VIP-CORE Reference Manual

®
VIP-CORE
Reference Manual
© 2008 Landmark Graphics Corporation
R5000.0.1
© 2008 Landmark Graphics Corporation
All Rights Reserved Worldwide
This publication has been provided pursuant to an agreement containing restrictions on its use. The publication is also
protected by Federal copyright law. No part of this publication may be copied or distributed, transmitted, transcribed,
stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any human or computer language, in any form or by any means,
electronic, magnetic, manual, or otherwise, or disclosed to third parties without the express written permission of:
Landmark Graphics Corporation

2107 CityWest Blvd, Building 2, Houston, Texas 77042-3051, USA
P.O. Box 42806, Houston, Texas 77242, USA
Phone:713-839-2000, FAX: 713-839-2015
Internet: www.halliburton.com/landmark
Trademarks
3D Drill View, 3D Drill View KM, 3DFS, 3D Surveillance, 3DView, Active Field Surveillance, Active Reservoir Surveillance, ADC,
Advanced Data Transfer, ARIES, ARIES DecisionSuite, AssetConnect, Asset Decision Solutions, Asset Development Center,
AssetDirector, Asset Journal, AssetLink, AssetLink Advisor, AssetLink Director, AssetLink Observer, AssetObserver, AssetObserver
Advisor, Asset Performance, AssetPlanner, AssetSolver, AssetSolver Online, AssetView, BLITZPAK, CasingLife, CasingSeat,
COMPASS, Corporate Data Archiver, Corporate Data Store, Data Analyzer, DataManager, DataStar, DBPlot, Decision Management
System, DecisionSpace, DecisionsSpace 3D Drill View KM, DecisionSpace AssetLink, DecisionSpace AssetPlanner, DecisionSpace
AssetSolver, DecisionSpace AssetView 2D, DecisionSpace AssetView 3D, DecisionSpace Atomic Meshing, DecisionSpace Decision
Management Systems(DMS), DecisionSpace for Production, DecisionSpace Infrastructure, DecisionSpace Nexus, DecisionSpace
PowerModel, DecisionSpace PrecisionTarget, DecisionSpace Reservoir, DecisionSpace TracPlanner, DecisionSpace Well Seismic
Fusion, DecisionSpace WellSolver, DecisionSuite, DepthTeam, Depth Team, DepthTeam Explorer, Depth Team Explorer, DepthTeam
Express, Depth Team Express, DepthTeam Extreme, Depth Team Extreme, DepthTeam Interpreter, Depth Team Interpreter, Desktop
Navigator, DESKTOP-PVT, DESKTOP-VIP, DEX, DIMS, Discovery, Discovery Asset, Discovery FrameBuilder, DMS, Drillability Suite,
Drilling Desktop, DrillModel, Drill-to-the-Earth Model, Drillworks, Drillworks ConnectML, DSS, Dynamic Reservoir Management,
Dynamic Surveillance System, EarthCube, EDM, EDT, eLandmark, Engineer’s Data Model, Engineer's Desktop, Engineer’s Link,
ESP, Event Similarity Prediction, ezFault, ezModel, ezSurface, ezTracker, FastTrack, FG+, FieldPlan, Field Scenario Planner, FZAP!,
GeoAtlas, GeoDataLoad, GeoGraphix, GeoGraphix Exploration System, GeoLink, GeoProbe GF DataServer, GES, GES97,
GESXplorer, GMAplus, GMI Imager, GRIDGENR, Handheld Field Operator, HHFO, I2 Enterprise, iDIMS, IsoMap, iWellFile, i Wellfile,
KnowledgeSource, Landmark, Landmark Decision Center, Landmark & Design, Landmark Logo and Design, Landscape, Lattix,
LeaseMap, LMK Resources, LogEdit, LogM, LogPrep, Make Great Decisions, MathPack, MIMIC, MIMIC+, Model Builder,
MyLandmark, Nexus, Object MP, OpenBooks, OpenJournal, OpenSGM, OpenVision, OpenWells, OpenWire, OpenWorks,
OpenWorks Development Kit, OpenWorks Well File, OpenWorks Production, PAL, Parallel-VIP, PetroBank, PetroBank Explorer,
PetroBank Master Data Store, PetroWorks, PetroWorks Asset, PetroWorks Pro, PetroWorks ULTRA, PlotView, Point Gridding Plus,
Pointing Dispatcher, PostStack, PostStack ESP, PostStack Family, PowerCalculator, PowerExplorer, PowerExplorer Connect,
PowerGrid, PowerHub, Power Interpretation, PowerJournal, PowerModel, PowerView, PrecisionTarget, Presgraf, Pressworks,
PRIZM, Production Asset Manager, Production, PROFILE, Project Administrator, ProMAGIC, ProMAGIC Connect, ProMAGIC
Server, ProMAX, ProMAX 2D, ProMAX 3D, ProMAX 3DPSDM, ProMAX 4D, ProMAX Family, ProMAX MVA, ProMAX VSP, pSTAx,
Query Builder, Quick, Quick+, QUICKDIF, QuickWell, QuickWell+, QUIKRAY, QUIKSHOT, QUIKVSP, RAVE, RAYMAP, RAYMAP+,
Real Freedom, Real Time Asset Management Center, Real Time Decision Center, Real Time Operations Center, Real Time
Production Surveillance, Real Time Surveillance, Real-Time View, Reference Data Manager, Reservoir Framework Builder, RESev,
ResMap, RightTime, RTOC, SCAN, SeisCube, SeisMap, SeisModel, SeisSpace, SeisVision, SeisWell, SeisWorks, SeisWorks 2D,
SeisWorks 3D, SeisWorks PowerCalculator, SeisWorks PowerJournal, SeisWorks PowerSection, SeisWorks PowerView,
SeisXchange, Semblance Computation and Analysis, Sierra Family, SigmaView, SimConnect, SimConvert, SimDataStudio,
SimResults, SimResults+, SimResults+3D, SIVA+, SLAM, smartSECTION, Spatializer, SpecDecomp, StrataAmp, StrataMap,
StrataModel, StrataSim, StrataWorks, StratWorks, StratWorks 3D, StreamCalc, StressCheck, STRUCT, Structure Cube, Surf &
Connect, SynTool, SystemStart, SystemStart for Clients, SystemStart for Servers, System Start for Servers, SystemStart for Storage,
Tanks & Tubes, TDQ, Team Workspace, TERAS, The Engineer’s Desktop, Total Drilling Performance, TOW/cs, TOW/cs Revenue
Interface, TracPlanner, TracPlanner Xpress, Trend Form Gridding, Turbo Synthetics, VESPA, VESPA+, VIP, VIP-COMP, VIP-CORE,
VIPDataStudio, VIP-DUAL, VIP-ENCORE, VIP-EXECUTIVE, VIP-Local Grid Refinement, VIP-THERM, WavX, Web Editor, Wellbase,
Wellbore Planner, Wellbore Planner Connect, WELLCAT, Well Cost, WELLPLAN, Well Seismic Fusion, WellSolver, WellXchange,
WOW, Xsection, You're in Control. Experience the difference, ZAP!, and Z-MAP Plus are trademarks, registered trademarks or
service marks of Landmark Graphics Corporation.
All other trademarks, service marks and product or service names are the trademarks or names of their respective owners.
Note
The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice and should not be construed as a commitment by Landmark
Graphics Corporation. Landmark Graphics Corporation assumes no responsibility for any error that may appear in this manual. Some states
or jurisdictions do not allow disclaimer of expressed or implied warranties in certain transactions; therefore, this statement may not apply to you.
Landmark acknowledges that certain third party code has been bundled with, or embedded in, Landmark’s
software. The licensors of this third party code, and the terms and conditions of their respective licenses,
may be found at the following location:
..\Nexus-VIP5000.0.1\help\com\lgc\dspx\Third_Party.pdf
❖
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
About This Manual
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiii
The Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiii
The Chapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiv
Data Formatting Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiv
Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxv
Related Documentation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxv
Chapter 1
Data Overview
1.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
1.1.1 VIP-COMP Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
1.1.2 VIP-ENCORE Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
1.1.3 VIP-DUAL Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
1.1.4 VIP-POLYMER Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29
1.1.5 VIP-THERM Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29
1.1.6 Shared Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30
1.2 Typical Data Requirements to Initialize a Simulation Study . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32
1.2.1 Geological Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32
1.2.2 Reservoir Rock Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32
1.2.3 Hydrocarbon Fluid Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32
1.3 Data Deck Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33
1.4 Input Data Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35
1.5 Data Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38
1.5.1 General Utility Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40
1.5.1.1 Comment Lines (C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40
1.5.1.2 Read Data from an External File (INCLUDE) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40
1.5.1.3 Stop Reading Data from the Current INCLUDE File
(ENDINC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-41
1.5.1.4 Read Array Data from a VDB File (VDB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-41
1.5.1.5 Echo Print On (LIST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-42
R5000.0.1 v
VIP-CORE® Reference Guide Landmark
1.5.1.6 Echo Print Off (NOLIST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-42

1.5.1.7 Skip Data On (SKIP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-42
1.5.1.8 Skip Data Off (NOSKIP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-43
1.5.1.9 Number of Printed Lines Per Page (NLINES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-43
1.5.1.10 Columns To Be Read (NCOL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-43
1.5.1.11 Data Line Continuation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-43
1.5.2 Array Input Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-43
1.5.2.1 Constant Array Input Option (CON) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-46
1.5.2.2 X (or R) Direction Array Value Variation (XVAR/RVAR) . . 1-47
1.5.2.3 Y (or Theta) Direction Array Value Variation
(YVAR/THVAR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-48
1.5.2.4 Z Direction Array Value Variation (ZVAR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-49
1.5.2.5 Full Array Input Option (VALUE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-50
1.5.2.6 Automatic Generation of Values for Layers 2 - Nz (LAYER) 1-52
1.5.2.7 Block Depths From Origin (DIP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-54
1.5.2.8 Define New Array From Previously Defined Array (MULT) . 1-56
1.5.2.9 Directional Relative Permeability Option (dir)
(Not Available in VIP-THERM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-56
1.5.3 Corner Point Array Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-58
1.5.3.1 X Direction Variation by Layer (LNXVAR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-58
1.5.3.2 Y Direction Variation by Layer (LNYVAR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-59
1.5.3.3 Z Direction Variation by Layer (LNZVAR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-59
1.5.3.4 Values by Layer (LNVAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-60
1.5.3.5 Replicate Concurrent Point Arrays (COPY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-60
1.5.4 Array Modification Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-61
1.5.4.1 Modify by a Constant (MOD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-62
1.5.4.2 Modify Depth by a Constant (MODLYR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-63
1.5.4.3 Replace Selected Values (VMOD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-66
1.5.5 Unformatted (BINARY) Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-68
1.6 Connection Transmissibility Modification (MULT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-69
1.7 Inter/Intra Region Transmissibility Multiplier (MULTIR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-72
1.8 Named Fault/Region Transmissibility Multiplier (MULTFL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-73
Chapter 2
Initialization Data
2.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75
2.2 Initialization Utility Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77
2.2.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77
2.2.1.1 Initialization (INIT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77
2.2.1.2 Change Default Dimensions (DIM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77
2.2.1.3 Descriptive Run Information (TITLEn) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-80
2.2.1.4 Date (DATE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-81
2.2.1.5 End-of-File Marker (END) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-81
2.2.2 Results File Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-81
vi R5000.0.1
Landmark VIP-CORE® Reference Guide
2.2.2.1 Grid Data Written for Post-Processing (MAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-81

2.2.2.2 Mole Fraction Data Written for Post-Processing (MAPX, MAPY,
MAPZ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-88
2.2.2.3 Full Size Arrays to VDB File (NOVDBPACK) . . . . . . . . . . . 2-89
2.2.2.4 Map File Instead of VDB File (NOVDB) (VIP-COMP and VIP-EN-
CORE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-89
2.2.2.5 VDB File (VDB) (VIP-COMP and VIP-ENCORE) . . . . . . . . 2-89
2.2.2.6 Grid Data Written for Post-Processing to SIMOUT Map File
(MAPOLD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-89
2.2.3 Grid System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-94
2.2.3.1 Rectangular (Cartesian) Grid System (NX, NY, NZ, NCOMP) . 2-
94
2.2.3.2 Radial (Cylindrical) Grid System (NR, NTHETA, NZ, RI, NCOMP)
2-95
2.2.3.3 Single-Well Gridded Wellbore Simulation (WBSIM)
(Not available in VIP-THERM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-97
2.2.3.4 Automatic Grid Setup for Pattern Elements
(VIP-THERM Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-98
2.2.4 Physical Property Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-107
2.2.4.1 VIP-COMP or VIP-ENCORE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-108
2.2.4.2 VIP-THERM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-109
2.2.4.3 Pore Volume Representation (PVEXP, PVLINEAR) . . . . . . 2-110
2.2.5 Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-111
2.2.5.1 Metric Units for Input and Output (METRIC) . . . . . . . . . . . 2-111
2.2.5.2 Laboratory Units for Input and Output (LAB) . . . . . . . . . . . 2-112
2.2.5.3 Print by Cross-Sections (CROSS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-112
2.2.5.4 Layer Output in Initialization Region Summary (REGNZ) . 2-112
2.2.5.5 Hydrocarbon Pore Volume and Bulk Volume Tables (HCPVTAB)
2-112
2.2.6 Formulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-113
2.2.6.1 Gas-Water Option for VIP-ENCORE (GASWATER) . . . . . 2-113
2.2.6.2 Water-Oil Option for VIP-ENCORE (WATEROIL) . . . . . . 2-113
2.2.6.3 Black-Oil Option (BLACKOIL) (VIP-ENCORE) . . . . . . . . 2-114
2.2.6.4 Two-Point Upstream Weighting (TWOPT)
(Not available in
VIP-THERM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-114
2.2.6.5 Nine-Point Finite Difference Approximations (NINEPT) . . . 2-115
2.2.6.6 SEBOUND option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-115
2.2.6.7 Compositional SORM Option (CSORM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-116
2.2.7 Saturation Tables and Hysteresis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-117
2.2.7.1 Two-Point Scaling of Relative Permeabilities (END2P) . . . . 2-117
2.2.7.2 Two-Point Scaling of Capillary Pressures for Initial Saturations
(INIT2P) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-117
2.2.7.3 Stone’s Three-Phase kro (STONE1, STONE2) . . . . . . . . . . . 2-118
2.2.7.4 Saturation Weighted Three-Phase kro (KROINT)
(Not available in VIP-THERM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-119
R5000.0.1 vii
2.2.7.5 Water-oil Capillary Pressure Hysteresis (PCHYSW)

2.2.7.6 Gas-Oil Capillary Pressure Hysteresis (PCHYSG)
2.2.7.7 Oil Relative Permeability Hysteresis (RPHYSO)
2.2.7.8 Gas Relative Permeability Hysteresis (RPHYSG)
2.2.7.9 Relative Permeability Hysteresis Tolerances (RPHYST) . . . 2-122
2.2.7.10 Leverett J-Function (JFUNC)
(Not available with SDFUNC option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-123
2.2.7.11 Rock Compaction (COMPACT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-123
2.2.7.12 Freeze Pcwo at Initial Value (FRZPCW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-124
2.2.7.13 Freeze Pcgo at Initial Value (FRZPCG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-124
2.2.8 Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-124
2.2.8.1 Nonequilibrium Initialization (NONEQ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-124
2.2.8.2 Gridblock Center Initialization (GBC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-125
2.2.8.3 Integrated Saturation Initialization (INTSAT) . . . . . . . . . . . 2-125
2.2.8.4 Integrated Saturation Initialization (VAITS)
2.2.8.5 Thickness Center (THCNTR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-126
2.2.8.6 Do Not Initialize (NOINIT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-127
2.2.8.7 Totally Refined ROOT Grid (NOROOT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-127
2.2.8.8 Grid Deactivation (DEACTIVATE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-127
2.2.8.9 Honor Input Water Saturation Values (KEEPSW) . . . . . . . . 2-127
2.2.8.10 Honor Input Gas Saturation Values (KEEPSG) . . . . . . . . . 2-127
2.2.9 Off-Band Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-128
2.2.9.1 Pinchout Gridblock Connections (PINCHOUT) . . . . . . . . . . 2-128
2.2.9.2 Fault Modeling (FAULTS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-129
2.2.9.3 Completing the Circle in Radial Grids (FLOW360) . . . . . . . 2-129
2.2.10 Vertical Equilibrium
(Not available in VIP-THERM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-130
2.2.10.1 Water-Oil Vertical Equilibrium (VEWO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-130
2.2.10.2 Gas-Oil Vertical Equilibrium (VEGO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-131
2.2.10.3 Vertical Equilibrium Directional Relative Permeability
(DRELPM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-131
2.2.10.4 Capillary Gravity Equilibrium (VEITS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-132
2.2.11 Fluid Property Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-133
2.2.11.1 Energy Minimization Phase Equilibrium (GIBBS) (VIP-COMP)
2-133
2.2.11.2 Near Critical Fluid Property Adjustment (IFT)
(VIP-COMP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-133
2.2.11.3 Suppresses Table Data Checking (NOCHK) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-134
2.2.11.4 PVT Interpolation for VIP-ENCORE (BOTINT) . . . . . . . . 2-134
2.2.11.5 Flash Calculation Method (FLASH) (VIP-COMP) . . . . . . . 2-135
2.2.11.6 Super-Critical Equilibration (CRINIT) (VIP-COMP) . . . . . 2-136
viii R5000.0.1
2.2.11.7 Li Pseudo-Critical Temperature (LI) (VIP-COMP) . . . . . . 2-137

2.2.11.8 Dry Gas Simulation (DRYGAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-138
2.2.11.9 Limit on Rate of Increase of Solution GOR (DRSDT) . . . . 2-138
2.2.12 Corner-Point Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-139
2.2.12.1 Corner-Point Simulation Grid (CORNER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-139
2.2.12.2 Fault Connections from Corner-Point Data (CORTOL) . . . 2-140
2.2.12.3 Data Checking Corner-Point Grid Data (CORCHK) . . . . . 2-141
2.2.13 Dual Porosity with Optional Dual Permeability (VIP-DUAL)
(Not available with VIP-THERM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-142
2.2.13.1 Dual-Porosity/Permeability Option (DUAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-142
2.2.13.2 Matrix Pseudo Capillary Pressure (PSEUDO) . . . . . . . . . . 2-143
2.2.13.3 Oil-Gas Phase Diffusivities (DIFF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-145
2.2.14 Fluid Tracking
2.2.14.1 Hydrocarbon Tracking Option (TRACK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-145
2.2.14.2 Names of Tracked Hydrocarbons (NAMES) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-146
2.2.14.3 Transition Block Assignments (CONTACT) . . . . . . . . . . . 2-146
2.2.14.4 Water Tracking Option (TRACKW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-147
2.2.14.5 Names of Tracked Water Types (NAMESW) . . . . . . . . . . . 2-147
2.2.15 Todd and Longstaff Miscible Displacement
2.2.15.1 Miscible Option Specifications (MIS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-149
2.2.15.2 Miscibility Transition Zone (ALPHA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-149
2.2.16 Time-Dependent Compressibility - Creep Option
2.2.16.1 Reversible Creep (CREEP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-152
2.2.17 Hydraulic Fracture Option
2.2.17.1 Fracture Blocks (HYDFRAC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-152
2.2.18 Polymer Injection Option (VIP-POLYMER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-153
2.2.18.1 Initialize for Polymer Injection (POLYMER) . . . . . . . . . . . 2-153
2.2.19 Thermal Option (VIP-THERM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-153
2.2.19.1 THERMAL Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-153
2.2.19.2 WATIDEAL Card (Compositional Model) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-153
2.2.19.3 FLOWS Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-154
2.2.20 Velocity Dependent Relative Permeability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-155
2.2.21 Change Units for Solution Gas-Oil Ratio (RSM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-158
2.2.22 Upscaled Permeabilities (UPSCALE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-158
Chapter 3
Print Control
3.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-161
3.2 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-161
3.2.1 Print Everything (ALL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-161
3.2.2 Print Nothing (NONE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-161
R5000.0.1 ix
3.3 Individual Group Print Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-162

3.3.1 Input Array Printing (PRINT ARRAYS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-162
3.3.2 Coefficient Array Printing (PRINT COEFS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-163
3.3.3 Compositional Data Printing (PRINT COMP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-167
3.3.4 Corner-Point Data Printing (PRINT CORNER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-167
3.3.5 Equilibrium Data Printing (PRINT EQUIL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-168
3.3.6 Fault Data Printing (PRINT FAULTS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-168
3.3.7 Influx Data Printing (PRINT INFLUX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-169
3.3.8 Initialization Arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-170
3.3.9 Region Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-175
3.3.10 Separation Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-175
3.3.11 Tabular Data - Saturation and PVT tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-175
3.4 Rescaled Saturation Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-177
3.4.1 Print Rescaled Saturation Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-177
3.4.2 Print Rescaled Fracture Saturation Tables (VIP-DUAL) . . . . . . . . . . . 3-178
Chapter 4
Tables
4.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-181
4.2 Equilibrium Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-181
4.2.1 Saturation Pressure is Constant by Regions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-183
4.2.1.1 IEQUIL for Three-Phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-183
4.2.1.2 IEQUIL for GASWATER Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-184
4.2.1.3 IEQUIL for WATEROIL Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-185
4.2.2 Saturation Pressure Varies with Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-186
4.2.3 Equilibrium for User-Specified Saturations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-187
4.2.4 Saturation Pressures for VIP-ENCORE (BPTAB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-187
4.2.5 Saturation Pressure Variation with Depth for Modified Black Oil . . . 4-188
4.3 Saturation-Dependent Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-191
4.3.1 Saturation-Dependent Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-193
4.3.1.1 Water-Oil Saturation for the Matrix (SWT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-194
4.3.1.2 Gas-Oil Saturation for the Matrix (SGT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-199
4.3.1.3 Gas-Dependent Water Relative Permeability for the Matrix
(SGWT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-203
4.3.1.4 Water-Oil Saturation for the Fracture (SWTF) . . . . . . . . . . . 4-204
4.3.1.5 Gas-Oil Saturation for the Fracture (SGTF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-205
4.3.1.6 Gas-Dependent Water Relative Permeability for the Fracture (SG-
WTF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-206
4.3.1.7 Oil Phase Hysteresis Option (SOTR)
4.3.1.8 Gas Phase Hysteresis Option (SGTR)
4.3.1.9 Gas Remobilization Option (GASRM)
x R5000.0.1
4.3.1.10 Normalized Saturation-Dependent Functions . . . . . . . . . . . 4-215

4.3.1.11 Vertical Equilibrium Pseudo-Relative Permeabilities . . . . . 4-215
4.3.2 Saturation-Dependent Functions (VIP-THERM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-216
4.3.3 Temperature-Dependent Endpoints (VIP-THERM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-219
4.3.4 Temperature-Dependent Endpoint Multipliers (VIP-THERM) . . . . . . 4-221
4.3.5 Water-Oil Hysteresis (Reference 32) (VIP-THERM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-223
4.4 Equation of State PVT Property Data (VIP-COMP or VIP-THERM) . . . . . . . . 4-226
4.4.1 Reservoir Equation of State (EOS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-227
4.4.2 Component Names (COMPONENTS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-229
4.4.3 Component Characteristics (PROPERTIES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-230
4.4.4 Binary Interaction Coefficients (DJK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-234
4.4.5 Lohrenz-Bray-Clark Viscosity Coefficients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-236
4.4.6 HSTAR Card (VIP-THERM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-236
4.4.7 Separator Equation of State (EOSSEP)
(VIP-COMP or VIP-THERM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-237
4.4.8 Standing-Katz Density Coefficients (STKZDN) (VIP-COMP) . . . . . . 4-239
4.4.9 Binary Interaction Coefficients for Separators (DJKSEP)
(VIP-COMP or VIP-THERM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-240
4.4.10 End of EOS data (ENDEOS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-243
4.4.11 Non-EOS PVT Property Data (VIP-THERM Compositional Model) 4-246
4.4.11.1 Oil Phase Viscosity Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-246
4.4.11.2 Gas Phase Viscosity Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-250
4.4.11.3 Component Oil Density Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-253
4.4.11.4 Component Enthalpy Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-255
4.4.11.5 Component K-value Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-257
4.4.12 Initial Fluid Composition Data (VIP-COMP or VIP-THERM) . . . . . 4-260
4.4.12.1 Constant Equilibrium Region Oil Composition (OILMF) . 4-261
4.4.12.2 Constant Equilibrium Region Gas Composition (GASMF) 4-261
4.4.12.3 Composition Varies with Depth (COMPOSITION) . . . . . . 4-262
4.4.12.4 Areal Composition Variation (COMPOSITION) . . . . . . . . 4-264
4.4.13 Pedersen Viscosity Correlation (VISPE) (VIP-COMP) . . . . . . . . . . . 4-266
4.4.14 Gas Plant Data Input (GASPLANT) (VIP-COMP or VIP-ENCORE) 4-268
4.4.15 Carbon Dioxide Solubility in Water Option (CO2TAB)
(VIP-COMP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-270
4.5 Black Oil PVT + (VIP-ENCORE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-272
4.5.1 Black Oil Laboratory Data (VIP-ENCORE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-274
4.5.2 Black Oil PVT Data (BOTAB) (VIP-ENCORE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-277
4.5.2.1 Three Phase Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-277
4.5.2.2 WATEROIL Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-284
4.5.3 Gas PVT Data for the GASWATER Option (BGTAB)
(VIP-ENCORE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-287
4.5.4 Modified Black Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-289
4.5.4.1 BOETAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-289
4.5.4.2 BOOTAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-297
4.5.4.3 BODTAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-302
R5000.0.1 xi
4.5.4.4 BOGTAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-305

4.5.4.5 BDGTAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-309
4.5.4.6 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-311
4.6 K-value Tabular Data (VIP-ENCORE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-316
4.6.1 Start of K-Value Data Input (KVALUES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-316
4.6.2 K-Value Component Names (COMPONENTS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-317
4.6.3 K-Value Component Molecular Weights (PROPERTIES) . . . . . . . . . 4-317
4.6.4 End of K-Value Components (ENDKV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-318
4.6.5 K-Value Tables (KVTAB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-319
4.6.6 Initial Fluid Composition Data (VIP-ENCORE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-325
4.6.7 Example of K-Value Input Data (VIP-ENCORE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-325
4.7 Dead Oil PVT Property Data (VIP-THERM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-326
4.7.1 Dead Oil PVT Property Tables Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-326
4.7.2 Dead Oil PVT Property Correlations Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-329
4.8 Surface Separation Data (VIP-COMP or VIP-THERM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-334
4.8.1 EOS Separator Data (SEPARATOR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-334
4.8.2 Surface Separator OMEGA Data (OMEGAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-336
4.8.3 Surface Separator Binary Interaction Coefficients (DJKSEP) . . . . . . . 4-337
4.8.4 Surface Separator Volume Shift Factor (VSHFTS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-337
4.9 Surface Separation Data with BOTAB PVT Data (VIP-ENCORE) . . . . . . . . . . 4-338
4.9.1 Default Separator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-339
4.9.2 Separator K-Value Input (SEPARATOR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-339
4.9.3 Separator Test Data Input (SEPTEST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-343
4.9.4 Black-oil Separator Data Input (BOSEP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-345
4.10 Separator Data with KVTAB PVT Data (VIP-ENCORE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-346
4.10.1 K-Values Separation Data (SEPARATOR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-348
4.11 Water Property Regions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-350
4.11.1 Region Constants (PVTW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-350
4.11.2 Salinity-Dependent Data (PVTWSAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-351
4.12 Compaction Tables (CMT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-351
4.13 Water Induced Rock Compaction Tables (WIRCT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-353
4.14 Three and Four Component Miscible Data
(Not available in VIP-THERM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-355
4.14.1 Solvent PVT Properties (SLVTAB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-356
4.14.2 Miscibility Pressure Table (MISPTB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-358
4.14.3 Solvent Molecular Weight (MWS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-359
4.15 Matrix-Fracture Transfer (VIP-DUAL)
(Available in VIP-COMP or VIP-ENCORE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-360
4.15.1 Surface Tension Ratio Tables (SIGT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-360
4.15.2 Gas-Oil Gravity Drainage Parameter (BETAG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-361
xii R5000.0.1
4.16 Hydraulic Fracture Option

4.16.1 Beta (Turbulance) Factors (HYDBETA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-362
4.17 Equation of State Interpolation Option(Not available in VIP-THERM) . . . . . . 4-363
4.17.1 EOS Interpolation Option (EOSINT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-366
4.17.2 Temperature Entries of EOS Interpolation Tables (TEMPERATURE) . . 4-
368
4.17.3 Maximum Pressure Entry of EOS Interpolation Tables (PMAX) . . . 4-368
4.17.4 Minimum Pressure Entry of EOS Interpolation Tables (PMIN) . . . . 4-369
4.17.5 Composition Entries of EOS Interpolation Tables (CMP) . . . . . . . . . 4-369
4.17.6 Coefficients of Interpolation Function (COEFFICIENTS) . . . . . . . . 4-370
4.17.7 Maximum Number of Outer Iterations (ITNMAX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-371
4.17.8 Minimum Increment of the Interpolation Function (DELTA) . . . . . . 4-372
4.17.9 Oil and Gas Composition Output (OUTPUT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-373
4.17.10 Automatic Generation of Composition
Entries of EOS Interpolation Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-374
4.17.10.1 Swelling PVT Test Simulation (SWELLTEST) . . . . . . . . 4-374
4.17.10.2 Differential Expansion PVT Test Simulation
(DIFEXPTEST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-376
4.17.10.3 Constant Volume Depletion PVT Test Simulation
(CONVDPTEST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-378
4.17.10.4 Multiple Contact PVT Test Simulation (MULCONTEST) 4-381
4.18 Fracture Modeling (VIP-THERM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-384
4.18.1 Porosity Deformation Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-385
4.18.2 Permeability Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-386
4.18.2.1 Method of Beattie, Boberg, and McNab (Reference 32) . . . 4-386
4.18.2.2 SIMTECH Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-387
4.19 Rock Heat Capacity Tables (VIP-THERM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-387
4.20 Chemical Reactions (REACTION Card) (VIP-THERM Compositional)
(Reference 42) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-387
Chapter 5
Grid Data Arrays
5.1 Array Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-395
5.2 Start of Array Data (ARRAYS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-397
5.3 Grid Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-398
5.3.1 X (R) Non-Corner Point Grid Dimension (DX, DXB, DR, R) . . . . . . 5-398
5.3.2 X Direction Corner Point Location (XCORN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-399
5.3.3 Y (THETA) Non-Corner Point Grid Dimension
(DY, DYB, DTHETA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-401
5.3.4 Y Direction Corner Point Location (YCORN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-401
5.4 Gross Thickness - Z grid dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-403
R5000.0.1 xiii
5.4.1 Gross Vertical Thickness, Non-Corner Point Grid (DZ) . . . . . . . . . . . 5-403

5.4.2 Gross Stratum Thickness, Non-Corner Point Grid (DZB) . . . . . . . . . . 5-403
5.4.3 Corner Point Gross Vertical Thickness (DZCORN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-404
5.4.4 Corner Point Gross Stratum Thickness (DZBCOR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-404
5.4.5 Depth Corner Point Gross Stratum Thickness (DZVCOR) . . . . . . . . . 5-405
5.5 Net Thickness - Z Grid Dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-405
5.5.1 Net Vertical Thickness, Non-Corner Point Grid (DZNET) . . . . . . . . . 5-405
5.5.2 Net Stratum Thickness, Non-Corner Point Grid (DZBNET) . . . . . . . . 5-406
5.5.3 Ratio Net Vertical Thickness to Gross Thickness (NETGRS) . . . . . . . 5-406
5.5.4 Fracture Block Net to Gross Vertical Thickness Ratio (NETGF) . . . . 5-406
5.6 Depth - Non-Corner Point Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-408
5.6.1 Depth to Top of Gridblock (DEPTH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-408
5.6.2 Depth to Center of Gridblock (MDEPTH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-408
5.7 Depth - Corner Point Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-408
5.7.1 Depth to Each Corner Point (ZCORN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-409
5.7.2 Depth to NE Corner Point (ZCORNE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-409
5.7.3 Depth to NW Corner Point (ZCORNW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-410
5.7.4 Depth to SW Corner Point (ZCORSW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-410
5.7.5 Depth to Bottom Corner Point (ZBOT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-411
5.7.6 Depth to NE Bottom Corner Point (ZBOTNE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-411
5.7.7 Depth to NW Bottom Corner Point (ZBOTNW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-412
5.7.8 Depth to SW Bottom Corner Point (ZBOTSW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-412
5.7.9 Depth to Point on a Depth Line (ZLNCOR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-413
5.8 Fracture Block Depth (DEPF, MDEPF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-413
5.9 Porosity / Pore Volume (POR, PV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-414
5.10 Fracture Porosity / Pore Volume (PORF, PVF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-414
5.11 Permeability / Transmissibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-415
5.11.1 X (R) Direction (KX, KXF, TX, KR, KRF, TR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-415
5.11.2 Y (Theta) Direction (KY, KYF, TY, KTHETA, KTF, TTHETA) . . . 5-416
5.11.3 Z Direction (KZ, KZF, TZ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-417
5.11.4 Diagonal (XY) Directions (TXYL, TXYR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-417
5.11.5 Well PI Upscaled Permeabilities (KWX, KWY, KWZ) . . . . . . . . . . 5-418
5.12 Fracture Permeability / Transmissibility (VIP-DUAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-418
5.12.1 X (R) Direction (KXFEFF, TXF, KRFEFF, TRF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-419
5.12.2 Y (THETA) Direction (KYFEFF, TYF, KTFEFF, TTHETF) . . . . . . 5-419
5.12.3 Z Direction (KZFEFF, TZF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-420
5.12.4 Diagonal (XY) Directions (TXYLF, TXYRF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-420
5.12.5 Well PI Upscaled Permeabilities (KWXF, KWYF, KWZF) . . . . . . . 5-421
5.13 Rock and Fluid Property Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-422
5.13.1 Primary Saturation Table (ISAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-422
5.13.2 Imbibition Saturation Table for Hysteresis (ISATI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-422
5.13.3 Fracture Primary Saturation Table (ISATF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-423
xiv R5000.0.1
5.13.4 Fracture Imbibition Saturation Table for Hysteresis (ISATIF) . . . . . 5-423

5.14 Fluid Property Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-424
5.14.1 PVT Property Table (IPVT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-424
5.14.2 Water Property Table (IPVTW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-424
5.15 Output Regions (IREGION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-425
5.16 Extra Regions (XREG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-425
5.17 Output Regions (IREGF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-427
5.18 Reservoir Temperature (TEMP) (VIP-COMP or VIP-THERM) . . . . . . . . . . . 5-427
5.19 Compaction Regions (ICMT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-429
5.20 Fracture Compaction Regions (ICMTF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-429
5.21 Water Induced Rock Compaction Regions (IWIRC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-429
5.22 Fracture Water Induced Rock Compaction Regions(IWIRCF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-430
5.23 Rock Compressibility (CR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-430
5.24 Fracture Compressibility (CRF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-430
5.25 Transmissibility Regions (ITRAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-431
5.26 Fracture Transmissibility Regions (ITRANF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-431
5.27 Turbidite Reservoir Option
5.27.1 Scaling Factor (SCLFCT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-432
5.27.2 Time Constant (TCTBD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-433
5.27.3 Shale Capacity (BTBD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-434
5.28 Equilibrium Regions (IEQUIL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-434
5.29 Water Salinity (SAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-435
5.30 User-Specified Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-435
5.30.1 Pressure and Saturation Overreads (P, SW, SG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-435
5.30.2 Gas Composition Overread (YI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-436
5.30.3 Oil Composition Overread (XI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-437
5.31 User-Specified Fracture Initialization (VIP-DUAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-437
5.31.1 Pressure and Saturation Overreads (PF, SWF, SGF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-437
5.31.2 Gas Composition Overread (YIF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-438
5.31.3 Oil Composition Overread (XIF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-439
5.32 Normalized Saturation-Dependent Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-439
5.32.1 Water-Oil Normalized Saturations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-440
5.32.1.1 Connate (Minimum) Water Saturation (SWL) . . . . . . . . . . 5-440
5.32.1.2 Residual Water Saturation (SWR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-441
5.32.1.3 Water Saturation at Residual Oil (SWRO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-441
5.32.1.4 Maximum Water Saturation (SWU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-441
R5000.0.1 xv
5.32.1.5 Maximum Trapped Gas Saturation (SGTR) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-441

5.32.1.6 Fracture Connate (Minimum) Water Saturation (SWLF) . . 5-441
5.32.1.7 Fracture Residual Water Saturation (SWRF) . . . . . . . . . . . 5-442
5.32.1.8 Fracture Water Saturation at Residual Oil (SWROF) . . . . . 5-442
5.32.1.9 Fracture Maximum Water Saturation (SWUF) . . . . . . . . . . 5-442
5.32.2 Gas-Oil Normalized Saturations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-443
5.32.2.1 Connate (Minimum) Gas Saturation (SGL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-443
5.32.2.2 Residual Gas Saturation (SGR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-443
5.32.2.3 Gas Saturation at Residual Oil (SGRO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-443
5.32.2.4 Maximum gas saturation (SGU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-443
5.32.2.5 Gas Saturation at Residual Water (SGRW) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-443
5.32.2.6 Fracture Connate (Minimum) Gas Saturation (SGLF) . . . . 5-444
5.32.2.7 Fracture Residual Gas Saturation (SGRF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-444
5.32.2.8 Fracture Gas Saturation at Residual Oil (SGROF) . . . . . . . 5-444
5.32.2.9 Fracture Maximum Gas Saturation (SGUF) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-445
5.32.2.10 Fracture Gas Saturation at Residual Water (SGRWF) . . . 5-445
5.32.3 Normalized Relative Permeability Endpoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-445
5.32.3.1 Kro at Connate Water Saturation (KROLW) . . . . . . . . . . . 5-445
5.32.3.2 Krw at Residual Oil (KRWRO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-446
5.32.3.3 Krg at Residual Oil (KRGRO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-446
5.32.3.4 Krg at Residual Water (KRGRW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-446
5.32.3.5 Fracture Kro at Connate Water (KROLWF) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-446
5.32.3.6 Fracture Krw at Residual Oil (KRWROF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-446
5.32.3.7 Fracture Krg at Residual Oil (KRGROF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-447
5.33 Vertical Equilibrium Fraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-447
5.33.1 Water-Oil VE (FVEWO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-447
5.33.2 Gas-Oil VE (FVEGO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-448
5.34 Vertical Equilibrium Fraction (VIP-DUAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-448
5.34.1 Water-oil VE (FVEWOF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-448
5.34.2 Gas-Oil VE (FVEGOF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-448
5.35 Matrix Fracture Exchange Transmissibility (VIP-DUAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-449
5.35.1 Matrix Block Size (LX, LY, LZ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-449
5.35.2 Exchange Shape Factor (SIGMA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-449
5.35.3 Exchange Transmissibility (TEX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-450
5.36 Matrix-Fracture Diffusion (VIP-DUAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-451
5.36.1 Diffusion Exchange Shape Factor (SIGMAD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-451
5.36.2 Gas Diffusion Mass Transfer Coefficient (TDIFFG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-451
5.36.3 Oil Diffusion Mass Transfer Coefficient (TDIFFO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-451
5.37 Fluid Tracking
5.37.1 Oil Tracked Fluid Number (OILTRF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-452
5.37.2 Gas Tracked Fluid Number (GASTRF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-452
5.37.3 Fractional Flow Exponent for Extraneous Water Tracking (TKWEXP) . 5-
xvi R5000.0.1
452
5.38 Three and Four Component Miscible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-453
5.38.1 Mixing Parameter for Effective Viscosity (OMGV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-453
5.38.2 Mixing Parameter for Effective Density (OMGD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-453
5.39 Time-Dependent Compressibility - Creep Option
5.39.1 Reservoir Rock Rate Constant (CREEPB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-454
5.39.2 Equilibrium State Total Rock Compressibility (CREEPC) . . . . . . . . 5-454
5.39.3 Creep Exponent (CREEPM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-455
5.40 Connection Transmissibility Modification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-455
5.40.1 X Direction Transmissibility Multiplier (TMX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-455
5.40.2 Y Direction Transmissibility Multiplier (TMY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-456
5.40.3 Z Direction Transmissibility Multiplier (TMZ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-456
5.40.4 R Direction Transmissibility Multiplier (TMR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-457
5.40.5 Theta Direction Transmissibility Multiplier (TMTH) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-457
5.40.6 Left Diagonal Direction Transmissibility Multiplier (TMXYL) . . . . 5-458
5.40.7 Right Diagonal Direction Transmissibility Multiplier (TMXYR) . . . 5-458
5.40.8 Fracture X Direction Transmissibility Multiplier (TMXF) . . . . . . . . 5-459
5.40.9 Fracture Y Direction Transmissibility Multiplier (TMYF) . . . . . . . . 5-459
5.40.10 Fracture Z Direction Transmissibility Multiplier (TMZF) . . . . . . . . 5-459
5.40.11 Fracture R Direction Transmissibility Multiplier (TMRF) . . . . . . . . 5-460
5.40.12 Fracture Theta Direction Tranmissibility Multiplier (TMTHF) . . . . 5-460
5.40.13 Fracture Left Diagonal Direction Transmissibility Multiplier (TMXYLF)
5-460
5.40.14 Fracture Right Diagonal Direction Transmissibility Multiplier
(TMXYRF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-461
5.40.15 X Direction Thermal Transmissibility Multiplier (TTMX)
(VIP-THERM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-461
5.40.16 Y Direction Thermal Transmissibility Multiplier (TTMY)
(VIP-THERM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-462
5.40.17 Z Direction Thermal Transmissibility Multiplier (TTMZ)
(VIP-THERM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-462
5.40.18 R Direction Thermal Transmissibility Multiplier (TTMR)
(VIP-THERM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-462
5.40.19 Theta Direction Thermal Transmissibility Multiplier (TTMTH)
(VIP-THERM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-463
5.41 COARSEN Control Integer (ICOARS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-464
5.42 Bulk Volume Multiplier (MULTBV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-464
5.43 Inactive Gridblock Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-465
5.43.1 Inactive Gridblock Indicator (DEADCELL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-465
5.43.2 Active Gridblock Indicator (LIVECELL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-465
5.44 Function Input Option (FUNCTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-466
R5000.0.1 xvii
5.45 Reference Rock Specific Heat Capacity (CPR0) (VIP-THERM) . . . . . . . . . . . 5-477

5.46 Reference Thermal Conductivity (VIP-THERM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-477
5.46.1 X(R) Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-477
5.46.2 Y(Theta) Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-477
5.46.3 Z Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-478
5.47 Water-Oil Hysteresis Arrays (VIP-THERM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-478
5.47.1 KWHYS Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-478
5.47.2 KOHYS Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-478
5.48 Beattie et. al Fracture Model Arrays (VIP-THERM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-479
5.49 Rock Heat Capacity Variations (ICPRTB) (VIP-THERM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-480
Chapter 6
Fault Data
6.1 Fault Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-481
6.2 Start of Fault Data (FAULTS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-483
6.3 Standard Fault Data (FX, FR, FY, FTHETA, FXCORN, FYCORN) . . . . . . . . . 6-484
6.4 Specification of a Conductive Fault (LEAKY)
6.5 Arbitrary Gridblock Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-488
6.5.1 Non-Corner-Point Connections (FLTXC, FLTRC, FLTYC, FLTTC) . 6-488
6.5.2 Arbitrary Gridblock Connections (FTRANS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-489
6.6 Arbitrary Gridblock Connections (VIP-DUAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-491
6.6.1 Non-Corner-Point Connections for Fracture Blocks (FLTXCF, FLTRCF,
FLTYCF, FLTTCF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-491
6.6.2 Arbitrary Gridblock Connections for Fracture Blocks in VIP-DUAL
(FTRANF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-492
6.7 Automatic Fault Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-494
6.8 Automatic Pinchout Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-494
Chapter 7
Overread Options
7.1 Transmissibility / Pore Volume Modification Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-495
7.2 Override Modification (OVER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-496
7.3 Override Modification for VIP-DUAL (OVER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-499
7.4 Value Override (VOVER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-500
7.5 Value Override for VIP-DUAL (VOVER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-503
xviii R5000.0.1
Chapter 8
Grid Coarsening
8.1 Grid Coarsening (COARSEN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-505
Chapter 9
Region Data
9.1 Assign Output Region Names (REGION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-509
9.2 Assign Output Regions Separator Batteries (REGSEP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-510
9.3 Specify Datum Depth Each Output Region (REGDTM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-511
Chapter 10
Grid Boundary Flux
10.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-513
10.2 Analytical Aquifer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-513
10.2.1 Carter-Tracy Aquifer Influx (INFLUX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-514
10.2.2 Fetkovich Aquifer Influx (INFLUX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-520
10.3 Coarse Grid, Fine Grid Boundary Flux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-524
10.3.1 Flux Across a Grid Perimeter (FLUX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-524
Chapter 11
Local Grid Refinement
11.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-533
11.2 Grid Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-533
11.3 Grid Refinement (LGR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-533
11.3.1 Grid Refinement Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-534
11.3.1.1 Cartesian Grid Refinement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-534
11.3.1.2 Radial Grid Refinement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-535
11.4 Array Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-545
11.5 Array Data Propagation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-545
11.6 Array Input Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-545
11.7 Saturation and Relative Permeability Endpoint Arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-546
11.8 Grid Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-546
11.9 Corner Point Data (CORP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-546
11.9.1 Modify by a Constant (MODX,MODY,MODZ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-547
11.10 Handedness of Coordinates (RIGHTHANDED) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-549
11.11 Transmissibility Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-550
11.11.1 Harmonic Integration (HARTRAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-550
R5000.0.1 xix
11.11.2 No Integration (NEWTRAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-550

11.11.3 Rectangular or Radial ROOT Grid (BLOCKTR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-550
11.12 Minimum Radius of Radial Refinements (RMIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-551
11.13 Connection Transmissibility Modification (MULT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-551
11.14 Function Input Option (FUNCTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-552
11.15 Arbitrary Grid-block Connections (FTRANS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-552
11.16 Override Modification (OVER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-552
11.17 Value Override (VOVER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-553
11.18 Half-Transmissibility Override (TOVER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-553
11.19 Pinchout Gridblock Connections (PINCHGRID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-554
11.20 Pore Volume Cutoff (TOLPV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-555
Chapter 12
Tracer Option
12.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-557
12.2 New Input Data for Initialization Module VIP-CORE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-557
12.2.1 Activate Tracer Option (TRACER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-557
12.2.2 Additional INFLUX Data (INFLUX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-558
Chapter 13
Heat Loss Data (VIP-THERM)
13.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-559
13.2 Gridding of Over/Underburden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-559
13.3 Method of Vinsome and Westerveld (Reference 10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-559
13.4 Method of Coats, George, Chu, and Marcum (Reference 40) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-560
13.5 Heat Loss Data Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-561
13.5.1 Specified Index Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-561
13.5.2 Automatic Index Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-562
Chapter 14
Parallel Computing
14.1 Automatic Grid Decomposition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-565
14.1.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-565
14.1.2 Domain Decomposition of Cartesian Grids (DECOMP) . . . . . . . . . 14-565
xx R5000.0.1
Chapter 15
Diffusion
15.1 Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-571
15.2 Methodology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-572
15.2.1 Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-572
15.2.2 IMPES Formulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-573
15.2.3 Implicit Formulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-574
15.3 References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-574
15.4 Input Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-575
15.4.1 VIP-CORE Input Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-575
15.4.1.1 Diffusion Activation (DIFFUSION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-575
15.4.1.2 Component Characteristics (PROPERTIES) . . . . . . . . . . . 15-576
15.4.1.3 Steady-State Diffusion Initialization (DIFFCOMP) . . . . . 15-576
15.4.1.4 Coefficient Array Printing (PRINT COEFS) . . . . . . . . . . . 15-577
15.4.1.5 Grid Data Written for Post-Processing (MAP) . . . . . . . . . 15-578
15.4.1.6 Input Arrays and/or FUNCTION Options (SIGMAD, DEX,
TEMPF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-578
15.4.1.7 Override Modification (OVER, VOVER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-579
15.4.2 VIP-EXEC Input Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-580
15.4.2.1 Diffusion Activation/Deactivation (DIFFUSION) . . . . . . 15-580
15.4.2.2 Mapping Diffusion Fluxes (MAPZ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-580
References
Keyword Index
Subject Index
R5000.0.1 xxi
xxii R5000.0.1
Preface
000000 About This Manual
Purpose
VIP-CORE® is the initialization module of the VIP-EXECUTIVE® Family of
simulators. 00
The primary purpose of this Reference Manual is to document the input options of
the VIP-CORE initialization module. It is assumed that the reader is familiar with
reservoir engineering concepts, in general, and reservoir simulation terminology,
specifically. This document is not intended to be a cookbook for the novice
simulation user. This manual is intended to be used in conjunction with the VIP-
EXECUTIVE Simulation Modules Reference Manual. 00
The Modules
The VIP-CORE module calculates the initial reservoir conditions for the
following simulation modules: 00
VIP-ENCORE®: Multi-component Black-Oil Model
VIP-COMP®: Equation-of-State Compositional Model
VIP-DUAL®: Dual-Porosity, Dual-Permeability Model
VIP-POLYMER™: Polymer Flooding Model
VIP-THERM™ Thermal Compositional or Dead Oil Model
These modules work together to provide total flexibility in reservoir modeling.

For example, VIP-ENCORE and VIP-DUAL could be combined to provide
simulation capability for a dual-porosity, dual-permeability, black-oil reservoir. If
VIP-COMP were included in the same program, the user could convert to a fully
compositional version of the dual-porosity, dual-permeability model simply by
substituting the compositional specific data for the black-oil specific data. 00
R5000.0.1 About This Manual xxiii

VIP-CORE® Reference Manual Landmark
The Chapters
The VIP-CORE input data stream consists of keywords and data values which
invoke the features of the simulator. 00
■ Chapter 1 is an overview of the data required for VIP-CORE; it also describes

data cards which are used throughout the entire data stream.
■ The subsequent chapters describe the initialization data, which for the most
part, are order dependent. (Any restrictions are described in the appropriate
section.)
Data Formatting Conventions

This manual uses a consistent format to indicate the correct methods for entering
data. For example:
DATE day mo yr.
Keyword Variables
Data entry formats are always shown between horizontal gray bars, as illustrated
above. Keywords used to label the data are denoted by upper-case letters. Variable
names are shown in lower-case. For example, an actual line of data based on the
above format might look like this:
DATE 31 12 1992
More complex formats may include parentheses to indicate optional elements,

dots to indicate continuation, and bracketed columns to indicate required mutually
exclusive options. In the example below, the four options inside the vertical
brackets are mutually exclusive — you can use only one of them. If you use the
first or fourth option, you must enter at least one array name but you can enter
more, as indicated by the parentheses and the dots.
array1 (array2 ...)
PRINT ARRAYS ALL

NONE
EXCEPT array1 (array2 ...)
xxiv About This Manual R5000.0.1

Landmark VIP-CORE® Reference Manual
The following examples show the four different ways in which the above format
can be used:
PRINT ARRAYS KX KY KZ
PRINT ARRAYS ALL
PRINT ARRAYS NONE
PRINT ARRAYS EXCEPT KZ
For a complete discussion of data formatting, see Section 1.5.
Compatibility
Internal calculations are carried out in customary oil field units, but input and
output can be in either customary units or the International System of Units (SI)
metric system. Throughout this Reference Manual, units are first listed as the
customary units followed by the SI units in parentheses. The user may choose
metric pressure units of kg/cm2 instead of the default kPa. In this case, whenever
the documentation reads kPa, kg/cm2 will be expected. 00
Related Documentation
The following manuals provide more information related to the material in this
manual. For more information, please consult the appropriate manual listed below.
■ VIP-EXECUTIVE Reference Manual.
■ VIP-EXECUTIVE Technical Reference Manual.
R5000.0.1 About This Manual xxv

xxvi About This Manual R5000.0.1

Chapter
1
Data Overview
00000
1.1 Introduction
VIP-CORE® is the initialization module of the VIP-EXECUTIVE® family of
simulators. It is used to calculate the initial reservoir conditions to be used by
several simulation modules, including VIP-COMP®, VIP-ENCORE®, VIP-
DUAL®, VIP-POLYMER®, and VIP-THERM. For example, VIP-ENCORE and
VIP-DUAL could be combined to simulate a dual-porosity, dual-permeability,
"black-oil" reservoir. If VIP-COMP were included in the same program, the user
could convert to a fully compositional version of the dual-porosity, dual-
permeability model simply by substituting the compositional specific data for the
black-oil specific data.
VIP-CORE will only accept data for those modules which have been purchased.
They are listed on the first page of the computer output in the title box.
The documentation for entering the initialization data for VIP-COMP, VIP-
ENCORE, VIP-DUAL, VIP-POLYMER, and VIP-THERM is all included in this
Reference Manual. The majority of the data required for all five of these options is
identical since VIP-ENCORE is a special subset of the more generalized VIP-
COMP, and VIP-DUAL is only used in conjunction with either VIP-ENCORE or
VIP-COMP. Where the data differs between VIP-COMP, VIP-ENCORE, and
VIP-THERM or additional data is required for VIP-DUAL, VIP-POLYMER, and
VIP-THERM, the model to which the described data applies is enclosed in
parentheses after the section heading.
1.1.1 VIP-COMP Overview

VIP-COMP is an n-component, equation-of-state, compositional simulator. It can
simulate the flow of oil, gas, and water through an underground reservoir and
predict the behavior of all associated production/injection wells. The system takes
into account the fact that fluid properties and phase behavior can vary strongly
with fluid composition. Fluid properties and phase equilibrium are governed by a
generalized cubic equation-of-state which includes the Peng-Robinson equation
(see Reference 22) and various versions of the Redlich-Kwong equation (see
References 23 and 24). Both oil and gas are treated as mixtures containing an
arbitrary number of hydrocarbon and nonhydrocarbon components. In addition,
special techniques are implemented in VIP-COMP to provide stability and
efficiency of solution for near-critical oil and gas fluid systems.
R5000.0.1 Data Overview 1-27

1.1.2 VIP-ENCORE Overview

VIP-ENCORE is a three-phase reservoir simulator which models the immiscible
flow of oil, gas, and water within the reservoir. VIP-ENCORE is a special case of
the generalized VIP-COMP simulator. Fluid properties can be described
according to the "black-oil convention" — oil at reservoir conditions is a mixture
of stock tank oil and dissolved gas. The amount of gas dissolved in the oil is
determined by a bubblepoint pressure relationship.
VIP-ENCORE is able to treat water-oil or gas-water two-phase problems as

special cases of the more generalized three-phase fluid system. In addition, VIP-
ENCORE can process multi-component systems whose PVT properties are
adequately described by pressure-dependent K-values. Thus, it can be used to
model gas condensates and volatile oils more rigorously than conventional black-
oil simulators.
1.1.3 VIP-DUAL Overview
NOTE: VIP-DUAL is available as a separately licensed option.
The VIP-DUAL option simulates the performance of reservoirs which are

naturally fractured, heterogeneous, or highly stratified. The full dual-porosity,
dual-permeability formulation allows flow in both fractures and matrix rock,
thereby enabling correct and accurate modeling of reservoirs which may be highly
fractured in some regions while unfractured in others.
VIP-DUAL must be used in conjunction with either VIP-ENCORE or VIP-

COMP. Within VIP-DUAL, the exchange of fluids between the fracture and
matrix rock is based on the Warren & Root theory, (see Reference 18) and the
more recent work of Thomas, Dixon, and Pierson. (see Reference 19). Mass
transfer between matrix rock and fractures includes diffusion, convection,
imbibition, and gravity drainage. Imbibition and gravity drainage effects can be
modeled with pseudo-capillary pressure functions. These functions are
automatically and independently determined for the matrix rock and fractures and
account for the matrix block and gridblock sizes. Also available is a dual porosity/
single permeability option which assumes that the fractures alone are a continuous
media and the matrix rock exists only as a source or sink for reservoir fluids.
1-28 Data Overview R5000.0.1

1.1.4 VIP-POLYMER Overview
NOTE: VIP-POLYMER is available as a separately licensed option.
The VIP-POLYMER option simulates the performance of polymer flooded

reservoirs. The model takes into account the major physical properties attributed
to the flow of polymer solutions through porous media. These include a non-
Newtonian (shear dependent) aqueous phase viscosity that is also a function of
polymer concentration.
Other polymer dependent properties are: polymer adsorption, permeability

reduction, and polymer inaccessible pore volume phenomenon. The well
performance calculations also include the effects of non-Newtonian viscosity. The
polymer is represented by a separate component, present only in the aqueous
phase and occupying no volume. VIP-POLYMER must be used in conjunction
with either VIP-ENCORE or VIP-COMP.
1.1.5 VIP-THERM Overview

VIP-THERM is an extension of the fully implicit formulation of VIP-COMP to
include an energy balance, an equilibrium constraint for the water component,
heat loss models, and temperature-dependency of all important properties. Two
phase behavior models are available: 1) the n-component compositional equation
of state model which VIP-THERM shares with VIP-COMP (Section 4.4) or 2) the
dead oil model in which oil is treated as a single non-volatile component
(Section 4.7).
The VIP-THERM compositional model is a fully implicit, n-component,

equation-of-state, thermal simulator. The number of volatile components may be
specified as less than or equal to the total number of components. Water and steam
properties including density, enthalpy, and viscosity are obtained from a tabular
input file which is separate from the file containing the data described in this
manual.
The VIP-THERM dead oil model is a fully implicit three-phase reservoir

simulator which models the flow of oil, water, and steam within the reservoir. This
version is a special case of the generalized compositional version. Oil is
represented as a single non-volatile component. Oil properties are either
calculated by interpolation from input tables or are calculated from input values of
oil compressibility, oil coefficient of thermal expansion, oil heat capacity, and oil
viscosity as a function of temperature. Water and steam properties including
density, enthalpy, and viscosity are obtained from a tabular input file which is
separate from the file containing the data described in this manual.
VIP-COMP or VIP-ENCORE initialization data may easily be converted to VIP-

THERM format:
1. Specify THERMAL card in VIP-CORE utility data (Section 2.2.19.1).

2. Specify NCV in the grid system data (Sections 2.2.3.1 or 2.2.3.2).
3. Replace Physical Property Constants table with VIP-THERM format

(Section 2.2.4.2).
4. Replace VIP-ENCORE PVT data with either EOS data (Section 4.4) or Dead
Oil PVT data (Section 4.7). If PCHOR was specified in VIP-COMP EOS
data, that column must be removed before the data will be accepted by VIP-
THERM.
5. Specify heat capacity arrays in VIP-CORE array data (Sections 5.45 and
5.46).
6. Specify heat loss data in VIP-CORE (Chapter 12).
VIP-COMP and VIP-ENCORE recurrent data may easily be converted to VIP-

THERM format:
1. Specify TINJ and QUAL for all water injectors (VIP-EXECUTIVE Sections
3.4.2.1 and 3.4.2.2). Also specify PINJ (VIP-EXECUTIVE Section 3.4.2.3)
for all wells for which steam quality is specified as zero or one.
2. Specify TINJ for all gas injectors (VIP-EXECUTIVE Section 3.4.2.1).
3. Modify DT cards (VIP-EXECUTIVE Section 7.1.1), ITNLIM cards (VIP-

EXECUTIVE Section 7.1.3), and TOLD cards (VIP-EXECUTIVE Section
7.1.7) to include values for maximum temperature change.
4. Modify TOLR cards (VIP-EXECUTIVE Section 7.1.8) to include an energy

balance tolerance.
1.1.6 Shared Features

VIP-COMP, VIP-ENCORE, VIP-DUAL, VIP-POLYMER, and VIP-THERM
share all the same major features in VIP-CORE. Finite difference grids may be
constructed in either rectangular (x-y-z) or radial (r-θ-z) coordinates, using either
one, two, or three dimensions. Simulations using more general curvilinear grid
systems also are possible. However, in this case the user must employ the corner
point feature in VIP-EXECUTIVE, or input transmissibility and pore volumes
directly.
The reservoir being studied may be initialized to capillary-gravity equilibrium or

to a nonequilibrium state. Under equilibrium conditions saturation pressure can
vary with depth, and multiple water-oil and gas-oil contacts can be established.
VIP-CORE will determine the initial reservoir pressure and saturation
distributions for these cases. To achieve a nonequilibrium state both the gas and
water saturations must be specified for each gridblock.
Each block in the finite difference grid is designated as containing a particular

type of rock with each rock type corresponding to a particular set of relative
permeability and capillary pressure curves.

The reservoir description may be completely heterogeneous with regard to the

distribution of permeabilities, porosities, and net pay. Furthermore, each gridblock
can be assigned a depth that is independent of the depths of the surrounding
blocks, so there are no limits on the description of faults or varying dip angles.
Wells are controlled by a variety of options which allow both rate and pressure
constraints. Wells can also be shut in, or recompleted, automatically. Rates can be
adjusted to meet production and injection targets at any of the target levels. These
targets levels include gathering center, flow station, area, and field.
Separator conditions are also taken into consideration for all of the simulator
modules. In VIP-COMP (or in the VIP-THERM compositional model), a multi-
component model, separators are required to determine surface production rates.
In VIP-ENCORE, separators allow for the additional flexibility of treating flash
separation conditions at the surface versus the differential calculations which take
place in the reservoir.
Both VIP-COMP and VIP-ENCORE allow fully implicit (IMPLICIT) or explicit

(IMPES) formulations to be selected for the integration of the flow equations.
When the VIP-DUAL option or the VIP-THERM option is activated, only the
fully implicit formulation is accepted for the additional required stability.
Internal calculations are carried out in customary oil field units, but input and
output can be in either customary units or the International System of Units (SI)
metric system. Throughout this Reference Manual, units are first listed as the
customary units followed by the SI units in parentheses. The user may choose
metric pressure units of kg/cm2 instead of the default kPa. In this case, whenever
the documentation reads kPa, kg/cm2 will be expected.

1.2 Typical Data Requirements to Initialize a Simulation Study
1.2.1 Geological Descriptions

The following geological descriptions are required: 00
■ Reservoir maps showing the current interpretation of the structure, gross and
net sand thicknesses.
■ Reservoir maps showing the distribution of pore volume (i.e., porosity -

thickness product) or, if appropriate, an average porosity representative of the
pool.
■ Reservoir maps showing the distribution of flow capacity (i.e. permeability -

thickness product) or, if appropriate, an average permeability representative
of the pool.
■ If the reservoir can be subdivided into geological units that display different
rock quality or flow characteristics, then all previous reference maps should
be available for each reservoir unit.
■ For coning, cross-section, or three-dimensional studies, the well logs and core
analysis results should be available to help identify reservoir layering and
corresponding layer properties.
1.2.2 Reservoir Rock Characteristics

The following reservoir rock characteristics are required: 00
■ Laboratory reports detailing results from relative permeability tests and end-
point relative permeability or, if already reviewed by the operator, a set of
relative permeability curves for each rock type (lithology related) present in
the pool.
■ Laboratory reports detailing the results from capillary pressure tests

conducted on core samples or the operator’s best estimate of the capillary
pressure characteristics of each rock type (lithologically related) present in the
pool.
■ Formation water analysis including the dissolved solids content.
1.2.3 Hydrocarbon Fluid Properties

The following hydrocarbon fluid properties are required: 00
■ Laboratory results from fluid characterization tests performed on reservoir oil

and gas samples. Both oil and gas properties are required, including
composition and volume factors, viscosity, density, compressibility, and
dissolved gas-oil ratios as functions of pressure.

■ Operating conditions of field separation units to properly correct laboratory

data. The location of the metering equipment should be identified to ensure
that volumetric rate information input to the model is consistent with field
data.
1.3 Data Deck Layout

VIP-CORE is the initialization module of VIP-EXECUTIVE. It is used to
describe the reservoir and the fluids it contains, plus the initial saturation and
pressure distributions.
It is possible to write sufficient information onto disk to allow a subsequent run to

pick up where the first one left off. The information saved this way is called a
restart record. VIP-CORE automatically writes a restart record upon completion
of the initialization process. The information on this restart record is then used by
VIP-EXECUTIVE simulation modules to begin the simulation.
In addition to the standard output and initialization restart record, VIP-CORE can
write the initialization portion of summary records for subsequent processing by
ancillary programs. The currently available menu of these data cards, the
summary records they control, and the FORTRAN units on which the information
is stored include:
PRINT Printer Output (Section 3.1), FORTRAN Unit 6.
MAP Grid Array Maps (Section 2.2.2.6), FORTRAN

Units 9 and 27. Also the VDB file.
RESTART Restart Record automatically written upon successful

initialization, FORTRAN Unit 2.
CORNER Corner-point data for post-processing (Section 3.1),

FORTRAN Unit 12.
To save any or all of these records for subsequent post-processing, appropriate

commands must be added to the job control stream for permanent storage of the
appropriate FORTRAN units.

VIP-CORE I/O is illustrated schematically in Figure 1-1 below along with the
appropriate FORTRAN (FT) Unit numbers.
RESTART FILE: FT02

PRINTER FILE: FT06
SIMOUT MAP FILE: FT09
CORNER FILE: FT12
COEFS FILE: FT13
INPUT
DECK: PROCESS ID FILE: FT15
FT05 MAP FILE: FT27
DUAL PC PSEUDO DATA
VIP-CORE FILE: FT28
FLUX DEBUG: FT55
MORES POROSITY: FT69
MORES GEOMETRY,
PERM., TRANS.: FT70
DATA FOR STATISTICAL
PROGRAM: FT72
EOSINT OPTION: FT73 -
SCRATCH FILES: FT77
FT01 (Formatted) INPUT DATA INCLUDE
FT08 (Formatted) OPTION: FT91 - FT99
FT04 (Unformatted)
FT21, FT23
Figure 1-1: VIP-CORE I/O Files
The general data structure for VIP-CORE is shown in Figure 1-2. 00
Figure 1-2: VIP-CORE Data Organization

1.4 Input Data Template

The following printout lists the most frequently used VIP-CORE data input
options.
C
INIT
C ------------------------------------------------------------
C IDENTIFICATION DATA
C ------------------------------------------------------------
C
TITLE1
VIP-CORE BATCH DATA INPUT TEMPLATE
TITLE2
THIS LIST INCLUDES ONLY THE MOST FREQUENTLY USED OPTIONS
C
C
C
C
C ************************************************************
C INITIALIZATION DATA CHAPTER 2
C
C ***********************************************************
C
C ------------------------------------------------------------
C UTILITY DATA SECTION 2.2
C ------------------------------------------------------------
DATE DY MO YR
C
C ------------------------------------------------------------
C PRINT CONTROL CHAPTER 3
C ------------------------------------------------------------
PRINT (ALL)(EQUIL)(COMP)(TABLES)(ARRAYS)(COEFS)(INFLUX)
(INIT)(FAULTS)(CORNER)(NONE)
C NOTE: PRINT CARDS ARE NOT REQUIRED; THE DEFAULT IS PRINT ALL
C
C -----------------------------------------------------------
C GRID SYSTEM OPTIONS SECTION 2.2.3
C ------------------------------------------------------------
NX(NR) NY(NTHETA) NZ (RI) NCOMP(NCV)
C
NO.X-DIR NO.Y-DIR NO.Z-DIR (INNER RADIUS)NO. OF
INCREMENTSINCREMENTS INCREMENTSRI≠0COMPONENTS
C THE PREVIOUS 2 CARDS ARE REPLACED BY 1 DATA CARD
C NOTE: NCV IS REQUIRED IN VIP-THERM ONLY
C
C -----------------------------------------------------------
C PHYSICAL PROPERTY CONSTANTS SECTION 2.2.4
C ------------------------------------------------------------
DWB BWI VW CW CR TRES TS PS
WATER WATER WATERWATERROCKRES STAND.STAND.
DENSITY F.V.F. VISCCOMPRCOMPRTEMP TEMPPRESS


C NOTE: THE ABOVE TABLE FORMAT DIFFERES IN VIP-THERM
C
C -----------------------------------------------------------
C TABLES CHAPTER 4
C ------------------------------------------------------------
TABLES
C
C -----------------------------------------------------------
C EQUILIBRIUM INITIALIZATION TABLE(S) SECTION 4.2
C ------------------------------------------------------------
IEQUIL PINITDEPTHPCWOC WOC PCGOCGOC PSAT
C
EQUIL INITPRESCAP WATER CAPGAS INIT
REGION PRES REF PRES OIL PRES OIL SATR’N
NUMBER DEPTH AT WOC CONTACT AT GOCCONTACTPRES
C THE PREVIOUS 3 CARDS ARE REPLACED BY 1 DATA CARD FOR EACH
C REGION
C
C NOTE: THERE ARE TWO INPUT OPTIONS FOR THIS TABLE: (A)
C SATURATION PRESSURE CONSTANT BY REGIONS, (B)
C SATURATION PRESSURE VARIES WITH DEPTH.
C
C ------------------------------------------------------------
C WATER SATURATION TABLE(S) SECTION 4.3
C ------------------------------------------------------------
SWT 1
SW KRW KROW PCWO
SWR 0.0 KROCW PCWOCW
. . . .
SWRO KRWRO 0.0 PCWORO
. . 0. .
SWMX KRWMX 0.0 PCWOMN
C NOTE: IF ONLY PCWOCW AND PCWOMN ARE INPUT, THE MISSING
C VALUES OF PCWO WILL BE GENERATED BY LINEAR
C INTERPOLATION
C ------------------------------------------------------------
C GAS SATURATION TABLE(S) SECTION 4.3
C ------------------------------------------------------------
SGT 1
SG KRG KROG PCGO
SGMN 0.0 KROCW PCGOMN
. 0. . .
SGC 0.0 KROCG PCGOCG
. . . .
SGRO KRGRO 0.0 PCGORO
. . 0. .
SGMX KRGMX 0.0 PCGOMX
C
C NOTE: IF ONLY PCGOMN AND PCGOCW ARE INPUT, THE MISSING
C VALUES OF PCGO WILL BE GENERATED BY LINEAR
C INTERPOLATION

C
C ---------------------------------------------------------------
C PVT PROPERTY DATA SECTION 4.4
C THE FOLLOWING TABLE APPLIES ONLY TO VIP-ENCORE
C ---------------------------------------------------------------
BOTAB 1
DOS WTOS PSAT
DENSITY OFMOLECULAR WEIGHTINITIAL
SATURATED OILOF SATURATED OILSATURATION PRESSURE
PSAT RS BO BG(ZG)GR VO VG
SATURATIONSOLUTION OIL GAS GAS SATURATED GAS
PRESSURE GAS-OIL FORMATIONFORMATIONGRAVITYOIL VISCOSITY
RATIO VOLUME(GAS VISCOSITY
FACTORCOMPRESSI-
BILITY)
VOLUME
FACTOR
C THE PREVIOUS 7 CARDS ARE REPLACED BY AT LEAST 2 DATA CARDS
PSAT SATURATION PRESSURE VALUES (AT LEAST 1 VALUE)
DP BOFACVOFAC (BOFAC VOFAC). . . (BOFAC VOFAC)
RELATIVE OIL OIL
PRESSURE FORMATIONVISCOSITY
(P - PSATI)VOLUME FACTOR
C
C NOTES: THE PREVIOUS 3 CARDS ARE REPLACED BY AT LEAST 1 DATA
C CARD. A PAIR OF BOFAC, VOFAC VALUES MUST APPEAR FOR
C EACH VALUE OF PSAT ON THE PSAT CARD.
C
SEPTEST IBAT : SEPARATOR BATTERY NUMBER
PVTTABLE 1 : PVT TABLE NUMBER
PSATF BOF
SATURATION PRESSURE OIL FORMATION VOLUME FACTOR
P T GOR BOSTG GR
STAGE STAGE STAGE GAS STAGE OIL STAGE GAS
PRESSURES TEMPERATURES OIL RATIOSVOLUME FACTORSGRAVITIES
C REPLACE THE PREVIOUS 2 CARDS WITH 1 DATA CARD FOR EACH STAGE
C ------------------------------------------------------------
GRID DATA ARRAYS CHAPTER 5
C ------------------------------------------------------------
ARRAYS
DX(DR) INPUT OPTION
VALUES
DY(DTHETA)INPUT OPTION
VALUES
DZ INPUT OPTION
VALUES
DEPTH INPUT OPTION
VALUES
POR INPUT OPTION
VALUES
KX(KR) INPUT OPTION
VALUES

KY(KTHETA)INPUT OPTION
VALUES
KZ INPUT OPTION
VALUES
C
C NOTE: ALTERNATIVELY, THE TRANSMISSIBILITIES TX, TY, AND
C TZ; THE MDEPTH ARRAY; AND THE PV ARRAY MAY BE
C ENTERED INSTEAD OF THE PRECEDING ARRAYS
C
C NOTE: THE INPUT OPTIONS ARE DESCRIBED IN CHAPTER 1
C
C
C ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
C THE FOLLOWING ARRAYS ARE REQUIRED FOR MULTIPLE TABLES
C ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
C
ISAT INPUT OPTION
VALUES
IEQUIL INPUT OPTION
VALUES
C
C
C ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
C FAULT OPTION DATA (NOT REQ’D) CHAPTER 6
C ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
C
C TRANSMISSIBILITY/PORE VOLUME MODIFICATION OPTION DATA (NOT
C REQ’D) CHAPTER 7
C
C ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
C REGION DATA (NOT REQ’D) CHAPTER 8
C ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
C
C
C ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
C INFLUX OPTION DATA (NOT REQ’D) SECTION 9.1
C ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
STOP
END
1.5 Data Format

Nearly all data are input in ‘free field’ format. This means that it is not necessary
to enter numbers in specific columns. Each item of data, or "word,” must be
separated by either one or more blank columns or by a comma. Unless explicitly
stated, all data need not appear on a single card - the continuation character ‘>’ is
used to extend data onto the next card.
The data stream includes both numbers and alpha keywords; the latter are used to
identify subsequent numbers or select program options. Generally, each new type
of data is introduced by an alpha keyword. Secondary keyword items in [ ] are

"required mutually exclusive" while those in ( ) are "optional". The brackets and
parenthesis should not be input with the data, they simply help describe data input
options. In the data descriptions that follow, keywords are shown in upper case
letters (they can be input in upper or lower case). The names of the variables that
are entered as numbers are shown in lower case letters. For example, one of the
utility data cards indicates the date at which the simulation is to begin. In the data
description, this is written as:
DATE day mo year
This indicates that the data card must contain the alpha label DATE followed by
three numbers that indicate the day, month, and year. An example of a valid data
card follows:
DATE 15 2 1980
This information could be anywhere on the card so long as nothing else appears in
the columns being scanned and there is at least one blank between each of the
"words".
Numbers can be represented in any of the conventional FORTRAN formats. Note

the following valid representations of the number 1000:
1000 1000. 1.E3 1E3 0.1E+4 10000E-01
None of the various forms may contain an imbedded blank, since the simulator
interprets them as two words rather than one. There is no distinction between
integer and floating point representations of numbers. (All numbers are decoded
as if they were floating point, then are stored as either integer or floating point
variables, depending on use.)
Repeated values can be written in shorthand notation to reduce data preparation

effort. For example, consider two equivalent ways of specifying the following
data card:
Method 1: 10 12.5 12.5 12.5 15. 15 16.5
Method 2: 10 3*12.5 2*15 16.5
The single "word" 3*12.5 is decoded as 12.5 12.5 12.5 and 2*15 becomes 15 15.
On the other hand, 3* 12.5 could not be decoded properly because of the blank
between * and 12.5. In this case, the simulator issues an error message. If an error
occurs in the initialization data, the run stops prior to initializing.
The number of data values on a line is restricted to 20,000. This applies to

decoded repeated values, so that 1500*3 becomes 1,500 data values.

Any word beginning with a number (or a decimal point) must be a valid numeric
form, or it causes the run to terminate before the first timestep. Any word
beginning with a character other than a number (or a decimal point) is treated as
alpha data. A # sign before a number causes the number to be interpreted as an
alpha string.
Any word beginning with an exclamation point (!) indicates the beginning of
inline comments. All text after the exclamation point is ignored by the simulator.
The following is an example of the use of inline comments:
SWT 1 !Water Saturation Table 1

SW KRW KROW PCWO
0.22 0.0 1.0 7.0! Connate
0.3 0.07 0.4 4.0
0.4 0.15 0.125 3.0
0.45 0.24 0.0649 2.5
0.6 0.33 0.0048 2.0
0.8 0.65 0.0 1.0! 1-Sor
0.9 0.83 0.0 0.5
1.0 1.0 0.0 0.0
!-----------------------------------------------------
1.5.1 General Utility Data
1.5.1.1 Comment Lines (C)
C comment
Makes a “comment” of the field which follows. The alpha label C must be the first
word on the card and must be followed by a blank.
See also the use of the inline comment character “!,” which is discussed in the
introduction to this section.
1.5.1.2 Read Data from an External File (INCLUDE)
INCLUDE file-name
NOTE: A relative pathname for an include file is resolved with respect to the
current working directory rather than to the directory where the VIP-CORE
dataset resides. 00
Definition: 00
file-name The pathname to the file from which data should be read.
The file name may be contained in double quotes. The

file name may contain blanks; in this case, it must be

contained in double quotes.
When the INCLUDE card is encountered in the input file, the named file is
opened and it becomes the current input file. A fatal error occurs if the file cannot
be opened. Reading from the include file stops when either a physical end-of-file
is encountered or an ENDINC card is encountered. Reading then continues from
the previous input file. Include files can be nested (i.e. contain other INCLUDE
cards). However, the nesting level cannot exceed nine.
Examples: INCLUDE grid.data! Contains DX, DY and DZ

INCLUDE perm.data! Contains KX, KY and KZ
1.5.1.3 Stop Reading Data from the Current INCLUDE File (ENDINC)
ENDINC
The ENDINC card indicates the end of data for the current include file. When the
ENDINC card is encountered on an INCLUDE file, the file is closed and data
continues to be read from the previous input file. If INCLUDE files are nested
then the nesting level is decreased by one. The ENDINC card is optional in that a
physical end-of-file also indicates end of data. A warning message is given when
an ENDINC card is encountered on the primary input file.
Examples: ENDINC
1.5.1.4 Read Array Data from a VDB File (VDB)
VDB file-name (CASE case-name) (CLASS class_type) (TIME time) (VARIABLE var_name)
Definitions:
file-name The pathname to the VDB file from which grid data
should be read.
CASE Indicator for case_name.
case_name The case name of the data being read from the VDB file.
CLASS Indicator for class_type.
class_type CALC, INIT, RECUR, and GEO are the allowed class
types. Default class is CALC.
TIME Indicator for the time value.
time Time value (days) used when the RECUR class is

specified. Default time = 0.0

VARIABLE Indicator for the var_name.
var_name Variable name that exists in the VDB. Default is the

name of the array specified preceding the VDB line.
Var_name is required when reading VMOD data,
(Section 1.5.4.3).
If the case name is entered, obviously it must exist in the VDB file. If the case
name is not entered, then only one case name may exist in the VDB file.
The file name may be contained in double quotes. The name may contain blanks;
in this case, it must be contained in double quotes.
1.5.1.5 Echo Print On (LIST)
LIST
LIST and NOLIST cards control printing of card images of the data read. Until a
NOLIST Card is entered, LIST is assumed.
Examples: LIST
1.5.1.6 Echo Print Off (NOLIST)
NOLIST
If NOLIST is read, printing of card images is suppressed until a LIST card is read.
Examples: NOLIST
1.5.1.7 Skip Data On (SKIP)
SKIP
A skip card indicates that all subsequent data is ignored until a NOSKIP card is
encountered; i.e., it is as if all the cards were comment lines. The card images are
not printed.
Example: SKIP
.
.
.
NOSKIP

1.5.1.8 Skip Data Off (NOSKIP)
NOSKIP
A NOSKIP card ends the skip data option.
1.5.1.9 Number of Printed Lines Per Page (NLINES)
NLINES nlines
Definition: 00
nlines The maximum number of lines to be printed on a page.

Default is 60.
The number of lines to be printed on a page of array output can be specified. This
card facilitates printing on short paper.
Examples: NLINES 60
1.5.1.10 Columns To Be Read (NCOL)
NCOL ncol
Definition: 00
ncol Number of columns to be scanned for data; value must be

between 30 and 1000, inclusive. Default is 1000.
Only the columns 1 to ncol will be processed. Items beyond column ncol will be
ignored (e.g. comments).
Examples: In order to limit processing to the first 45 columns:

NCOL 45
1.5.1.11 Data Line Continuation
Data required to be entered in a single record may be input on multiple lines by

entering a “greater than” (>) character at the end of each data line to be continued.
1.5.2 Array Input Options

Reservoir properties, such as porosity, absolute permeability, depths, and
gridblock locations or dimensions, can vary spatially in VIP-CORE. A value of
any one of these properties must be specified for each gridblock in the reservoir

model (Figure 1-3). The field of values required to specify a given reservoir
property is referred to as an array. In some cases, symmetry exists in the array
data, which lends itself to abbreviated data input. Options to exploit data
symmetries are given in the remainder of this section. Array data may be modified
later (Section 1.5.4). To simplify the presentation of several of the input options,
NX and x or NY and y are often used where NR and r or NTHETA and theta
should be used for radial models.
Most arrays have one entry per gridblock. However, several of the corner-point
arrays have more than this. In general, the array input options extend to these
arrays in the obvious way. In a few cases, however, input options behave
differently for corner-point data arrays; the differences are described in this
section.
The general format of array data is: 00
aname option (amin amax nl)

values
Definitions: 00
aname Array name as specified in this section.
option Array input option as described in Array Input.
amin Minimum value against which data values are checked

(optional, unless amax or nl specified).
amax Maximum value against which data values are checked

(optional, unless nl specified).
nl Number of areal planes for which data will be specified -

used only with the LNXVAR, LNYVAR, LNZVAR and
LNVAL input options.
values Data values are entered as necessary for the array option
being used.

The available array input options are discussed in this section. 00
Figure 1-3: A Typical VIP-CORE Reservoir Grid

1.5.2.1 Constant Array Input Option (CON)
CON requires only one value for input. The entire array is constant for all
gridblocks.
array CON
value(s)
Definition: 00
array Any valid array name.
Example: For a system with NX = 4, NY = 3, NZ = 2, and a constant

porosity of 30%.
POR CON
0.30 00
Values of porosity assigned to the gridblocks are: 00

1.5.2.2 X (or R) Direction Array Value Variation (XVAR/RVAR)
XVAR (RVAR) requires NX (NR) data values. For certain corner-point arrays
NX+1 data values are required. XVAR (RVAR) varies the array property in the x
(or r) direction, while holding it constant in the y and z directions. This usually is
used with the DX (DR or R) array.
array XVAR
value(s)
Example: For a system where NX = 4, NY = 3, and NZ = 2.

DX XVAR
1. 1.5 2.0 2.5 00
Values of DX assigned to the gridblocks are: 00

1.5.2.3 Y (or Theta) Direction Array Value Variation (YVAR/THVAR)
YVAR (THVAR) requires NY (NTHETA) data values. For certain corner-point

arrays, NY+1 data values are required. YVAR (THVAR) varies the array property
in the y (or theta) direction, while holding it constant in the x and z directions.
This usually is used with the DY (or DTHETA) array.
array YVAR
value(s)

DY YVAR
5 6 7 00
Values of DY assigned to the gridblocks are: 00

1.5.2.4 Z Direction Array Value Variation (ZVAR)
ZVAR requires NZ data values. For corner-point arrays NZ+1 data values are
required. ZVAR varies the array property in the z direction while holding it
constant in the x and y directions. This is useful for reading data that varies by
layers.
array ZVAR
value(s)

DZ ZVAR
10 15.3 00
Values of DZ assigned to the gridblocks are: 00

1.5.2.5 Full Array Input Option (VALUE)
VALUE requires NX*NY*NZ data values. For corner-point arrays

(NX+1)*(NY+1)*(NZ+1) or NX*NY*(NZ+1) data values are required,
depending on the array. Each gridblock must be assigned a value. The values are
input by x-direction rows. All rows for the first xy plane are entered in order of
increasing y index, followed by the remaining planes in order of increasing z
index.
Although the number of data values on a line is essentially unrestricted, the user
should order his array data as rows or multiples of rows to make data entries at
specific locations easily referenced. This is further clarified with the use of
comment cards. The following example displays two different ways of entering
the same array.
array VALUE
value(s)
Example: POR VALUE

.10 3*.12.15 .20 .252* .32 .35
2*.36 .12.13 .14 .15 .15
2*.16 .17.25 .22 .20 .21 00
or 00
POR VALUE
C LAYER 1
.10 3*.12
.15.20 .25 .32
.32.35 2*.36
C LAYER 2
.12.13 .14 .15
.15.16 .16 .17
.25.22 .20 .21 00

Values of porosity assigned to the gridblocks are: 00

1.5.2.6 Automatic Generation of Values for Layers 2 - Nz (LAYER)
The LAYER option may be used with any input data arrays, but it is particularly
useful for the DEPTH, MDEPTH, or ZCORN arrays. With all but these three
arrays, the LAYER option replicates the values provided for the first layer for
each of the other layers of the grid. When used with non-corner-point arrays or
with the ZCORNE, ZCORNW, or ZCORSW arrays, the LAYER option requires
NX*NY values. When used with other corner-point arrays, the LAYER option
requires (NX+1)*(NY+1) data values.
To use the LAYER option with the DEPTH or MDEPTH arrays, the DZ array
must have been read previously. The depth of each gridblock in the first layer (K =
1) is read. The depths of the remaining gridblocks are then calculated from the
depths of the gridblocks in the first layer and gridblock thicknesses.
To use the LAYER option with the ZCORN array, the XCORN and YCORN
arrays and one of the corner-point thickness arrays DZCORN, DZVCOR, or
DZBCOR must have been previously read. In this case the LAYER option not
only adjusts the values of the ZCORN array, but also it may adjust the values of
the XCORN and YCORN arrays depending on which of the corner-point
thickness arrays are read. If the DZCORN array is read, then no adjustment is
made to the XCORN or YCORN arrays; the LAYER option works in this case as
it does for DEPTH or MDEPTH. However, if either the DZBCOR or DZVCOR
arrays are read, then only the top layer values of the XCORN and YCORN arrays
are kept; the values in the other layers are adjusted so that the dip of the top layer
is mimicked in succeeding layers and the specified thickness data is honored. The
difference between the DZBCOR and DZVCOR is the interpretation of the
thickness: for DZBCOR, thickness is the thickness perpendicular to the bedding
plane, while for DZVCOR it is the depth difference between a corner point in one
layer and the corresponding corner point in the next layer.
When MOD cards (Section 1.5.4.1) are used with this option only the specified
locations are changed; the depths of the locations not specified on the MOD cards
are not recalculated. For example, if the depths of layer 1 are modified, then the
depths of the other layers are not recalculated. Thus,
DEPTH (layer 2) ≠ DEPTH (layer 1) + DZ (layer 1). 00
Indiscriminate use of the MOD card may therefore result in different layers
occupying the same or overlapping positions.
To avoid this problem MODLYR cards (Section 1.5.4.2) may be used. When the
depths of layer 1 are modified using MODLYR cards, the depths of the remaining
layers are recalculated.
Although the number of data values on a line is restricted to 20,000, the user
should order his array data as rows or multiples of rows to make data entries at
specific locations easily referenced.
array LAYER

value(s)
Example: DEPTH LAYER

4*2000 4*2020 4*2040 00
The depths for layer 2 are calculated using the DZ values from the ZVAR
example.
Values of DEPTH assigned to the gridblocks are: 00

1.5.2.7 Block Depths From Origin (DIP)
The DIP option can be used only to enter the ZCORN, DEPTH or MDEPTH
arrays. When used for the ZCORN array, the XCORN and YCORN arrays and
one of the corner-point thickness arrays must have been previously read. When
used with the DEPTH or MDEPTH arrays, either the DZ or the H array must have
been previously read. Using the DIP option, VIP-CORE calculates the data values
for the first layer of gridblocks based upon the DIP information, then calculates
the depths for the remaining gridblocks based upon the thicknesses using the
LAYER option.
For a rectangular coordinate system, the depth of each gridblock in the first layer
is calculated from a reference depth (dref), the dip angle in the x direction (xdip),
and the dip angle in the y direction (ydip). For a radial coordinate system, the
depth of each gridblock is calculated from a reference depth (dref), the steepest
dip angle in the radial direction (rdip), and the angle between the radial of
steepest dip angle and the 0 radial (theta). Positive dip angles indicate increasing
depth. Angles must be entered in decimal degrees. Minutes should be converted to
decimal fractions of a degree.
If only the reference depth is given, the system is considered non-dipping and
each gridblock in the first layer is assigned the depth value dref.
After a depth value is calculated/assigned for each gridblock in the first layer, the
depths of the remaining layers are calculated from the depths of the first layer and
gridblock thicknesses.
When MOD cards (Section 1.5.4.1) are used with this option only the specified
locations are changed; the depths of the locations not specified on the MOD cards
are not recalculated. For example, if the depths of layer 1 are modified, then the
depths of the other layers are not recalculated. Thus,
DEPTH (layer 2) ≠ DEPTH (layer 1) + DZ (layer 1). 00
Indiscriminate use of the MOD card may therefore result in different layers
occupying the same or overlapping positions.
To avoid this problem, MODLYR cards (Section 1.5.4.2) may be used. When the
depths of layer 1 are modified using MODLYR cards, the depths of the remaining
layers are recalculated.
Using the DIP option for radial coordinates does NOT result in a cone. Instead, it
results in a dipping cylinder in which elevations at 180 degrees will decrease
moving outward from the well at the same slope that elevations will increase
along the 0 degree plane.

For Rectangular Coordinates 00
DEPTH DIP
dref xdip ydip
Definitions: 00
dref Depth to the top (DEPTH) or middle (MDEPTH) of

gridblock (1,1,1) or depth to corner point (1,1,1) when
used for the ZCORN array, in a cartesian grid, ft (m).
xdip Dip in the x direction, measured between the x axis and

horizontal, decimal degrees. This can be omitted if both
xdip and ydip are equal to zero. A positive value
indicates increasing depth.
ydip Dip in the y direction, measured between the y axis and

the horizontal, decimal degrees. This can be omitted if it
is equal to zero. A positive value indicates increasing
depth.
For Radial Coordinates 00
DEPTH DIP
dref rdip theta
Definitions: 00
dref Depth to the origin of the radial grid system, ft (m).
rdip The angle measured between the radial of steepest dip

angle and the horizontal, decimal degrees. This can be
omitted if both rdip and theta are equal to zero. A
positive value indicates increasing depth.
theta The angle between the 0 radial and the radial of steepest
dip angle, decimal degrees. This can be omitted if it is
equal to zero.
Example 1Given:dref = 1575 feet

xdip = 0 degrees
ydip = 32 degrees
Input: MDEPTH DIP

1575 0 32 00

Example 2 Given:dref = 2000 feet

rdip = 15 degrees
theta = 0 degrees (This can be omitted.)
Input: DEPTH DIP

2000 15 00
1.5.2.8 Define New Array From Previously Defined Array (MULT)
The MULT option allows the user to define a new array from a previously-defined
array. Each element of the new array is a constant multiple of the previously
defined array. If the new array is the ZCORNE, ZCORNW, or ZCORSW array,
and if the previously-defined array is the ZCORN array, then the program
automatically matches up corner points in ZCORN and the new array. In all other
cases, the new array and the previously-defined array should have the same
dimensions.
array MULT
mult array
Definitions: 00
mult Multiplier to use with the specified array.
Example: KZ MULT
.1 KX 00
In this example, kzi = 0.1 * kxi for all gridblocks i. 00
1.5.2.9 Directional Relative Permeability Option (dir) (Not Available in VIP-

THERM)
The directional relative permeability option allows each gridblock to have

different relative permeability values in each flow direction. For vertical
equilibrium (VE) models, the program will internally generate the relative
permeability functions. For non-VE models, the user must assign saturation
function tables and/or relative permeability endpoints for each flow direction for
which there is variation.
array dir
value(s)

Definitions: 00
array A valid array name from the following list of arrays

allowed for the directional relative permeability option:
ISAT, ISATI, SWL, SWR, SWRO, SWU, SGL, SGR,
SGRO, SGU, SGRW, KROLW, KRWRO, KRGRO,
KRGRW.
The following are additional arrays for the DUAL

option:ISATF,ISATIF, SWLF, SWRF, SWROF, SWUF,
SGLF, SGRF, SGROF, SGUF, SGRWF, KROLWF,
KRWROF, KRGROF, KRGRWF.
dir The direction to which this array data applies, from the
following list of alpha labels:
X+ Flow from gridblock (i,j,k) to (i+1,j,k)
X- Flow from gridblock (i,j,k) to (i-1,j,k)
Y+ Flow from gridblock (i,j,k) to (i,j+1,k)
Y- Flow from gridblock (i,j,k) to (i,j-1,k)
Z+ Flow from gridblock (i,j,k) to (i,j,k+1)
Z- Flow from gridblock (i,j,k) to (i,j,k-1)
A Flow for all four areal directions.
V Flow for both vertical directions.
amin Minimum value against which data values are checked

(optional).
amax Maximum value against which data values are checked

(optional).
Data values are entered as necessary for the array option being used. 00
Several data conventions should be noted. If array data is entered for the (+)
direction and not for the (-) direction, the (-) direction array will default to the (+)
direction data. If neither (+) direction or (-) direction arrays are entered, both
arrays will default to the array of the same type without direction specification.
For example, if the ISAT X+ array is entered, the values for ISAT X- default to the
ISAT X+ values. However, if the ISAT X+ array is not entered, the default values
for both the ISAT X+ and ISAT X- arrays are the values in the ISAT array. The
saturation table assignment for well calculations defaults, as before, to the ISAT
array. If a directional array is entered for either SWR or SWRO, both arrays must

be entered for that direction. The same requirement holds for the SGR and SGRO
arrays. The areal (A) and vertical (V) direction options cannot be mixed with the
(+) and (-) direction options for the same type of array data.
Examples: ISAT CON

1
ISAT A CON
2
ISAT V CON
3
SWR X+ ZVAR
.15 .2 .18 .12
SWRO X+ ZVAR
.75 .82 .79 .86 00
In the data given above, well relative permeability calculations will use saturation
Table 1, interblock flow calculations in the areal direction will use saturation
Table 2, and interblock flow calculations in the vertical direction will use
saturation Table 3. Water-oil saturation function endpoint values in the x direction
are specified, while the equivalent values for the y direction default from
saturation Table 2, and the z direction default from saturation Table 3.
1.5.3 Corner Point Array Options

Corner point arrays display different relationships from those used to define
"conventional" grids. This includes the fact that, in some cases, node values are
required instead of block center values - each grid dimension is increased by one
for these arrays. In a stacked system, the bottom of one grid block may have the
same corner points as the block below, leading to special requirements for array
input and duplication.
Several special input options are described in the following pages. 00
1.5.3.1 X Direction Variation by Layer (LNXVAR)
array LNXVAR
value(s)
Definition: 00
The LNXVAR option requires NX * NL data values where NL is the number of

layers for which information is specified. The default value is NL=2. For certain
corner point arrays (NX+1) * NL data values are required. LNXVAR varies the
array property in the x direction in the NL layers, while holding it constant in the y

direction. The values of the array in the NL+1, NL+2, ....,NZ layers are copied
from the NL layer. This option is usually used with the XCORN array for the
LINE corner point position option.
Examples:XCORN LNXVAR 1 3 2
1. 1.5 2.0 2.5 2.8
1.1 1.6 2.1 2.6 2.9 00
1.5.3.2 Y Direction Variation by Layer (LNYVAR)
array LNYVAR
value(s)
Definition: 00
The LNYVAR requires NY * NL data values where NL is the number of layers

for which information is input. The default value is NL=2. For certain corner-
point arrays (NY+1) * NL data values are specified. LNYVAR varies the array
property in the y direction in the NL layers, while holding it constant in the x
direction. The values of the array in the NL+1, NL+2, ,...,NZ layers are copied
from the NL layer. This option is usually used with the YCORN array for the
LINE corner point position option.
Examples: YCORN LNYVAR 7 9 2

9. 8.5 8 7.5
8.9 8.4 7.9 7.4 00
1.5.3.3 Z Direction Variation by Layer (LNZVAR)
array LNZVAR
value(s)
Definition: 00
The LNZVAR requires NZ * NL data values where NL is the number of layers for
which information is specified. The default value is NL=2. For certain corner-
point arrays (NZ+1) * NL data values are specified. LNZVAR varies the array
property in the z direction in the NL layers, while holding it constant in the x and
y directions. The values of the array in the NL+1, NL+2, ...., NZ layers are copied
from the NL layer. This option is usually used with the ZLNCOR array for the
LINE corner point option.

Examples: ZLNCOR LNZVAR 10 15.5 2

10 15.3 00
1.5.3.4 Values by Layer (LNVAL)
array LNVAL
value(s)
Definition: 00
LNVAL requires NX*NY*NL data values. For corner-point arrays

(NX+1)*(NY+1)*NL or NX*NY*NL data values are required depending on the
array. Here NL is the number of layers for which information is specified. The
default value is NL=2. Each grid block for the NL layers must be assigned a value.
All rows for the first layer are entered in order of increasing y index, followed by
the remaining layers in order of increasing z index. The values of the array in the
NL+1, NL+2, ....,NZ layers are copied from the NL layer. This option is usually
used with the XCORN, YCORN, ZCORN, or ZLNCOR array for the LINE
corner point option.
Examples: ZLNCOR LNVAL

C The first xy-plane
4*10 11
4*10 11
4*10 11
4*10.1 11.1 00
C The second xy-plane

4*15.3 16.3
4*15.3 16.3
4*15.3 16.3
4*15.416.4 00
1.5.3.5 Replicate Concurrent Point Arrays (COPY)
array COPY
Definition: 00

This option can only be used with the ZBOT, ZBOTNW, ZBOTNE, or ZBOTSW
array. No data input is required. The depths of the corner points in the bottom of
the every block are set to be equal to the depths of the corner points in the top of
the next block below it. It is required that ZCORN, or ZCORNW, ZCORNE,
ZCORSW arrays must have been previously read.
Examples: For example, such input as

ZCORN ZVAR
10 15.3 18
ZBOT COPY 00
is equivalent to 00
ZCORN ZVAR
10 15.3 18
ZBOT ZVAR
15.3 18 00
1.5.4 Array Modification Options

The array modification options in this section can be used to simplify data input
and to change data when making comparison runs. The MOD and VMOD options
can be used with any of the input arrays. With these options, modification data
must immediately follow the array being modified or created. Any number of
MOD and/or VMOD changes can follow that array. (There are also modification
methods which are used to modify only the pore volume and/or transmissibility
just before initialization. These methods are described in Section 6.1.)
The array modification option MODLYR is used to modify the depths in layer 1
of a model. The depths of the remaining layers are then recalculated from the new
depths of the first layer and gridblock thicknesses. This option may only be used
following the use of LAYER or DIP for one of the depth arrays (Section 5.7) and
must immediately follow that array.
The array modification option XREG is used to designate the "extra regions"
option. That is, gridblocks may be assigned to more than one output region. This
option only applies to the IREGION array (Section 5.15) and must immediately
follow the array data, or any MOD/VMOD cards.
A full array is first generated by assigning a value to every gridblock according to

the array input option (Section 1.5.2) chosen. Then, only the specific gridblock
locations described by the MOD/MODLYR/VMOD/XREG modification are
changed within this "full array". The modification described by each data card is
performed at the time that card is read. Therefore, the modifications are order
dependent. The result of multiple modifications is cumulative.

1.5.4.1 Modify by a Constant (MOD)
The MOD option is used to apply a constant arithmetic operation to a portion of

the grid system. It modifies the immediately preceding array data. Only one title
card containing the keyword MOD is required, but the data cards may be repeated
as necessary.
MOD
i2 j2 k2
i1 j1 k1 #v (v2)
NX NY NZ
Definitions:
MOD Indicates that changes are to be made to the preceding

array using the MOD option.
Gridblock locations are defined by indices i, j, k in reference to the (x,y,z) or

(r,θ,z) grid. Modifications are applied to array elements that fall in the portion of
the grid defined by:
i1≤ I ≤ i2
j1≤ J ≤ j2
k1≤ K ≤ k2 ,
where i1, j1, k1 are numeric, i2 is numeric or NX, j2 is numeric or NY,

and k2 is numeric or NZ.
# An operator that describes how the array is to be

modified. Any of the following symbols may be used:
+ add
- subtract
/ divide
* multiply
= equal
GE values smaller than v will be set equal to v2
LE values larger than v will be set equal to v2
There are no spaces between the operator and the value,

#v, except when # is GE or LE.
v The value to be applied to the indicated portion of the

array by using the specified operation.

v2 The step value required for the GE and LE operators.
Example: POR CON

0.20
MOD
2 4 22 1 1 *1.5
2 3 33 1 1 =0.22 00
The gridblock values assigned to porosity are: 00
1.5.4.2 Modify Depth by a Constant (MODLYR)
The MODLYR option is used to apply a constant arithmetic operation to the depth
values of gridblocks in layer 1 of a grid system. The depth array must be the
immediately preceding array, and the array option LAYER or DIP must have been
used. Only one title card containing the keyword MODLYR is required, but the
data cards may be repeated as necessary.
MODLYR
i2 j2
i1 j1 #v
NX NY
Definitions:
MODLYR Indicates that changes are to be made to the layer 1

depths of the preceding depth array.

Gridblock locations are defined for layer 1 by indices i,j in reference to the
(x,y,z) or (r,θ,z) grid, with z=1. Modifications are applied to array elements
that fall in the portion of the grid defined by
i1≤ I ≤ i2
j1≤ J ≤ j2
K=1 ,
where i1, j1 are numeric, i2 is numeric or NX and j2 is numeric or NY.

+ add
- subtract
/ divide
* multiply
= equal

#v.

array by using the specified operation.
Example: DZ CON
10
DEPTH LAYER
3*2000 3*2020
Consider the following MOD and MODLYR cards:
MOD
1 3 1 2 1 1 +4
MODLYR
1 3 1 2 +4

Values of depth assigned to the gridblocks in layer 1 are the same for
either of the 2 methods:
2004 2004 2004
2024 2024 2024
Layer 2 depths, though, are different, depending on

whether MOD or MODLYR is used.
For MOD, the depths are:
2010 2010 2010
2030 2030 2030
For MODLYR the depths are:
2014 2014 2014
2034 2034 2034

1.5.4.3 Replace Selected Values (VMOD)
VMOD modifies the array data immediately preceding the VMOD card with an
individual value for each changed gridblock. A minimum of two cards must
follow the VMOD card. The first card contains the locations describing the
gridblocks to be changed. The second card contains the altered values for those
gridblocks. A new VMOD card and its corresponding data cards are read for each
different portion of the grid system being altered.
VMOD
i2 j2 k2
i1 j1 k1 (op)
NX NY NZ
Values as necessary
Definitions: 00
VMOD Indicates that changes are to be made to the preceding

array by replacing selected values.

(r,θ,z) grid. Modifications are applied to array elements that fall in the portion
of the grid defined by:
i1 ≤ I ≤ i2
j1 ≤ J ≤ j2
k1 ≤ K ≤ k2 ,
where i1, j1, k1 are numeric, i2 is numeric or NX, j2 is numeric or NY,

and k2 is numeric or NZ
op An optional keyword that defines the operation to apply

to the array. Any of the following keywords may be used:
ADD add
SUB subtract
DIV divide
MULT multiply
EQ equal. This is the default.
Enough values must be read to replace all array elements in the designated
portion of the grid. The number of required values is:
(k2 - k1 + 1) * (j2 - j1 + 1) * (i2 - i1 + 1).
The order of replacement is by x direction (r direction) rows. All rows for the
first xy (rθ) plane are entered in order of increasing J index, followed by the
remaining planes in order of increasing K index.

The values can be from INCLUDE files (Section Section 1.5.1.2) that are
either binary or formatted. They can also be from VDB files (Section
Section 1.5.1.4.)
Example 1: POR CON

0.20
VMOD
2 4 2 3 1 1 EQ
0.25 0.26 2*.27
0.29 0.30 00
or POR CON
0.20
1 nx 1 ny 1 nz EQ
VDB study.vdb 00
The final array values are: 00
Example 2: POR CON

0.20
VMOD
2 4 2 2 1 1 EQ
0.25 0.26 0.27
VMOD
1 3 3 3 1 1 EQ
0.28 .29 .40 00

The final array values are: 00
1.5.5 Unformatted (BINARY) Data

Unformatted data files containing only single precision real data values
(REAL*4) can be read using the INCLUDE card (Section 1.5.1.2). The data may
consist of multiple records each of any length. This feature is intended for reading
(very large) array data using the value or vmod options.
Example:
POR VALUE
INCLUDE por.dat
CORP VALUE
INCLUDE corp.dat

1.6 Connection Transmissibility Modification (MULT)

This option modifies the transmissibility multipliers defined using arrays TMX,
TMY, TMZ, etc. This option is also used to assign group of gridblocks to a name
for use by the MULTFL option in VIP-CORE and VIP-EXEC.
The options on the MULT card can be specified in any order. One array name
must be included on each card. Other keywords are optional. If some option is not
included the corresponding value defined in the previous MULT card is used. For
the first MULT card the following default values are used: ALL MINUS MULT.
The cards are order-dependent. The MULT card allows the user to modify
transmissibility multipliers for standard and non-standard connections.
Connections between Block (I, J, K) and Blocks (I-1, J, K), (I+1, J, K), (I, J+1, K),
(I, J-1, K), (I, J, K-1), (I, J, K+1) are defined as standard connections. All other
connections are non-standard, including grid-to-grid connections created by
user-defined LGR data (Section 11.3) and created by DECOMP data
(Section 14.1.2). The transmissibility multipliers for left and right block faces in
three coordinate directions can be specified. If a nonstandard transmissibility
multiplier for a block face is set to zero, then faulted connections are not
automatically generated for this face.A minimum of one card must follow the
MULT card.
The MULT cards must appear after all array input and before any fault data.
⎛ STD ⎞
⎜ ⎟ ⎛ MINUS ⎞
MULT array ⎜ NONSTD ⎟ ⎜ ⎟ (operator)
⎜ ⎟ ⎝ PLUS ⎠
⎝ ALL ⎠
(GRID name)
(FNAME fname)
i1 i2 j1 j2 k1 k2 (val)
(Repeat as necessary)
Definitions: 00
array One of the following: TX, TY, TZ, TR, TTHETA, TXF,
TYF, TZF, TRF or TTHETF. In VIP-THERM, TXT0,
TYT0, TZT0, TRT0, TTT0 are also allowed.
NONSTD Non-standard transmissibility multipliers are to be

modified.
STD Standard transmissibility multipliers are to be modified.
ALL Standard and non-standard transmissibility multipliers

are to be modified.
MINUS Transmissibility multipliers for the minus (from block

center) faces are to be modified.

PLUS Transmissibility multipliers for the plus (from block

center) faces are to be modified.
operator Defines the operation to apply to the transmissibility

multipliers. Any of the following keywords may be used:
ADD - add
SUB - subtract
DIV - divide
MULT - multiply
EQ - equal.
GRID Data applies to a particular grid.
name Name of the grid. Default is ROOT.
FNAME Alpha character keyword for assigning a name to the

group of blocks defined by the following i,j,k range, and
in a direction (X,Y, or Z) consistent with the array
specified on the MULT card. A grid block will be
assigned to a name based on the last definition
encountered. By default no identifying name is assigned.
FNAME is not allowed in combination with the PLUS
option.
fname A character string or number by which the group of grid

blocks is identified. A maximum of 256 characters or
numbers is allowed, otherwise the string is truncated to
the first 256.
i1, i2 Range of grid blocks to be modified in the x (r) direction.
j1, j2 Range of grid blocks to be modified in the y (θ) direction.
k1, k2 Range of grid blocks to be modified in the z direction.
val The value to be applied to the indicated portion of the

multiplier array by using the specified operation. If this
value is not specified, then enough values must be
provided in the following data cards to modify
transmissibility multipliers in all blocks of the designated
portion of the grid. The number of values required is: (k2
- k1 + 1) * (j2 -j1 + 1) * (i2 -i1 + i).
Example: 00
C
C TRANSMISSIBILITY MULTIPLIERS FOR NON-STANDARD
C CONNECTIONS
C
MULT TX PLUS NONSTD MULT

1 1 3 3 1 1 0.5
MULT TX MINUS DIV
2 2 3 3 2 2
2
2 2 4 5 2 2 3
MULT TY
2 2 4 4 1 1 2
C
CTRANSMISSIBILITY MULTIPLIERS FOR STANDARD
CCONNECTIONS
C
MULT TZ STD PLUS MULT
1 10 2 2 2 2
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9 10
MULT TX
2 3 3 3 2 2
2 0.5
MULT TY MINUS ADD
2 2 3 3 2 2 3
MULT TZ DIV
2 2 3 3 2 3
2
4
NOTE: 1. The PLUS and MINUS options can be mixed only if LGR is on, or if
STD and the operators are MULT or DIV.
2. FNAME identifiers can also be assigned using the FAULTS, OVER, and
VOVER keywords. A gridblock will be assigned based on the last
identifier encountered.

1.7 Inter/Intra Region Transmissibility Multiplier (MULTIR)

The order of data must be OVER/VOVER, COARSEN, MULTIR, MULTFL,
REGION/REGSEP/REGDTM, INFLUX/FLUX, when such data are input. 00
The MULTIR keyword is used to modify the transmissibilities between and

within regions. The transmissibility regions are defined using the ITRAN(F) array
data (Section 5.26). 00
MULTIR
itr1 itr2 tmul (X) (Y) (Z) (STD) (NONSTD)
Definition: 00
itr1, itr2 Positive integer values identifying transmissibility

regions. The transmissibility regions are defined using
the ITRAN and ITRANF arrays (Section 5.26). When
itr1 and itr2 are different, the transmissibilities
between these regions are multiplied by tmul wherever
they are in contact. When itr1 and itr2 are equal the
transmissibilities within the region are multiplied by
tmul.
tmul Transmissibility multiplier between regions itr1 and itr2

wherever they are in contact.
XYZ Directions for applying the multiplier. The letters are

order independent and spaces are optional. Default
XYZ. Specifying all directions also multiplies
connections that do not have a direction associated
with them. Connections defined using FTRANS do
not have a direction.
STD Apply multiplier to the standard connections which

include grid to grid connections for local grid
refinement.
NONSTD Apply multiplier to non-standard connections (faults).
NOTE: 1. When neither STD or NONSTD are specified then both standard and
non-standard connections are multiplied.
2. The multipliers are applied after the FTRANS, OVER, and COARSEN
data, and are cumulative
3. The matrix to fracture exchange transmissibility connections of the dual

porosity option are not effected by MULTIR.

1.8 Named Fault/Region Transmissibility Multiplier (MULTFL)

REGION/REGSEP/REGDTM, INFLUX/FLUX, when such data are input. 00
The MULTFL keyword is used to modify the transmissibilities between grid

blocks that have been assigned a name. Grid blocks can be assigned a name using
the FNAME parameter on the MULT (Section 1.6), FAULTS (Section 2.2.9.2),
OVER (Section 7.2) and VOVER (Section 7.4) options. Both standard and non-
standard transmissibility connections if any are multiplied. 00
The MULTFL keyword is also used to modify the transmissibility connections

that are defined and named with the FTRANS option (Section 6.5.2). Only the
non-standard transmissibility connections defined with the FTRANS data will be
effected, while any corresponding standard connections will be left unaltered. 00
Note: All the transmissibility multipliers are cumulative. They are applied on top
of any previously defined using other options. 00
MULTFL fname tmul

Definition: 00
MULTFL Alpha character keyword.
fname Name or number identifying the fault or group of grid

block to be operated upon.
tmul Transmissibility multiplier.


Chapter
2
Initialization Data
00000
2.1 Introduction
Initialization data include all data defined at time zero in a simulation. These
include: 00
■ title cards
■ fluid initialization controls
■ initialization output controls
■ the description of the reservoir
■ the reservoir rock
■ fluid properties.
The data are input after the INIT card and are terminated by the END card. The
data are checked for consistency as they are read. If no errors occur, the data are
then processed. If no initialization errors are generated, the program initializes and
writes an initialization restart file. When the program initializes, the average
pressure, fluids in place, saturation pressure, oil, water, and gas saturation, and oil
and gas composition arrays are calculated. 00
All of the data on each card are free field, following the description given in
Section 1.5. However, the order of data cards is important. The first card in the
initialization data must be the INIT card. 00
The data groups must be arranged as shown in Figure 2-1. Some restrictions on
the order of data cards within each data group may apply. These restrictions are
described in subsequent sections of this chapter. 00
In all of the data descriptions that follow, parentheses are used to indicate optional
items of data. Parentheses are never included in the actual data stream. Items of
data that are aligned vertically in the description of a single data card indicate a
choice; these items are mutually exclusive. 00
R5000.0.1 Initialization Data 2-75

00
Figure 2-1: Order Of Initialization Data
2-76 Initialization Data R5000.0.1

2.2 Initialization Utility Data

The following cards can be used to control the program. Of these, only the DATE
card, a grid system card (NX or NR), and a physical property constants card
(DWB) are mandatory for every run. The other cards should be used when
appropriate. Within this data group the order of the utility data cards is immaterial.00
2.2.1 General
2.2.1.1 Initialization (INIT)
INIT
The first card in the initialization data contains only the keyword INIT.
Initialization data are terminated by the appearance of an END card. 00
Example: 00
INIT
TITLE1
HISTORY MATCH NO FAULTS ZEROED OUT
TITLE2
SAG12 WITH RELICT OIL
DATE 1 6 1977 00
2.2.1.2 Change Default Dimensions (DIM)
The DIM card allows the user to change the default dimensions on any
initialization run. Multiple sets of DIM cards may be entered, one after the other. 00
DIM param1 param2 . . . paramn (card 1)

size1 size2 . . . sizen (card 2)
Definitions: 00
param Alpha labels of those dimension parameters being

defined:
NBATMX Maximum number of user-defined separator batteries.

(NBATMX ≥ NSTGMX) Default is 10.
NCBLKS Maximum number of coarse gridblock faces for all flux

regions. Default is 100.

NCDPMX Maximum number of depth values for composition vs.

depth. Default is 15.
NDHCMX Maximum number of lines in the hydrocarbon pore

volume vs. depth table. Default is 100.
NEIPMX Maximum number of pressure entries in a single EOS

interpolation table. Default is 50.
NEQLMX Maximum number of equilibrium regions. Default is 15.
NFBLKS Maximum number of fine gridblock faces for all flux

regions. Default is 200.
NFLMAX Maximum number of tracked hydrocarbon types. Default

is 10.
NFNAME Maximum number of named face sets. Default is 100.
NFWMAX Maximum number of tracked water types. Default is 6.
NFXREG Number of distinct boundary flux regions. Default is 2.
NHLMAX Maximum number of gridblock faces for VIP-THERM

heat loss calculation. Default is 1000.
NINFBL Maximum number of gridblocks in all the influx regions

combined. Default is 600.
NINFMX Maximum number of distinct influx regions. Default is 5.
NINFTD Maximum number of table entries in Carter-Tracy TD-

PD table. Default is 100.
NLKFLT Maximum number of conductive faults. Default is 0.
NLKMAX Maximum number of faulted gridblocks in a conductive

fault. Default is 200.
NNTMAX Maximum number of total fault connections. Default is

5000.
NOBMAX Maximum number of over/underburden layers for VIP-

THERM heat loss calculations. Default is 10.
NPCMP Maximum number of interpolation points in gas plant

table lookup. Default is 20.
NPINCM Maximum number of points in each undersaturated

curve. Default is 10.

NPMAX Number of pressure entries in a single reconstructed PVT

table. Default is 50, normally do not change.
NPMXCT Number of pressure entries in a single reconstructed

compaction table. Default is 50.
NPSATM Maximum number of undersaturated curves (oil and gas).

Default is 6.
NOTE: If data is read for oil only or gas only, the minimum required is 2 curves. If
data is read for both oil and gas, the minimum required is 4 curves.
NREGMX Maximum number of output regions. Default is 40.
NSALMX Maximum number of salinities in any water PVT table.

Default is 30.
NSATMX Maximum number of unique saturation regions.
NSATNT Maximum number of entries in each saturation table

input. Default is 30.
NSGDIM Number of SG entries in a single reconstructed gas

saturation table. Default is 51, normally do not change.
NSIGMX Maximum number of pressure values in surface tension

ratio versus pressure table (DUAL, PSEUDO option).
Default is 20.
NSMTAB Maximum number of saturation entries in the pseudo

capillary pressure tables. (DUAL, PSEUDO option.)
Default is 10.
NSTGMX Maximum number of stages per battery. (NBATMX ≥

NSTGMX) Default is 5.
NSWDIM Number of SW entries in a single reconstructed water

saturation table. Default is 51, normally do not change.
NTAB Maximum number of unique PVT regions. Default is 4.
NTABCM Maximum number of compaction regions. Default is 3.
NTABW Maximum number of unique water PVT regions.
NTMAX Maximum number of temperature entries in VIP-

THERM PVT tables. Default is 30.
NVISMX Maximum number of entries in the VIP-THERM

VISOIL or VISGAS tables. Default is 15.

NWCDIM Number of water saturation entries in a single

reconstructed water-induced rock compaction table.
Default is 50.
NWCMAX Maximum number of water-induced rock compaction

tables.
NWCSWM Maximum number of initial water saturations, SWINIT,

in any water-induced rock compaction table, WIRCT.
NXMAX Number of composition entries in a single reconstructed

PVT table. Default is 40, normally do not change.
size The value or size of the corresponding parameter.
NOTE: NBMAX (maximum number of gridblocks) is calculated internally based

on the values entered on the grid system options card (Section 2.2.2.6).
Ž Cartesian Grid System

NBMAX = NX * NY * NZ
Ž Corner-Point Cartesian Grid System

NBMAX = (NX+1) * (NY+1) * (NZ+1).
Ž Cylindrical Grid System

NBMAX = NR * NTHETA * NZ
Ž Dual Porosity/Permeability
NBMAX = NBMAX * 2
Example: 00
To increase the number of reporting regions to 80.

INIT
DIM NREGMX
80 00
2.2.1.3 Descriptive Run Information (TITLEn)
TITLE cards contain descriptive information about the run that will be printed in
the output title blocks. A maximum of three titles can be read, each on a separate
card following its corresponding alpha label card (TITLE1, TITLE2, or TITLE3).
Title cards defined during initialization are used throughout the simulation unless
redefined in a restart run (see Section 2.1 of the Simulation Modules Manual).
Title cards are not required. Any or all of the three title cards contained on a restart
record can be overwritten by entering new title cards. 00
TITLE1
title
TITLE2

title
TITLE3
title
Definition: 00
title The descriptive information to be printed in the output

title blocks. Centering the title between columns 1 and 80
centers the title in the output.
2.2.1.4 Date (DATE)
The initialization date is input using a DATE card. Time is initialized to zero at
this date. VIP-CORE accounts for leap years, and provides for proper operation
into the 21st century. 00
DATE day mo yr
Definitions: 00
day Day of the month
mo Month of the year, between 1 and 12
yr Year in full (e.g., 1989), or in 2-digit form (e.g., 89)
If the 2-digit form is used, it will be converted to the full

4-digit form using the pivot-year defined by the
LGC_Y2K_PIVOT_YEAR environment variable.
2.2.1.5 End-of-File Marker (END)
This primary keyword appears in both the Initialization and Simulation Modules 00
END
The END card is required and must be the last card in the data stream; it acts as an
end-of-file marker. 00
2.2.2 Results File Control
2.2.2.1 Grid Data Written for Post-Processing (MAP)
The MAP card causes initialization arrays to be written to the vdb file or to the
map file. 00

One of the map cards MAP, MAPX, MAPY, or MAPZ must be entered if
recurrent arrays are to be mapped from the simulation module. 00
MAP (FORM) (NONE) (ADD) (ALL) (array1 ... arrayk)
Definition: 00
FORM This parameter, applicable only when data is written to

the map file, causes formatted records to be written to
the map file. It is required for files that are going to be
disposed to another computer, when binary compatibility
cannot be guaranteed. If the FORM parameter is omitted
and the map file is used, binary records will be written.
NONE Only the pore volume and corner-point arrays are to be

mapped.
ADD Map the default arrays as well as the listed arrays.
ALL Map all appropriate arrays.
array Alpha label of those arrays to be mapped (an array will

be mapped only if it is appropriate with respect to the
options in the model):
DX X-direction gridblock length.
DY Y-direction gridblock length.
DZ Z-direction gridblock length.
DEP Depth to top of gridblock.
MDEP Depth to center of gridblock.
DR Radial-direction gridblock length.
NETG Net-to-gross ratio.
DZN Net thickness.
POR Porosity.
KX X-direction permeability.
KY Y-direction permeability.
KZ Z-direction permeability.
TXR Reference x-direction transmissibility.

TYR Reference y-direction transmissibility.
TZR Reference z-direction transmissibility.
TDLR Reference l-diagonal transmissibility.
TDRR Reference r-diagonal transmissibility.
ISAT Primary saturation table.
IPVT Fluid PVT property table.
IPVTW Water property table.
IEQU Equilibrium region.
IREG Summary region.
ICMT Compaction region.
IWIRC Water-induced compaction region.
IFID Named fault identifier.
ITRAN Transmissibility region identifier.
P Initial pressure.
PSAT Initial saturation pressure.
PDAT Initial datum pressure.
SG Initial gas saturation.
SO Initial oil saturation.
SW Initial water saturation.
SOM Initial mobile oil saturation.
SWM Initial mobile water saturation.
SAL Water salinity. Available only when the

PVTWSAL tables are entered.
ENDPTS Relative permeability endpoints,
SWL, SWR, SWRO, SWU, SGL, SGR,
SGRO, SGU, SGRW, KRWRG,
KRGRW, KROLW, KRWRO, KRGRO,
when appropriate.

TOP Calculated depth-corner point geometry.
PV Pore volume.
PVR Reference pore volume.
TX X-direction transmissibility.
TY Y-direction transmissibility.
TZ Z-direction transmissibility.
TDL L-diagonal transmissibility.
TDR R-diagonal transmissibility.
TEXR Reference matrix/fracture

transmissibility.
TEX Matrix/fracture exchange

transmissibility.
API API gravity.
KH Permeability thickness.
GOC Depth of gas-oil contact.
WOC Depth of water-oil contact.
FVWO Water-oil vertical equilibrium.
FVGO Gas-oil vertical equilibrium.
TMX X-direction transmissibility multiplier.
TMY Y-direction transmissibility multiplier.
TMZ Z-direction transmissibility multiplier.
TMDL L-diagonal transmissibility multiplier.
TMDR R-diagonal transmissibility multiplier.
WTRACK Saturation of tracked water type.
TNSC Non-standard connection

transmissibility.
PCSW Water-oil capillary pressure adjustment.
PCSG Gas-oil capillary pressure adjustment.

ICOARS Coarsen control integer.
MULTBV Bulk volume multiplier.
KWX X-direction well PI upscaled

permeability.
KWY Y-direction well PI upscaled

permeability.
KWZ Z-direction well PI upscaled

permeability.
CR Elastic rock compressibility.
CRD Dilitant rock compressibility.
CRR Recompactive rock compressibility.
PD Dilation pressure.
PR Recompaction pressure.
FR Permanent fraction of dilation.
POMX Maximum dilitant porosity.
POMN Minimum recompactive porosity.
KMLX X-direction permeability factor.
KMLY Y-direction permeability factor.
KMLZ Z-direction permeability factor.
KMDL L-diagonal permeability factor.
KMDR R-diagonal permeability factor.
DXC Calculated x-direction gridblock length.
DYC Calculated y-direction gridblock length.
DZC Calculated z-direction gridblock length.
DRS Incremental gridblock radii.
MLTX X-direction transmissibility multiplier

after over/vover.
MLTY Y-direction transmissibility multiplier

after over/vover.

MLTZ Z-direction transmissibility multiplier

after over/vover.
The following only apply to VIP-THERM:
CPR0 Reference rock heat capacity.
KTX0 Reference x-direction thermal

conductivity.
KTY0 Reference y-direction thermal

conductivity.
KTZ0 Reference z-direction thermal

conductivity.
TXT0 Reference x-direction thermal

transmissibility.
TYT0 Reference y-direction thermal

transmissibility.
TZT0 Reference z-direction thermal

transmissibility.
ICPR Rock heat capacity table region.
YW Mole fraction H2O - vapor phase.
T Temperature.
TXT X-direction thermal transmissibility.
TYT Y-direction thermal transmissibility.
TZT Z-direction thermal transmissibility.
TTMX X-direction thermal transmissibility

multiplier.
TTMY Y-direction thermal transmissibility

multiplier.
TTMZ Z-direction thermal transmissibility

multiplier.
MTXT X-direction thermal transmissibility

multiplier after over/vover.
MTYT Y-direction thermal transmissibility


MTZT Z-direction thermal transmissibility

NOTE: 1. The pore volume array and the corner-point array are always mapped.
2. If no array names are entered on the MAP card (i.e, MAP or MAP
FORM is input), the three saturation arrays and the x-direction, y-
direction, and z-direction transmissibilty arrays will by default be
mapped.
3. Any other array must be entered on the MAP card in order to be

mapped. Including the keyword ADD causes the 6 default arrays to
be mapped as well as the explicitly entered arrays.
4. The FORM parameter, if included on any of the MAP, MAPX,

MAPY, or MAPZ cards will apply to the writing of all data to the map
file.
5. Writing map arrays to the vdb file is the default. The NOVDB card
(Section 2.2.2.4) must be entered to write arrays to the map file.
6. The MAP and MAPOLD keywords may not be used simultaneously.

2.2.2.2 Mole Fraction Data Written for Post-Processing (MAPX, MAPY,

MAPZ)
The MAPX, MAPY, and MAPZ cards cause the appropriate initialization mole
fraction arrays to be written to the vdb file or to the map file. 00
One of the map cards MAP, MAPX, MAPY, or MAPZ must be entered if
recurrent arrays are to be mapped from the simulation module. 00
outf (FORM) (cmpid1 cmpid2 ... cmpidk)
outf can be one of the following: 00
MAPX, MAPY, MAPZ 00
Definitions: 00
MAPX Map liquid mole fractions.
MAPY Map vapor mole fractions.
MAPZ Map overall hydrocarbon mole fractions.
FORM This parameter, applicable only when data is written to

the map file, causes formatted records to be written to
the map file. If it is omitted and the map file is used,
binary records will be written.
cmpid Alpha label identifying a component whose mole

fractions will be mapped. Only those components named
will be mapped.
NOTE: 1. If the user wishes to map arrays of mole fractions, the components to
be mapped must be explicitly selected on one of the above cards.
2. The FORM parameter, if included on any of the MAP, MAPX,

MAPY, or MAPZ cards, will apply to the writing of all data to the
map file.
3. Writing map arrays to the vdb file is the default. The NOVDB card
(Section 2.2.2.4) must be entered to write arrays to the map file.

2.2.2.3 Full Size Arrays to VDB File (NOVDBPACK)
The NOVDBPACK card is used to cause full size gridblock arrays to be written to
the vdb file in both VIP-CORE and the simulator module. The default is to
write array data for only the active gridblocks. 00
NOVDBPACK
2.2.2.4 Map File Instead of VDB File (NOVDB) (VIP-COMP and VIP-
ENCORE)
The NOVDB card is used to cause, in both VIP-CORE and the simulation
module, map arrays to be written to the map file rather than the vdb file. Writing
to the vdb file is the default. 00
NOVDB
2.2.2.5 VDB File (VDB) (VIP-COMP and VIP-ENCORE)
The VDB card is used to cause map arrays to be written to the vdb file. It may
also be used to request the simultaneous writing of map arrays to the map file.
This will apply in VIP-CORE and in the simulation module, unless changed on a
VDB card in the Utility Data of the simulation module. 00
VDB (PLUS MAP)
Definitions: 00
PLUS MAP In VIP-CORE and at the WMAP times in the simulation

module, write the map arrays to both the vdb file and the
map file.
2.2.2.6 Grid Data Written for Post-Processing to SIMOUT Map File

(MAPOLD)
MAPOLD (FORM) (array1 . . .)
Arrays 00
P PSAT SG SW SO PV Xi Yi Zi DENO DENG VISO VISG IFT GOR WCUT

SOM SWM PDAT API TX TY TZ TEX TR TTHETA Wi KRO KRG KRW 00

T TXT TYT TZT TRT TTT DENW VISW YW HLOS CHLS SOR HOIL HGAS
HWAT αFβγ (VIP-THERM only) 00
TDL TDR PVML TXML TYML TZML TRML TTML (VIP-THERM executable
only) 00
Definitions: 00
FORM This parameter causes formatted records to be written to

the SIMOUT map file. It is required for files that are
going to be disposed to another computer, when binary
compatibility cannot be guaranteed. If the FORM
parameter is omitted, binary records will be written to the
map file.
P Pressure.
PSAT Saturation pressure.
SG Gas saturation.
SW Water saturation.
SO Oil saturation.
PV Pore volume including compaction effects.
TX X direction transmissibility including compaction effects.
TY Y direction transmissibility including compaction effects.
TZ Z direction transmissibility including compaction effects.
TR R direction transmissibility including compaction effects.
TTHETA Angular direction transmissibility including compaction

effects.
Xi Liquid phase composition of component i; e.g., X2

indicates component 2 in the liquid phase.
Yi Vapor phase composition of component i; e.g., Y5

indicates component 5 in the vapor phase.
Zi Overall hydrocarbon phase composition of component i;

e.g., Z7 indicates the overall hydrocarbon mole fraction
of component 7.
DENO Oil density.
DENG Gas density.

VISO Oil viscosity.
VISG Gas viscosity.
IFT Interfacial tension (only if the IFT option is in use).
GOR Gas-oil ratio.
WCUT Water-cut.
SOM Normalized mobile oil saturation.
SWM Normalized mobile water saturation.
PDAT Datum pressure.
KRO Relative permeability of the oil phase. Keywords KOX+,

KOX-, KOY+, KOY-, KOZ+, and KOZ- can be used to
map directional relative permeabilities in X+, X-, Y+,
Y-, Z+, and Z- directions, respectively.
KRG Relative permeability of the gas phase. Keywords

KGX+, KGX-, KGY+, KGY-, KGZ+, and KGZ- can be
used to map directional relative permeabilities in X+, X-,
Y+, Y-, Z+, and Z- directions, respectively.
KRW Relative permeability of the water phase. Keywords

KWX+, KWX-, KWY+, KWY-, KWZ+, and KWZ- can
be used to map directional relative permeabilities in X+,
X-, Y+, Y-, Z+, and Z- directions, respectively.
API API gravity of the liquid phase, available only if the PVT
interpolation option is in use.
TEX Matrix-fracture exchange transmissibility, available only

if the DUAL option is in use.
Wi Saturation of tracked water type i, available only if the

water tracking option is in use.
The following arrays are available only for the polymer injection option (VIP-
POLYMER): 00
CPW Aqueous phase polymer concentration.
RK Permeability reduction factor.
VW0 Aqueous phase viscosity (at GAMMA = 0).
CPT Total polymer concentration.
CPAD Absorbed polymer concentration.

GAMX X direction shear rate.
GAMY Y direction shear rate.
GAMZ Z direction shear rate.
VWX Aqueous phase viscosity (at GAMMA = GAMX).
VWY Aqueous phase viscosity (at GAMMA = GAMY).
VWZ Aqueous phase viscosity (at GAMMA = GAMZ).
NAT Total sodium concentration.
CAT Total calcium concentration.
CLT Total chlorine concentration.
NAW Aqueous phase sodium concentration.
CAW Aqueous phase calcium concentration.
CLW Aqueous phase chlorine concentration.
NAAD Absorbed sodium concentration.
CAAD Absorbed calcium concentration.
TDL Diagonal -x, +y direction transmissibility including

compaction effects, available only with NINEPT option.
TDR Diagonal +x, +y direction transmissibility including

compaction effects, available only with NINEPT options.
PVML Ratio of pore volume to reference value.
TXML Ratio of x-direction transmissibility, including

compaction, to reference value.
TYML Ratio of y-direction transmissibility, including

TZML Ratio of z-direction transmissibility,including

TRML Ratio of r-direction transmissibility,including

TTML Ratio of theta-direction transmissibility,including

The following arrays are available only in the thermal option (VIP-THERM): 00

T Temperature.
TXT X-direction thermal transmissibility.
TYT Y-direction thermal transmissibility.
TZT Z-direction thermal transmissibility.
TRT R-direction thermal transmissibility.
TTT Theta-direction thermal transmissibility.
DENW Liquid water phase density.
VISW Liquid water phase viscosity.
YW Mole Fraction water in vapor phase.
HLOS Heat loss rate.
CHLS Cumulative heat loss.
SOR Steam-oil ratio.
HOIL Oil phase enthalpy.
HGAS Vapor phase enthalpy.
HWAT Liquid water phase enthalpy.
αFβγ Flow rate arrays. These arrays can be mapped only if a

FLOWS card (Section 2.2.19.3) is input. α, β, and γ
are unit, phase, and direction symbols which are speci-
fied as follows:
α =V, N, or M for volumetric, molar or mass flow
rates.
β = O, G, or for oil, gas, or water phase.
W
γ = X(R) flow in from i-1 for cartesian (radial)
grid.
γ = Y(T) flow in from j-1 for cartesian (radial)
grid.
γ=Z flow in from k-1.
γ=E flow in from i+1, j-1 for cartesian
grids with 9-point.
γ=W flow in from i-1, j-1, for cartesian
grids with 9-point.

NOTE: The MAPOLD card is needed if records of grid data, in the SIMOUT
form, are to be written during the simulation for subsequent post-
processing. There are two formats. If none of the array names are
specified, all recurrent output arrays are written to the map file at
WMAPOLD frequency (see Simulation Module). If the array names are
specified, only those arrays are written to the map file.
This data is written to FORTRAN Unit 9.
The MAP and MAPOLD keywords may not be used simultaneously.
For additional information, see the SIMOUT Map file format description
in the SIMULATION MODULE, OUTPUT CONTROL section.
Example: 00
MAPOLD FORM P SG SW SO 00
2.2.3 Grid System Options

VIP-CORE offers two choices of reservoir geometry: Cartesian and cylindrical.
The Cartesian (rectangular) option is not limited to uniform, orthogonal grids; it is
general enough to approximate curvilinear grids (Reference 4). Trapezoidal
gridblock shapes also are feasible. The corner-point option facilitates the use of
such grids. The cylindrical grid commonly is referred to as "radial." It is most
often used for single-well studies. A special variation of the radial grid system,
WBSIM, is available for single-well gridded wellbore simulation. 00
2.2.3.1 Rectangular (Cartesian) Grid System (NX, NY, NZ, NCOMP)
For VIP-COMP or VIP-ENCORE, 00
NX NY NZ NCOMP
nx ny nz nc
For VIP-THERM, 00
NX NY NZ NCOMP NCV
nx ny nz nc ncv
Definitions: 00
The values on both cards must appear in the order shown. 00
nx Number of gridblocks in the x direction.

ny Number of gridblocks in the y direction. If nx = 1, then

ny cannot be > 1.
nz Number of gridblocks in the z direction.
nc Number of components in the hydrocarbon system.
ncv Number of volatile or distillable components in the

hydrocarbon system. The first ncv components are
volatile (VIP-THERM only).
NOTE: For the PVT interpolation option (Section 2.2.11.4) the number of
components must be set equal to 3.
Example: 00
NX NY NZ NCOMP
100 1 25 2 00
2.2.3.2 Radial (Cylindrical) Grid System (NR, NTHETA, NZ, RI, NCOMP)
For VIP-COMP or VIP-ENCORE, 00
NR NTHETA NZ RI NCOMP
nr ntheta nz ri nc
For VIP-THERM, 00
NR NTHETA NZ RI NCOMP NCV

nr ntheta nz ri nc ncv
Definitions: 00
The values on both cards must appear in the order shown. 00
nr Number of gridblocks in the r direction.
ntheta Number of gridblocks in the theta direction. If nr = 1,

then ntheta cannot be > 1.
nz Number of gridblocks in the z direction.
ri Inner radius, ft (m). This is the distance from the origin to

the inner edge of the first gridblock. For a single well
study, ri is usually the wellbore radius, where ri must be
greater than zero, except for the special WBSIM option
discussed below.

nc Number of components in the hydrocarbon system.
ncv Number of volatile or distallable, components in the

hydrocarbon sytem. The first ncv components are
volatile (VIP-THERM only).
NOTE: 1. For the PVT interpolation option (Section 2.2.11.4) the number of
components must be set equal to 3.
2. For the VIP-THERM dead oil option, nc must be set to 1 and ncv
must be set to 0.
Example: 00
NR NTHETA NZ RI NCOMP
37 4 3 .5 2 00

2.2.3.3 Single-Well Gridded Wellbore Simulation (WBSIM) (Not available in

VIP-THERM)
WBSIM
This option is used to invoke a special radial initialization for gridded wellbore
simulation in which the first ring of gridblocks is used to model the wellbore. The
equations for wellbore flow are transformed into a form similar to Darcy flow, and
then applied to the vertical flow within the first ring of the grid system. Numerous
correlations are available for vertical or inclined pipe flow, including Hagedorn
and Brown, Dunns and Ross, Beggs and Brill, Aziz and Govier, Orkiszewski, and
Griffith, Lau, Hon, and Pearson. In these correlations, flow conditions are divided
into patterns or flow regimes. Using the user-specified flow correlation and the
computed flow regime at each interval, the simulator transforms the wellbore flow
equations into Darcy-type vertical flow coefficients for each interval at the start of
each timestep.
When the key word WBSIM is specified, the first column of gridblocks is
initialized to a porosity of 1.0 and the connate water saturation is set to 0.0, and it
is sealed off from the reservoir. All other input data for this first column
(wellbore) except for depth and gross thickness will not be used, except if a zero
vertical permeability is specified for any gridblock in the first column, the
wellbore will be sealed at that point.
The RI input variable, which is normally the wellbore radius, should be set to 0.0
for the case of simulating the wellbore as the first column of gridblocks. If the first
column of gridblocks is to be used for the annulus, then RI should be the outside
diameter of the tubing, and the first radius should be the inside diameter of the
casing.
The first radius specified will be the radius of the wellbore, followed by the
normal progression of radii to define the areal extent of the drainage area for the
well.
The non-productive zones between producing horizons must be defined as several

additional layers with zero porosities in order to define a continuous wellbore. At
least one additional layer above the top producing horizon should be specified in
order to generate a velocity calculation including the flow from the top horizon. It
is recommended at this time to grid the wellbore all the way to the surface [define
additional zero porosity layers all the way up to the surface] in order to avoid
problems encountered with the use of BHPTAB tables when the required
bottomhole pressure increases as rate declines. [The normal concept of finding the
intersection of the inflow performance curve and the interpolated BHPTAB curve
is no longer valid, since the inflow performance curve starts at BHP rather than
gridblock reservoir pressure.]

A separate equilibrium region should be defined for the wellbore [first column of
gridblocks] using the PVT data from the initially producing horizon with the
highest common datum pressure, but lowering the water level to below the
deepest productive horizon. This ensures that the wellbore is in pressure
equilibrium with and contains the fluid from the initial producing horizon.
2.2.3.4 Automatic Grid Setup for Pattern Elements (VIP-THERM Only)
NOTE: This option is compatible only with non-corner point rectangular grids.
Data given in this section must immediately follow that given in Sections
2.2.3.1 or 2.2.3.2.
Automatic grid setup is available for 1/8 and 1/4 elements of symmetry of 5- and
9-spot patterns and 1/12 and 1/6 elements of symmetry of 7-spot patterns. Both
diagonal and parallel grids are available for the 5- and 9-spot patterns. Use of the
nine-point finite difference option (NINEPT card, Section 2.2.6.5) is
recommended to reduce grid orientation effects. Patterns are allowed to be non-
square (rectangular) only for 1/8 or 1/4 elements of 5- or 9-spot patterns with
parallel grids. 00
Adjustments to transmissibilities, pore volumes, etc., to account for partial grid

blocks and to well permeabilities to account for partial wells are made
automatically. Extensive well data (such as maximum rates) are specified on a full
well basis. All total field and regional extensive output data (production, injection,
fluids in place, etc.) are scaled to (an optional multiple of) the full pattern value.
All extensive output data for individual wells are scaled to the full well value. See
“1/8 of 5- or 9-Spot Pattern” on page 2-101 through “1/6 of 7-Spot Pattern” on
page 2-106 describe the grid and required data for each pattern element option. 00
For homogeneous reservoirs, simulation of elements of symmetry in pattern

recovery options is an effective means of significantly reducing computer time
and storage requirements for predicting field performance (over full field
simulation). Differences between scaled-up pattern element simulation results and
full field simulation results will exist due to differences in boundary conditions
(The pattern element results are valid for wells in interior patterns since all lateral

boundaries are assumed to be planes of symmetry.) This option is not compatible

with Faults. 00
Figure 2-2: Nine Spot Pattern
A single nine-spot pattern is shown in Figure 2-2. Points B and D represent

standard locations of production wells and Point A is the standard injection well
location. Wells may be defined in any gridblock in the pattern element grid. In this
case, points A, B, and D serve only to define the pattern. The triangle drawn
between points A, B, and D is a one eighth element of symmetry of the nine-spot
pattern. 00
00
Figure 2-3: Diagonal Grid for 1/8 Nine-Spot
A diagonal grid for the 1/8 element of symmetry is shown in Figure 2-3. This grid

is called diagonal because the flow from the injector to the corner producer is in
the diagonal grid direction. The grid is drawn such that the standard well locations
are in the center of their respective gridblocks and such that the lines of symmetry
(lines, AB, AD and BD) cut the gridblocks on the boundary by exactly half. This
introduces restrictions upon the grid dimensions. In this case NX must equal NY,
and for all types of pattern elements DX and DY must be constant. 00
In order to properly set up the simulation grid for the pattern element shown in
Figure 2-3, the following must be provided for and are accomplished
automatically with this option: 00
■ scaling of thermal and convective transmissibilities, pore volumes, total heat

capacities, and heat loss data for partial gridblocks
■ scaling of well permeabilities for partial wells
■ specification of inactive cells
■ calculation of DX, DY arrays
In addition, all total field, well management level, and regional extensive output
data (production, injection, fluids in place, etc.) are scaled to (an optional multiple
of) the full pattern value. All extensive output data for individual wells are scaled
to the full well value. 00
The following sections describe the generated grid, required data, and restrictions
for each pattern element option. 00

1/8 of 5- or 9-Spot Pattern 00
A 5-spot pattern is the same as the 9-spot pattern shown in Figure 2-2 except that
no wells exist at points B. For the diagonal grid only, the well spacing is allowed
to differ in the xp and yp pattern coordinate directions. A well spacing ratio (wsr)
is defined as L/W in Figure 2-2. 00
Figure 2-4: Parallel Grid for 1/8 of 5- or 9-Spot
The diagonal grid for 1/8 of a 5- or 9-spot pattern is shown in Figure 2-3. The
parallel grid is shown in Figure 2-4. The following data must immediately follow
the grid dimension data in Section 2.2.3.1 or 2.2.3.2. 00
5
PATTERN (np) EIGHTH (DIAGONAL) area (wsr)
9
Definitions: 00
np Number of cell patterns contained in the reservoir.

Optional, default is 1.
5,9 Designates 5-spot or 9-spot.
DIAGONAL Alpha label indicating the diagonal grid is to be used.

Optional, default is parallel.
area Single full pattern area, acres (m2).
wsr Well spacing ratio, equal to L/W in Figure 2-2. Optional

for parallel grid only. Default is 1.

Restrictions: 00
Diagonal Grid
NX = NY ≥ 2
Parallel Grid
NX = 2 * NY - 1 ≥ 3
wsr may not be specified
NOTE: 1. All field and regional extensive output data are scaled to values for
np full patterns.
2. All extensive well data, such as maximum rates, are input on a full-
well basis.
3. All extensive output data for individual wells are scaled to full well
values.
4. DX and DY arrays are calculated automatically and cannot be

specified in the ARRAY data.
1/4 of 5- or 9-Spot Pattern

00
Figure 2-5: Diagonal Grid for 1/4 of 5- or 9-Spot

00
Figure 2-6: Parallel Grid for 1/4 of 5- or 9-Spot
The diagonal grid for 1/4 of a 5- or 9-spot pattern is shown in Figure 2-5. The
parallel grid is shown in Figure 2-6. For the diagonal grid only, well spacing is
allowed to differ in the xp and yp pattern coordinate directions. The following data
must immediately follow the grid dimension data given in Section 2.2.3.1 or
2.2.3.2. 00
5
PATTERN (np) FOURTH (DIAGONAL) area (wsr)
9
Definitions: 00
np Number of full patterns contained in the reservoir.

5,9 Designates 5-spot or 9-spot.
DIAGONAL Alpha label indicating the diagonal grid is to be used.

Optional, default is parallel.
wsr Well spacing ratio, equal to L/W in Figure 2-2. Optional

for parallel grid only. Default is 1.

Restrictions: 00
Diagonal Grid
NX = NY ≥ 2
Parallel Grid
NX = NY = odd number ≥ 3
wsr may not be specified
NOTE: 1. All field and regional extensive output data are scaled to values for
np full patterns.
well basis.
values.

1/12 of 7-Spot Pattern 00
The 7-spot pattern is in the shape of a regular hexagon and is shown in Figure 2-7.
Only one type of grid is available for 1/12 of a 7-spot pattern. This grid is parallel
with respect to the pattern coordinate directions but diagonal with respect to inter-
well flow, and is shown in Figure 2-8. 00
Figure 2-7: 7-Spot Pattern

00
Figure 2-8: Grid for 1/12 of 7-spot
The following data must immediately follow the grid dimension data given in
Section 2.2.3.1 or 2.2.3.2. 00
PATTERN (np) TWELFTH 7 area
Definitions: 00

7 Designates 7-spot.
Restrictions:
NX = NY ≥ 2 00

NOTE: 1. All field and regional extensive output data are scaled to values for np
full patterns.
well basis.
values.

1/6 of 7-Spot Pattern 00
For 1/6 of a 7-spot pattern, the parallel and diagonal grids are identical since the
wells at points B and C in Figure 2-7 are identical. The grid is shown in Figure 2-
9. 00
Figure 2-9: Grid for 1/6 of 7-Spot
The following data must immediately follow the grid dimension data given in
Section 2.2.3.1 or 2.2.3.2. 00
PATTERN (np) SIXTH 7 area
Definitions: 00

7 Designates 7-spot.

Restrictions:
NX = 2 * NY -1 ≥ 3 00
NOTE: 1. All field, regional, and well management level extensive output data
are scaled to values for np full patterns.
well basis.
values.

2.2.4 Physical Property Constants

Initial reservoir temperature may be specified in one or more of the following
ways for compositional or thermal models (temperature variation is not allowed in
black oil models, but a constant value is required in the constant data): 00
1. Specified as a constant (Required, Section 2.2.4).
2. Specified by equilibrium region in the IEQUIL table (Section 4.2.1.1, 4.2.1.2,

4.2.1.3, or 4.2.2), overriding the constant value in option 1.
3. Specified by equilibrium region, as a function of depth or as a function of

depth and areal location, overriding values in options 1 and 2:
a. For isothermal and thermal compositional models, Section 4.4.11.3 or

4.4.11.4.
b. For thermal dead oil models, Section 4.7.1 or 4.7.2.
Entering temperature as a function of depth and areal location (4.4.11.4)

is discouraged, since the areal temperature variation is not accounted for
in the calculation of equilibrium phase pressures versus depth. See option
4 below for further discussion of this problem.

4. Specified as a gridblock array in Section 5.25.1, overriding all other input

values. This method is discouraged, since the calculation of the phase
pressure versus depth curves by equilibrium region, from which initial
gridblock pressures and saturations are computed, does not account for
variation of temperature by gridblock (or for areal variation of temperature by
equilibrium region). This results in errors in the computed initial gridblock
fluid properties of pressure, saturation pressure, phase saturations, and
possibly compositions. These errors may be avoided only by specifying all of
these initial gridblock fluid properties (only the pressure array in the thermal
dead-oil case) as gridblock array data.
2.2.4.1 VIP-COMP or VIP-ENCORE
The constant properties of the reservoir and its fluids are input in one of the
following forms: 00
a. This form also includes constant water properties.
DWB BWI VW CW CR TRES (TS PS)

dwb bwi vw cw cr tres (ts ps)
b. This form assumes that water properties will be specified with either
PVTW (Section 4.11.1) or PVTWSAL (Section 4.11.2).
CONSTANTS CR PBASE TRES (TS PS)

cr pbase tres (ts ps)
Definitions: 00
The titles on these cards must appear in the order shown. 00
dwb Density of the stock tank water, gm/cc (gm/cc).
bwi Water formation volume factor at pbase, rb/STB (m3/

STM3).
vw Water viscosity, cp (cp).
cw Water compressibility, psi-1 (kPa-1).
cr Rock compressibility, psi-1 (Kpa-1). This will generally

be bulk compressibility/porosity.
tres Reservoir temperature, °F (°C).
ts Standard temperature, °F (°C). Default is 60°F (15°C).

ps Standard pressure, psia (kPa). Default is 14.65 psia

(101.325 Kpa or 1.03353 kg/cm2).
pbase Reference pressure for rock compressibility calculations,

psia (kPa). If not entered on a CONSTANTS card, pbase
is set to the pinit value of the first equilibrium region
(See Section 4.2.1 or Section 4.2.2).
2.2.4.2 VIP-THERM
Three options are available for specification of initial reservoir temperature:
1. Specified here as a constant value.
2. Specified as a function of depth in the composition data (in Section 4.4.12.3

(Composition Model) or Section 4.7 (Dead Oil Model)), overriding option 1.
3. Specified by gridblock using the TEMP array (Section 5.18), overriding options 1 and
2.
If the second or third option is used, some value for TRES must be input in the
physical property constant data, although it will not be used.
DWB CR DCPRDT DKTDSG TRES (TS PS)

dwb cr dcprdt dktdsg tres (ts ps)
Definitions:
The titles in this card must appear in the order shown.
dwb Density of the stock tank water, gm/cc (gm/cc).
cr Rock compressibility, psi-1 (KPa-1).
dcprdt Derivative term in rock heat capacity equation (see

below), °R-1 (°K-1).
dktdsg Derivative term in rock thermal conductivity equation

(see below), dimensionless.
tres Initial reservoir temperature. If temperature versus depth

tables or values by gridblock are to be input, enter any
arbitrary value, °F (°C).
ts Standard temperature, °F (°C). Default is 60°F (15°C).
ps Standard pressure, psia (kPa). Default is 14.65 psia

(101.325 Kpa or 1.03353 kg/cm2).

NOTE: If either TS or PS is specified, then both must be specified.
The rock heat capacity equation is
CPR = CPR0 (1 + DCPRDT (T - TS))
where CPR0 is the reference rock thermal conductivity at standard temperature.

The derivative term, DCPRDT, is therefore defined as
δCPR 1
DCPRDT = --------------- ---------------
δT CPR0
The thermal conductivity equation is
KT = KT0 (1 - DKTDSG*SG)
where KT0 is the reference liquid filled thermal conductivity. The derivative term,
DKTDSG, is therefore defined as
– δ KT 1
DKTDSG = -------------- -----------
δSG KT0
The partial derivatives appearing in the above equations are assumed to be
constants.
NOTE: If either TS or PS is specified, then both must be specified.
Service companies usually measure and report compressibility as relative

change in bulk volume per unit pressure change, or Cbulk = ΔVbulk/
Vbulk/ΔP. VIP requires rock compressibility measured as relative change
in pore volume per unit pressure change, Cr, where Cr = ΔVpore/Vpore/
ΔP. Since porosity is Vpore/Vbulk, and assuming incompressible rock
matrix, i.e. ΔVbulk =ΔVpore, we have Cr = Cbulk/φ. Pore compressibility
can be input as array data using the CR card. In such a case the value
specified on the DWB card will be ignored.
Example:
DWB BWI VW CW CR TRES TS PS

1.0 1.0 0.3 3.E-6 3.E-6 181.0 60.0 14.7
2.2.4.3 Pore Volume Representation (PVEXP, PVLINEAR)
Pore volume may be represented in linear (without respect to

+L) form, which is: 00
PV = PVMUL * PVREF * (1.0 + CR * (P - PREF)) 00
Pore volume may also be represented in exponential form: 00
PV = PVMUL * PVREF * EXP(CR * (P - PREF)) 00

where:
PVMUL = Optional pore volume multiplier given as a function of
pressure (Compaction Option, Section 4.12),
PVREF = input pore volume, or input porosity times total (constant)
block volume,
CR = input rock compressibility,
P = gridblock pressure, and
PREF = reference pressure, taken as PINIT(1) from EQUIL table
(Section 4.2). 00
In general, the linearized form is accurate for small (normal) values of

compressibility. 00
Porosity is given by the same expressions, with PHI (true porosity) and POR
(input, or reference, value of porosity) replacing PV and PVREF. Note that this
value of porosity is not the true rock porosity, but the ‘simulator’ porosity
corresponding to the assumption of constant total block volume, such that the pore
volume expression predicts the true pore volume behavior as a function of
pressure. 00
One of the following keywords may be optionally entered: 00
PVEXP
PVLINEAR
Definitions: 00
PVEXP Use exponential form of pore volume expression. This is

the default in VIP-THERM and is required if the
PORDEF Option (Section 4.16.1) is selected (in this
case, PVREF, PREF, and CR are all functions of
pressure)
PVLINEAR Use linear form of pore volume expression. This is the

default option in VIP-COMP and VIP-ENCORE.
2.2.5 Output
2.2.5.1 Metric Units for Input and Output (METRIC)
The METRIC card indicates that all data being read and all printed output are in
metric units.
⎛ KPA ⎞
⎜ ⎟
METRIC
⎜ KG ⁄ CM2 ⎟
⎝ BAR ⎠
The pressure units for the metric option may be kPa, bar or kg/cm2; if neither KG/
CM2 nor BAR is specified, the default is kPa.
Example:
METRIC KG/CM2
2.2.5.2 Laboratory Units for Input and Output (LAB)
The LAB card indicates that all data being read and all printed output are in
laboratory units. Please refer to VIP-EXECUTIVE Technical Reference, Chapter
31.
LAB
When laboratory units are used, the program automatically adjusts some of the
internal tolerances used by the well calculations for testing of shut-in wells.
2.2.5.3 Print by Cross-Sections (CROSS)
The CROSS card causes arrays to be printed by cross-sections (vertical planes),

instead of by areal planes. 00
CROSS
2.2.5.4 Layer Output in Initialization Region Summary (REGNZ)
REGNZ
Initialization region reports usually provide totals for each region, but REGNZ
causes layer values to be output, as well. 00
2.2.5.5 Hydrocarbon Pore Volume and Bulk Volume Tables (HCPVTAB)
The HCPVTAB card causes three additional tables to be printed as functions of

depth: the first containing hydrocarbon pore volume, the second containing bulk

volume, and the third containing cumulative bulk volume. The tables are
generated by rock type, by region, and by totals. 00
HCPVTAB hpvinc (hpvtop)
Definitions: 00
hpvinc Depth increment, ft (m). This controls the spacing of the

depths in each of the tables.
hpvtop Optional specification of the top depth, ft (m) subsea, for

use in both of the tables. Default is the minimum top
depth of any gridblock in the system.
2.2.6 Formulation
2.2.6.1 Gas-Water Option for VIP-ENCORE (GASWATER)
This option is not applicable with the DUAL module. 00
GASWATER
This option is used to invoke the two phase gas-water option. This option is useful
for cases with no oil or condensate in the reservoir (dry gas). The gas phase has
constant composition and hence only one hydrocarbon equation is solved in
IMPLICIT cases - coefficient generation is unaffected. This option provides
reduced data input of the saturation and PVT tables, where only the gas properties
are required. 00
NOTE: 1. Simplified equilibrium data for this option is possible (see Section
4.2.1.2).
2. The saturation tables are specified using a modified SGT card, and
SWT data is not required (as described in Section 4.3.1.2).
3. The PVT data is specified by the BGTAB card, rather than the
BOTAB card (as described in Section 4.5.3).
2.2.6.2 Water-Oil Option for VIP-ENCORE (WATEROIL)
This option is not applicable with the DUAL module. 00
WATEROIL

This option is used to invoke the two phase water-oil option. This option is useful
for cases with no gas in the reservoir. The oil phase has constant composition and
hence only one hydrocarbon equation is solved in IMPLICIT cases - coefficient
generation is unaffected. This option provides reduced data input of the saturation
and PVT tables, where only the oil properties are required. 00
NOTE: 1. Simplified equilibrium data for this option is possible (see Section
4.2.1.3).
2. The saturation tables are specified by the SWT card described in

Section 4.3.1.1. Gas saturation table data (SGT card) is not required.
3. The PVT data is specified by the BOTAB card, but gas parameters
may be omitted (as described in Section 4.5.2.2).
2.2.6.3 Black-Oil Option (BLACKOIL) (VIP-ENCORE)
BLACKOIL
The black-oil option allows the simulation of a true black-oil system in which the
K-value of the oil component is near zero (on the order of 10-10). The option will
prevent the residual oil (or the relict oil in a gas cap) from vaporizing during gas
injection. In the standard black-oil model, the K-value of the oil component is on
the order of 10-3 to 10-2 even if the oil is specified as non-volatile, i.e., input of a
constant GR (gas gravity) in the BOTAB table. In addition to this keyword, the
other data requirements are noted below. 00
NOTE: 1. All input GR values in the BOTAB table must be the same.
2. If multiple PVT tables are specified, the WTRO (molecular weight of

residual oil) values in all BOTAB tables must be the same, and the
GR values in all BOTAB tables must also be the same.
3. Default separators must be used and no additional separator data may

be specified.
2.2.6.4 Two-Point Upstream Weighting (TWOPT) (Not available in

VIP-THERM)
TWOPT
This option causes two-point upstream mobility weighting and two-point

upstream component mole fraction weighting to be used in generating flow

coefficients. It should be noted that two-point upstream weighting cannot be used

with the IMPLICIT formulation. 00
Two point upstream has a stability limit only two-thirds the size of the limit of the
default single-point upstream method. Care must be taken when timestep size is
determined. When using the IMPSTAB option to control timestep size,
parameters "ststar" and "stslim" must be explicitly defined (on IMPSTAB card)
as 0.6 and 0.66 respectively. 00
2.2.6.5 Nine-Point Finite Difference Approximations (NINEPT)
NINEPT
The use of the nine-point option is subject to the following conditions:
1. Cartesian grid system or LGR model with Cartesian root grid and Cartesian
refinements only.
2. NX > 1, NY > 1.
The NINEPT card causes the program to utilize nine-point finite difference
approximations on the X-Y plane, while the Z-direction (if present) is discretized
using the usual three-point approximation. Unless input, diagonal
transmissibilities are internally calculated using the method of Coats and Modine
(Reference 3). For models with local grid refinements, the diagonal
transmissibilities are computed only inside each grid but not across grid
boundaries. 00
2.2.6.6 SEBOUND option
When using the NINEPT option in cartesian or corner point grids, the areal outer
reservoir boundary may be specified as passing through the outer gridblock
centers rather than along the outer edges of the outer gridblocks. This option is
particularly useful when manually setting up pattern elements of symmetry. The
areal transmissibilities parallel to these boundaries are then automatically
computed using the corrrect boundary conditions (for non-homogenous and/or
non-isotropic grids, the correct transmissibilities cannot be obtained by manual
scaling when using the NINEPT option). The SEBOUND option affects only the
areal flow trans-missibility calculations - scaling of pore volumes, bulk volumes,
vertical transmissibilities, thermal transmissibilities, etc., to account for partial
gridblocks must be performed manually. 00
SEBOUND dir
Definitions: 00

dir = any combination of the labels: 00
XM (areal boundary passes through block centers at i = 1) 00
XP (areal boundary passes through block centers at i = nx) 00
YM (areal boundary passes through block centers at j = 1) 00
YP (areal boundary passes through block centers at j = ny) 00
2.2.6.7 Compositional SORM Option (CSORM)
The purpose of this option is to specify a residual oil saturation to miscible

displacement in compositional processes. With this option, a portion of the initial
oil will be assumed to be isolated and will not participate in any mass transfer
calculations during a simulation run. Consequently, this oil will not be recovered
through displacement or vaporization during miscible injection. The option is
designed to correct errors introduced by the assumption of a stirred tank (complete
mixing) in a gridblock. 00
In this option, the residual hydrocarbons will expand (or flash into two phases) or
contract with the pressure change. If the pressure drops below the bubblepoint, the
total molar density of the residual hydrocarbons will be calculated using internally
generated tables. Alternatively, the user may elect to approximate the total molar
density using direct extrapolation of the oil phase molar density at the
bubblepoint. When using internally generated tables, fine grids in LGR models
may not be deactivated and/or activated during the run. 00
The option is not compatible with IMPLICIT or DUAL or THERM. 00
CSORM csorm (prange np)
Definitions: 00
csorm Compositional residual oil saturation to miscible

displacement.
prange Pressure range of internally generated molar density

tables for pressures below the residual hydrocarbons’
bubblepoint pressure, psia (kPa). If not entered, the molar
density tables will not be generated and the residual
hydrocarbons’ molar densities at pressures below the
bubblepoint will be calculated from extrapolation of the
density at the bubblepoint. If entered, the value may not
be less than 500 psi.

np Number of pressure intervals for the molar density tables.

May be entered only if prange is entered. Default is 20.
If entered, the value may not be less than 5.
Example: 00
CSORM 0.03 2000. 50 00
2.2.7 Saturation Tables and Hysteresis
2.2.7.1 Two-Point Scaling of Relative Permeabilities (END2P)
END2P
This option causes two-point scaling of relative permeability table endpoints to be

performed, in place of the default three-point scaling (four-point for capillary
pressures). The two-point scaling approach was the only method available in VIP-
EXECUTIVE Version 1.6R, and earlier versions.
In the two-point case, each curve is scaled over its entire length (from residual/
irreducible saturation to the saturation at which it attains a maximum). In the
three-point case, all curves in a table are scaled together (retaining the relative kr
and Pc characteristics of the curves). In this case, which is the default scaling
method, all endpoints serve to break the table up into partitions, with scaling being
done in each partition independently. As an example, the water-oil table would be
scaled in two sections; from water saturations of Swir to Swor and from Swor to
1.
2.2.7.2 Two-Point Scaling of Capillary Pressures for Initial Saturations

(INIT2P)
INIT2P
In the simulation module, four-point scaling is the default for capillary pressures
and two-point scaling will be used if END2P was entered in VIP-CORE. But in
any version of VIP-CORE before 2003.19.0.0, two-point scaling of capillary
pressures was always used to compute the initial saturations. As of version
2003.19.0.0, the default initial saturation calculation will use four-point scaling of
capillary pressure or, if END2P is entered, two-point scaling.
The INIT2P card allows the user to request that the prior method be used for the
initial saturation calculation.

2.2.7.3 Stone’s Three-Phase kro (STONE1, STONE2)
The first keyword defines the calculation method for 3-phase oil relative
permeability. The second keyword defines the calculation method for 3-phase
water relative permeability when the two-curve water relative permeability option
is selected. The default method for the two-curve water relative permeability
option is the same as the calculation method for oil relative permeability.
STONE1 (st1exp (st1eps (st1nu)))

⎛ STONEm⎞
⎝ KROINT⎠
STONE2
⎛ STONEm⎞
⎝ KROINT⎠
Definition:
m Can be 1 or 2, giving STONE1 or STONE2 respectively.
KROINT Saturated weighted interpolation method will be used to

calculate 3-phase water relative permeability for the two-
curve water relative permeability option. Not allowed in
VIP-THERM.
st1exp Exponent term A in the expanded definition of Sorm (see

Section 4.3). Default is 1.
st1eps Coefficient term ε in the expanded definition of Sorm (see

st1nu Coefficient term ν in the expanded definition of Sorm (see

If not one of the STONE1, STONE2, or KROINT cards is input, the default
method is STONE2.
Enter appropriate data card in Utility Data:
Select Stone Method 1. (Reference 1)
STONE1
Select Stone Method 2. (Reference 2)
STONE2

Examples: STONE1
2.2.7.4 Saturation Weighted Three-Phase kro (KROINT) (Not available in

VIP-THERM)
This option will cause three phase oil relative permeability to be calculated using
a saturation weighted interpolation method. (see Reference 25).
The calculation model for 3-phase water relative permeability when the two-curve
water relative permeability option is selected is defined in the second keyword.
The default is the same as the calculation method for oil relative permeability. 00
KROINT
⎛ STONEm⎞
⎝ KROINT⎠
Definitions: 00
m Can be 1 or 2, giving STONE1 or STONE2 respectively
KROINT Saturation weighted interpolation method will be used to

calculate 3-phase relative permeability.
2.2.7.5 Water-oil Capillary Pressure Hysteresis (PCHYSW) (Not available in

VIP-THERM)
The PCHYSW card is used to invoke the water-oil capillary pressure hysteresis
option and to define certain control parameters for use in the simulation module. 00
PCHYSW (eta) (nlevel) (tols) (maxsw) (IMB)(SIMPLE)
Definitions: 00
eta Parameter defining the shape of scanning curves.

Recommended value is in the .05 to .1 range. Default is
.1.
nlevel The maximum number of levels of scanning curves for

water-oil capillary pressure hysteresis. Default is 2.
tols The minimum required change in water saturation to

allow saturation reversals to be accepted. Default is
.0001.
maxsw The maximum water saturation value for which the

program will calculate hysteresis. Default is 1.

IMB Keyword indicating that initialization is from an

imbibition curve. Default is to use a drainage curve.
SIMPLE Keyword indicating that no interior scanning loops are

generated.
Examples: 00
PCHYSW .05 5 .0001 1. IMB 00
2.2.7.6 Gas-Oil Capillary Pressure Hysteresis (PCHYSG) (Not available in

VIP-THERM)
The PCHYSG card is used to invoke the gas-oil capillary pressure hysteresis
option and to define certain control parameters for use in the simulation module. 00
PCHYSG (eta) (nlevel) (tols) (minsg) (IMB)
Definitions: 00
eta Parameter defining the shape of scanning curves.

Recommended value is in the .05 to .1 range. Default is
.1.
nlevel The maximum number of levels of scanning curves for

gas-oil capillary pressure hysteresis. Default is 2.
tols The minimum required change in gas saturation to allow

saturation reversals to be accepted. Default is .0001.
minsg The minimum gas saturation value for which the program
will calculate hysteresis. Default is 0.
IMB Keyword indicating that initialization is from an

imbibition curve. Default is to use a drainage curve.
Examples: 00
PCHYSG .07 3 .001 0. 00

2.2.7.7 Oil Relative Permeability Hysteresis (RPHYSO) (Not available in VIP-

THERM)
The RPHYSO card is used to invoke the oil phase relative permeability hysteresis
option for use in the simulation module. 00
RPHYSO (meth) (somin)(WATER)
Definitions: 00
meth Keyword indicating the method of oil phase relative

permeability hysteresis to be used from the following:
CARLSON Carlson’s method
LINEAR Linearized version of Carlson’s method
DRAINAGE Drainage curve is scaled onto the range

of saturation needed for imbibition,
using the trapped hydrocarbon saturation
from Carlson’s method and the historical
maximum hydrocarbon saturation as the
endpoints.
USER User-specified imbibition curve assigned

using ISATI.
The default method is LINEAR unless ISATI was

entered, causing USER to be set.
somin The minimum oil saturation value below which oil is

immobile when oil phase relative permeability hysteresis
is used. Default is 0.001.
WATER Keyword indicating that water relative permeability

hysteresis is to be used in addition to oil phase relative
permeability hysteresis. The USER method (drainage and
imbibition curves entered) must be in use.
2.2.7.8 Gas Relative Permeability Hysteresis (RPHYSG) (Not available in

VIP-THERM)
The RPHYSG card is used to invoke the gas phase relative permeability hysteresis
option for use in the simulation module. 00
RPHYSG (meth)

Definitions:
meth Keyword indicating the method of gas phase relative

permeability hysteresis to be used from the following:
CARLSON Carlson’s method
LINEAR Linearized version of Carlson’s method
DRAINAGE Drainage curve is scaled onto the range

of saturation needed for imbibition,
using the trapped hydrocarbon saturation
from Carlson’s method and the historical
maximum hydrocarbon saturation as the
endpoints.
USER User-specified imbibition curve assigned

using ISATI.
The default method is LINEAR unless ISATI was

entered, causing USER to be set.
2.2.7.9 Relative Permeability Hysteresis Tolerances (RPHYST)
The RPHYST card can be used to modify the tolerances to be used for the oil and
gas relative permeability hysteresis calculations. These tolerances must be
exceeded before the hysteresis calculations are performed; otherwise, only the
drainage relative permeability curves are used. 00
RPHYST tolrev (tolhys)
Definitions:
tolrev Saturation fraction by which the phase saturation must be

below the historical maximum phase saturation before
hysteresis calculations are performed. The imbibition
curve is constructed starting at the phase saturation equal
to historical maximum phase saturation minus tolrev.
Default value is 0.02.
tolhys Used for gas relative permeability hysteresis, only. This

is the incremental gas saturation by which the adjusted
historical maximum gas saturation (historical maximum
gas saturation minus tolrev) must exceed the critical gas
saturation before hysteresis calculations are performed.
Default value is 0.05.

NOTE: For both oil and gas relative permeability hysteresis, the calculated trapped
saturation from Land’s equation is restricted to be no greater than the critical
saturation plus 70 percent of (adjusted historical maximum saturation minus
the critical saturation).
2.2.7.10 Leverett J-Function (JFUNC) (Not available with SDFUNC option)
JFUNC
The JFUNC card invokes the option to use the Leverett J-function for the
calculation of capillary pressures. The J-function is input in place of capillary
pressure in the SWT table as a function of water saturation. For each gridblock,
the program calculates the square root of permeability divided by porosity, in
order to scale the J-function to a unique capillary pressure curve. The J-function is
defined as follows: 00
Pc K
J ( Sw ) = ------------------- ---
σ cos θ c φ
The capillary pressure table input should be
Pc wo ( Sw ) = J ( Sw ) σ cos θ c 00
such that the program can calculate capillary pressure as
Pc wo ( Sw )
Pc = ------------------------
- 00
Kx
------
φ
where Kx is the x-direction permeability and φ the porosity.
2.2.7.11 Rock Compaction (COMPACT)
Also see Section 4.12.
The COMPACT card invokes the compaction option. Compaction tables are
described in Section 4.12.
COMPACT (REVERSE)

Definition:
REVERSE Alpha label indicating that compaction is reversible (i.e.,

the current gridblock pressure is used in compaction
calculations). Optional; default is that compaction is
irreversible (i.e., the minimum pressure ever achieved in
the gridblock is used in the compaction calculations).
2.2.7.12 Freeze Pcwo at Initial Value (FRZPCW)
FRZPCW
This option freezes the water-oil capillary pressure at its initial value for the entire
simulation. Applies only to saturation tables, does not apply to saturation-
dependent functions option.
2.2.7.13 Freeze Pcgo at Initial Value (FRZPCG)
FRZPCG
This option freezes the gas-oil capillary pressure at its initial value for the entire
simulation. Applies only to saturation tables, does not apply to saturation-
dependent functions option.
2.2.8 Initialization
2.2.8.1 Nonequilibrium Initialization (NONEQ)
Also see Section 4.2.3 and Section 5.30. 00
The NONEQ card is required for a nonequilibrium initialization. The default

initialization procedure is to always produce an equilibrium system, which is to
say that regardless of which input data options are used, capillary pressure
adjustments are computed for each gridblock which will ensure that the phases are
in equilibrium. If the default GBC option is used, the adjustments are zero;
otherwise, small capillary pressure adjustments are calculated, and remain
constant for each of the gridblocks for the entire simulation. The integrated
saturation initialization options may require small adjustments to capillary
pressures in order to maintain initial phase equilibrium. 00
NONEQ can be specified to deactivate the computation of the capillary pressure

adjustments. This allows the user to initialize at dynamic conditions by

specifying saturations, pressures, and possibly compositions, even though there

may be fluid movements at these initial conditions. 00
NONEQ
2.2.8.2 Gridblock Center Initialization (GBC)
The GBC card invokes the gridblock center initialization algorithm. In this case
the saturation distribution of the gridblock is determined by the fluid located at the
gridblock center. This is the default. 00
GBC
2.2.8.3 Integrated Saturation Initialization (INTSAT)
INTSAT (MOBILE) (sorwmn sorgmn sgcmin)
Definitions: 00
MOBILE Mobile saturation calculations will be performed.
sorwmn Optional minimum calculated residual oil saturation

(MOBILE specified) in a water-oil system. Default is 0.
sorgmn Optional minimum calculated residual gas saturation

(MOBILE specified) in a gas-oil system. Default is 0.
sgcmin Optional minimum calculated critical gas saturation

(MOBILE specified) in a gas-oil system. Default is 0.
The INTSAT card invokes the integrated saturation initialization algorithm. In this
case, initial fluid saturations are calculated based upon the actual fluid distribution
throughout the gridblock, by integrating the capillary pressure on the block
thickness (default is gridblock center initialization, see GBC card). The MOBILE
keyword turns on calculation of modified oil and gas residual values, to account
for initial contacts in some blocks. This is especially useful for grids with large
blocks downdip, near the water-oil contact, where a small oil thickness above the
contact will contain mobile oil, while the oil saturation is much less than Sorw. 00
Examples: 00
For integrated saturation initialization and mobile fluid calculations 00
INTSAT MOBILE 00

2.2.8.4 Integrated Saturation Initialization (VAITS) (Not available in VIP-

THERM)
VAITS (tolsw tolsg tolvol) (NPVUPD)
Definitions: 00
tolsw Relative approximation error tolerance for initial water

saturation. Default is 0.001.
tolsg Relative approximation error tolerance for initial gas

saturation. Default is 0.001.
tolvol Relative approximation error tolerance for block bulk

volume. Default is 0.001. The tolvol parameter is used
only for pore volume calculations.
NPVUPD If this keyword is included, the bulk volume will not be

updated. For cornerpoint grids, DX . DY . DZ will be
used.
The VAITS card invokes the volume averaged integrated saturation initialization
algorithm. In this case, the saturation values are calculated based on the actual
fluid distribution throughout the gridblock by integrating the inverse capillary
pressure function over the gridblock volume. (The default is the gridblock center
initialization procedure, see GBC card). This option allows calculations of
average gridblock saturations and bulk volume with specified approximation error
tolerances. This option gives the same answer as the INTSAT option for
rectangular gridblocks. 00
Examples: 00
For volume average integrated saturation initialization with relative

approximation error tolerances for water and gas saturations of 0.05%,
0.001%, respectively, and applications of the standard VIP mapping technique
for bulk volume calculations.
VAITS 0.0005 0.00001 0.001 NPVUPD 00
2.2.8.5 Thickness Center (THCNTR)
THCNTR
The THCNTR card uses the thickness along the bedding plane to calculate block
properties. The default is to use true vertical thickness to calculate block
properties; this more accurately represents dipping reservoir blocks. 00

2.2.8.6 Do Not Initialize (NOINIT)
NOINIT
The NOINIT card will cause the program to stop after all the coefficents are
calculated. This card is useful when used in conjunction with the PRINT COEFS
FILE, Section 3.3.2. 00
2.2.8.7 Totally Refined ROOT Grid (NOROOT)
NOROOT
The keyword NOROOT will reduce memory and disk space by ignoring the
ROOT grid, when LGR’s result in no active grid blocks remaining in the ROOT
grid. The keyword NOROOT should not be used if grids are planed for
deactivation in VIP-EXEC such that grid blocks in the ROOT grid will become
active. 00
2.2.8.8 Grid Deactivation (DEACTIVATE)
DEACTIVATE
The keyword DEACTIVATE is required when LGR’s of the same level (i.e.,
siblings) touch, and are planed to be deactivated separately in VIP-EXEC.
Without this keyword, the transmissibility connections between the LGR’s and the
parent grid at the interface between the sibling grids are not created. 00
2.2.8.9 Honor Input Water Saturation Values (KEEPSW)
By default, it is an error when both the water and gas saturation arrays are input
and, for any gridblock, the sum of the two saturations is greater than 1. The
KEEPSW card allows the water saturation to be honored and the gas saturation to
be reset so that the sum is 1. 00
KEEPSW
2.2.8.10 Honor Input Gas Saturation Values (KEEPSG)
By default, it is an error when both the water and gas saturation arrays are input
and, for any gridblock, the sum of the two saturations is greater than 1. The

KEEPSG card allows the gas saturation to be honored and the water saturation to
be reset so that the sum is 1. 00
KEEPSG
2.2.9 Off-Band Connections
2.2.9.1 Pinchout Gridblock Connections (PINCHOUT)
The PINCHOUT card controlls the generation of nonstandard gridblock

connections between layers of the grid system where pinchouts occur. Such
connections will be generated automatically whenever two layers are separated by
one or more inactive blocks, where the total thickness separating them is less than
tolth. The transmissibilities generated in this way may be overridden by the use of
FTRANS cards (see Section 6.5.2). The PINCHOUT card requires the use of the
corner-point (see Section 1.5.3) or LGR option (see Section 11.19). 00
PINCHOUT (tolnet) (tolth) (tolgrs) (NONE) (AND)
Definition: 00
tolnet Gridblock net thickness tolerance, ft (m). Pore volume is

set to zero for blocks with a net thickness less than or
equal to tolnet. In VIP-COMP or VIP-ENCORE, blocks
with a zero pore volume are considered to be inactive.
Default is 0.
tolth Interblock gross thickness tolerance, ft (m). A block is

considered to be "pinched out" if it is inactive (zero pore
volume or total volume (VIP-THERM)) and the gross
thickness between two active gridblocks is less than or
equal to tolth. Default is tolnet.
tolgrs Gridblock gross thickness tolerance, ft(m). Total volume

and pore volume are set to zero for blocks with a gross
thickness less than or equal to tolgrs. In VIP-THERM,
blocks with zero total volume are considered to be
inactive. Default is tolnet.
NONE Keyword to turn off the automatic generation of

pinchouts.
AND Keyword indicating that total volume and pore volume

are set to zero for blocks with a gross thickness less than

or equal to tolgrs AND a net thickness less than or equal

to tolnet.
2.2.9.2 Fault Modeling (FAULTS)
Also see Section 6.1. 00
The FAULTS card invokes the fault modeling option. Additional fault data are
described in Section 6.1. 00
FAULTS
⎛ LATERAL ⎞
⎝ NONE ⎠
Definition: 00
LATERAL Calculates connections, across any block on the other

side of the fault plane. Default only connects logically
vertical blocks.
NONE Do not generate automatic faults or pinchout

connections.
2.2.9.3 Completing the Circle in Radial Grids (FLOW360)
The FLOW360 card indicates that, for a radial model, flow is permitted between
the first and last gridblocks in the theta direction. There is no internal boundary in
the angular direction. This option requires that the total angular span be 360
degrees. In radial models sweeping less than 360 degrees it is assumed that no
flow occurs across the external boundaries of the first and last gridblocks in the
theta direction. Without a FLOW360 card, a full 360 degree model has a no-flow
boundary at θ = 0 degrees = 360 degrees. The FLOW360 option is subject to the
same formulation choices and solution technique choices as the FAULT option. 00
FLOW360

2.2.10 Vertical Equilibrium (Not available in VIP-THERM)

The vertical equilibrium with completely segregated fluids may be invoked for the
water and oil phases, the gas and oil phases, or both. Initial fluid distributions are
calculated which are consistent with total gravity segregation at the phase contacts
and with the gridblock geometry, if that option is used. Pseudo capillary pressures
are calculated to ensure that the segregated fluids remain in equilibrium. Each
gridblock is divided into several sublayers. Fractional volumes and fractional face
areas of the sublayers are calculated and stored in tables. Oil and gas saturations in
the sublayers are defined to be consistent with the segregated flow assumption and
the sublayer fractional volumes. Pseudo relative permeabilities, krw, krow, krg,
krog, for six faces of each gridblock are defined from saturation values and
fractional face areas of the sublayers. 00
Oil relative permeability, kro, is calculated from the usual three phase
correlations. 00
The degree of vertical equilibrium in each block may be varied by using the
FVEWO and FVEGO array keywords (Section 5.33.1 and Section 5.33.2). 00
2.2.10.1 Water-Oil Vertical Equilibrium (VEWO)
VEWO (nvelev)
Definitions: 00
VEWO This card invokes the water-oil VE option.
nvelev Number of sublayers into which each gridblock is

divided. Fractional volumes and fractional face areas of
the sublayers are stored in tables, which are used for the
calculation of pseudo relative permeabilities and
capillary pressure in the dynamic part of a simulation.
The VE corner point option is used whenever nvelev is
greater than 1 even if the cartesian geometry option is
used. Setting nvelev to 1 will turn off the VE corner point
geometry option. VE corner point geometry is always off
with the PSEUDO option. Default is 10.
NOTE: If the grid dimension NZ is greater than one and VE corner point geometry
option is off then DRELPM (Section 2.2.10.3) should also be used.

2.2.10.2 Gas-Oil Vertical Equilibrium (VEGO)
VEGO (nvelev)
Definitions: 00
VEGO This card invokes the gas-oil VE option.

The VE corner point option is used whenever nvelev is
greater than 1 even if the cartesian geometry option is
used. Setting nvelev to 1 will turn off the VE corner point
geometry option. VE corner point geometry is always off
with the PSEUDO option. Default is 10.
NOTE: If the grid dimension NZ is greater than one and VE corner point geometry
option is off then DRELPM (Section 2.2.10.3) should also be used.
2.2.10.3 Vertical Equilibrium Directional Relative Permeability (DRELPM)
DRELPM (drpfrc)
Definition: 00
drpfrc The fraction of the gridblock to be considered when

computing the effective saturation in the vertical
directions when using the directional relative
permeability option in a vertical equilibrium model. The
value must be in the range 0. to 1. inclusive, with default
value of .25.
The DRELPM card is used to select the directional relative permeability option
for a vertical equilibrium model. DRELPM turns off the VE corner point
geometry option (nvelev > 1, sections 2.2.10.1 and 2.2.10.2). If the DRELPM card
is omitted in a vertical equilibrium model, and nvelev = 1, the same effective
saturation will be used for vertical flow as for areal flow. If the model does not
use vertical equilibrium, the DRELPM card has no effect. 00

Example: 00
TITLE1 SPECIFY FRACTION OF BLOCK FOR VE

TITLE2 OVERRIDE THE DEFAULT VALUE OF .25
VEWO
VEGO
DRELPM .5 00
2.2.10.4 Capillary Gravity Equilibrium (VEITS)
VEITS (nvelev)
Definitions: 00
VEITS This card invokes the capillary gravity equilibrium

option.

Default value is 10.
NOTE: A capillary gravity equilibrium option can be applied only in corner point
geometry models if capillary pressure curves are not flat. This assumes
that phase hydrostatic potential is independent of depth within a cell. But
the assumption about complete fluid segregation is not used. The VAITS
option is applied for the calculation of initial saturation distributions.
Accuracy of the initial saturation calculations can be controlled by the
VAITS card. Each gridblock is divided into several sublayers. Fractional
volumes and fractional face areas of the sublayers are calculated and
stored in tables. Phase pressure and saturations in the sublayers are
accurately defined, taking into account the sublayer fractional volumes,
varying ratios of capillary, viscous and gravity forces at different times
during simulation. Pseudo relative permeabilities, krw, krow, krg, krog, for
the six faces of each gridblock are determined from saturation values and
fractional face areas of the sublayers. Oil relative permeability, kro, is
calculated from the usual three phase correlations.
Example: 00
VEITS 20 00

2.2.11 Fluid Property Options
2.2.11.1 Energy Minimization Phase Equilibrium (GIBBS) (VIP-COMP)
GIBBS
This card invokes a phase stability test, and calculation of phase equilibrium,
using a GIBBS energy minimization algorithm. The technique provides superior
near critical fluid property values, but at the expense of higher computing cost. It
should be tried in any compositional case where near critical behavior is
suspected, and program performance is unsatisfactory. 00
2.2.11.2 Near Critical Fluid Property Adjustment (IFT) (VIP-COMP)
IFT (tenthr) (xex) (teni)
Definitions: 00
tenthr The threshold interfacial tension for relative permeability

adjustment, dynes/cm. Default is 0.01 dynes/cm.
xex The value of the exponent for relative permeability

adjustment. Default is 0.25.
teni The reference interfacial tension, dynes/cm. Default is

defined as the gas-oil interfacial tension at the gas-oil
contact of equilibration region 1.
This card invokes the near critical relative permeability and capillary pressure
adjustment option. The adjustments are based on interfacial tension (ift)
calculations - capillary pressure is multiplied by 00
[ift / ift(reference)] when the fraction is less than 1 00
and relative permeability is interpolated 00
[ift / ift(threshold)]**xex. 00
The IFT option is compatible with both GIBBS and non-GIBBS phase
equilibrium calculation options. Additionally, PCHOR data must be included in
the fluid properties table. 00
The IFT option is not compatible with the velocity-dependent relative

permeabilities. 00

2.2.11.3 Suppresses Table Data Checking (NOCHK)
NOCHK (PVTTAB) (SATTAB)
Definitions: 00
PVTTAB Suppress PVT property data checking of monotonicity

and total hydrocarbon compressibility, when BOTAB
tables are read. This is necessary in some 3-component
miscible cases.
SATTAB Suppress saturation table monotonicity checks -

primarily used with pseudo relative permeability curves,
generated by Stone’s method, which may not be single
valued.
The NOCHK card can selectively suppress PVT table and saturation table data
checks. By default, all table checks listed above are suppressed if a NOCHK card
is entered. This card should be used cautiously since PVT and saturation table
nonconformity can cause instability in the simulation. 00
Examples: 00
To suppress PVT table checking in 3-component miscible case 00
NOCHK PVTTAB 00
2.2.11.4 PVT Interpolation for VIP-ENCORE (BOTINT)
The BOTINT card is used to invoke the PVT interpolation option. In this option,
three hydrocarbon components are required, instead of the usual two components
for VIP-ENCORE with black-oil data. PVT data is still specified in terms of two
pseudo-components, just as for ordinary black-oil models, but the PVT data is
parameterized by the API gravity or density of the liquid oil phase at stock tank
conditions. In each PVT region, BOTABS data is specified for several different
values of API gravity (i.e., for several different oil types), and PVT properties are
calculated by interpolation between the specified tables depending on the actual
stock tank API gravity of the insitu oil. Internally, the simulator treats the oil
phase as a mixture of three pseudo-components, and the PVT properties vary
based on the liquid phase split between the heavier two components as well as on
the values of pressure and light component composition. Initially, the split
between the heavier components is chosen to match the API gravity of the stock
tank liquid as specified in a table of API gravity versus depth, so the overall
treatment is equivalent to varying PVT properties with stock tank density. 00
The use of the PVT interpolation option requires changes to some of the following
data cards: NX card (Section 2.2.3.1), NR card (Section 2.2.3.2), PRINT INIT

card (Section 2.2.1.1), MAP card (Section 2.2.2.6), IEQUIL card (Section 4.2.1),
BPTAB card (Section 4.2.4), BOTAB card (Section 4.5.2), SEPTEST data
(Section 4.8.3), and other associated cards. In the simulation modules, the option
may cause a change to the OUTPUT card (Section 2.5.1 of the Simulation
Modules Manual). 00
BOTINT ntypes
Definition: 00
ntypes The number of oil types for which BOTABS data must be
provided in each PVT region. The product of ntypes and
the actual number of PVT regions must be no larger than
the maximum number of PVT tables for which the
program is dimensioned. Default is 1.
If SEPTEST separator battery data is input, then the data

must be provided for each oil type, for each separator
battery defined.
Example: 00
If there are two API gravities in each PVT region: 00
BOTINT 2 00
NOTE: The BOTAB tables for each PVT region must be introduced in decreasing
order of API gravity.
2.2.11.5 Flash Calculation Method (FLASH) (VIP-COMP)
The FLASH card allows the user to define the flash calculation method and
maximum allowable iterations for reservoir and surface flashes. The two available
methods are accelerated successive substitution and Newton-Raphson with
successive substitution preconditioning. The default method for reservoir flashes
is accelerated successive substitution. The default method for surface flashes is
Newton-Raphson. 00
RES
FLASH maxss maxnr (ACC)
SURF
Definitions:

maxss Maximum number of successive substitution iterations

allowed for a flash calculation. Default is 5 for flashes to
surface conditions and 20 for flashes to reservoir
conditions.
maxnr Maximum number of Newton-Raphson iterations

allowed for a flash calculation. Default is 10 for flashes
to surface conditions and 0 for flashes to reservoir
conditions.
RES Keyword indicating that the data on this card apply to

flashes to reservoir conditions.
SURF Keyword indicating that the data on this card apply to

flashes to surface conditions.
ACC Keyword indicating that accelerated successive

substitution flash calculations will be performed.
NOTE: 1. Only one of the RES or SURF labels may be specified. Separate
FLASH cards can be input for RES and SURF. If neither the RES nor
SURF label is specified, the data are used for both reservoir and
surface flash calculations.
2. If a FLASH card with the RES option is not input, then ACC
(accelerated successive substitution) is the default. If a FLASH card
with the SURF option is not input, accelerated successive substitution
calculations are not performed. When a FLASH card is input, ACC
must be specified to invoke the option.
Example:
To specify the SS and NR iterations for surface flashes as 20 and 10,

respectively:
FLASH 20 10 SURF
2.2.11.6 Super-Critical Equilibration (CRINIT) (VIP-COMP)
CRINIT (iequil1 iequil2 ...)
Definition: 00
CRINIT This card invokes super-critical equilibration.
iequil Equilibrium region to which super-critical equilibration

is applied.

The CRINIT card is used to invoke the super-critical equilibration option. This
option is used to initialize fluid systems which are always one phase but are gas
condensate overlaying volatile oils. The compositions are such that they are
always above the equilibrium two phase envelope at the reservoir temperature and
pressure. The gas-oil contact is defined by looking at the heaviest component k-
value to insure it is less than one because there is no two phase region in the
reservoir at initial conditions. The value of PINIT at DEPTH from the IEQUIL
card is used as the starting point for the initial pressure profile calculations. 00
If the CRINIT card is used with no arguments, all equilibrium regions will be
initialized using the super-critical option. If the CRINIT keyword is followed by a
list of equilibrium region numbers, the super-critical option will only be applied to
the specified equilibrium regions. 00
2.2.11.7 Li Pseudo-Critical Temperature (LI) (VIP-COMP)
LI (factli)
Definition: 00
factli Li pseudo-critical temperature factor. Default is 1.
The LI card is used to invoke the Li pseudo-critical temperature option. This

option uses the Li pseudo-critical temperature to determine the labeling of a single
phase fluid. The Li pseudo-critical temperature is calculated by the following
equation:
nc
∑ Tcj Vcj Zj
T pc = j----------------------------
=1 -
nc
∑ Vcj Zj
j=1
In the above equation, Tc is the critical temperature, Vc is the critical volume, and
z is the mole fraction.
If the reservoir temperature is below the Li pseudo-critical temperature, then the

single phase fluid is considered to be an oil phase. Otherwise, it is considered to
be a gas phase.
One might use this option for a supercritical fluid in a situation where the
saturation pressure cannot be found, or where the user prefers the fluid to be
called an oil instead of a gas, or vice versa.

Optionally, a factor can be entered that is used to multiply the Li pseudo-critical

number, and thus influence the labeling. The default value is 1.0. The number
must be positive. If an factli value between 0 and 1 is entered, a single phase will
more likely be labeled a gas phase. Conversely, if an factli value greater than 1 is
entered, a single phase will more likely be labeled an oil phase.
2.2.11.8 Dry Gas Simulation (DRYGAS)
DRYGAS
This card invokes the dry gas option. 00
The dry gas option enables the compositional modeling of a hydrocarbon system
that is always in a single phase state. The water phase can co-exist with this single
phase. The hydrocarbon fluid properties are calculated by an equation of state. 00
The dry gas option should only be used if fluids always remain in a single phase
state without crossing any phase boundaries. For example, injection and
production from a gas storage reservoir would be an appropriate situation for this
option, depending on the compositions of the in-situ and injected gas. 00
The dry gas option is required for a fluid system existing at a reservoir
temperature above its cricondentherm. For such a system, no saturation pressure
can be found. This would result in termination of the VIP initialization procedure
without the dry gas option. The dry gas option also allows the simulator to run
considerably faster because phase transition calculations are avoided. 00
2.2.11.9 Limit on Rate of Increase of Solution GOR (DRSDT)
DRSDT limit (FREE)
Definitions: 00
DRSDT Turns limit on. By default, no limit is applied.
limit The limiting value of the rate of solution GOR increase.

Units are SCF/STB/day (field), SM3/SM3/day (metric),
or Scc/Scc/hr (lab), unless the RSM card (Section 2.2.22)
is entered, in which case units are MSCF/STB/day
(field), KSM3/SM3/day (metric), or MScc/Scc/hr (lab).
FREE Only applies DRSDT in blocks with free gas saturation.
The DRSDT option can be used in conjunction with certain combinations of

extended black oil tables only. They can be used with the BOETAB table, but

only if RS is non-zero and RV is zero. In other words, gas must be allowed to

enter into solution with the liquid phase, but oil is not allowed to condense from
the vapor phase. The equivalent separate oil and gas data tables are BOOTAB and
BDGTAB. 00
The DRSDT option controls the rate at which the solution gas-oil ratio (Rs) within
a block can increase. The rate at which Rs can decline during depletion is
unaffected. Additionally, the rate at which Rs increases will still be limited by the
availability of free gas, and by the saturated values in the tables. 00
At the extreme where DRSDT has a limit of 0, Rs will stay constant within each
gridblock, and free gas cannot dissolve into the undersaturated oil. At the other
extreme, where DRSDT has a very large limit, Rs will rise to that allowed by the
table or until no free gas remains. This is equivalent to not using the option at all. 00
The use of the FREE keyword limits the application of the DRSDT constraint to
blocks that have free gas. This prevents the limiting of changes in Rs due to the
mixing of fluids from adjacent unsaturated blocks that have different starting
values of Rs. This will allow gas flowing from a two-phase cell into an
undersaturated cell to dissolve into solution in an unrestrained manner. 00
Example: 00
DRSDT 10
C Limits increase of solution GOR to 10 SCF/STB/day
2.2.12 Corner-Point Grid
2.2.12.1 Corner-Point Simulation Grid (CORNER)
The CORNER card is used to set optional parameters for corner point grids. The
user may set the variables iquads, jquads, and kquads to control the accuracy of
the integration process used for pore volume and transmissibility calculations.
Corner point grids allow the user to describe more general grid systems than those
describable through the specification of block-size arrays only. Some examples of
the use of the corner-point option include the description of nonorthogonal grids
and the modeling of sloping faults and pinchouts. The user should take great care
with the use of this option, since less data checking is performed on the grid
system description. The corner-point option is not compatible with radial or
cylindrical grids. 00
When the FAULTS card (see Section 2.2.9.2) is also specified, the corner-point
option requires somewhat different specification of faults than the standard fault
data description (see Section 6.3). If the user specifies corner-point depths
(instead of explicit faults), the program will automatically generate fault
connections. 00

When corner point grids are used, the program will automatically recognize
pinchouts and generate the appropriate nonstandard interlayer gridblock
connections. The FTRANS fault option (see Section 6.5.2) allows the user to
overread the transmissibilities generated in this way. 00
The default method for calculation of inter-block transmissibilities is a method

based on harmonic integration (HARINT). This has been found to give a more
accurate representation of transmissibilities for corner-point grids. This was not
the default in previous versions of VIP-CORE. The previous default can be
invoked by using the optional keyword NEWTRAN. 00
The optional keyword LINE should be used to specify corner-point positions

along depth lines. 00
CORNER (NEWTRAN (V98)) (LINE) (iquads jquads kquads)
Definitions: 00
NEWTRAN Invoke the NEWTRAN option for the inter-block

transmissibility calculation.
V98 Invoke the NEWTRAN calculation in use in version 98.
LINE Specification of corner-point positions along depth lines.
iquads Number of quadrature points (1 ≤ iquads ≤ 3) in the x

direction. Default is 3 (Default for NEWTRAN option is
2).
jquads Number of quadrature points (1 ≤ jquads ≤ 3) in the y

2).
kquads Number of quadrature points (1 ≤ kquads ≤ 3) in the z

2).
Example: 00
CORNER NEWTRAN 3 3 3 00
2.2.12.2 Fault Connections from Corner-Point Data (CORTOL)
CORTOL tola tolt tolpv tolpn toltt tolvb
Definitions: 00

tola Tolerance for relative overlap area for corner-point faults.

When LGR is on or CORP data is read, tola is the
absolute overlap area, sq. ft. (sq m). Default is 1.E-3.
tolt Tolerance for absolute transmissibility cutoff for corner-

point faults, rb-cp/day/psi (cm-cp/day/kPa). Default is
1.E-8 rb-cp/day/psi.
tolpv Tolerance for pore volume cutoff, rb (m3). Pore volumes

in cells with calculated values less than tolpv are set to
zero. In VIP-COMP or VIP-ENCORE, zero pore volume
cells are inactive. OVER/VOVER of pore volumes are
applied after this check. Default is 0.
tolpn Tolerance for determining if corner-point gridblock

corner points are in vertical contact, ft (m). If the
difference in depth between the corner points at the top of
layer n and the bottom of layer n-1 is less than tolpn it is
assumed layer n and n-1 are in contact and a non-zero z-
direction transmissibility is calculated. Default is 1.E-4
ft.
toltt Tolerance for thermal transmissibility cutoff for corner-

point faults. Default is 1.E-8 BTU/DAY-DEG.F (2.198 x
10-10 W/DEG.C). Enter in VIP-THERM only.
tolvb Tolerance for block volume cutoff, rb(m3). Total volume

and pore volume in cells with calculated total volume
less than tolvb are set to zero. In VIP-THERM, zero total
volume cells are inactive. Enter in VIP-THERM only.
The CORTOL card is used to control under what conditions block connections
will be generated from corner-point data. If a block connection value is less than
one or more of the tolerances, a connection is not calculated. 00
Examples: 00
To change the overlap, transmissibility, and pore volume tolerances to

1.E-2, 1.E-7, and 100, respectively: 00
CORTOL 1.E-2 1.E-7 100 00
NOTE: The CORTOL data must be in put in the order shown, but may truncate at
any point after tolt.
2.2.12.3 Data Checking Corner-Point Grid Data (CORCHK)
The program automatically checks to make sure that each face of each gridblock
projects as a convex quadrilateral on to an average plane "parallel" to the face.

Faces that fail the convexity condition are checked for the angle between each of
the pair of opposite sides. If any angle is larger than 90 degrees a warning message
is printed. The check is performed initially excluding blocks with zero porosity.
After the pore volume has been calculated the check is repeated for blocks with
non-zero pore volume. The CORCHK card allows the user to control the amount
of printout. 00
The program checks that x coordinates of corner points (XCORN array) do not
decrease with increasing i index. The optional keyword NOX can be used to
bypass this check. 00
The program checks that y coordinates of corner points (YCORN array) do not
increase with increasing j index. The optional keyword NOY can be used to
bypass this check. 00
CORCHK (nblocks) (NOX) (NOY)
Definition: 00
nblocks The maximum number of blocks for which detailed

warning messages are printed. Regardless of the value of
nblocks, a summary line is printed that shows the total
number of blocks that violate the convexity and angle
conditions simultaneously. Default is 20.
NOX No checking of x coordinate increasing order.
NOY No checking of y coordinate decreasing order.
Example: 00
CORCHK 300 00
2.2.13 Dual Porosity with Optional Dual Permeability (VIP-DUAL) (Not

available with VIP-THERM)
2.2.13.1 Dual-Porosity/Permeability Option (DUAL)
This card invokes the dual porosity/permeability option. Two distinct options are
available in VIP-DUAL. By default this option models the flow of fluids in two
continuous media which represent the matrix rock and fractures. Exchange of
fluids between the fractures and matrix rock is based on the Warren and Root
theory and includes the effects of imbibition and gravity drainage. 00
Alternatively, a dual porosity/single permeability option may be selected which

assumes that the fractures alone are a continuous media and the matrix rock exists

only as a source or sink for reservoir fluids. While less general than the full dual
porosity/dual permeability approach, this option can result in a substantial
decrease of computer time. 00
The dual porosity/permeability option requires extra data to be supplied to the

simulator. The minimum extra data required is: 00
1. Saturation tables for fractures
2. Fracture array data (porosity, permeability)
3. Matrix block size
4. Surface tension ratio tables (see Section 4.15.1).
DUAL (POR) (SWAPMF) (TEXORG)
Definition: 00
POR Alpha label that invokes the dual porosity/single

permeability option. By default the dual porosity/
dual permeability option is invoked.
SWAPMF Alpha label used to properly simulate dual porosity

reservoirs that are not fractured in some regions. Only
applicable with the single permeability option.
TEXORG Invokes the original method for calculating the matrix/

fracture exchange transmissibilities. The default is to use
the equation described by Coats, reference 53 of the
Technical Reference Manual.
Example: 00
C INITIAL DATE
DATE 23 6 1983
C DUAL POROSITY
DUAL 00
2.2.13.2 Matrix Pseudo Capillary Pressure (PSEUDO)
VIP-DUAL accounts accurately for the effects of imbibition and gravity drainage
from matrix gridblocks that contain many matrix blocks by invoking an automatic
calculation of matrix pseudo capillary pressure. 00
For water-oil imbibitions, the calculation assumes an equilibrium distribution of

saturations in each of the matrix blocks and then calculates, for each gridblock, a
table of average gridblock saturation versus pseudo capillary pressure at the block

center by varying the fluid contact between the top of the gridblock and the
bottom of the gridblock. 00
A smooth curve of pseudo capillary pressure is produced by integrating the

saturations over a number of columns of matrix blocks displaced areally relative
to one another. 00
Gas-oil gravity drainage is modeled using either a method which is parallel to that
described for the water-oil imbibitions above, or Coats’ method (Reference 29).
Coats’ method requires additional data as described in Section 4.15. 00
The PSEUDO card allows the user to change the various parameters associated
with these calculations. 00
PSEUDO (NOCOATS) (ncol) (PRINT) (nsmtab) (INTSW)
Definitions: 00
NOCOATS For gas-oil matrix-fracture exchange, use the method

parallel to that of water-oil imbibition. If not specified,
the default is to use Coats’ method (Reference 29) for
gas-oil matrix-fracture exchange.
ncol Number of columns of matrix blocks used in the pseudo

capillary pressure calculation. Default is 1.
PRINT Prints to Fortran Unit 28 the internally generated pseudo

capillary pressures that are used in the matrix-fracture
flow. If not specified, the default is to not print the
pseudo capillary pressure.
nsmtab Number of saturation entries in the pseudo capillary

pressure tables. Default is 10.
INTSW Integrate water-oil capillary pressure over matrix blocks

above the water-oil contact. Default SW = SWC above
water-oil contact. Gas-oil capillary pressure is always
integrated above the gas-oil contact.
Example: 00
To use 10 entry pseudo Pc tables based on 5 columns and to print the

generated pseudo Pc tables. 00
PSEUDO NOCOATS 5 PRINT 10 00
NOTE: The data on the PSEUDO card is order-dependent. Except for the COATS/
NOCOATS keyword, all previous fields must be entered to specify a later

one. The COATS/NOCOATS keyword may be omitted entirely if COATS

is to be used.
2.2.13.3 Oil-Gas Phase Diffusivities (DIFF)
The DIFF card is used to enter values of oil phase and gas phase diffusivities.
These are used to compute mass transfer between fracture and matrix via the
mechanism of molecular diffusion. The diffusion calculation is not used for
matrix-matrix or fracture-fracture mass transfer. If the DIFF card is omitted, no
diffusive mass transfer will take place. 00
DIFF diffg diffo
Definitions: 00
diffg Gas phase diffusivity, sq. ft./day (sq.cm./sec.).
diffo Oil phase diffusivity, sq. ft./day (sq. cm./sec.).
NOTE: The oil and gas phase diffusivities are converted into mass transfer
coefficients using the matrix block shape factors (Section 5.36.2 and
5.36.3) and gridblock dimensions:
TDg = (diffg)*(sigmad)*(Δx Δy Δz)

TDo = (diffo)*(sigmad)*(Δx Δy Δz)
Alternatively, TDg and TDo may be entered directly via the TDIFFG and
TDIFFO arrays (Section 5.36.2 and 5.36.3).
Example: 00
For gas diffusivity of 1 sq. ft/day and no oil diffusivity: 00
DIFF 1 0 00
2.2.14 Fluid Tracking (Not available in VIP-THERM)
2.2.14.1 Hydrocarbon Tracking Option (TRACK)
TRACK nfl
Definition: 00
nfl Number of tracked fluids.

The TRACK card is used to invoke the fluid tracking option and to define the
number of tracked fluids. 00
Example: 00
When tracking six fluid Types 00
TRACK 6 00
2.2.14.2 Names of Tracked Hydrocarbons (NAMES)
The TRACK card must precede the NAMES card. 00
The NAMES card is used to assign alphanumeric names to the tracked fluids. 00
NAMES iflnm1 iflnm2 . . . iflnmnfl
Definition: 00
iflnm Tracked fluid name. The first character in the name must
be alphabetic unless the name is immediately preceded
by the character #. Only the first six (6) characters of the
name are retained.
NOTE: The number of iflnm names must equal the number of tracked fluids.
Example: 00
See the OILTRF and GASTRF arrays for specification of initialtracked

fluid type. 00
2.2.14.3 Transition Block Assignments (CONTACT)
CONTACT nflup nfldwn (resoil)
Definitions: 00
nflup Number of the tracked hydrocarbon fluid assigned to the

oil above the gas-oil contact in transition blocks.
nfldwn Number of the tracked fluid assigned to the oil below the
gas-oil contact in transition blocks.
resoil Residual oil saturation used to calculate the fraction (F)

of the transition block oil located below the gas-oil

contact, fraction. Default is to use the block value of the

residual oil saturation. The formula for the fraction is:
F = ((S(o) - S*(or))(1-S(w))) / (S(o) (1-S(w) - S*(or)))
The CONTACT card is used to invoke the special option of assigning oil in
transition blocks to two tracked fluids. 00
Example: 00
If the RELICT and BLACK Oil are tracked fluids 1 and 2 respectively,
and GOC is near the bottom of the grid block: 00
CONTACT 1 2 0.077 00
2.2.14.4 Water Tracking Option (TRACKW)
The TRACKW card is used to invoke the water tracking option and to define the
number of tracked water types. This feature is available with the IMPES
formulation option only. 00
TRACKW nwtrk nsitu
Definition: 00
nwtrk Number of tracked water types (maximum 6).
nsitu Index to the water type to be used for tracking the insitu
water.
2.2.14.5 Names of Tracked Water Types (NAMESW)
The TRACKW card must precede the NAMESW card. 00
The NAMESW card is used to assign alphanumeric names to the tracked water
types. 00
NAMESW tknamw1 tknamw2 ... tknamwnwtrk
Definition: 00
tknamw Tracked water type name, maximum of eight (8)

characters. The first character in the name must be
alphabetic unless the name is immediately preceded by
the character #.

NOTE: The number of tknamw names must equal the number of tracked water
types.

2.2.15 Todd and Longstaff Miscible Displacement (Not available in VIP-

THERM)
2.2.15.1 Miscible Option Specifications (MIS)
MIS (gridname1)...(gridnamei) omegavomegad imis sorm beta (CDPKRH)
Definitions: 00
gridname Names of grids to be assigned the values on this card. If

this list only contains the keyword ALL, or no grid
names are provided, then all grid refinements will be
assigned these values.
omegav Value of the mixing parameter in viscosity calculations.
omegad Value of the mixing parameter in density calculations.
imis A flag for the effective density calculation. A value of 1

causes the normal quarter power mixing rule to be used.
A value of 2 selects a linear mixing procedure.
sorm The residual oil saturation to miscible flood.
beta The water blocking factor. The value must be greater than
zero.
CDPKRH Keyword to invoke interpolation option for miscible

hydrocarbon relative permeability. The krow curve will
be used for miscible hydrocarbon if this keyword is
omitted.
Input for the miscible option, in addition to the MIS and the ALPHA cards, is
discussed in the Tabular Data section and the Matrix Grid Data Array section. The
miscible option contains both a three-component (the original Todd and
Longstaff) option and a four-component option. To select the three component
(water, oil and solvent) option, two hydrocarbon components must be selected on
the grid dimension card (NX). To select the four component (water, oil, gas and
solvent) option, three hydrocarbon components must be selected. The miscible
option is compatible with both the IMPES formulation and the implicit
formulation. 00
2.2.15.2 Miscibility Transition Zone (ALPHA)
ALPHA (gridname1)...(gridnamei)pmis1 pmis2 ssmin

or 00
ALPHA (gridname1)...(gridnamei)dpmis
Definitions: 00
gridname Names of grids to be assigned the values on this card. If

this list only contains the keyword ALL, or no grid
names are provided, then all grid refinements will be
assigned these values.
pmis1 The lower-bound miscibility pressure.
pmis2 The upper-bound miscibility pressure.
ssmin The minimum solvent pseudo-saturation to maintain

miscibility.
dpmis The size of the transition zone (i.e. pmis2-pmis1).
The user can turn on the miscible transition zone option by entering an ALPHA
card. If this card is omitted, a first contact miscible process will be represented. In
a first contact miscible process, to avoid the solution gas and oil being treated as
miscible when the solvent is not present (i.e., during depletion or waterflood), an
ALPHA card with zero values for pmis1 and pmis2 and a non-zero value for
ssmin must be input. 00
There are no default values for pmis1, pmis2, ssmin, and dpmis. The employment
of Format (1) automatically invokes a miscible-immiscible transition where the
interpolation parameter increases linearly between the lower- and the upper-bound
miscibility pressures, provided that the solvent pseudo-saturation is larger than the
value of ssmin. Using the IMPES formulation, the value of pmis1 must be less
than or equal to pmis2, and the user may specify a step function for interpolation
by entering identical values for pmis1 and pmis2. However, if the fully implicit
formulation is to be used, the value of pmis2 must be greater than pmis1, i.e., a
step function for interpolation (with pmis1 = pmis2) is not allowed. Todd and
Longstaff suggest that a value of 0.01 for the parameter ssmin is sufficient to
account for the loss of miscibility. 00
Conversely, the employment of Format (2) above automatically invokes the

second option for the miscible-immiscible transition where the miscibility
pressure is specified as a function of the total hydrocarbon composition. The user
is required to enter a two-dimensional (four-component case) or a one-
dimensional (three-component case) miscibility pressure table after the solvent
property table input. Using the IMPES formulation, the size of the transition zone,

dpmis, can have a value of zero to model a step function. On the other hand,
dpmis must be greater than 0 if the fully implicit formulation is used. 00

2.2.16 Time-Dependent Compressibility - Creep Option (Not available in

VIP-THERM)
See Section 5.39 for an explanation of and how to invoke the creep option. 00
2.2.16.1 Reversible Creep (CREEP)
CREEP REVERSE
Definition: 00
REVERSE Alpha label indicating that creep is reversible. Optional;

default is that creep is irreversible.
2.2.17 Hydraulic Fracture Option (Not available in VIP-THERM)

The purpose of this option is to simulate the performance of a hydraulically
fractured, packed fracture in the first XZ plane of a model, including the effects of
fracture closure and non-Darcy flow within the fracture. The fracture is assumed
to be a vertical fracture, and the simulation involves modelling only one-fourth of
the fracture and one-fourth of the drainage area of the well. The well is assumed to
be adjacent to the (1,1) gridblock column. 00
The grid description must be defined with the DX, DY, DZ, KX arrays, and the
simulator must be run in the fully implicit, single porosity mode. 00
The required data for this option are HYDFRAC and HYDBETA (Section 4.16),
along with appropriate compaction (CMT) tables to define the fracture closure
effects and permeability reduction as a function of pressure. 00
2.2.17.1 Fracture Blocks (HYDFRAC)
HYDFRAC nf
Definition: 00
nf Number of gridblocks in the X direction comprising the

maximum horizontal extend of the fracture.
NOTE: The DY’s for Y=1 should be adjusted to define the tapering half-fracture
widths.
The porosities for gridblocks nf+1 through NX (for Y=1) should be set to
zero.

Fracture closure stress can be simulated using the compaction option, with
a separate table(s) for the fracture gridblocks. The pore volume reduction
factor will also be used to reduce the cross-sectional area in the flow
velocity calculations. The transmissibility reduction factor will also be
used to reduce the original KX for the Beta (turbulence) factor
calculations.
2.2.18 Polymer Injection Option (VIP-POLYMER)

VIP-POLYMER is available as a separately licensed option. 00
2.2.18.1 Initialize for Polymer Injection (POLYMER)
POLYMER
The POLYMER card will initialize the model for polymer injection. By default
the model does not initialize for polymer injection. Initializing for polymer
injection will increase the size of the restart files. 00
The physical properties required to model the polymer transport can be introduced
at any point of the recurrent data in the simulation module, preceding polymer
injection. 00
2.2.19 Thermal Option (VIP-THERM)

VIP-THERM is available as a seperately licensed option. 00
2.2.19.1 THERMAL Card
The THERMAL card is used to invoke VIP-THERM. 00
THERMAL
2.2.19.2 WATIDEAL Card (Compositional Model)
The WATIDEAL card invokes the following assumptions regarding water-oil-

vapor phase behavior:
■ The saturation pressure of an oil-water system is equal to the sum of the

saturation pressures of the oil and water alone at system temperature,
regardless of the relative amounts of oil and water as long as sufficient
quantities of each are present to saturate the vapor.

■ Water mole fraction in the vapor phase yw is given by VPW/P where VPW is
the vapor pressure of water as a function of temperature.
■ Hydrocarbon vapor-liquid equilibrium (using fugacity coefficients or k-

values) is computed at the hydrocarbon partial pressure ( ( l – y w ) ⋅ P ) on a
water-free basis. Vapor phase properties are obtained from internally
tabulated steam properties and water-free hydrocarbon vapor properties using
mixing rules. If k-value options are used, k-values are assumed to be input on
a water-free basis (The k-values are two phase gas-oil values).
In the default method, water is treated as a component in the vapor phase by the
equation of state. Water EOS parameters are internally fixed and were adjusted to
match vapor pressure, steam z-factor, and steam enthalpy along the saturation
curve. Liquid water fugacity coefficient is obtained from an internal table which
contains EOS-predicted values which were adjusted to match the vapor values
along the saturation curve. All other liquid water properties are obtained from
steam tables. Saturation pressure and flash calculations are performed using three
phase algorithms. If k-value options are used, input k-values are assumed to be
three-phase values and are evaluated at total system pressure.
WATIDEAL
2.2.19.3 FLOWS Card
The FLOWS card is required in order to map, print, or write to the spreadsheet
file (in VIP-EXECUTIVE) flow rate arrays or region boundary flow rates or
cumulatives. If all arrays are mapped, flow rate arrays will be mapped only if a
FLOWS card is input. Individual flow rate array names may be specified on the
MAP card only if a FLOWS card is input.
FLOWS

2.2.20 Velocity Dependent Relative Permeability

The following sets of keywords are used to turn on and control the velocity
dependency of relative permeabilities (see options CN and FNDG in EXEC
manual section 6.2). Both capillary number and non-Darcy (Forchheimer) flow
effects may be modeled. 00
The formulation of the velocity dependent models have been developed in the
Department of Petroleum Engineering at Heriot-Watt University under the
directorship of Professor A. Danesh and Professor D. H. Tehrani in a research
project sponsored by the UK Department of Trade and Industry and 11 oil and gas
companies. 00
Velocity dependent effects may be applied to both the production well model and
for flow between gridblocks. 00
Parachor values must be input in the equation of state property tables (see section
4.4.3). 00
⎛ ⎞
⎛ CN ⎞ ⎜ WELL ⎟
VELCTY ⎜ ⎟ ⎜ FIELD ⎟ ⎛ SAND ⎞
NDARCY ⎝ CARBON⎠
⎝ BOTH ⎠ ⎜
⎝ ALL ⎠
⎟
(RPCNO ⎛ NCBO⎞ (MO) (NO) )

⎝ VG ⎠
⎛ ⎛ N cbg ⎞ ⎞
⎜ ⎜ Vg
⎟ ( mo ) ( no ) ⎟ 00
⎝ ⎝ ⎠ ⎠
(RPCNG ⎛ NCBG⎞ (MG) (NG) )

⎝ VG ⎠
00
⎛ ⎛ N cbg ⎞ ⎞
⎜ ⎜ Vg
⎟ ( mg ) ( ng ) ⎟ 00
⎝ ⎝ ⎠ ⎠
(NDARCY (B0) (B1) (B2) (B3) (B4) (B5) ) 00
( (b0) (b1) (b2) (b3) (b4) (b5) ) 00
Definitions: 00
VELCTY: Turns on velocity dependency of relative permeabilities.

No other keywords are required unless default
parameters are to be re-defined.
CN Calculate only capillary number dependency.
NDARCY Calculate only non-Darcy effect.

BOTH Calculate combined capillary number and non-Darcy

effect (default).
WELL Apply velocity dependent calculations only at the well

(default).
FIELD Apply velocity dependent calculations only for inter-

gridblock flow.
ALL Apply velocity dependent calculations both at the well

and between gridblocks.
SAND Use sandstone default parameters (default).
CARBON Use carbonate default parameters.
RPCNO, RPCNG, and NDARCY are optional input fields that can be used to
override the default parameters. They are discussed below.
RPCNO
Ncbo Threshold value for oil phase capillary number

dependency.
vg Superficial gas velocity to be used for calculating the

threshold value of capillary number dependency.
mo Exponent of residual oil saturation factor.
no Exponent of weighting factor for oil phase relative

permeability.
RPCNG
Ncbg Threshold value for gas phase capillary number

dependency.
vg Superficial gas velocity to be used for calculating the

threshold value of capillary number dependency.
mg Exponent of residual gas saturation factor.
ng Exponent of weighting factor for gas phase relative

permeability.
See the Technical Reference manual for a full explanation of these

parameters.

Examples 00
1. Use all default parameters:
VELCTY
This is equivalent to:
VELCTY BOTH WELL SAND
Explicitly declaring all parameters, this is also equivalent to
VELCTY BOTH WELL SAND

RPCNO VG MO NO
10. 0 0.35
RPCNG VG MG NG
10. 35. 0.35
NDARCY BO B1 B2 B3 B4 B5
0.001524 -0.5 -5.5 -0.5 -2.99 -4.422
2. Apply only capillary number dependency, using default parameters, both

at the wells and between gridblocks:
VELCTY CN ALL
3. Apply both capillary number effects and non-Darcy effects at the well
only, but using carbonate default parameters. Also, selectively modify
some of the non-Darcy exponents, removing the dependency on
interfacial tension.
VELCTY CARBON
NDARCY B1 B3 B5
-0.7 0.7 0.
When velocity dependency is applied to wells, the condensate banking option is
automatically activated for every production well. The parameters on the
condensate banking control cards are ignored, except for the number of intervals
to be used for the numerical integration. By default, four intervals are used in
each phase region. Condensate banking can be used with or without velocity
effects. 00
4. To use 20 intervals for the numerical integration, input the following

keyword entry in the well data for VIP-EXEC:
CNDBNK TRAP 20

2.2.21 Change Units for Solution Gas-Oil Ratio (RSM)

This keyword indicates that the units for solution gas oil ratio in VIP-CORE only
are multiplied by a thousand, i.e.: 00
■ normal field units of SCF/STB will be input as MSCF/STB,
■ normal metric units of SM3/SM3 will be input as KSM3/SM3,
■ normal lab units of stcc/stcc will be input as mstcc/stcc.
RSM
2.2.22 Upscaled Permeabilities (UPSCALE)

The UPSCALE card is used to define the method of upscaling permeabilities
when gridblocks are COARSENed (Section 8.1). 00
UPSCALE param1 . . . paramn
Definitions: 00
param Alpha label indicating the permeability upscaling

methods to be used:
In the following descriptions, upper bound refers to slices

in series and lower bound refers to tubes in parallel.
KWELLPI Upscaled well permeabilities are based

on bulk volume weighted averages of
well productivity indices. When
KWELLPI is not specified, the upscaled
well permeabilities are consistent with
the block upscaling methods.
KXHARM X-direction block upscaling method

controlled by harmonic average of upper
and lower bounds. This is the default
method.
KYHARM Y-direction block upscaling method

method.
KZHARM Z-direction block upscaling method



method.
KXGEOM X-direction block upscaling method

controlled by geometric average of
upper and lower bounds.
KYGEOM Y-direction block upscaling method

KZGEOM Z-direction block upscaling method

KXARITH X-direction block upscaling method

controlled by arithmetic average of
KYARITH Y-direction block upscaling method

KZARITH Z-direction block upscaling method

KXUB X-direction block upscaling method

controlled by the upper bound.
KYUB Y-direction block upscaling method

KZUB Z-direction block upscaling method

KXLB X-direction block upscaling method

controlled by the lower bound.
KYLB Y-direction block upscaling method

KZLB Z-direction block upscaling method

00


Chapter
3
00000 Print Control
3.1 Introduction
Because of the large volume of data that can be generated, PRINT cards
should be used judiciously.
Three different print options control processed initialization data printing. (1) The
NONE option is the default. The NONE option is used to suppress printing of the
processed data. If any errors occur on the PRINT cards, the NONE option will be
activated. (2) The ALL option is used to print all processed tables and arrays. (3)
Printing of each individual group of data can be separately controlled by directly
specifying the group type and the desired information to be printed.
The processed initialization input data are divided into the following groups:
equilibrium data, compositional data, tables, input arrays, coefficient arrays, fault
descriptions, influx data, initialization arrays, corner-point arrays, separation data,
and region data.
3.2 General
3.2.1 Print Everything (ALL)
PRINT ALL
Definition:
ALL All of the processed tables and arrays are printed.
3.2.2 Print Nothing (NONE)
PRINT NONE
Definition:
NONE None of the tables or arrays are printed. This is the

default if no PRINT cards are read or if any PRINT card
errors occur.
R5000.0.1 Print Control 3-161

3.3 Individual Group Print Controls

Printing each individual group of data can be separately controlled by directly
specifying the group type and the desired information to be printed. If no PRINT
card is specified for any given group, no data pertaining to that group is printed. If
any errors occur on the PRINT cards, the NONE option is activated.
To continue the table or array names on a PRINT card, list the remaining table or
array names on successive cards. Do not repeat the PRINT label. Vertically
aligned data indicate a choice; these data are mutually exclusive.
3.3.1 Input Array Printing (PRINT ARRAYS)

DO NOT USE PARENTHESES ON THE DATA CARD.
The ARRAYS option controls the printing of the input arrays of the grid data
(Section 5.1) as specified, after any modifications have been applied. If no PRINT
ARRAYS card is read, none of the arrays that were read are printed. Array names
can be used with the E as described below. If EXCEPT is omitted, only the arrays
listed are printed. The array names can appear in any order. The parentheses
indicate that the labels within them are optional.
array 1 (array 2 ...)
ALL
PRINT ARRAYS
NONE
EXCEPT array 1 (array 2 ...)
Definitions:
ALL All of the arrays that were read are printed.
NONE None of the input array data is printed. This has the same
result as not reading a PRINT ARRAYS card.
EXCEPT All of the input arrays are printed except those listed. At
least one array name must be given.
array The alpha label of any array names that are contained in
the array data portion of the input stream (see Section
5.1).
Example:
PRINT ARRAYS DX DY KX
3-162 Print Control R5000.0.1

3.3.2 Coefficient Array Printing (PRINT COEFS)

The COEFS option controls the printing of the coefficient (calculation grid
property) arrays as specified, after overreads are applied. If no PRINT COEFS
card is read, none of the coefficients are printed. Coefficient names can be used
with the EXCEPT option as described below. If EXCEPT is omitted, only those
coefficients listed are printed. The coefficient names can appear in any order. The
parentheses indicate that the labels within them are optional. Sufficient
coefficients to completely describe a model (both corner-point and non-corner-
point) may be output to a separate file in VIP-CORE input format using the
optional FILE keyword. In a single porosity conversion 5-point, unfaulted
problem these are MDEPTH, PV, TX, TY, and TZ. In a faulted problem the fault
connections are output using the FTRANS keyword.
array 1 (array 2 ...)
ALL
PRINT COEFS NONE
EXCEPT array 1 (array 2 ...)
FILE
Arrays
DZNET DZBNET NETGRS MDEPTH PV TX TY TZ TXYL TXYR TR

TTHETA MULTX MULTY MULTZ DX DY DZ TOP TMX TMY TMZ TMXYL
TMXYR TMR TMTH
MDEPF PVF TEX TXYLF TXYRF TDIFFG TDIFFO TXF TYF TRF TZF
TTHETF (Dual Porosity Only)
TXT0 TYT0 TZT0 TRT0 TTHT0 (VIP-THERM Only)
Definitions:
ALL All of the coefficients are printed.
NONE None of the coefficients are printed. This has the same
result as not reading a PRINT COEFS card.
EXCEPT All of the coefficient arrays are printed except those

listed. At least one array name must be given.
FILE Selected coefficients are output to unit 13.
Single porosity, cartesian, geometry.
MDEPTH, PV, TX, TY, TZ

Single porosity radial geometry
MDEPTH, PV, TR, TTHETA, TZ
Single porosity, cartesian 9-point geometry
MDEPTH, PV, TX, TY, TZ, TXYL, TXYR
If faults are present the fault connections are output using

FTRANS.
In a dual porosity case the fracture equivalent of the

above arrays are also written to file.
DZNET Net vertical thickness of each gridblock.
DZBNET Net stratum thickness of each gridblock (measured

perpendicular to the bedding plane).
NETGRS Ratio of net vertical thickness to gross thickness of each

gridblock.
MDEPTH Depth to the center of each gridblock.
PV Pore volume at reference conditions.
TX Transmissibility in the x direction at reference conditions

(Half transmissibilities in the x-direction are also printed
with the LGR option).
TR Transmissibility in the r direction at reference conditions.
TY Transmissibility in the y direction at reference conditions

(Half transmissibilities in the y-direction are also printed
TTHETA Transmissibility in the angular direction at reference

conditions.
TZ Transmissibility in the z direction at reference conditions

(Half transmissibilities in the z-direction are also printed
TXYL Transmissibility in the -x,-y (diagonal) direction at

reference conditions, available only if the nine-point
option is in use.
TXYR Transmissibility in the +x,-y (diagonal) direction at

reference conditions, available only if the nine-point
option is in use.

MULTX Multiplier of transmissibility in the x direction (after

OVER/VOVER cards).
MULTY Multiplier of transmissibility in the y direction (after

OVER/VOVER cards).
MULTZ Multiplier of transmissibility in the z direction (after

OVER/VOVER cards).
DX Block thickness in the x direction. It can be printed only

in corner point geometry models.
DY Block thickness in the y direction. It can be printed only

DZ Block thickness in the z direction. It can be printed only

TOP Depth of a center of top block face. It can be printed only

TMX Multiplier of transmissibility in the x direction (before

OVER/VOVER cards).
TMR Multiplier of transmissibility in the r direction (before

OVER/VOVER cards).
TMY Multiplier of transmissibility in the y direction (before

OVER/VOVER cards).
TMTH Multiplier of transmissibility in the angular direction

(before OVER/VOVER cards).
TMZ Multiplier of transmissibility in the z direction (before

OVER/VOVER cards).
TMXYL Multiplier of transmissibility in the -x, -y (diagonal)

direction (before OVER/VOVER cards), available only if
the nine-point option is in use.
TMXYR Multiplier of transmissibility in the +x, -y (diagonal)

direction (before OVER/VOVER cards), available only if
the nine-point option is in use.
MDEPF Depth to the center of each fracture block.
PVF Fracture pore volume at reference conditions.
TXF Fracture transmissibility in the x direction at reference

conditions.

TRF Fracture transmissibility in the r direction at reference

conditions.
TYF Fracture transmissibility in the y direction at reference

conditions.
TTHETF Fracture transmissibility in the angular direction at

reference conditions.
TZF Fracture transmissibility in the z direction at reference

conditions.
TEX Matrix-fracture exchange transmissibility at reference

conditions.
TXYLF Fracture transmissibility in the -x,-y (diagonal) direction

at reference conditions, available only if the nine-point
option is in use.
TXYRF Fracture transmissibility in the +x,-y (diagonal) direction

at reference conditions, available only if the nine-point
option is in use.
TDIFFG Gas diffusion mass transfer coefficients.
TDIFFO Oil diffusion mass transfer coefficients.
TXT0 Thermal transmissibility in the x direction at reference

conditions.
TRT0 Thermal transmissibility in the r direction at reference

conditions.
TYT0 Thermal transmissibility in the y direction at reference

conditions.
TTHT0 Thermal transmissibility in the angular direction at

reference conditions.
TZT0 Thermal transmissibility in the z direction at reference

conditions.
Examples:
PRINT COEFS PV TX TY TZ

3.3.3 Compositional Data Printing (PRINT COMP)

The COMP option controls the printing of PVT property data (Section 4.4). If no
PRINT COMP card is read, the compositional data are not printed.
ALL
PRINT COMP
NONE
Definitions:
ALL All of the PVT compositional data are printed.
NONE None of the PVT compositional data are printed. This has
the same result as not reading a PRINT COMP card.
Example:
PRINT COMP ALL
3.3.4 Corner-Point Data Printing (PRINT CORNER)

The CORNER option controls the printing of corner-point data and the writing of
a formatted corner-point output file (FORTRAN Unit 12). The parentheses
indicate that the labels within them are optional.
( PRINT ) ( FILE )
PRINT CORNER ALL
NONE
Definitions:
ALL The corner-point data are printed and a corner-point

output file is written (Default, no corner-point data
printed or output).
PRINT Prints the corner-point coordinates for each block in

tabular form.
FILE Writes a formatted output file of corner-point data that

may be used for post-processing.

NONE No corner point data are printed or written to the output

files.
Example:
PRINT CORNER PRINT
3.3.5 Equilibrium Data Printing (PRINT EQUIL)
The EQUIL option controls the printing of the equilibrium data (Section 4.2),
including saturation pressure tables if input. If no PRINT EQUIL card is read, the
equilibrium data are not printed.
ALL
PRINT EQUIL
NONE
Definitions:
ALL All of the equilibrium data are printed.
NONE None of the equilibrium data are printed. This has the
same result as not reading a PRINT EQUIL card.
Example:
PRINT EQUIL ALL
3.3.6 Fault Data Printing (PRINT FAULTS)

The FAULTS option controls the printing of fault data (Section 6.1) in tabular
form, array form, or both. This card also controls the printing of any PINCHOUT
(Section 2.2.9.1) warning messages. If no PRINT FAULTS card is read, none of
the data are printed. If EXCEPT is omitted, the data are printed only in the form(s)
specified. The parentheses indicate that the labels within them are optional.
( TABLES ) (ARRAYS)
PRINT FAULTS ALL

NONE
EXCEPT (TABLES) (ARRAYS)

Definitions:
ALL The fault data are printed in both tabular form and array
form.
NONE None of the fault data are printed. This has the same
result as not reading a PRINT FAULTS card.
EXCEPT All of the data are printed except those specified. At least
one name must follow the EXCEPT.
TABLES Lists the connecting gridblocks across the fault, the

shared thickness of each "connection", and the
transmissibility of the "connection". (For the corner-point
option, only the transmissibility is printed.) TABLES
also prints PINCHOUT warning messages.
ARRAYS Shows the location of the fault and the amount of fault
displacement in array form. (Not applicable to the corner-
point option.) Also prints the IFID arrays if named faults
have been defined.
Example:
PRINT FAULTS TABLES
3.3.7 Influx Data Printing (PRINT INFLUX)

The INFLUX option controls the printing of the tabular and/or array influx data
(Section 10.2) as specified. If no PRINT INFLUX card is read, none of the influx
data are printed. If EXCEPT is omitted, the data are printed only in the form(s)
specified. The parentheses indicate that the labels within them are optional.
( TABLES ) (ARRAYS)
PRINT INFLUX ALL

NONE
EXCEPT (TABLES) (ARRAYS)
Definitions:
ALL Both the tabular and array influx data are printed.
NONE None of the influx data are printed. This has the same
result as not reading a PRINT INFLUX card.

EXCEPT All of the data are printed except those specified. At least
one name must follow the EXCEPT.
TABLES The influx data as expressed in tabular form.
ARRAYS The influx data as expressed in array form.
Example:
PRINT INFLUX ARRAYS
3.3.8 Initialization Arrays

The INIT option controls the printing of requested initialization (calculated initial
conditions) arrays as specified. If no PRINT INIT card is read, none of the
initialization arrays are printed. Initialization array names can be used with the
EXCEPT option as described below. If EXCEPT is omitted, only those arrays
listed are printed. Array names can appear in any order. The parentheses indicate
that the labels within them are optional.
table 1 (table 2 ...)
ALL
PRINT INIT
NONE
EXCEPT table 1 (table 2 ...)
Arrays
P PSAT SO SW SG VISO VISG DENO DENG VF XI YI ZI PV KH PDAT SOM

SWM PCSW PCSG IFT API TX TY TR TTHETA TZ TXYL TXYR SGR SGRO
SWRO SGM OMGV OMGD TEMP PWSAT WCO2 SCLFCT TCTBD BTBD
PF PSATF SOF SWF SGF DENOF DENGF VISOF VISGF VFF XIF YIF ZIF
PVF KHF PDATF SOMF SWMF PCSWF PCSGF IFTF TXF TYF TRF
TTHETF TZF TEX TXYLF TXYRF SGMF PWSATF WCO2F (Fractured Cases
Only)
TEMP VISW DENW HL HV HW CPRT0 (VIP-THERM Only)
Definitions:
ALL All of the initialization arrays are printed.
NONE None of the initialization arrays are printed. This has the
same result as not reading a PRINT INIT card.

EXCEPT All of the initialization arrays are printed except those

listed. At least one array name must be given.
P Initial pressure.
PSAT Initial saturation pressure.
SO Initial oil saturation.
SW Initial water saturation.
SG Initial gas saturation.
VISO Initial oil viscosity.
VISG Initial gas viscosity.
DENO Initial oil density.
DENG Initial gas density.
VF Initial vapor fraction.
XI Initial mole fraction of all components in the liquid

phase.
YI Initial mole fraction of all components in the vapor

phase.
ZI Initial overall hydrocarbon mole fraction of all

components.
PV Pore volume at initial conditions.
KH Permeability thickness at initial conditions.
PDAT Initial datum pressure (datum depth defined by the

IEQUIL card).
SOM Initial normalized mobile oil saturation.
SWM Initial normalized mobile water saturation.
RS Solution gas-oil ratio.
RV Solution oil-gas ratio.
PCSW Water-oil capillary pressure adjustment, meaningful only

if the integrated saturation initialization algorithm is used
for equilibrium initialization, or saturations have been
overread.

PCSG Gas-oil capillary pressure adjustment, meaningful only if

the integrated saturation initialization algorithm is used
for equilibrium initialization, or saturations have been
overread.
IFT Interfacial tension, available only if the IFT option is in

use.
API Initial API gravity of the liquid phase, available only if

the PVT interpolation option is in use.
TX X direction transmissibility at initial conditions.
TY Y direction transmissibility at initial conditions.
TZ Z direction transmissibility at initial conditions.
TR R direction transmissibility at initial conditions.
TTHETA Angular direction transmissibility at initial conditions.
TXYL (-x,-y) direction transmissibility at initial conditions,

available only if the nine-point option is in use.
TXYR (+x,-y) direction transmissibility at initial conditions,

available only if the nine-point option is in use.
SGR Calculated residual gas saturation (MOBILE fluid

option).
SGRO Calculated gas saturation at residual oil (MOBILE fluid

option).
SWRO Calculated water saturation at residual oil (MOBILE

fluid option).
SGM Initial normalized mobile gas saturation.
OMGV Mixing parameter for effective viscosity.
OMGD Mixing parameter for effective density.
TEMP Temperature, if variable temperature is in use.
PWSAT Initial saturation pressure for water (CO2 option).
WCO2 Initial CO2 dissolved in water.
SCLFCT Scaling factor for turbidite reservoir option.
TCTBD Time constant for turbidite reservoir option.
BTBD Shale capacity for turbidite reservoir option.

PF Initial fracture pressure.
PSATF Initial fracture saturation pressure.
SOF Initial fracture oil saturation.
SWF Initial fracture water saturation.
SGF Initial fracture gas saturation.
DENOF Initial fracture oil density.
DENGF Initial fracture gas density.
VISOF Initial fracture oil viscosity.
VISGF Initial fracture gas viscosity.
VFF Initial fracture vapor fraction.
XIF Initial fracture mole fraction of all components in the

liquid phase.
YIF Initial fracture mole fraction of all components in the

vapor phase.
ZIF Initial fracture overall hydrocarbon mole fraction of all

components.
PVF Fracture pore volume at initial conditions.
KHF Fracture permeability thickness at initial conditions.
PDATF Initial fracture datum pressure (datum depth defined by

the IEQUIL card).
SOMF Initial normalized fracture mobile oil saturation.
SWMF Initial normalized fracture mobile water saturation.
PCSWF Fracture water-oil capillary pressure adjustment,

available only if the integrated saturation initialization
algorithm is used for equilibrium initialization.
PCSGF Fracture gas-oil capillary pressure adjustment, available

only if the integrated saturation initialization algorithm is
used for equilibrium initialization.
IFTF Fracture interfacial tension, available only if the IFT

option is in use.
TXF X direction fracture transmissibility at initial conditions.

TYF Y direction fracture transmissibility at initial conditions.
TZF Z direction fracture transmissibility at initial conditions.
TRF R direction fracture transmissibility at initial conditions.
TTHETF Angular direction fracture transmissibility at initial

conditions.
TEX Matrix-fracture exchange transmissibility at initial

conditions.
TXYLF (-x,-y) direction fracture transmissibility at initial

conditions, available only if the nine-point option is in
use.
TXYRF (+x,-y) direction fracture transmissibility at initial

conditions, available only if the nine-point option is in
use.
SGMF Initial normalized fracture mobile gas saturation.
PWSATF Initial fracture saturation pressure for water (CO2

option).
WCO2F Initial fracture CO2 dissolved in water.
TEMP Temperature.
VISW Liquid water phase viscosity.
DENW Liquid water phase density.
HL Oil phase enthalpy.
HV Gas phase enthalpy.
HW Water phase enthalpy.
CPRT0 Total reference gridblock heat capacity.
Examples:
PRINT INIT EXCEPT SOM

3.3.9 Region Data

The REGION option controls the printing of output region names, separator
battery assignments and region datum depths (Section 9.1). If no PRINT REGION
card is read, no region data are printed. Region data are printed with PRINT
REGION only if this optional data is input.
ALL
PRINT REGION
NONE
Example:
PRINT REGION ALL
3.3.10 Separation Data
The SEPARATOR option controls the printing of all input separator data (Section
4.8 and Section 4.9) and derived separator properties. If no PRINT SEPARATOR
card is read, none of the data are printed. Default separator properties are printed
only if no separation data are input, the separation data print flag is on, and the
derived PVT properties print flag for VIP-ENCORE (Section 3.3.11) or the
compositional data print flag for VIP-COMP (Section 3.3.3) is on. When using
BOTABS PVT data in VIP-ENCORE, default separator properties will appear as
part of the derived PVT properties output if printed.
ALL
PRINT SEPARATOR
NONE
Example:
PRINT SEPARATOR ALL
3.3.11 Tabular Data - Saturation and PVT tables

The TABLES option controls the printing of the saturation tables and PVT tables
as specified. If no PRINT TABLES card is read, none of the tables are printed.
The table names can be used with the EXCEPT option as described below. If
EXCEPT is omitted, only the tables listed are printed. The table names can appear
in any order. The parentheses indicate that the labels within them are optional.

table 1 (table 2 ...)
ALL
PRINT TABLES
NONE
EXCEPT table 1 (table 2 ...)
Table Names
SWT RSWT SGT RSGT KR3P COMPACT RCOMPACT PROFILE
PVT DPVT RPVT (Black-Oil Only)
CO2 RCO2 (Compositional only)
SWTF RSWTF SGTF RSGTF KR3PF SIGT (Dual Porosity Only)
Definitions:
ALL All tables (except RPVT and RCO2) are printed.
NONE None of the tabular data are printed. This has the same
result as not reading a PRINT TABLES card.
EXCEPT All of the tables (except RPVT and RCO2) are printed
except those listed. At least one table name must be
given.
SWT Water saturation tables.
RSWT Reconstructed water saturation tables.
SGT Gas saturation tables.
RSGT Reconstructed gas saturation tables.
KR3P Three phase oil relative permeability tables.
PVT PVT or K-value tables.
PROFILE PVT profile table vs. depth
DPVT Derived PVT tables.
RPVT Reconstructed PVT or K-value tables. These tables will

be printed only if the RPVT keyword is input.
COMPACT Compaction tables.
RCOMPACT Reconstructed compaction tables.

CO2 Carbon dioxide solubility tables.
RCO2 Reconstructed carbon dioxide solubility tables. These

tables will be printed only if the RCO2 keyword is input.
SWTF Water saturation tables (fractures).
RSWTF Reconstructed water saturation tables (fractures).
SGTF Gas saturation tables (fractures).
RSGTF Reconstructed gas saturation tables (fractures).
KR3PF Three phase oil relative permeability tables (fractures).
SIGT Tension vs. pressure table (pseudo matrix capillary

pressure).
Examples:
PRINT TABLES ALL

PRINT TABLES KR3P
3.4 Rescaled Saturation Tables

The PRSTAB/PRSTABF keywords MUST follow the SWT/SGT table data.
3.4.1 Print Rescaled Saturation Tables

The saturation-dependent tables (SWT and SGT section 4.3) can be rescaled and
printed using a user supplied set of endpoints. A rescaled three-phase oil relative
permeability table will also be printed if requested with the PRINT TABLES
KR3P option described in section 3.3.11. These prints are for diagnostic purpose
only and do not effect the simulation results.
PRSTAB ENDPOINT1 (ENDPOINT2 ...)

nt endpoint1 (endpoint2 ...)
( repeat values for different rescaled endpoint print tables )
Endpoint Names:
SWL SWR SWRO SWU KROLW KRWRO (SWT tables)
SGL SGR SGRO SGU KROLG KRGRO (SGT tables)
Definitions:
nt The table number (rock type) to be rescaled and printed.

SWL Connate (minimum) water saturation.
SWR Residual water saturation.
SWRO Water saturation at residual oil saturation.
SWU Maximum water saturation.
KROLW Kro at connate water saturation.
KRWRO Krw at residual oil saturation.
SGL Connate (minimum) gas saturation.
SGR Residual gas saturation.
SGRO Gas saturation at residual oil saturation.
SGU Maximum gas saturation.
KROLG Kro at connate gas saturation (equal to KROLW).
KRGRO Krg at residual oil saturation.
Examples:
PRSTAB SWL SWR SWRO SWU SGL SGR SGRO SGU
1 .05 .1 .8 1.0 0.0 .03 .65 .95
1 .05 .1 .8 1.0 0.0 .03 .65 .95
2 .1 .1 .7 1.0 0.0 .03 .65 .9
PRSTAB SWR SWRO KRWRO
1 .1 .9 .8
3.4.2 Print Rescaled Fracture Saturation Tables (VIP-DUAL)

The saturation-dependent tables for the fractures (SWTF and SGTF section 4.3)
can be rescaled and printed using a user supplied set of endpoints. This option
works like the one for printing the matrix saturation tables described in section
3.4.1.
PRSTABF ENDPOINT1 (ENDPOINT2 ...)

nt endpoint1 (endpoint2 ...)
( repeat values for different rescaled endpoint print tables )

Endpoint Names:
SWL SWR SWRO SWU KROLW KRWRO (SWT tables)
SGL SGR SGRO SGU KROLG KRGRO ( SGT tables)
Definitions:
Definitions are as given in Section 3.4.1, Print Rescaled Saturation Tables.


Chapter
4
Tables
00000
4.1 Introduction
00 VIP-CORE tabular data must be preceded by the alpha label TABLES.
TABLES
4.2 Equilibrium Tables

00 VIP-CORE can initialize multiple reservoirs, called equilibrium regions, within
the same model (Figure 4-1). The IEQUIL array (Section 5.28) is used to relate
each gridblock to the appropriate equilibrium table (region). If no IEQUIL array is
read, then the entire grid is assumed to lie in Region 1.
Figure 4-1: Multiple Reservoirs in the Same Field
WARNING: When two equilibration regions are in communication, initial

equilibrium cannot be guaranteed.
VIP-CORE initializes to equilibrium conditions on the basis of data found in the

equilibrium table. A vertical profile of reservoir fluid and pressure distributions
assuming gravity-capillary pressure equilibrium is shown in Figure 4-2. Note that
where a phase becomes immobile, the pressure gradient follows the density
gradient of the still-mobile phase. 00
00 The labels on the left side of the figure correspond to specific entries in the
R5000.0.1 Tables 4-181

equilibrium initialization table (Section 4.2.1 and Section 4.2.2). The reference
values of capillary pressure are shown in the right hand figure. VIP-CORE
constructs pressure versus depth tables for each phase and assigns to each
gridblock an oil pressure equal to the oil phase pressure at the depth of the
gridblock center. The difference between phase pressures, capillary pressure, is
then used to compute average saturation values for each gridblock.
Figure 4-2: Equilibrium Initialization
Data for each region are input in one of two ways: (1) with a constant saturation
pressure, Section 4.2.1, or (2) with a variable saturation pressure that is a function
of depth, Section 4.2.2. If one equilibrium region has a constant saturation
pressure while another region has a varying saturation pressure, use the variable
saturation pressure format to enter all of the equilibrium data. 00



a. For isothermal and thermal compositional models, Section 4.4.12.3,

orSection 4.4.12.4.
4-182 Tables R5000.0.1

Entering temperature as a function of depth and areal location (Section

4.4.12.4) is discouraged, since the areal temperature variation is not
accounted for in the calculation of equilibrium phase pressures versus
depth. See option 4 below for further discussion of this problem.

4.2.1 Saturation Pressure is Constant by Regions
4.2.1.1 IEQUIL for Three-Phase
IEQUIL PINIT (TINIT) DEPTH PCWOC WOC PCGOC GOC PSAT (API)(IPVT)(IPVTW)
iequil pinit (tinit) depth pcwoc woc pcgoc goc psat (api)(ipvt)(ipvtw)
(one data card for each equilibrium region)
Definitions: 00
The titles on this card must appear in the order shown. The title card is not
repeated for multiple equilibrium regions. 00
iequil The equilibrium region to which these data apply. Values

must increase consecutively for each data card.
pinit Initial reservoir pressure at the specified depth, psia

(kPa).
tinit Initial reservoir temperature in the equilibrium region,

degrees F (degrees C). Valid in VIP-COMP or VIP-
THERM only.
depth Depth at which initial reservoir pressure is given, ft (m).

This is also the datum depth used to calculate datum
pressures.
pcwoc Water-oil capillary pressure at the water-oil contact, psia

(Kpa), where pcwoc = po - pw.
woc Depth of the water-oil contact, ft (m).
R5000.0.1 Tables 4-183

pcgoc Gas-oil capillary pressure at the gas-oil contact, psia

(kPa), where pcgoc = pg - po.
goc Depth of the gas-oil contact, ft (m).
psat Initial saturation pressure, psia (kPa).
api Initial API gravity of the stock-tank liquid, °API (°API),

available only if the PVT interpolation option is in use.
ipvt PVT table number (black-oil or EOS) that applies within

this equilibrium region. Only one PVT table can be used
within any equilibrium region. It is highly
recommended that the PVT table be set by this
method, instead of setting it in the IPVT array, to
obtain proper initialization. The ipvt parameter may
also be entered on the COMPOSITION or OILMF or
GASMF cards.
ipvtw Water property table number (PVTW/PVTWSAL) that

applies within this equilibrium region. Only one water
table can be used within any equilibrium region. It is
highly recommended that the water table be set by
this method instead of setting it in the IPVTW array.
If the goc is within the reservoir, then the model calculated psat at goc will be
used for initializing the reservoir pressure, and PINIT will be ignored. In the VIP-
THERM dead oil model, the value of psat is arbitrary and is not used. 00
4.2.1.2 IEQUIL for GASWATER Option
The following format is used to enter saturation pressures with the GASWATER
option described in Section 2.2.6.1. 00
IEQUIL PINIT (TINIT) DEPTH PCGWC GWC (IPVT) (IPVTW)

iequil pinit (tinit) depth pcgwc gwc (ipvt) (ipvtw)
Definitions: 00


(kPa).
4-184 Tables R5000.0.1


THERM only.
pcgwc Gas-water capillary pressure at the gas-water contact,

psia (kPa), where pcgwc = pg - pw.
gwc Depth of the gas-water contact, ft (m).

within any equilibrium region. It is highly
obtain proper initialization. The ipvt parameter may
also be entered on the COMPOSITION or OILMF or
GASMF cards.

4.2.1.3 IEQUIL for WATEROIL Option
The following format is used to enter saturation pressures with the WATEROIL
option discussed in Section 2.2.6.2. 00
IEQUIL PINIT (TINIT) DEPTH PCWOC WOC PSAT (IPVT) (IPVTW)

iequil pinit (tinit) depth pcwoc woc psat (ipvt) (ipvtw)
Definitions: 00


(kPa).

THERM only.
R5000.0.1 Tables 4-185

pcwoc Water-oil capillary pressure at the water-oil contact, psia

(kPa), where pcwoc = po - pw.
woc Depth of the water-oil contact, ft (m).
psat Initial saturation pressure, psia (kPa).

within this equilibrium region. It is highly
obtain proper initialization. The ipvt input may also
be entered on the COMPOSITION or OILMF or
GASMF cards.

Examples: 00
00 TABLES
C
IEQUIL PINIT DEPTH PCWOC WOC PCGOC GOC PSAT
1 4335 8575 6.0 9022 0.0 8575 4335
00 C
IEQUIL PINIT DEPTH PCGWC GWC
1 5000. 8000. 0.0 8000.
4.2.2 Saturation Pressure Varies with Depth

The following data should be entered for either VIP-COMP or VIP-ENCORE or
the VIP-THERM compositional model if saturation pressure will vary with depth. 00
IEQUIL PINIT (TINIT) DEPTH PCWOC WOC PCGOC GOC (IPVT) (IPVTW)
iequil pinit(tinit) depth pcwoc woc pcgoc goc (ipvt) (ipvtw)
Data items are defined exactly as described in Section 4.2.1. Note that the only
difference is the absence of the PSAT, and possibly API, data. 00
BOTAB (VIP-ENCORE) or COMPOSITION (VIP-COMP or VIP-THERM)

must be specified when saturation pressure varies with depth. 00
4-186 Tables R5000.0.1

4.2.3 Equilibrium for User-Specified Saturations

An equilibrium initialization can be achieved for any specified distribution of
initial water and gas saturations. The user must first enter the fluid contact
information in one of the formats described above. Then, saturation arrays are
entered (Section 5.30) to "overwrite" the equilibrium initialization. However,
equilibrium conditions are still maintained for the specified saturation distribution
since the program automatically shifts the capillary pressure curve to ensure that
these saturations are in equilibrium. For this equilibrium option, a NONEQ card
must not be included in the utility data (Section 2.2.8.1) since a NONEQ card
forces the capillary pressure shift to be set to zero. 00
4.2.4 Saturation Pressures for VIP-ENCORE (BPTAB)

This card may not be specified if PSAT was entered on the IEQUIL card. 00
Depth versus psat tables using the BPTAB card only apply when the PVT property
data are input using the BOTAB card (Section 4.5.2). 00
Saturation pressure tables are read immediately after the cards defining the fluid
contacts for VIP-ENCORE. The values on these cards must appear in the order
shown. One saturation pressure table must be read for each equilibrium region. 00
(1) BPTAB iequil

(2) DEPTH PSAT (API)
(3) depth psat (api) (repeat as necessary)
Definitions: 00
00 (1) BPTAB Indicates the data being read is a saturation pressure

table.
iequil The equilibrium region to which these data apply. The

values must be consecutively increasing.
00 (2) The alpha labels on this card must appear as shown.
00 (3) depth Depth corresponding to psat, ft (m). Values must

increase consecutively.
psat Saturation pressure at the specified depth, psia (kPa).
api API gravity of the liquid phase at the specified depth,

°API (°API), available only when the PVT interpolation
option is in use.
00 Example:
00 BPTAB 1
R5000.0.1 Tables 4-187

DEPTH PSAT
6600 2850
7800 2647
8600 2540
4.2.5 Saturation Pressure Variation with Depth for Modified Black Oil
00 PSTAB or RSTAB and RVTAB cards
These cards may not be specified if PSAT was entered on the IEQUIL card. 00
Depth versus psat or solution oil/gas and solution gas/oil tables using the PSTAB,
RSTAB, or RVTAB cards only apply when the PVT property data are input using
the BOETAB, or some combination of BODTAB, BOOTAB, BOGTAB,
BDGTAB cards. 00
These tables are read immediately after the cards defining the fluid contacts for
VIP-ENCORE. The values on these cards must appear in the order shown. Either
a PSTAB or a RVTAB/RSTAB combination must be read for each equilibrium
region. For a dead oil, only a RVTAB card is required. For a dry gas, only a
RSTAB card is required. 00
(1) PSTAB iequil

(2) DEPTH PSAT
(3) depth psat (repeat as necessary)
00 Definitions:
(1) PSTAB Indicates the data being read is a saturation pressure

table.

(2) The alpha labels on this card must appear as shown.
(3) depth Depth corresponding to psat, ft (m). Values must

increase consecutively.
psat Saturation pressure at the specified depth, psia (kPa).
00 Example:
00 PSTAB 1
DEPTH PSAT
6600 2850
7800 2647
4-188 Tables R5000.0.1

8600 2540
(1) RSTAB iequil

(2) DEPTH RS
(3) depth rs (repeat as necessary)
00 Definitions:
(1) RSTAB Indicates the data being read is a table of solution gas-oil
ratio versus depth.

(3) depth Depth corresponding to rs, ft (m). Values must increase

consecutively.
rs Solution gas-oil ratio at the specified depth. Units of rs

are the same as the units input using the BOETAB or
BOOTAB cards.
00 Example:
00 RSTAB 1
DEPTH RS
6600 700
7800 750
8600 800
(1) RVTAB iequil

(2) DEPTH RV
(3) depth rv (repeat as necessary)
00 Definitions:
(1) RVTAB Indicates the data being read is a table of solution oil-gas
ratio versus depth.

(3) depth Depth corresponding to rv, ft (m). Values must increase

consecutively.
R5000.0.1 Tables 4-189

rv Solution oil-gas ratio at the specified depth, STB/MSCF

(stm3/stm3).
Example:
00 RVTAB 1
DEPTH RV
6600 0.04
7800 0.042
8600 0.045
4-190 Tables R5000.0.1

4.3 Saturation-Dependent Data

00 Relative permeability data must follow the equilibrium data.
VIP-CORE accepts either tabular or functional data describing two-phase (water-

oil and gas-oil) relative permeabilities and capillary pressures. The water and gas
relative permeabilities are used directly from the input coefficients or tables.
Three-phase oil relative permeability is not directly entered. It is computed from
the two-phase values of krg, krog, krw, krow according to one of the two Stone
(Reference 2) probability models or the Saturation Weighted Interpolation
(Reference 25). The default is Stone Model II. 00
Stone Model I: 00
k rog k row ( 1 – S wc – S or m ) ( 1 – S w – S g – S orm )

k ro = ------------------ -------------------------------------- --------------------------------------------------
k rocw ( 1 – S w – S or m ) ( 1 – S wc – S g – S orm )
00
00 where
00 S orm = S orw – γS g ,
S orw – S org
00 γ = -------------------------------
- .
1 – S wc – S org
00 An extension of the Sorm term is available:
Sg A Sg ⎞ A
S orm = S org ⎛⎝ ----------⎞⎠ + S orw ⎛⎝ 1 – ---------
2 2 3
00 -⎠ – ε ( S gro S g – S g ) + ν ( S gro S g – S g )
S gro S gro
00 where S gro = 1 – S wc – S org .
This collapses to the first definition of Sorm when A = 1, ε = ν = 0. The values A,

ε, ν are input on the STONE1 card. 00
Stone Model II: 00
k row k rog
k ro = k rocw ⎛ ----------
- + k rw⎞ ⎛ ----------
- + k rg⎞ – k rg – k rw ,
⎝ k rocw ⎠ ⎝ k rocw ⎠
00
Saturation Weighted Interpolation: 00
( S g * k rog + ( S w – S wc ) * k row )
00 K ro = ----------------------------------------------------------------------
-
( S g + S w – S wc )
R5000.0.1 Tables 4-191

where: 00
00 krog is evaluated at (Sg + Sw - Swc) and

Krow is evaluated at (Sg + Sw)
00 A ternary diagram exhibiting kro for pairs of typical two-phase data is shown in
Figure 4-3.
Figure 4-3: kro From Stone’s Model II (Ref. 2)
An arbitrary number of sets of relative permeability data may be input, each with
a unique table number. All data must be input using either the tabular or functional
format - the two types cannot be mixed. 00
Assignment of table numbers to each gridblock for use in the intergridblock flow
calculations is down with the ISAT, ISATI, ISATF, and ISATFI arrays (Section
5.13). Assignment of the table numbers to each perforation for use in the well bore
flow calculations is done with the ISAT and ISATI entries in the FPERF data
(Section 3.2.2 in the Simulation Module Reference Manual). No ISAT values are
required if only one set of saturation-dependent data is entered. 00
Often the shape of the relative permeability and capillary pressure curves are
identical for several core samples even though the endpoints are not the same.
VIP-CORE allows the user to model spatial differences in curve endpoints (such
as connate water and critical gas saturation) with a single set of generic relative
permeability and capillary pressure curves. 00
Arrays of curve endpoints may be entered as described in Section 5.32. For the
tabular option, the program automatically renormalized the tables for each
gridblock. For the functions option, the array value for each gridblock simply
overrides the constant value given in the SDFUNC data. 00
In VIP-THERM, temperature dependence of all endpoint relative permeabilities

and saturations may be specified for each set of saturation-dependent data as
described in Section 4.3.3. 00
4-192 Tables R5000.0.1

4.3.1 Saturation-Dependent Tables

The saturation tables must satisfy the following requirements: 00
1. All water saturation tables must precede the gas saturation tables, which must
precede the gas-water tables, if present.
2. The table numbers for both the water and gas tables must be consecutively
increasing.
3. The number of water saturation tables must equal the number of gas
saturation tables.
One or both of capillary pressure and relative permeability hysteresis can be

represented in one or both of the water-oil and gas-oil tables, but not in the gas-
water table. The user can choose to activate one, or the other, or both at once. 00
Capillary pressure hysteresis requires the following changes to the water-oil and/
or gas-oil table data: 00
■ Secondary drainage curves must be provided on the appropriate drainage

saturation table (SWT or SGT). These are used in making the transition from
the imbibition curve to the drainage curve and consequently start on the
drainage curve and end at the table residual oil saturation.
■ An imbibition saturation table must be provided, with the imbibition capillary

pressure curve input as the primary capillary pressure.
■ An ISATI array must be specified to assign imbibition tables to grid blocks (in
concert with the ISAT array for drainage tables.
■ PCHYSW and PCHYSG cards can optionally be specified to control scanning

loop parameters for the water and gas tables, respectively.
Relative permeability hysteresis (for the relative permeability of oil in an oil-

water system and/or the relative permeability of gas in a gas-oil system) requires
changes to the water-oil and/or gas-oil table data. There are two options: 00
■ Trapped hydrocarbon saturation. A trapped hydrocarbon saturation can be

specified on the appropriate table (SOTR with SWT and SGTR with SGT).
Note that this value may not be matched exactly if endpoint scaling is also
employed. RPHYSO and RPHYSG cards can optionally be specified to
control the method used to calculate oil and gas relative permeability
hysteresis, respectively.
■ Curve input. An imbibition saturation table can be provided, with the

appropriate imbibition relative permeability curve input. An ISATI array must
be specified to assign imbibition tables to grid blocks (in concert with the
ISAT array for drainage tables). RPHYSO and RPHYSG cards can optionally
be specified to control the method used to calculate oil and gas relative
permeability hysteresis, respectively.
R5000.0.1 Tables 4-193

4.3.1.1 Water-Oil Saturation for the Matrix (SWT)
Water saturation tables define the rock properties that depend on water saturation:
relative permeability of water, relative permeability of oil in the presence of water,
and water-oil capillary pressure. If capillary pressure hysteresis is selected,
secondary water-oil capillary pressure must also be defined for a drainage table.
These tables are not needed for the GASWATER option, Section 2.2.6.1. 00
(1) SWT nswt

(2) (SWMNI swmni)
(3) SW KRW KROW PCWO (PCWOS)
(4a) swc 0.0 krocw pcwocw
. . . .
(4b) swr 0.0 krorw pcworw
. . . .
(4c) (swd) (krwd) (krowd) (pcwod) (pcwod)
. . . .
(4d) swro krwro 0.0 pcworo (pcworos)
. . . .
(4e) swmx krwmx 0.0 pcwomn (pcworos)
Definitions: 00
00 (1) SWT Alpha label indicating that a water saturation table is

being read.
nswt The table number (rock type). This number corresponds

to the values in the ISAT array (Section 5.13.1).
00 (2) SWMNI Alpha label indicating that the following entry on this
line is the table value of the effective connate water
saturation to be used for initialization. This allows the
user to extend the oil relative premability curve below the
initialization value of connate water saturation, and is
useful when water saturation may be reduced below
connate either through compressibility effects in
isothermal simulations or through the vaporization of
water in thermal simulations.
swmni Table value of effective connate water saturation to be

used for initialization. Must be greater than or equal to
swc and less than or equal to swro. Default value is swc.
00 (3) The values on the data cards following this title card appear in the order
defined by this card. They must appear in the order shown.
SW Water saturation as a fraction of total pore volume.

Values must increase consecutively.
4-194 Tables R5000.0.1

KRW Relative permeability of water (in an oil-water system) at

a given water saturation. Values must increase with water
saturation.
KROW Relative permeability of oil in the presence of water (in

an oil-water system) at a given water saturation. Values
must decrease with increasing water saturation. If this is
an imbibition table, krow must be less than or equal to
the corresponding drainage curve value.
PCWO Water-oil capillary pressure, psia (kPa). Values must

decrease with increasing water saturation unless all
values are equal. This will either be a primary drainage
curve or an imbibition curve. If this is an imbibition
table, pcwo must be less than or equal to the
corresponding secondary drainage curve value. Here,
pcwo = po - pw.
PCWOS Optional column heading for water-oil capillary pressure

for a secondary drainage process (on drainage tables in
hysteresis cases only), psia (kPa). Values must decrease
with increasing water saturation and must be less than or
equal to the primary drainage curve values. Here, pcwos
= po - pw. Values of pcwos for sw < swd should be
omitted, causing pcwos for the saturation entry to be set
equal to pcwo.
(3) Data cards There must be a minimum of three data cards including
each of the types (b), (d), and (e). The last data card in the
table must be type (e). Table entries for water saturations
lying between the required points or between swc and
swr should be selected to adequately define the shape of
the curves. See Figure 4-3.
00 (a) SW = swc (connate water saturation).
00 KRW = 0.0
00 KROW = krocw (from permeability of oil in

the presence of water at swc).
00 PCWO = pcwocw (water-oil capillary

pressure at swc).
00 (b) SW = swr
00 KRW = 0.0
00 PCWO = krorw
R5000.0.1 Tables 4-195

00 PCWOS = pcworw
00 (c) SW = swd
00 KRW = krwd
00 KROW = krowd
00 PCWO = pcwod
00 PCWOS = pcwod
00 (d) SW = swro
00 KRW = krwro
00 KROW = 0.0
00 PCWO = pcworo
00 PCWOS = pcworos
00 (e) SW = swmx
00 KRW = krwmx
00 KROW = 0.0
00 PCWO = pcwomn
00 PCWOS = pcworos
For PCWO, if only the values pcwocw and pcwomn are read and the capillary
pressure entries between these two values are left blank, the program linearly
interpolates between these two values to complete the table entries. 00
When vertical flow potential is negligible, reservoir flow is ‘segregated’. Here the
relative permeability function depends only on the endpoints of the rock curves
and the initial fluid distribution. Water-oil and gas-oil pseudo-relative
permeabilities consistent with segregated flow are calculated by the simulation
module. VE water-oil tables require only three entries, for water saturations of
swr, swro and swmx. 00
Example: 00
00 C
C SATURATION DEPENDENT TABLES
C
C
SWT 1
4-196 Tables R5000.0.1

SW KRW KROW PCWO

.05000 0.00000 1.00000 56.30945
.32500 .00005 .64416 39.83473
.36250 .00071 .50332 32.91141
.40000 .00292 .38467 26.80040
.43750 .00758 .29631 21.45391
.47500 .01563 .20633 16.82418
.51250 .02798 .14283 12.86340
.55000 .04555 .09391 9.52381
.58750 .06928 .05768 6.75761
.62500 .10008 .03221 4.51702
.66250 .13888 .01563 2.75426
.70000 .18659 .00601 1.42156
.73750 .24414 .00147 .47111
.77500 .31245 .00009 .17500
.81250 .39245 0.00000 .13750
.85000 .48506 0.00000 .10000
.88750 .59119 0.00000 .06250
.92500 .71178 0.00000 0.02500
1.0000 1.00000 0.00000 0.00000
C
R5000.0.1 Tables 4-197

00 Example:
00 C
C SATURATION DEPENDENT TABLES WITH HYSTERESIS
C
00 C
SWT 1
SW KRW KROW PCWO PCWOS
.25000 0.00000 1.0000 56.30945
.32500 .00005 .64416 39.83473
.36250 .00071 .50332 32.91141
.40000 .00292 .38467 26.80040
.43750 .00758 .28631 21.45391
.47500 .01563 .20633 16.82418
.51250 .02798 .14283 12.86340
.55000 .04555 .09391 9.52381
.58750 .06928 .05768 6.75761
.62500 .10008 .03221 4.51702 4.51702
.66250 .13888 .01563 2.75426 2.0
.70000 .18659 .00601 1.42156 -1.0
.73750 .24414 .00147 .47111 -3.0
.77500 .31245 .00009 .17500 -8.5
.81250 .39245 0.00000 .13750 -15.0
.85000 .48506 0.00000 .10000 -15.0
.88750 .59119 0.00000 .06250 -15.0
.92500 .71178 0.00000 0.00000 -15.0
4-198 Tables R5000.0.1

4.3.1.2 Gas-Oil Saturation for the Matrix (SGT)
00 Do not use these tables with the WATEROIL option (Section 2.2.6.2).
Gas saturation tables define the rock properties that depend on gas saturation:
relative permeability of gas, relative permeability of oil in the presence of gas, and
gas-oil capillary pressure. The rock properties defined with the GASWATER
option (Section 2.2.6.1) are: relative permeability of gas; relative permeability of
water in the presence of gas; and gas-water capillary pressure. 00
(1) SGT nsgt

(2) SG KRG KROG PCGO (PCGOS)
(3a) sgmn 0.0 krocw pcgomn (pcgomns)
. . . .
(3b) sgc 0.0 krocg pcgocg pcgocgs
. . . .
(3c) (sgd) (krgd) (krogd) (pcgod) (pcgod)
. . . .
(3d) sgro krgro 0.0 pcgoro
. . . .
(3e) sgmx krgmx 0.0 pcgomx
GASWATER Option 00
SGT nsgt
SG KRG KRWG PCGW
0.0 0.0 1.0 pcgwmn
. . . .
sgc 0.0 krwgc .
. . . .
. . . .
sgcw krgcw 0.0 pcgwcw
Definitions: 00
00 (1) SGT Alpha label indicating that a gas saturation table is being
read.
nsgt The table number (rock type). This number corresponds

to the values in the ISAT array (Section 5.13.1).
SG Gas saturation as a fraction of total pore volume. Values

must increase consecutively.
KRG Relative permeability of gas (in a gas-oil or gas-water,

Section 2.2.6.1, system with connate water) at a given
gas saturation. Values must increase with gas saturation.
R5000.0.1 Tables 4-199

KROG Relative permeability of oil in the presence of gas (at

irreducible water saturation) at a given gas saturation.
Values must decrease with increasing gas saturation. If
this is an imbibition table, krog must be less than or
equal to the corresponding drainage curve value.
KRWG Relative permeability of water in the presence of gas at a

given gas saturation. Values must decrease with
increasing gas saturation.
PCGO Gas-oil capillary pressure, psia (kPa). Values must

increase with increasing gas saturation unless all values
are equal. If this is an imbibition table, pcgo must be less
than or equal to the corresponding secondary drainage
curve value. Here, pcgo = pg - po.
PCGOS Gas-oil capillary pressure for a secondary drainage

process (on drainage tables in hysteresis cases), psia
(kPa). Values must increase with increasing gas
saturation and must be less than or equal to the primary
drainage curve values. Here, pcgo = pg - po. Values for sg
> sgd should be omitted, causing pcgos for the saturation
entry to be set equal to pcgo.
PCGW Gas-water capillary pressure, psia (kPa). Values must

increase with increasing gas saturation unless all values
are equal. pcgw = pg - pw.
00 (3) Data cards A minimum of four data cards, including each of the
types (a), (b), (d), and (e), is required for each gas
saturation table. The first data card must be type (a),
while the last must be type (e). See Figure 4-3. For the
GASWATER option, a minimum of three data cards (gas
saturations of 0.0, sgc, and sgcw) is required for each
table.
00 (a) SG = sgmn
00 KRG = 0.0
00 KROG = krocw (from data card (a) in the

water saturation table).
00 PCGO = pcgomn (minimum gas-oil capillary

pressure at SG = 0).
00 PCGOS = pcgomns
00 (b) SG = sgc
4-200 Tables R5000.0.1

00 KRG = 0.0
00 KROG = krocg
00 PCGO = pcgocg
00 PCGOS = pcgocgs
00 (c) SG = sgd
00 KRG = krgd
00 KROG = krogd
00 PCGO = pcgod
00 PCGOS = pcgod
00 (d) SG = sgro (gas saturation at which oil

becomes immobile, one minus the
connate water saturation minus
residual oil saturation to gas).
00 KRG = krgro (KRG at sgro).
00 KROG = 0.0
00 PCGO = pcgoro
00 (e) SG = sgmx
00 KRG = krgmx
00 KROG = 0.0
00 PCGO = pcgomx
For PCGO, if only the values pcgomn and pcgomx are read and the capillary
pressure entries between these two values are left blank, the program linearly
interpolates between these two values to complete the table entries. If capillary
pressure hysteresis is selected, secondary gas-oil capillary pressure must also be
defined. 00
When vertical flow potential is negligible, reservoir flow is ’segregated’. Here the
module. VE gas-oil tables require four entries: Sgmn, Sgr, Sgro, and Sgcw.
Critical gas saturation is ignored in the calculation of gas-oil VE relative
permeabilities. Hence the gas relative permeability is a straight line between zero
R5000.0.1 Tables 4-201

at sgmn and krgro at sgro as the gas cap size is increasing. The entry at Sgr is
used to define a residual gas saturation and oil relative permeability krogr for use
when the gas cap size is decreasing. 00
00 Examples:
00 C
C GAS SATURATION FUNCTIONS - DRAINAGE
C NOTE: ENTRIES OMITTED IN THE PCGOS COLUMN
C WILL HAVE VALUES SET TO PCGO AT THAT
C GAS SATURATION.
C
SGT 1
SG KRG KROG PCGO PCGOS
0. 0. 1. 0. 0.
.03 .007 .91 .21 0.
.10 .04 .77 .30 0.
00 .20 .075 .57 .34 0.

.30 .18 .42 .40 0.
.32 .206 .402 .43 0.25
.36 .258 .366 .49 0.40
.40 .31 .33 .55 0.55
.50 .46 .20 .78
.60 .64 .11 1.00
.70 .825 .04 1.80
.75 .92 0. 17.00
.78 1. 0. 150.00
C
C GAS SATURATION FUNCTIONS - IMBIBITION
C
C
SGT 2
C
SG KRG KROG PCGO
0. 0. 1. 0.
.03 0. .91 0.
.10 0. .77 0.
.20 0. .57 0.
.30 0. .4 0.
.40 .095 .33 .04
.50 .269 .20 .09
.60 .494 .11 .25
.70 .761 .04 .73
.75 .908 0. 1.70
.78 1. 0. 150.00
4-202 Tables R5000.0.1

00 C
C GAS WATER OPTION
C
SGT 1
SG KRG KRWG PCGW
0.0 0.0 1.0 0.0
0.05 0.0 0.92
0.1 0.0 0.83
0.2 0.1 0.650
0.3 0.2 0.430
0.4 0.37 0.250
0.5 0.45 0.110
0.6 0.57 0.032
0.7 0.75 0.006
0.75 0.85 0.00 4.0
4.3.1.3 Gas-Dependent Water Relative Permeability for the Matrix (SGWT)
SGWT nsgwt
SG KRWG
0.0 1.0
. .
sgrw 0.0
. .
1.0 0.0
00 Definitions:
SGWT Alpha label indicating that a gas dependent water relative

permeability table is being read.
nsgwt The table number (rock type). This number corresponds

to the values in the ISAT array.
00 The values on the data cards following this title card must appear in the order
shown.
SG Gas saturation as a fraction of total pore volume.
KRWG Relative permeability of water in a water-gas system at

the given gas saturation (zero oil saturation).
A minimum of three data cards, for gas saturations of 0.0, sgrw and 1.0 are
required for each table. SG must increase and the KRWG must be monotonically
decreasing. 00
sgrw gas saturation at which water becomes immobile.
R5000.0.1 Tables 4-203

The two-curve option for water relative permeability is invoked simply by

entering "SGWT" tables in the initialization input data set. This table should
follow the gas saturation (SGT) table. 00
The keywords "STONE1", "STONE2", and "KROINT" are used to invoke Stone’s
model I, Stone’s model II, and Saturation Weighted Interpolation, respectively, for
calculation of three phase oil relative permeability. If the SGWT option is
selected, both the oil and water 3-phase relative permeabilities will be calculated
based on the same selected model. Otherwise, only the oil relative permeability
will be calculated from the selected model. 00
4.3.1.4 Water-Oil Saturation for the Fracture (SWTF)
When the DUAL option is invoked the user must specify fracture saturation tables
in addition to the matrix saturation tables. The water saturation tables for the
fracture must follow the normal (matrix) gas saturation tables. These tables define
the rock properties that depend on water saturation in the fractures: relative
permeability of water, relative permeability of oil in the presence of water, and
water-oil capillary pressure. 00
SWTF nswtf
(SWMNI swmni)
SW KRW KROW PCWO
swc 0.0 krocw pcwocw
. . . .
swr 0.0 krorw .
. . . .
swro krwro 0.0 .
. . . .
swmx krwmx 0.0 pcwomn
00 Definition:
SWTF Alpha label indicating that a water saturation table for the
fracture is being read.
nswtf The table number (rock type). This number corresponds

to the values in the ISATF array (Section 5.13.3).
SWMNI Alpha label indicating that the following entry on this

4-204 Tables R5000.0.1


00 All other definitions are as given in Section 4.2.1, WATER Saturation Tables for
the Matrix.
00 Example:
00 SWTF 1
SW KRW KROW PCWO
0. 0. 1. 0.
.5 .5 .5 0.
1. 1. 0. 0.
4.3.1.5 Gas-Oil Saturation for the Fracture (SGTF)
When the DUAL option is invoked the user must specify fracture gas saturation
tables. These must follow the fracture water saturation tables. These tables define
the rock properties that depend on gas saturation in the fractures: relative
permeability of gas, relative permeability of oil in the presence of gas, and gas-oil
capillary pressure. 00
SGTF nsgtf
SG KRG KROG PCGO
0.0 0.0 krocw pcgomn
. . . .
sgc 0.0 krocg .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
sgro krgro 0.0 .
. . . .
sgmx krgmx 0.0 pcgomx
00 Definitions:
SGTF Alpha label indicating that a gas saturation table for the
fracture is being read.
nsgtf The table number (rock type). This number corresponds

to the values in the ISATF array (Section 5.13.3).
All other definitions are as given in Section 4.3.1.2, Gas Saturation Tables for the
Matrix. 00
00 Examples:
R5000.0.1 Tables 4-205

00 SGTF 1
SG KRG KROG PCGO
0. 0. 1. 0.
.5 .5 .5 0.
.9999 .999 0. 0.
1. 1. 0. 0.
4.3.1.6 Gas-Dependent Water Relative Permeability for the Fracture

(SGWTF)
SGWTF nsgwtf
SG KRWG
0.0 1.0
. .
sgrw 0.0
. .
1.0 0.0
00 Definitions:
SGWTF Alpha label indicating that a gas dependent water relative

permeability table for the fracture is being read.
nsgwt The table number (rock type). This number corresponds

to the values in the ISATF array.
All other definitions are as given in Section 4.3.1.3, Gas-Dependent Water

Relative Permeability for the Matrix. 00
4-206 Tables R5000.0.1

4.3.1.7 Oil Phase Hysteresis Option (SOTR) (Not available in VIP-THERM)
To invoke the oil hysteresis option, the SOTR card must be inserted in the water-
oil saturation table as shown, unless user defined tables are entered for imbibition
functions. All other water saturation data (table entries) are unchanged. 00
SWT nswt
(SWMNI swmni)
SOTR sotr
SW KRW KROW PCWO PCWOS
swc 0.0 krocw pcwocw
. . . . .
swr 0.0 krorw pcworw
. . . . .
(swd) (krwd) (krowd)(pcwod)(pcwod)
. . . . .
swro krwro 0.0 pcworo pcworos
. . . . .
swmx krwmx 0.0 pcwomn pcworos
00 Definitions:
SWMNI Alpha label indicating that the following entry on this


SOTR Alpha label indicating that the value to follow is the

maximum allowed trapped oil saturation for this table.
sotr Maximum trapped oil saturation. Must be greater than

sorw.
Hysteresis in oil relative permeability can be modeled in VIP-EXECUTIVE using

any of the methods described on the RPHYSO card (LINEAR by default). A
family of imbibition oil relative permeability curves is constructed from the user-
specified drainage curve and the user-specified maximum trapped oil saturation,
SOTR. The endpoints of a typical intermediate imbibition curve are the historical
maximum oil saturation, Somax, and the corresponding trapped oil saturation,
Sotr. The historical maximum oil saturation is tracked for each gridblock. In
general, each gridblock may follow its own imbibition curve. Trapped oil
saturation is calculated from Somax by using Land’s formula (Reference 6). 00
R5000.0.1 Tables 4-207

00 Sotr = Somax / [ 1 + (C * Somax) ],
00 where C is Land’s constant C, given by:
00 C = [ (1 -Swc) -Sotr] / [ Sotr * (1 -Swc) ]
Carlson’s approach assumes the imbibition oil relative permeability is equal to the
drainage oil relative permeability evaluated at the ’free’ or continuous oil
saturation, Sodr: 00
00 krowi(1-So) = krowd(1-Sodr),
00 where the free oil saturation, Sodr, is defined as
00 Sodr = 1/2[(So-Sotr) + [(So-Sotr)**2 + 4*C*(So-Sotr)]**1/2]
4-208 Tables R5000.0.1

4.3.1.8 Gas Phase Hysteresis Option (SGTR) (Not available in VIP-THERM)
To invoke the gas hysteresis option, the SGTR card must be inserted in the gas
saturation table as shown unless user defined tables are entered for imbibition
functions. All other gas saturation data (table entries) are unchanged. 00
SGT nsgt
SGTR sgtr
SG KRG KROG PCGO (PCGOS)
sgmn 0.0 krocw pcgomn (pcgomns)
. . . . .
sgc 0.0 krocg pcgocg pcgocgs
. . . . .
(sgd) (krgd) (krogd) (pcgod) (pcgod)
. . . . .
sgro krgro 0.0 pcgoro .
. . . . .
sgmx krgmx 0.0 pcgomx .
00 GASWATER Option
SGT nsgt
SGTR sgtr
SG KRG KRWG PCGW
0.0 0.0 1.0 pcgwmn
. . . .
sgc 0.0 krwgc .
. . . .
. . . .
sgcw krgcw 0.0 pcgwcw
00 Definitions:
SGTR Alpha label indicating that the value to follow is the

maximum trapped gas saturation for this table.
sgtr Maximum trapped gas saturation. Must be greater than

sgc.
Hysteresis in gas relative permeability can be modeled in VIP-EXECUTIVE

using any of the methods described on the RPHYSG card (LINEAR by default).
A family of imbibition gas relative permeability curves is constructed from the
user-specified drainage curve and the user-specified maximum trapped gas
saturation, SGTR. The endpoints of a typical intermediate imbibition curve are the
historical maximum gas saturation, Sgmax, and the corresponding trapped gas
saturation, Sgtr. The historical maximum gas saturation is tracked for each
gridblock. In general, each gridblock may follow its own imbibition curve.
Trapped gas saturation is calculated from Sgmax by using Land’s formula
(Reference 6). 00
R5000.0.1 Tables 4-209

S gmax * C VIP
S gtr = -----------------------------
-
S gmax + C VIP
where CVIP is the reciprocal of Land’s constant, C,
SGTR * (1 – S wc )
C VIP = ------------------------------------------
( 1 – S wc ) – SGTR
Drainage and imbibition relative permeability curves and the endpoints described
above are shown in Figure 4-4.
krg
Sg
D
krg
krgI
0 Sgc Sgc Sg 1-Swc 1

tr tr
Figure 4-4: Drainage and Imbibition krg from Carlson’s Model
Carlson’s approach assumes the imbibition gas relative permeability is equal to

the drainage gas relative permeability evaluated at the "free" or continuous gas
saturation, Sgdr: 00
l D
k rg ( S g ) = k rg ( S gdr ) ,
where the free gas phase saturation, Sgdr, is defined as
1
--
1 2 2
S gdr = -- ( S g – S gtr ) + [ ( S g – S gtr ) + 4C VIP ( S g – S gtr ) ]
2
4-210 Tables R5000.0.1

00 Example:
00 C
C GASWATER OPTION
C
SGT 1
SGTR 0.25
SG KRG KRWG PCGW
0.0 0.0 1.0 0.0
0.5 0.0 0.92
0.1 0.0 0.83
0.2 0.1 0.650
0.3 0.2 0.430
0.4 0.37 0.250
0.5 0.45 0.110
0.6 0.57 0.032
0.7 0.75 0.006
0.75 0.85 0.00 4.0
4.3.1.9 Gas Remobilization Option (GASRM) (Not available in VIP-

THERM)
The gas remobilization option models the remobilization of trapped gas resulting
from gas expansion during pressure blowdown. The following input data specifies
the secondary drainage curve for remobilized gas in gridblocks subject to
remobilization calculation. These data may not appear before any SGT table input.
The gas remobilization option may not be invoked if the gas relative permeability
hysteresis option is not invoked. 00
(1) GASRM ngasrm

(2) SGTR SGRM KRGMAX
(3a) sgtr1 sgrm1 krgmax1
. . .
(3b) sgtrn sgrmn krgmaxn
00 Tabular Form:
(4) GASRMT
(5) SG KRG
(6a) sgrmi 0.
. .
(6b) sgmx krgmx
R5000.0.1 Tables 4-211

00 Analytical Function:
(4) C1 C2 C3
(5) c1 c2 c3
00 Definitions:
00 (1) GASRM Alpha label indicating that a gas remobilization table is

being read.
ngasrm The table number (rock type). This number corresponds

to the values in the ISAT array (Section 5.13.1). If data
for any saturation table (other than saturation table 1) are
not entered, they will be defaulted to the table 1 values.
SGTR Trapped gas saturation as a fraction of total pore volume.

Values must increase consecutively.
SGRM Gas saturation at which the trapped gas becomes mobile

during gas expansion.
KRGMAX Maximum relative permeability to remobilized gas at the

maximum gas saturation (sgmx) in the SGT table.
00 (3) Data cards A minimum of two data cards is required for each
saturation table.
00 Secondary drainage curve can be specified either in a tabular form or as an

analytic function.
00 Tabular Form:
00 (4) GASRMT Alpha label indicating that a tabular secondary drainage

curve is being read.
SG Gas saturation as a fraction of total pore volume. Values

must increase consecutively.
KRG Secondary drainage relative permeability to gas at a

given gas saturation. Values must increase with gas
saturation.
00 (6) Data cards A minimum of two data cards, including each of the
types (a) and (b), is required for each saturation table.
4-212 Tables R5000.0.1

The first data card must be type (a), while the last must
be type (b).
(a) SG = sgrmi
KRG = 0.0
(b) SG = sgmx (from data card 3(e) in the gas

saturation table).
KRG = krgmx
00 Analytic Function:
00 (4) The values on the data card following this title card appear in the order
C1 Parameter C1 in the analytic secondary drainage relative

permeability function.


00 (5) Data card Input c1, c2, and c3 are values of C1, C2, and C3.
00 Note:
Using the tabular form, the secondary drainage relative permeability is

calculated using the standard two-point endpoint scaling method:
K rgmax, m o
K rg ( S g ) = ---------------------- K rg2d, r ( S g )
krgmx
00 where
o ( sgmx – sgrmi )
S g = sgrmi + ( S g – S grm, m ) --------------------------------------------
( S gma, m – S grm, m )
00 Here Sgma,m is the gridblock maximum gas saturation in the SGT table.
Symbols Sgrm,m and Krgmax,m are gridblock sgrm and krgmax values
determined from the table lookup of cards (2) and (3) above. The input sgtr
for the table lookup is the gridblock trapped gas saturation corresponding to
the historic maximum gas saturation.
00 Using the analytic function, the secondary drainage Krg is determined by
R5000.0.1 Tables 4-213

C
( 1 + C 2 )S g11
00 K rg ( S g ) = K rgmax, m ----------------------------
C3
-
1 + C 2 S g1
00 where
S g – S grm, m
S g1 ≡ ---------------------------------------
S gma, m – S grm, m
00 The output of the input tables and the reconstructed tables may be requested
through keywords SGT and RSGT in the PRINT card.
00 Example:
C
C Gas Remobilization Option Input
C
GASRM 1
SGTR SGRM KRGMAX
0.05 0.10 0.9
0.10 0.15 0.85
0.17 0.23 0.81
0.24 0.30 0.75
0.33 0.40 0.7
0.4 0.48 0.6
0.5 0.6 0.5
GASRMT
SG KRG
0.21 0.0
0.30 0.02
0.43 0.10
0.55 0.20
0.66 0.33
0.77 0.5
0.985 0.65
C
GASRM 2
SGTR SGRM KRGMAX
0.05 0.10 0.9
0.10 0.15 0.85
0.17 0.23 0.81
0.25 0.31 0.74
0.33 0.40 0.7
0.4 0.48 0.6
0.5 0.6 0.5
GASRMT
SG KRG
0.21 0.0
4-214 Tables R5000.0.1

0.30 0.02
0.43 0.10
0.55 0.20
0.66 0.33
0.78 0.51
0.9 0.65
4.3.1.10 Normalized Saturation-Dependent Functions
Often the shape of the relative permeability and capillary pressure curves are
similar for several core samples even though the endpoints are not the same. VIP-
CORE allows the user to model spatial differences in connate water and critical
gas saturations with a single set of generic relative permeability and capillary
pressure curves. 00
VIP-CORE accepts generic saturation-dependent data as unnormalized entries

that the program automatically normalizes using the endpoint arrays as described
in Section 5.32. For multiple tables, the format may vary from table to table.
Generic saturation-dependent data can be defined in one table while specific
saturation-dependent data is entered in another table. 00
4.3.1.11 Vertical Equilibrium Pseudo-Relative Permeabilities
When vertical flow potential is negligible, reservoir flow is "segregated". Here the
module. 00
Water-Oil Tables (SWT) 00
00 VE water-oil tables require only three entries: Swc, 1-Sor, and 1.
SWT nswt
SW KRW KROW PCWO
swc 0.0 krocw 0.0
1-sor krwro 0.0 .
1.0 1.0 0.0 0.0
00 Definitions:
The definitions in Section 4.3.1.1 apply, except only the three data cards
shown are entered.
R5000.0.1 Tables 4-215

Gas-Oil Tables (SGT) 00
00 VE gas-oil tables require four entries: 0, Sgr, Sgro, and Sgcw.
SGT nsgt
SG KRG KROG PCGO
0.0 0.0 krocw 0.0
sgr 0.0 krogr .
sgro krgro 0.0 .
sgcw krgcw 0.0 0.0
00 Definitions:
The definitions in Section 4.3.1.1 apply, except only the four data cards shown are
entered. 00
sgr The residual gas saturation.
krogr krog at sgr.
NOTE: Critical gas saturation is ignored in the calculation of gas-oil VE relative

permeabilities. Hence the gas relative permeability is a straight line
between zero at Sg = 0 and krgro at Sg = Sgro as the gas cap size is
increasing. The entry at Sgr is used to define a residual gas saturation and
oil relative permeability krogr for use when the gas cap size is
decreasing.
4.3.2 Saturation-Dependent Functions (VIP-THERM)

Two-phase relative permeability and capillary pressure data may be described
using the following analytic functions:
ew
⎛ Sw – Swir ⎞
krw = krwro ⎜ -------------------------------------------⎟
⎜ ⎟
⎝ 1 – Sorw – Swir ⎠
eow
⎛ 1 – Sorw – Sw ⎞
krow = krocw ⎜ ------------------------------------------⎟
⎜ ⎟
⎝ 1 – Sorw – Swc ⎠
eg
⎛ Sg – Sgc ⎞
krg = krgro ⎜ --------------------------------------------------------⎟
⎜ ⎟
⎝ 1 – Swc – Sorg – Sgc ⎠
4-216 Tables R5000.0.1

eog
⎛ 1 – Swc – Sorg – Sg ⎞
krog = krocw ⎜ -----------------------------------------------------⎟
⎜ ⎟
⎝ 1 – Swc – Sorg ⎠
3
Pcwo = Po – Pw = – ( Pcw1 + Pcw2 ( 1 – Sw ) + Pcw3 ( 1 – Sw ) ) ⋅ ( 1 – Pcw4 ( T – Tini ) )
3
Pcgo = Pg – Po = ( Pcg1 + Pcg2 Sg + Pcg3 Sg ) ⋅ ( 1 – Pcg4 ( T – Tini ) )
where
Sw = water saturation
Sg = gas saturation
Swir = irreducible water saturation
Sorw = residual oil saturation to water
Swc = connate water saturation
Sgc = critical gas saturation
Sorg = residual oil saturation to gas
e* = relative permeability exponents
krwro = water relative permeability at residual oil (to water)
krocw = oil relative permeability at connate water saturation
krgro = gas relative permeability at residual oil (to gas at

connate water saturation)
krw = water relative permeability
krow = oil relative permeability to water (2-phase)
krg = gas relative permeabilty.
krog = oil relative permeability to gas (2-phase)
Pcwo = water-oil capillary pressure (Po - Pw)
Pcgo = gas-oil capillary pressure (Pg - Po)
Pcwn = water-oil Pc coefficients, n=1,4.
Pcgn = gas-oil Pc coefficients, n=1,4.
R5000.0.1 Tables 4-217

T = temperature
Tini = initial temperature
(1) Title Card:SDFUNC isat

(2) Title Card:EW EOW EG EOG
(3) Data Card: ew eow eg eog
SWRO SGRO
(4) Title Card:(SWIR) SWC SGC KRWRO KROCW KRGRO
SORW SORG
swro sgro
(5) Data Card: (swir) swc sgc krwro krocw krgro
sorw sorg
(6) Title Card:(PCWO1 PCWO2 PCWO3 PCWO4)

(7) Data Card: (pcwo1 pcwo2 pcwo3 pcwo4)
(8) Title Card:(PCGO1 PCGO2 PCGO3 PCGO4)
(9) Data Card: (pcgo1 pcgo2 pcgo3 pcgo4)
Definitions:
isat Rock type number.
Swro 1 - Sorw, water saturation at which oil becomes

immobile.
Sgro 1 - Swc - Sorg, gas saturation at which oil becomes

immobile (in presence of connate water).
NOTE: 1. The cards must appear in the order shown.
2. The order of the entries on cards 2 through 5 are arbitrary.
3. SWIR is optional. The default is Swir = Swc.
4. The capillary pressure data is optional (cards 6, 7, 8 and 9). The

default is Pc = 0.
4-218 Tables R5000.0.1

4.3.3 Temperature-Dependent Endpoints (VIP-THERM)

TENDPT and TENDM may not both be entered.
Temperature variations in all endpoints may be specified for each set of

saturation-dependent data. Any spatial variations in endpoints (Section 5.32) are
ignored for blocks which are assigned to rock types with temperature-dependent
endpoints. Only those endpoints which are temperature-dependent need be
specified. Default values are the constant values in the corresponding set of
saturation-dependent data.
TENDPT isat
TEMP t1 t2 t3 ...
SWIR swir1 swir2 swir3 ...
SWC swc1 swc2 swc3 ...
SWRO swro1 swro2 swro3 ...
SORW sorw1 sorw2 sorw3 ...
SGR sgr1 sgr2 sgr3 ...
SGRO sgro1 sgro2 sgro3 ...
SORG sorg1 sorg2 sorg3 ...
KRWRO krwro1 krwro2 krwro3 ...
KROCW krocw1 krocw2 krocw3 ...
KRGRO krgro1 krgro2 krgro3 ...
Definitions:
TEMP Alpha label indicating that the following entries on this

line are the table temperature values.
ti Table temperature values, °F (°C).
SWIR Alpha label indicating that the following entries on this

line are values of irreducible water saturation. Used only
in saturation-dependent functions option.
swir Values of irreducible water saturation.
SWC Alpha label indicating that the following entries on this

line are: tables option - irreducible water saturation;
functions option - connate water saturation.
swc Values for above definition.
SWRO Alpha label indicating that the following entries on this

line are values of water saturation at residual oil, SWRO
= 1-SORW.
swro Values of water saturation at residual oil.
R5000.0.1 Tables 4-219

SORW Alpha label indicating that the following entries on this

line are values of residual oil saturation to water.
sorw Values of residual oil saturation to water.
SGR Alpha label indicating that the following entries on this

line are values of critical gas saturation.
sgr Values of critical gas saturation.
SGRO Alpha label indicating that the following entries on this

line are values of gas saturation at residual oil.
sgro Values of gas saturation at residual oil.
SORG Alpha label indicating that the following entries on this

line are values of residual oil saturation to gas.
sorg Values of residual oil saturation to gas.
KRWRO Alpha label indicating that the following entries on this

line are values of water relative permeability at residual
oil saturation.
krwro Values of water relative permeability at residual oil

saturation.
KROCW Alpha label indicating that the following entries on this

line are values of oil relative permeability at connate
water saturation.
krocw Values of oil relative permeability at connate water

saturation.
KRGRO Alpha label indicating the the following entries on this

line are values of gas relative permeability at residual oil
saturation.
krgro Values of gas relative permeability at residual oil

saturation.
NOTE: When using the saturation-dependent functions option, capillary pressures

are unaffected by endpoint variations, whereas they are in the tables
option.
4-220 Tables R5000.0.1

4.3.4 Temperature-Dependent Endpoint Multipliers (VIP-THERM)

TENDM and TENDPT may not both be entered.
Temperature multipliers in all endpoints may be specified for each set of

saturation-dependent data. Any spatial variations in endpoints (Section 5.32) are
ignored for blocks which are assigned to rock types with temperature-dependent
endpoints. Only those multipliers for endpoints which are temperature-dependent
need be specified. All multipliers default to 1.
TENDM isat
TEMP t1 t2 t3 ...
SWIR swir1 swir2 swir3 ...
SWC swc1 swc2 swc3 ...
SWRO swro1 swro2 swro3 ...
SORW sorw1 sorw2 sorw3 ...
SGR sgr1 sgr2 sgr3 ...
SGRO sgro1 sgro2 sgro3 ...
SORG sorg1 sorg2 sorg3 ...
KRWRO krwro1 krwro2 krwro3 ...
KROCW krocw1 krocw2 krocw3 ...
KRGRO krgro1 krgro2 krgro3 ...
Definitions:
TEMP Alpha label indicating that the following entries on this

line are the table temperature multipliers.
ti Table temperature multipliers.
SWIR Alpha label indicating that the following entries on this

line are multipliers of irreducible water saturation. Used
only in saturation-dependent functions option.
swir Multipliers of irreducible water saturation.
SWC Alpha label indicating that the following entries on this

line are multipliers for: tables option - irreducible water
saturation; functions option - connate water saturation.
swc Multipliers for above definition.
SWRO Alpha label indicating that the following entries on this

line are multipliers of water saturation at residual oil,
SWRO = 1-SORW.
swro Multipliers of water saturation at residual oil.
R5000.0.1 Tables 4-221

SORW Alpha label indicating that the following entries on this

line are multipliers of residual oil saturation to water.
sorw Multipliers of residual oil saturation to water.
SGR Alpha label indicating that the following entries on this

line are multipliers of critical gas saturation.
sgr Multipliers of critical gas saturation.
SGRO Alpha label indicating that the following entries on this

line are multipliers of gas saturation at residual oil.
sgro Multipliers of gas saturation at residual oil.
SORG Alpha label indicating that the following entries on this

line are multipliers of residual oil saturation to gas.
sorg Multipliers of residual oil saturation to gas.
KRWRO Alpha label indicating that the following entries on this

line are multipliers of water relative permeability at
residual oil saturation.
krwro Multipliers of water relative permeability at residual oil

saturation.
KROCW Alpha label indicating that the following entries on this

line are multipliers of oil relative permeability at connate
water saturation.
krocw Multipliers of oil relative permeability at connate water

saturation.
KRGRO Alpha label indicating the the following entries on this

line are multipliers of gas relative permeability at
residual oil saturation.
krgro Multipliers of gas relative permeability at residual oil

saturation.
NOTE: When using the saturation-dependent functions option, capillary pressures

are unaffected by endpoint variations, whereas they are in the tables
option.
4-222 Tables R5000.0.1

4.3.5 Water-Oil Hysteresis (Reference 32) (VIP-THERM)
NOTE: Related data - ISATI (Section 5.13.2), KWHYS, and KOHYS (Section
5.47) arrays and NOHYSW card (Simulation Module Reference Manual
Section 3.2.2)
The treatment of hysteresis is restricted to water and oil relative permeabilities for
the two-phase water-oil system. Three phase oil relative permeabilities are
computed using the hysteretic water-oil value and the non-hysteretic gas-oil value
in one of the two Stone models. The treatment is further restricted to imbibition
and drainage curves with common endpoints, as shown in Figures 4-5 to 4-8.
imbibition
krw
drainage
Swr Swro
Figure 4-5: Hysteretic Water Relative Permeability Bounding Curves for a Water-
wet System.
drainage
krow
imbibition
Swr Swro
Figure 4-6: Hysteretic Oil Relative Permeability Bounding Curves for a Water-wet
System.
R5000.0.1 Tables 4-223

drainage
krw
imbibition
Swr Swro
Figure 4-7: Hysteretic Water Relative Permeability Bounding Curves for an Oil-wet
System.
imbibition
krow
drainage
Swr Swro
Figure 4-8: Hysteretic Oil Relative Permeability Boundary Curves for an Oil-wet
System.
For a water-wet system, the ISAT array (Section 5.13.1) is used to assign the
drainage curves, and the ISATI array (Section 5.13.2) is used to assign the
imbibition curves. The definitions of ISAT and ISATI are reversed for an oil-wet
system. In other words, the ISAT array defines the bounding curves for decreasing
water saturation and the ISATI array defines the bounding curves for increasing
water saturation. Table ISATI is used for krw and krow for water saturations less
than Swr or greater than Swro and for krg, krog, and all capillary pressures.
Hysteretic relative permeabilities are computed using the method of Beattie,

Boberg, and McNab (Reference 32), for which the scanning curve equations are:
4-224 Tables R5000.0.1

For Sw increasing:
Sw – Swr - ewi
1 – ----------------------------
Swro – Swr
krw = krwi – Kwrev ( krwi – krwd ) -----------------------------------------
Swrev – Swr
1 – --------------------------------
Swro – Swr
Sw – Swr - eoi
1 – ----------------------------
Swro – Swr
krow = krowi + Korev ( krowd – krowi ) -----------------------------------------
Swrev – Swr
1 – --------------------------------
Swro – Swr
For Sw decreasing:
Sw – Swr - ewd
----------------------------
Swro – Swr
krw = krwd + ( 1 – Kwrev ) ( krwi – krwd ) --------------------------------
Swrev – Swr-
-------------------------------
Swro – Swr
Sw – Swr eod
-----------------------------
Swro – Swr-
= krowd – ( 1 – Korev ) ( krowd – krowi ) -------------------------------
Swrev – Swr-
-------------------------------
Swro – Swr
where
ewi, eoi, ewd, eod = scanning curve exponents
krwi – krw
kwrev = ------------------------------ at Swrev
krwi – krwd
krow – krowi
korev = ------------------------------------- at Swrev
krowd – krowi
Swrev = Water Saturation at last reversal
i = values from Table ISATI (imbibition for water-wet,

drainage for oil-wet)
d = values from Table ISAT (drainage for water-wet,

imbibition for oil-wet).
By default, Kwrev and Korev are initialized to 1.0 (to drainage curves for water
wet, to imbibition curves for oil-wet). If water saturation is at or below Swr
initially or if water saturation decreases to Swr or below during simulation, kwrev
and korev are reset to 0.0 in order to follow the imbibition curves (water-wet) or
drainage curves (oil-wet) when water saturation increases. Similar logic applies to
R5000.0.1 Tables 4-225

the endpoint at Swro. Kwrev and Korev can be specified with the KWHYS and
KOHYS arrays (Sections 5.47.1 and 5.47.2) to initialize to either bounding curve
or a scanning curve.
HYSWO EWI EWD EOI EOD

ewi ewd eoi eod
NOTE: By default, relative permeabilities appearing in the production/injection

equations for each perforation are set equal to those in the gridblock
containing the perforation. Hysteretic tables differing from gridblock
values may not be assigned to perforations. Non-hysteretic relative
permeability tables may be assigned to perforations using the ISAT label
in the FPERF data (VIP-EXECUTIVE Section 3.2.2) only if a NOHYSW
card (VIP-EXECUTIVE Section 3.2.2) appears previous to the FPERF
card in the recurrent data.
4.4 Equation of State PVT Property Data (VIP-COMP or VIP-

THERM)
The PVT properties of both vapors and liquids are predicted in VIP-COMP, and
optionally in VIP-THERM, by means of a cubic equation of state. Available
equations of state include Redlich-Kwong (RK), Soave-Redlich-Kwong (SRK),
Zudkevitch-Joffe-Redlich-Kwong (ZJRK), and Peng-Robinson (PR), each with
optional density correction (3 parameter). In VIP-THERM, the hydrocarbon
system may alternatively be characterized as a single component non-volatile
“dead” oil as described in Section 4.7. 00
In order to completely define fluid properties it is necessary only to define fluid

composition and various properties of individual components. The individual
components may be pure components, but frequently they are themselves
mixtures. For example, isobutane i-C4 and normal butane n-C4 may be treated
together simply as C4. 00
Heavy fractions are normally grouped together over a reasonably wide range of
molecular weights. For example, C16 - C20 may be grouped together as a single
component that is designated as C18. 00
The properties of a large number of components have been internally coded, so

they are automatically assigned unless the user elects to override the default. For
light components the internal values usually represent pure component properties,
but for heavier fractions the internal values have been adjusted to produce
improved results for naturally occurring oils and gases at reservoir conditions. 00
4-226 Tables R5000.0.1

Table 4-1 and 4-2 summarize the internally coded properties for all components
that can be automatically determined. Using one of the component identification
codes contained in these tables as data in the "COMPONENTS" input data will
cause the tabulated values to be loaded as data. Unless these values are overridden
by the user in the "PROPERTIES" data section, they will be used by default. 00
Initial reservoir temperature may be specified in one or more of three ways: 00
1. Specified as a constant value (Section 2.2.4). This value is always required.
2. Specified as a function of depth in the COMPOSITION data (Section

4.4.12.3), overriding option 1.
3. Specified by gridblock as the TEMP array (Section 5.18), overriding options

1 and 2.
4.4.1 Reservoir Equation of State (EOS)

00 This card should be used only with VIP-COMP or VIP-THERM.
The equation of state to be used for PVT properties for reservoir calculations is
specified on the EOS data card. 00
The additional data required for three parameter EOS treatment (Reference 26 and
27), is input by supplying VSHFT data as a part of the PROPERTIES data. 00
PR
PRORIG
EOS RK (ipvt)
SRK
ZJRK
00 Definitions:
PR Modified Peng-Robinson equation of state. (Reference

41)
PRORIG Original version of Peng-Robinson equation of state.

(Reference 22)
RK Redlich-Kwong equation of state. (Reference 23)
SRK Soave-Redlich-Kwong equation of state. (Reference 24)
ZJRK Zudkevitch-Joffe extension to the Redlich-Kwong

equation of state. (References 29 and 30)
ipvt PVT table number.
R5000.0.1 Tables 4-227

NOTE: 1. The Zudkevitch-Joffe equation (ZJRK) is not available in VIP-

THERM.
2. The modified (PR) or the original (PRORIG) equations must be used in

VIP-THERM unless the WATIDEAL option (Section 2.2.19.2) is selected.
3. Only one EOS table is allowed for VIP-THERM.
4. If only a single equation of state is used for all calculations, the ipvt
parameter may be omitted. If multiple equations of state are utilized, the
table numbers must consecutively increase.
00 Example:
00 C*********************************************
EOS PR 1
COMPONENTS
CO2 N2 C1 C2 C3 IC4 NC4 IC5 NC5 C6 C7 C8 C9 C10
C11 C14P C20P C27P C36P
C
4-228 Tables R5000.0.1

4.4.2 Component Names (COMPONENTS)

The alphanumeric labels that will be used to identify the components are defined
here. If any of the component names contained in either Table 4-1 or Table 4-2 are
used, the properties data will be picked from the tables, subject to user override. If
unrecognized labels are used, the user must directly specify all of the properties
data. 00
For multiple equation of state tables, the component names need only be entered
for the first table. Component names may also be entered for subsequent tables,
but the names must be the same as those entered for the first table. 00
COMPONENTS
cmp1 cmp2 . . . cmpnc
00 Definition:
cmp Component name. An alphanumeric label containing up

to 6 characters. Using a name contained in either Table 4-
1 or Table 4-2 will cause the tabulated properties to be
automatically loaded.
00 Example:
00 C*********************************************
EOS PR
COMPONENTS
C11P C14P C20P C27P C36P
R5000.0.1 Tables 4-229

4.4.3 Component Characteristics (PROPERTIES)

Properties data are entered to define the PVT characteristics of individual

components in EOS cases. These are combined by appropriate mixing rules and
used with the equation of state to determine the properties of mixtures. 00
Default properties for internally defined components are given in Table 4-1 and 4-
2. Omitting the properties data card for these components results in use of the
default properties. 00
For non-internally defined components, a minimum of molecular weight data

must be entered on the properties data card. Default properties for these
components are determined by table lookup on the internally defined hydrocarbon
component properties based on molecular weight. 00
All properties for internally-defined components and all except molecular weight
for non-internally defined components may be defaulted by entering the alpha
label X on the properties data card (Card 3) where the default value is desired. 00
The properties table (Card 2 and Cards 3) may be truncated at any point after
molecular weight. All unread data is defaulted. The column titles on the table title
card (Card 2) must appear in the order shown. The number of entries on Card 2
and Cards 3 must be the same. 00
PSIA
F
KPA
C
(1) PROPERTIES PSIG
K
KG/CM2
R
BAR
(2) COMP MW TC PC ZC ACENTRIC OMEGAA OMEGAB(VSHFT)(PCHOR)
(3) cmp1 mw1 tc1 pc1 zc1 w1 Ωa1 Ωb1 (vs1) (pch1)
. . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
cmpn mwn tcn pcn zcn wn Ωan Ωbn (vsn) (pchn)
00 The properties table is extended as follows for the Zudkevitch-Joffe equation of

state:
(2) ... PCHOR NBP GRVL TREF

(3) ... pchor1 nbp1 grvl1 tref1
... . . . .
... . . . .
... . . . .
... pchornc nbpnc grvlnc trefnc
4-230 Tables R5000.0.1

00 Definitions:
00 (1) Alpha label indicating that the units of the critical temperature values (TC)
are:
F Degrees Fahrenheit, °F. Default for english units.
C Degrees Centigrade, °C. Default for metric units.
K Degrees Kelvin, °K.
R Degrees Rankine, °R.
Alpha label indicating that the units of the critical pressure values (PC) are:
PSIA Psia. This is the default for english units.
KPA KPa. This is the default for metric units.
PSIG Psig.
KG/CM2 Kg/cm2.
BAR Bar.
00 (2) The titles on this card must appear in the order shown. PCHOR is not allowed
in VIP-THERM.
00 (3) cmpi Component name for component i. Must be identical to

one of the names included in the COMPONENTS data.
mwi The molecular weight of component i.
tci Critical temperature of component i.
pci Critical pressure of component i.
zci Critical z-factor of component i. (This affects nothing but

viscosity calculations.)
wi Acentric factor of component i.
Ωai Ωa for component i. This is treated as a universal constant

in the original formulations of the equations of state
(0.4274802 for RK, SRK and ZJRK; 0.457235529 for
PR). Additional flexibility in fitting data is gained by
allowing it to vary by component.
Ωbi Ωb for component i. This is treated as a universal

constant in the original formulation of the equations of
state (0.08664035 for RK, SRK and ZJRK; 0.077796074
R5000.0.1 Tables 4-231

for PR). Additional flexibility in fitting data is gained by

allowing it to vary by component.
vsi Shift parameter S used for volume correction in any three

parameter equation of state.
pchi Parachor for component i for use with the IFT or

VELCTY options only to calculate interfacial tension. If
an X is entered in this column a value will be calculated
from pchori = -11.4 + 3.23mwi - 0.0022(mwi)**2. Not
allowed in VIP-THERM.
nbpi Normal boiling point temperature of component i.
grvli Specific gravity of component i at temperature trefi

relative to water at 60°F.
trefi Reference temperature for specific gravity of component

i.
NOTE: 1. If either of the temperature or pressure unit flags is specified, then

both must be specified.
2. Repeat the data card containing cmpi, mwi, etc. as necessary to

specify all properties correctly.
3. If a three parameter EOS treatment is required, vshft values must be

entered.
4-232 Tables R5000.0.1

00 Example:
00 EOS PR
C************ COMPONENT PROPERTIES **************
C
PROPERTIES
COMP MW TC PC ZC ACENTRIC OMEGAA OMEGAB VSHFT
00 CO2 44.01 87.58 1071.92 0.2826 0.2250 .45723553 .07779607 0.02700

N2 28.01 -232.73 493.19 0.294 0.0400 .45723553 .07779607 -0.17520
C1 16.04 -116.96 667.97 0.2997 0.0130 .45723553 .07779607 -0.11800
C2 30.07 89.76 707.95 0.2926 0.0986 .45723553 .07779607 -0.10700
00 C3 44.10 205.68 616.52 0.2882 0.1524 .45723553 .07779607 -0.08477

IC4 58.12 274.65 529.20 0.2857 0.1848 .45723553 .07779607 -0.08269
NC4 58.12 305.32 550.81 0.2845 0.2010 .45723553 .07779607 -0.06858
IC5 72.15 368.77 490.54 0.2828 0.2223 .45723553 .07779607 -0.04671
NC5 72.15 385.37 488.78 0.2804 0.2539 .45723553 .07779607 0.04103
C6 85.18 464.75 469.96 0.2816 0.2385 .45723553 .07779607 0.02115
C7 92.03 494.32 419.54 0.2793 0.2693 .45723553 .07779607 0.10456
C8 104.23 570.03 389.40 0.2772 0.2974 .45723553 .07779607 0.13470
C9 120.73 628.33 374.85 0.2733 0.3516 .45723553 .07779607 0.08856
C10 134.00 662.5 364.85 0.2705 0.3910 .45723553 .07779607 0.04730
C11P 158.27 694.63 327.66 0.2660 0.4577 .45723553 .07779607 0.03175
C14P 214.42 808.93 276.65 0.2557 0.6174 .45723553 .07779607 0.01107
C20P 300.93 996.43 233.14 0.2448 0.7999 .45723553 .07779607 0.00579
C27P 403.05 1089.67 173.46 0.2381 0.9202 .45723553 .07779607 0.10818
C36P 668.30 1354.26 93.78 0.2273 1.1307 .45723553 .07779607 0.42092
R5000.0.1 Tables 4-233

4.4.4 Binary Interaction Coefficients (DJK)

DJK cards are used to define binary interaction coefficients djk. These are used in
the mixing rules that determine for mixtures the "A" parameter of the equation of
state. 00
Table 4-3 summarizes values of djk that have been internally coded for various
combinations of components. These values will be automatically loaded as data
when the corresponding component names are entered in the COMPONENTS
data. All binary combinations that involve an unrecognized component will be
assigned default values of zero. 00
Any of the default values for binary interaction coefficients can be overridden by
means of DJK data. 00
DJK cmpj
cmpk djk
00 Definitions:
cmpj Component name of the first component in a binary

mixture.
cmpk Component name of the second component in a binary

mixture.
djk The binary interaction coefficient for mixtures of

component j and component k.
NOTE: 1. Repeat the data card containing cmpk for each component k that
interacts with component j.
2. Remember that djk = dkj. It is not necessary to define both.
3. Unless the WATIDEAL option (Section 2.2.19.2) is used, binary

interaction coefficients between water adn other components may be
defined by specifying the alpha label H2O for cmpj. Specifying H2O
for cmpk will result in an error.
4-234 Tables R5000.0.1

00 Example:
00 EOS PR
00 COMPONENTS
C1N2 NO2C3 C4C5 C5C8 C9C19 C2035 C36P
C
C****************** COMPONENTS PROPERTIES
*********************
C
PROPERTIES
COMP MW TC PC ZC ACENTRIC OMEGAA OMEGAB
00 C1N2 16.13 -117.31 666.64 0.3141 0.0132 .45723553 .07779607

CO2C3 40.17 107.29 911.55 0.3016 0.1805 .45723553 .07779607
C4C5 62.99 325.6 525.53 0.2993 0.2118 .45723553 .07779607
C6C8 94.57 514.09 422.18 0.2952 0.2712 .45723553 .07779607
C9C19 152.75 690.49 339.57 0.2838 0.4427 .45723553 .07779607
C2035 311.26 1006.50 227.12 0.2619 0.8142 .45723553 .07779607
C36P 668.30 1354.89 93.78 0.2458 1.1307 .45723553 .07779607
C
DJK CO2C3
C1N2 -0.508225E-01
DJK C4C5
C1 N2 0.4172094E-01
CO2C3 -0.2031559E-01
DJK C6C8
C1N2 -0.3255523E-01
CO2C3 -0.6801761E-01
C4C5 -0.1434877E+00
DJK C9C19
C1 N2 0.1238972E+00
CO2C3 -0.8605607E-03
C4C5 0.2762086E+00
C6C8 -0.6246630E-01
DJK C2035
C1 N2 0.8639371E-01
CO2C3 0.1466657E-01
C4C5 -0.2710768E+00
C6C8 -0.1425948E+00
C9C19 0.8496494E-02
DJK C36P
C1 N2 0.8916950E-01
CO2C3 0.1177855E+00
C4C5 -0.2947721E-01
C6C8 0.5526345E-01
00 C9C19 -0.7258570E-01
C2035 -0.9795381E-01
R5000.0.1 Tables 4-235

ENDEOS
C
4.4.5 Lohrenz-Bray-Clark Viscosity Coefficients

00 This card should be used only with VIP-COMP.
00 The Lohrenz-Bray-Clark viscosity calculation is as follows:

2 3 4 4 –4
00 μ = μ b + ζ ( [ C 1 + C 2 ρ r + C 3 ρ r + C 4 ρ r + C 5 ρ r ] – 10 )
00 where μ is the phase viscosity, μ b is a base viscosity, ζ is a function of pseudo
critical pressures, pseudo critical temperatures, and mixture molecular weight, and
ρ r is a pseudo reduced phase density.
00 By default, the coefficients C1, C2, C3, C4, and C5 are equal to 0.1023, 0.023364,
0.058533,-0.040758, and 0.0093324, respectively. Use of the LBC keyword
allows the user to modify these default coefficients to obtain a better match with
experimental viscosities.
00 The LBC keyword is not required if the user wishes to retain the default
coefficients.
00 The LBC keyword can appear anywhere after the PROPERTIES keyword and
data and before the ENDEOS keyword. The modified coefficients will only apply
for the current EOS table being defined.
LBC
c1 c2 c3 c4 c5
4.4.6 HSTAR Card (VIP-THERM)

00 The HSTAR card is used to define component ideal gas state enthalpy
coefficients. The ideal gas state enthalpy for each component is given by the fifth
degree polynomial
H i* = h i0
* + h * T + h * T2 + h * T3 + h * T4 + h * T5
i1 i2 i3 i4 i5
where H i* is the ideal gas state enthalpy of component i in Btu/LB mole (KJ/kg
mole), T is the temperature in degrees Rankin (degrees Kelvin) and h *in are the
ideal gas state enthalpy coefficients of component i in Btu/LB mole-(°R)n (KJ/kg
mole-(°K)n).
Table 4-4 gives component Passut-Danner ideal gas state enthalpy coefficients for
pure components (References 33 and 34) which have been internally coded. Note
that these coefficients are given on a mass rather than a molar basis. These values
will be automatically loaded when the corresponding component names are
entered in the COMPONENTS data.
4-236 Tables R5000.0.1

For components not listed in Table 4-4, default ideal gas state enthalpy
coefficients are calculated using the Kesler and Lee correlation (References 35,
36, and 37). This correlation is not always applicable. It fails if the component
critical temperature is less than 60 °F. The correlation requires component specific
gravity. If the component is a gas at standard conditions, then we use the density at
the vapor pressure at standard temperature. For the relatively heavy components
commonly used in thermal reservoir simulation, these shortcomings are not a
problem.
Any of the default values for ideal gas state enthalpy coefficients may be
overridden by means of HSTAR data.
HSTAR * * * * * *
cmpi h io h i1 h i2 h i3 h i4 h i5
Definitions:
cmpi Component name for component i. Must be identical to

one of the components included in the COMPONENTS
data.
*
hi Ideal gas state enthalpy coefficients for component i, Btu/
LB mole-(°R)n (KJ/kg mole-(°k)n).
NOTE: Water ideal gas state enthalpy coefficients are internally hardcoded and
may not be input.
4.4.7 Separator Equation of State (EOSSEP) (VIP-COMP or VIP-THERM)
PR
RK
EOSSEP
SRK
ZJRK
00 Definitions:
PR Peng-Robinson equation of state.
RK Redlich-Kwong equation of state.
SRK Soave-Redlich-Kwong equation of state.
ZJRK Zudkevitch-Joffe extension to the Redlich-Kwong

equation of state (not available in VIP-THERM).
R5000.0.1 Tables 4-237

The equation of state to be used for PVT properties for surface calculations is
specified on the EOSSEP data card. The default equation of state is the reservoir
equation of state. 00
NOTE: 1. Since separator equation of state parameters default to reservoir

values, if a different equation of state is defined for surface
separation, a full set of surface separator equation of state parameters
will probably be required.
2. If the equation of state for surface separation is set to Peng-Robinson

and the reservoir equation of state is one of the Redlich-Kwong types,
the surface Ωai and Ωbi will be set to the Peng-Robinson defaults.
Similarly, if the equation of state for surface separation is set to one of
the Redlich-Kwong types and the reservoir equation of state is Peng-
Robinson, the surface Ωai and Ωbi will be set to the Redlich-Kwong
defaults. In both cases these defaults may be replaced by user-
supplied PROPERTIES data.
3. If not entered on the surface PROPERTIES card, the units of critical

temperature and pressure will be the same as for the reservoir
properties.
4. The Zudkevitch-Joffe (ZJRK) equation is not available in VIP-

THERM.
00 The additional data required for three parameter EOS treatment is input by
supplying VSHFT data as a part of the PROPERTIES data.
00 Examples:
00 EOS PR
COMPONENTS
C02 N2 C1 C2 C3 IC4 NC4 IC5 NC5 C6 C7 C8 C9 C10
C
PROPERTIES
.
.
.
DJK
.
.
.
EOSSEP SRK
PROPERTIES
.
.
4-238 Tables R5000.0.1

.
STKZDN
.
DJKSEP
.
.
.
ENDEOS
4.4.8 Standing-Katz Density Coefficients (STKZDN) (VIP-COMP)
STKZDN
den1 . . . dennc
00 Definition:
deni Standing-Katz density correlation coefficient for

component i, gm/cc.
The coefficients for the Standing-Katz density correlation for surface separation
calculations are entered using STKZDN card and associated data. 00
The Standing-Katz correlation is used to calculate surface liquid density. 00
NOTE: This data can be entered only after the EOSSEP card. If the equation of
state data for surface separators is identical to that for the reservoir, the
EOSSEP card can be followed by STKZDN card.
00 Examples:
00 C
EOSSEP SRK
STKZDN
0.632 0.641 0.658 0.70 0.80 0.777
ENDEOS
R5000.0.1 Tables 4-239

4.4.9 Binary Interaction Coefficients for Separators (DJKSEP) (VIP-COMP or

VIP-THERM)
DJKSEP cmpj
cmpk djk
00 Definitions:
cmpj Component name of the first component in a binary

mixture.
cmpk Component name of the second component in a binary

mixture.
djk The binary interaction coefficient for mixtures of

component j and component k.
DJKSEP cards are used to define binary interaction coefficients djk for surface
separators. These are used in the mixing rules that determine for mixtures the ’A’
parameter of the equation of state. 00
Table 4-3 summarizes values of djk that have been internally coded for various
combinations of components. These values will be automatically loaded as data
when the corresponding component names are entered in the COMPONENTS
data. All binary combinations that involve an unrecognized component will be
assigned default values of zero. 00
Any of the default values for binary interaction coefficients can be overridden by
means of DJKSEP data. 00
The data entered using DJKSEP card is used for all stages. The data can be
selectively overridden by using the DJKSEP card as a part of the separator stage
data. 00
Repeat the data card containing cmpk for each component k that interacts with
component j. 00
00 Remember that djk = dkj. It is not necessary to define both.
00 Examples:
00 EOS PR
COMPONENTS
C1 N2 C02C3 C4C5 C6C8 C9C19 C2035 C36P
C
C COMPONENTS PROPERTIES
C
PROPERTIES
4-240 Tables R5000.0.1


.
.
.
C
DJK C02C3
C1 N2 -0.508225E-01
DJK C4C5
C1 N2 0.4172094E-01
C02C3 -0.2031559E+00
DJK C6C8
C1 N2 -0.3255523E-01
C02C3 -0.6801761E-01
C4C5 -0.1434877E+00
DJK C9C19
C1 N2 0.1238792E+00
C02C3 -0.8605607E-03
C4C5 0.2762086E+00
C6C8 -0.6246630E-01
DJK C2035
C1 N2 0.8639371E-01
2C3 0.1466657E-01
C4C5T -0.2710768E+00
C6C8 -0.1425948E+00
C9C19 0.8496494E-02
DJK C36P
C1 N2 0.8916950E-01
C02C3 0.1177855E+00
C4C5 -0.2947721E-01
C6C8 0.5526345E-01
C9C19 -0.7258570E-01
C2035 -0.9795381E-01
C
EOSSEP SRK
C
00 PROPERTIES
C
DJKSEP C02C3
C1 N2 -0.508225E-01
DJKSEP C4C5
Cl N2 0.4172094E-01
C02C3 -0.2031559E+00
DJKSEP C2035
.
R5000.0.1 Tables 4-241

. .
.
C1 N2 0.8639371E-01
C02C3 0.1466657E-01
C4C5 -0.2710768E+00
C6C8 -0.1425948E+00
C9C19 0.8496494E-02
ENDEOS
4-242 Tables R5000.0.1

4.4.10 End of EOS data (ENDEOS)

00 This card should be used only with VIP-COMP.
The ENDEOS card terminates the reading of the equation-of-state properties for
the components whose mixture characteristics are to be simulated. 00
ENDEOS
00
Table 4-1: Component Properties Data - Pure Compounds Critical Properties
ACENTRIC
COMPONENT MOL. WT. TC, °F. PC, psia ZC
FACTOR
CO2 44.010 87.9 1070.9 .2742 .2225*
H2S 34.076 212.7 1036.0 .2660 .0920
N2 28.013 -232.4 493.0 .2910 .0372
C1 16.043 -116.6 667.8 .2890 .0126
C2 30.070 90.1 707.8 .2850 .0978
C3 44.097 206.0 616.3 .2810 .1541
NC4 58.124 305.7 550.7 .2740 .2015
IC4 58.124 275.0 529.1 .2830 .1840
NC5 72.151 385.7 488.6 .2620 .2524
IC5 72.151 369.1 490.4 .2730 .2286
NC6 86.178 453.7 436.9 .2640 .2998
NC7 100.210 512.8 396.8 .2630 .3498
NC8 114.230 564.2 360.6 .2590 .3981
NC9 128.260 610.7 332.0 .2510 .4452
NC10 142.290 652.1 304.0 .2470 .4904
* Adjusted to fit the vapor pressure curve using the P-R equation.
R5000.0.1 Tables 4-243

00
Table 4-2: Component Properties - Heavy Fractions* Critical Properties

MOL. ACENTRIC METHANE
COMPONENT TC, °F. PC, psia
WT. FACTOR Djk
C6 84 463 468.3 .2313 .0298
C7 96 525 449.4 .2718 .0350
C8 107 576 429.8 .3151 .0381
C9 121 625 402.0. .3636 .0407
C10 134 668 379.6 .4176 .0427
C11 147 706 359.3 .4680 .0442
C12 161 743 340.2 .5147 .0458
C13 175 776 323.9 .5575 .0473
C14 190 810 308.8 .5982 .0488
C15 206 844 294.3 .6445 .0502
C16 222 872 280.0 .6889 .0512
C17 237 900 269.3 .7315 .0523
C18 251 920 258.7 .7664 .0530
C19 263 940 251.3 .8002 .0537
C20 275 961 244.7 .8415 .0544
C21 291 982 235.4 .8750 .0551
C22 300 1001 232.1 .9261 .0558
C23 312 1020 226.9 .9629 .0565
C24 324 1037 221.6 1.0045 .0571
C25 337 1055 216.2 1.0382 .0575
C26 349 1071 211.5 1.0804 .0581
C27 360 1087 207.8 1.1167 .0586
C28 372 1102 203.4 1.1583 .0591
C29 382 1114 200.0 1.1987 .0595
C30 394 1129 196.2 1.2325 .0599
C31 404 1143 193.7 1.2706 .0605
C32 415 1156 190.5 1.3151 .0609
C33 426 1169 187.5 1.3494 .0613
C34 437 1180 184.2 1.3901 .0616
C35 445 1191 182.5 1.4284 .0620
C36 456 1202 179.5 1.4718 .0623
C37 464 1213 178.1 1.4993 .0627
C38 475 1223 175.2 1.5423 .0630
C39 484 1233 173.2 1.5781 .0633
C40 495 1243 170.6 1.6237 .0635
C41 502 1252 169.4 1.6494 .0638
C42 512 1260 166.9 1.6927 .0640
C43 521 1269 165.2 1.7294 .0642
C44 531 1279 163.2 1.7829 .0645
C45 539 1287 161.8 1.8213 .0648
* Tc, Pc, and acentric factor have been adjusted to fit the liquid density and boiling point data of Katz and
Firoozabadi.
4-244 Tables R5000.0.1

00
Table 4-3: Binary Interaction Coefficients

CO2 H2S N2 C1 C2 C3 NC4 IC4
CO2 .0 .0 .0 .150 .150 .150 .150 .150
H2S .0 .0 .0 .0 .0 .0 .0 .0
N2 .0 .0 .0 .120 .120 .120 .120 .120
C1 .150 .0 .120 .0 .0 .0 .020 .020
C2 .150 .0 .120 .0 .0 .0 .010 .010
C3 .150 .0 .120 .0 .0 .0 .010 .010
NC4 .150 .0 .120 .020 .010 .010 .0 .0
IC4 .150 .0 .120 .020 .010 .010 .0 .0
NC5 .150 .0 .120 .020 .010 .010 .0 .0
IC5 .150 .0 .120 .020 .010 .010 .0 .0
NC6 .150 .0 .120 .025 .010 .010 .0 .0
NC7 .150 .0 .120 .025 .010 .010 .0 .0
NC8 .150 .0 .120 .035 .010 .010 .0 .0
NC9 .150 .0 .120 .035 .010 .010 .0 .0
NC10 .150 .0 .120 .035 .010 .010 .0 .0
NC5 IC5 NC6 NC7 NC8 NC9 NC10
CO2 .150 .150 .150 .150 .150 .150 .150
H2S .0 .0 .0 .0 .0 .0 .0
N2 .120 .120 .120 .120 .120 .120 .120
C1 .020 .020 .025 .025 .035 .035 .035
C2 .010 .010 .010 .010 .010 .010 .010
C3 .010 .010 .010 .010 .010 .010 .010
NC4 .0 .0 .0 .0 .0 .0 .0
IC4 .0 .0 .0 .0 .0 .0 .0
NC5 .0 .0 .0 .0 .0 .0 .0
IC5 .0 .0 .0 .0 .0 .0 .0
NC6 .0 .0 .0 .0 .0 .0 .0
NC7 .0 .0 .0 .0 .0 .0 .0
NC8 .0 .0 .0 .0 .0 .0 .0
NC9 .0 .0 .0 .0 .0 .0 .0
NC10 .0 .0 .0 .0 .0 .0 .0
R5000.0.1 Tables 4-245

Table 4-4: Passut-Danner Ideal Gas State Enthalpy Coefficients BTU/LB-(°R)n

* * * * * *
COMPONENT h i0 h i1 h i2 ( *10 4 ) h i3 ( *10 7 ) h i4 ( *10 11 ) h i5 ( *10 15 )
CO2 4.778 0.11443 1.01130 -0.26490 0.34706 -0.13140
H2S -0.617 0.23858 -0.24460 0.41070 -1.30126 1.44852
N2 -0.934 0.25520 -0.17790 0.15890 -0.32203 0.15893
C1 -6.977 0.57170 -2.94312 4.23157 -15.26740 19.45261
C2 -0.021 0.26488 -0.25014 2.92334 -12.86050 18.22060
C3 -0.738 0.17260 0.94041 2.15543 -10.70986 15.92794
NC4 7.430 0.09857 2.69180 0.51820 -4.20139 6.56042
IC4 11.498 0.04668 3.34801 0.14423 -3.16420 5.42893
NC5 27.172 -0.00280 4.40073 -0.86287 0.81764 -0.19715
IC5 27.623 -0.03150 4.69884 -0.98282 1.02985 -0.29485
NC6 -7.391 0.22911 -0.81569 4.52784 -25.23180 47.48019
NC7 -0.066 0.18021 0.34729 3.21879 -18.36600 33.76939
NC8 1.120 0.17308 0.48810 3.05401 -17.36459 31.24831
NC9 1.720 0.16906 0.58126 2.92611 -16.55850 29.29610
NC10 -2.993 0.20335 -0.34904 4.07057 23.06441 42.96899
00
4.4.11 Non-EOS PVT Property Data (VIP-THERM Compositional Model)

Data described in this section may be input in any order, but must appear as a
group immediately following the ENDEOS card.
Described in this section are oil and gas phase viscosity data and data for options
in which EOS calculations (oil and gas phase fugacity coefficients, densities, and
enthalpies) may be selectively replaced by tables or correlations.
4.4.11.1 Oil Phase Viscosity Data
Four methods are available for modeling oil phase viscosity - (A) the Pederson
Model28, (B) mixing rule option, (C) the molecular weight-dependent intercept
logarithmic correlation option, and (D) the Lohrenz, Bray, and Clark model38 (not
recommended for non-isothermal problems).
4-246 Tables R5000.0.1

A) Pedersen Viscosity Correlation (Reference 28)
VISOIL PEDERSON
VISK
i ki
. . .
VISKJ
i j Xij
. . . . . .
Definitions:
VISK The keyword for inputting K-values. Optional.
i Index for ki.
ki Overwriting ki value.
VISKJ The keyword for inputting binary interaction coefficients

Xij. Optional.
i Component i.
j Component j.
Xij Interaction coefficient for components i and j. Default is

0.
The Pedersen correlation is based on the corresponding states principle (see

Reference 28). A group of substances obeys the corresponding states principle if
these substances have the same reduced viscosity at the same reduced density and
reduced temperature. In such a case, only comprehensive viscosity data for one
component (the reference component - methane) in the group are needed. Others
can be calculated from the reduced viscosity. This correlation is especially useful
for heavy oils where the Lohrenz-Bray-Clark correlation (LBC) fails to give a
proper viscosity prediction. The user has the option of specifying binary
interacting coefficients Xij for calculating the mixture critical temperature and k1
to k7 for calculating the viscosity of the reference component. VISK and VISKJ
cards are optional. Default values will be used if they are not entered. The default
values are zero for all the interaction coefficients Xij and are the following values
for the coefficients kj. Only those data overwriting the default values need to be
entered.
k1 = 9.74602
k2 = 18.0834
k3 = 4126.66
k4 = 44.6055
k5 = 0.976544
k6 = 81.8134
k7 = 15649.9
R5000.0.1 Tables 4-247

Examples:
ENDEOS
VISOIL PEDERSON
VISK
1 42.5
2 0.0002279
3 11770
4 600.3
5 16.49
6 1614
7 0.05552.
VISKJ
35 -0.36409
36 -0.38517
37 -0.8
38 -0.62763
OILMF 1
0.0001 0.2917 0.0045 0.0024 0.1538 0.3003 0.1095 0.1377
GASMF 1
X X X X X X X X
B) Component Oil Viscosity Option
In this option, oil viscosity for each component is tabulated versus temperature.
The mixing rule
x1 x2 x3
μ 01 * μ 02 * μ 03 . . . μ oxNC
NC
is used to obtain the oil phase viscosity from the component viscosities μoi which
are interpolated/extrapolated from the tabular data using the equation
In(In(μoi +1.000001 - μ min

o )) = A + B In T,
min
where μ o is the limiting viscosity as temperature approaches infinity and T is
min
absolute temperature. The value of μ o is .200001 by default, and may be input
using a VOMIN card:
VOMIN vomin
where vomin is in cp.
4-248 Tables R5000.0.1

The component oil viscosities are input in the form:
Title Card: VISOIL COMP

Header Card: T 1 2 3 . . . NC
Data Cards: t1 vo1,1 vo2,1 vo3,1 . . . voNC,1
. t2 vo1,2 vo2,2 vo3,2 . . . voNC,2
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
Definitions:
Title Card: VISOIL COMP Alpha labels indicating that component

oil viscosity data is to follow.
Header Card:T 1 2 ... NC Table header card, where NC is replaced

by the numeric value of the total number
of components.
tj Temperature, °F (°C).
voij Viscosity of pure component i at temperature tj, cp.
C) Logarithmic Correlation Option
In this option, oil viscosity is modeled by assuming a linear relationship between

viscosity and temperature on a standard ASTM viscosity plot (In (In (μo + .8))
versus InT). The slope of the line is assumed constant, while the y-intercept is
allowed to vary with composition and is correlated against oil molecular weight.
Oil viscosity is then given by
μo = exp (exp (A + B In(t)) - 1.00001 + μ min

o
min
00 where μo is oil viscosity in centipoise, μ o is minimum oil viscosity, T is
temperature in degrees Rankin, B is a constant, and A is a function of oil
min
molecular weight. Note that the use of μ o = .200001 is equivalent to the
standard ASTM viscosity relationship in which viscosity approaches a value of .2
as temperature approaches infinity for all fluids.
VISOIL
(VOMIN vomin)
B b
A MW
a1 mw1
a2 mw2
. .
. .
. .
R5000.0.1 Tables 4-249

Definitions:
VISOIL Alpha label indicating that the following data is oil

viscosity data.
VOMIN Alpha label indicating that the next entry on this line is
the minimum oil viscosity. (Optional.)
vomin Value of minimum oil viscosity, cp (cp). This is the

limiting value of oil viscosity as temperature approaches
infinity. Default is .200001. (Optional.)
B Alpha label indicating that the next entry on this line is

the parameter B in the oil viscosity correlation.
b Value of the parameter B in the oil viscosity correlation,

dimensionless.
A Alpha label indicating that the entry in this location on

the following data cards is the parameter A in the oil
viscosity correlation.
MW Alpha label indicating that the entry in this location on

the following data cards is the oil molecular weight for
each value of A.
ai Value of A in oil viscosity correlation corresponding to

oil molecular weight mwi.
mwi Value of oil molecular weight corresponding to oil

viscosity parameter ai.
D) Lohrenz, Bray, and Clark Option
VISOIL LBC
4.4.11.2 Gas Phase Viscosity Data
Three methods are available fo modeling gas phase viscosity - (A) the Pederson
Model28, (B) the component gas viscosity option, and (C) the Lohrenz, Bray, and
Clark model38.
4-250 Tables R5000.0.1

In all three methods, steam tables are used to obtain the steam viscosity, which is
combined with the hydrocarbon gas viscosity (determined by one of the methods)
by mole fraction average. Steam viscosity is given by
⎧
⎪ μ s ( T, P ) if P < Pwsat
μs = ⎨
⎪ μ sat ( T ) if ≥ Pwsat
⎩ s
SAT
where: μ s ( T, P ) is the steam table value at T,P ; μ s ( T ) is the saturated value
at T, and Pwsat is the water saturation pressure as a function of temperature.
A) Pedersen Viscosity Correlation
VISGAS PEDERSON
VISK
i ki
. . .
VISKJ
i j Xij
. . . . . .
Definitions:
i Index for ki.

Xij. Optional.
i Component i.
j Component j.

0.

proper viscosity prediction. The user has the option of specifying binary
interacting coefficients Xij for calculating the mixture critical temperature and k1
to k7 for calculating the viscosity of the reference component. VISK and VISKJ
R5000.0.1 Tables 4-251

cards are optional. Default values will be used if they are not entered. The default
values are zero for all the interacting coefficients Xij and the following values for
the coefficients kj. Only those data overwriting the default values need to be
entered.
k1 = 9.74602
k2 = 18.0834
k3 = 4126.66
k4 = 44.6055
k5 = 0.976544
k6 = 81.8134
k7 = 15649.9
Examples:
ENDEOS
VISGAS PEDERSON
VISK
1 42.5
2 0.0002279
3 11770
4 600.3
5 16.49
6 1614
7 0.05552.
VISKJ
35 -0.36409
36 -0.38517
37 -0.8
38 -0.62763
OILMF 1
0.0001 0.2917 0.0045 0.0024 0.1538 0.3003 0.1095 0.1377
GASMF 1
X X X X X X X X
4-252 Tables R5000.0.1

B) Component Gas Viscosity Option 00
This option is identical to the component oil viscosity option except that the
component viscosities are linearly interpolated/extrapolated from the tabular data
and that a mole fraction average mixing rule is used:
NCV
*
μg = ∑ μgi yi
i=1
Title Card: VISGAS COMP

Header Card: T 1 2 3 . . . NCV
Data Cards: t1 vg1,1 vg2,1 vg3,1 . . . vgNCV,1
. t2 vg1,2 vg2,2 vg3,2 . . . vgNCV,2
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
Definitions:
Title Card: VISGAS COMP Alpha labels indicating that component

gas viscosity data is to follow.
Header Card: T 1 2 ... NCV Table header card, where NCV is

replaced by the numeric value of the
number of volatile components.
tj Temperature, °F(°C)
vgij Viscosity of pure component i at temperature tj, cp.
C) Lohrenz, Bray, and Clark Option
VISGAS LBC
4.4.11.3 Component Oil Density Option
In this option, pure component compressibilities coefficients of thermal

expansion, and densities at standard conditions along with a mixing rule are used
to compute oil density, thus eliminating the equation-of-state oil z-factor
calculations.
The pure component densities are given by

STD
ρ oi = ρ oi * ( 1 + C oi ( P – P s ) – C TEOi * ( T – T s ) )
R5000.0.1 Tables 4-253

and are used to obtain the oil phase density in the volume-average mixing rule
1
ρ o = --------------------
NC
xi Mi
∑ ----------
ρ oi
i 1
DENO COMP
COIL coil1 coil2 . . . coilNC
CTEOIL cteoil1 cteoil2. . . cteoilNC
DOSTD dostd1 dostd2 . . . dostdNC
Definitions:
DENO COMP Alpha labels indicating that component oil density data is
to follow.
COIL Alpha label indicating that the next NC entries on this

card are oil component compressibilities.
coili Value of compressibility of oil component i, psi-1 (kPa-1).

If the values for all components are the same, only one
value is required.
CTEOIL Alpha label indicating that the next NC entries on this

card are oil component coefficients of thermal expansion.
cteoili Value of coefficient of thermal expansion of oil

component i, °R-1 (°K-1). If the values for all components
are the same, only one value is required.
DOSTD Alpha label indicating that the next NC entries on this

card are oil component densities at standard conditions.
dostdi Value of density at standard conditions of oil component

i, gm/cc (gm/cc).
4-254 Tables R5000.0.1

4.4.11.4 Component Enthalpy Option
In this option, specific heat capacity coefficients for components in the oil and gas
phases and volatile component heats of vaporization are used to obtain oil and gas
phase enthalpies, thus eliminating the equation-of-state enthalpy calculations.
Component specific heat capacities in the oil and gas phase are defined as
Cpoi = cpoi0 + cpoi1 * T

Cpgi = cpgi0 + cpgi1 * T + cpgi2 * T2 + cpgi3 * T
Volatile component specific heats of vaporization are assumed constant and are
specified at the boiling point TBi.
Component enthalpies in the oil and gas phases are given by
h oi = ∫ Cpoi dT
Ts
TB i T
h gi = ∫ Cpoi dT + ∫ Cpgi dT + ΔH vi
Ts TB i
The oil and gas phase enthalpies are then given by mole fraction averages of the
component values:
NC
ho = ∑ xi hoi
i=1
NCV
hg = ∑ yi hgi + ys hgs
i=1
where ys is the steam mole fraction in the gas phase and hgs is the steam enthalpy,
which is taken from the steam tables as:
⎧
⎪ H ( P, T ) + ΔH vw ( T )if P > Pwsat
h gs = ⎨ WL
⎪ H WV ( P, T ) if P ≤ Pwsat
⎩
where: HWL (P,T) and HWV (P,T) are liquid water and steam enthalpies at P,T;
ΔHVW(T) is the saturated water heat of vaporization at T; and Pwsat is the water
saturation pressure as a function of temperature.
R5000.0.1 Tables 4-255

ENTHALPY COMP
CPO0 cpo01 cpo02 . ..cpo0NC
CPO1 cpo11 cpo12 . ..cpo1NC
CPG0 cpg01 cpg02 . ..cpg0NCV
CPG3 cpg31 cpg3s . . . cpg3ncv
HVAP hvap1 hvap2 . . .havapNCV
TB tb1 tb2 . . .tbNC
Definitions:
ENTHALPY COMP Alpha labels indicating that enthalpy component data

is to follow.
CPO0, CPO1 Apha labels indicating that the next NC entries on

each card are the 0th or 1st degree specific heat
capacity coefficients for the oil phase components.
cpo0i, cpo1i Values of the 0th and 1st degree specific heat
capacity coefficients for oil component i, Btu/(LB
°Fdegree+1) (KJ/(KG °Cdegree+1)).
CPG0, CPG1, CPG2, Apha labels indicating that the next NCV
CPG3 entries on each card are the 0th or 1st or 2nd or
3rd degree specific heat capacity coefficients for
the gas phase components. CPG3 data is
optional.
cpg0i, cpg1i, cpg2i Values of the 0th and 1st and 2nd and 3rd
cpg3 degree specific heat capacity coefficients for gas
component i, Btu/(LB °Fdegree+1) (KJ/(KG
°Cdegree+1)).
HVAP Alpha label indicating that the next NCV entries on

this card are the specific heats of vaporization for the
gas phase components.
hvapi Value of the specific heat of vaporization at thvapi

for gas component i, Btu/LB (KJ/KG).
TB Alpha label indicating that the next NC entries on

this card are the boiling point temperatures
corresponding to hvapi for the NCV volatile
components.
tbi Values of the boiling point temperatures

corresponding to hvapi for volatile gas component i,
°F (°C).
4-256 Tables R5000.0.1

4.4.11.5 Component K-value Options
Two options are provided in which equation of state component fugacity

coefficient calculations are replaced by component k-value equilibrium
relationships. The first option (A) uses a fixed functional dependence on
temperature and pressure of the volatile component k-values. In the second
option, (B) k-values for the volatile components are expressed as two dimensional
tables in temperature and pressure.
If the WATIDEAL option (Section 2.2.19.2) is invoked, the k-values are assumed
to apply to the water-free fluid system at the hydrocarbon partial pressure in the
gas phase (PHC = (1-ystm)*P). As a result, the k-values are a function of
temperature, pressure, and steam mole fraction in the vapor phase.
In the default treatment of water in the vapor phase (using the Equation of State),
the k-values are assumed to be three phase values which account for the presence
of water in the vapor phase.
A) Component K-Value Correlation Option
In this option, k-values for the volatile components in a water-free system are
expressed as
B –Di
KV i = ⎛⎝ A i + -----i + C i *P⎞⎠ *EXP ⎛⎝ --------------⎞⎠
P T – Ei
KVCOR
COMP A B C D E
1 a1 b1 c1 d1 e1
2 a2 b2 c2 d2 e2
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
NCV aNCV bNCV cNVC dNCV eNCV
R5000.0.1 Tables 4-257

B) Component K-Value Tables Option
KVTBS
P p1
COMP 1 2 3 ... NCV
TEMP
t11 kv111 kv211 kv311 ...
t21 kv121 kv221 kv321 ...
t31 kv131 kv231 kv331 ...
. . . .
. . . .
. . .
P p2
COMP 1 2 3 ...
TEMP
t21 kv112 kv212 kv312 ...
t22 kv122 kv222 kv322 ...
t32 kv132 kv232 kv332 ...
P p3
.
.
.
Definitions:
P Alpha label indicating that the following entry on this

line is the pressure at which the subsequent k-value vs.
temperature table applies.
pk Values of pressure, psia (kPa).
COMP Alpha label indicating that NCV component numbers

follow.
TEMP Alpha label indicating that the entries appearing in this

location on the following data cards are temperature
values.
tjk Temperature value for temperature entry j at pressure pk,

°F (°C).
kvijk Water-free k-value for component i at temperature tjk

and pressure pk.
4-258 Tables R5000.0.1

NOTE: 1. Data is required for at least two pressures.
2. At least two temperature entries are required at each pressure.
3. Pressures and temperatures must be monotonically increasing (with

the k and j indices, respectively).
4. Linear interpolation is performed in pressure assuming linear kp vs. P

and in temperature assuming linear ln k vs. 1/T.
5. Below p1 and above pnp, kp is held constant with pressure.
R5000.0.1 Tables 4-259

4.4.12 Initial Fluid Composition Data (VIP-COMP or VIP-THERM)

The initial compositions of the liquid and vapor hydrocarbon phases must be
specified to initialize the fluids in the reservoir model. Composition may be
constant for a given phase or may vary with depth. Use OILMF/GASMF if PSAT
was entered on the IEQUIL card; use COMPOSITION if PSAT was not entered
on the IEQUIL card. 00




Section 4.4.12.4.
Entering temperature as a function of depth and areal location (Section

4.4.12.4) is discouraged, since the areal temperature variation is not
accounted for in the calculation of equilibrium phase pressures versus
depth. See option 4 below for further discussion of this problem.

00
4-260 Tables R5000.0.1

4.4.12.1 Constant Equilibrium Region Oil Composition (OILMF)
00 Use only if PSAT was entered on the IEQUIL card.
00 Component mole fractions in the liquid hydrocarbon phase may be specified as

follows:
OILMF ieq (ipvt)

x1 x2 . . . xnc
00 Definitions:
ieq Equilibrium region number for this composition. Default

is 1.
ipvt PVT table number used for saturation pressure

calculations. The PVT number can be specified on this
card instead of on the IEQUIL card.
xi Mole fraction of component i in the liquid hydrocarbon

phase.
4.4.12.2 Constant Equilibrium Region Gas Composition (GASMF)
00 Use only if PSAT was entered on the IEQUIL card.
Component mole fractions in the vapor hydrocarbon phase may be specified as

follows: 00
GASMF ieq (ipvt)

y1 y2 . . . ync
00 Definitions:
ieq Equilibrium region number for this composition. Default

is 1.

card instead of on the IEQUIL card.
yi Mole fraction of component i in the vapor hydrocarbon

phase.
R5000.0.1 Tables 4-261

NOTE: 1. Both the OILMF and GASMF cards must be entered when defining
an equilibrium region composition that is constant. However, the
composition for the equilibrium phase may be defaulted by using the
alpha label X in place of the composition values xi or yi. In this case,
the primary phase composition must be entered first, with the
defaulting equilibrium phase following.
2. There are two options for entering the default designation: either one
alpha label X or the alpha label X for each component.
00 Example:
00 C USE EQUILIBRIUM GAS COMPOSITION

OILMF 1
0.4471288 0.1630387 0.0365740 0.06565135
0.1575420 0.0932349 0.0368287
GASMF 1
XXXXXXX
4.4.12.3 Composition Varies with Depth (COMPOSITION)
00 This card should be used only with VIP-COMP or VIP-THERM. This card
may not be specified if PSAT was entered on the IEQUIL card.
00 To specify composition as a function of depth, the table described below should be

entered instead of OILMF and GASMF data. The table consists of a value of
saturation pressure, primary phase composition, and optional temperature value
for each depth entry. The program assumes that compositions entered for depths
above the gas-oil contact are gas phase compositions. Compositions entered for
depths at or below the gas-oil contact are assumed to be oil phase compositions. If
a gas-oil contact is present in the reservoir, an entry at the gas-oil contact depth
must be in the table.
00 In VIP-THERM, all mole fractions are input on a water-free basis. For gas
compositions, enter zero values for non-volatile components.
COMPOSITION ieq (ipvt)

DEPTH PSAT (T) Z
d1 ps1 (t1) z1,1 . . . z1,nc
. . . . .
. . . . .
dn psn (tn) zn,1 . . . zn,nc
4-262 Tables R5000.0.1

00 Definitions:
ieq Equilibrium region number. Default is 1.

card instead of on the IEQUIL card. The user should
consistently use the same ipvt parameter for the same
equilibrium region entries. Entering IPVT on the IEQUIL
card is recommended.
di Depth, ft (m).
psi Saturation pressure, psia (kPa).
ti Reservoir temperature, °F (°C). Enter only if temperature

dependency option is used. Default value equals constant
reservoir temperature as described in Section 2.2.4.
zi,j Composition of component j for depthi.
NOTE: The alpha keyword T is optional; it should be entered only if the

temperature dependency option or the thermal option is used. Do not enter
the parentheses.
00 Example:
00 EOS PR
COMPONENTS
C11P C14P C20 C27P C36P
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COMPOSITION 1
DEPTH PSAT Z
8393.0 4312.0 0.114694 0.00596171 0.0535574 0.0253688
0.00375082 0.00931554 0.00287086 0.00407180 0.0452978 0.00641069
0.00608870 0.00382681 0.00266587 0.00422379 0.00241988
0.000426779 0.0000480376 0.00000520974
8568.5 4312.0 0.092183 0.00286226 0.449443 0.0467961 0.0290827
0.00647076 0.0177852 0.00652344 0.00992164 0.0138857 0.0260174
0.0308275 0.026336 0.0222263 0.0454738 0.0655906 0.0668725
0.0214402 0.0219302
8784.0 4312.0 0.0725313 0.00335000 0.444713 0.0461563 0.0293813
0.00583125 0.0140063 0.00593125 0.00847500 0.0126438 0.0246996
0.0294541 0.0232041 0.0197861 0.0495547 0.0694539
R5000.0.1 Tables 4-263

4.4.12.4 Areal Composition Variation (COMPOSITION)
00 This card should be used only with VIP-COMP or VIP-THERM. This card
may not be specified if PSAT was entered on the IEQUIL card.
To specify areal composition variation, the table described below should be

entered instead of OILMF and GASMF data. The table consists of saturation
pressure, primary phase composition, and optional temperature value for each
depth entry, as in the table described in Section 4.4.9.3. In addition, an areal
location must be specified for each depth entry. The areal location can be constant
for each of the depth entries in a table, corresponding to composition
measurements from a vertical well, by specifying an (x,y) location on the
COMPOSITION card. Alternatively, the areal location can vary for each depth
value, corresponding to composition measurements from a deviated well, by
entering columns of x and y location in the table. 00
This option is particularly useful for fields in which measurements of composition

versus depth have been made for several wells covering a large portion of the
model area. Initial compositions for each gridblock are computed by interpolating
both with depth and areal location in a two-step procedure. The first step is similar
to the standard composition versus depth option. However, instead for
interpolating composition only for the equilibration region to which a grid block
belongs, an interpolated composition is obtained from each composition versus
depth table, at the depth of the center of the gridblock. The areal location of each
of these interpolated compositions is also obtained by linear interpolation. The
second step is an areal interpolation, using a weight factor of inverse distance
squared, to obtain the final gridblock value of composition. 00
Constant Areal Location with Depth 00
COMPOSITION ieq (x1 y1)

DEPTH PSAT (T) Z
d1 ps1 (t1) z1,1 . . . z1,nc
. . . . .
. . . . .
dn psn (tn) zn,1 . . . zn,nc
Variable Areal Location with Depth 00
COMPOSITION ieq
DEPTH PSAT X Y (T) Z
d1 ps1 x1 y1 (t1) z1,1 . . . z1,nc
. . . . .
. . . . .
dn psn xn yn (tn) zn,1 . . . zn,nc
4-264 Tables R5000.0.1

00 Definitions:
ieq Equilibrium region number. Default is 1.
xi Value of x-direction coordinate location.
yi Value of y-direction coordinate location.
di Depth, ft(m).
psi Saturation pressure, psia(kpa).
ti Reservoir temperature, °F (°C). Enter only if temperature

dependency option is used. Default value equals constant
reservoir temperature as described in Section 2.2.4.
zi,j Composition of component j for depth i.
NOTE: 1. The alpha keyword T is optional; it should be entered only if the

temperature dependency option is used. Do not enter the parentheses.
00 2. Corner point geometry must be used in the model. The areal location
of the composition versus depth tables must be (x,y) coordinates,
rather than gridblock (i,j) indices.
00 3. Each composition versus depth table must have the areal location
specified in order for the option to interpolate properly. Both constant
and variable areal location specification may be used in the same data
set.
00 4. There must be as many sets if IEQUIL data (Section 4.2.2) as

composition versus depth tables. This allows VIP-COMP to calculate
phase pressure versus depth tables for each composition table using
the standard method. As a result, each grid block must be assigned to
one of the IEQUIL regions, even though the final composition of each
block will be derived by interpolation from all the tables.
00 5. The resulting composition distribution is not in capillary-gravity

equilibrium. As a result, some initial fluid movement will occur even
without production and injection.
00 6. There are no bounds placed on the interpolated fluid compositions

other than to normalize them to sum to 1.0. As a result, areas of the
model with no measurements nearby may encounter extrapolated
values of composition that are inconsistent. To prevent this
unconstrained extrapolation, it is recommended to enter additional
tables of composition to better control computations in areas without
measured data.
R5000.0.1 Tables 4-265

4.4.13 Pedersen Viscosity Correlation (VISPE) (VIP-COMP)

00 For VIP-THERM, see Section 4.4.11.
VISPE (ipvt)
VISK
i ki
. . .
VISKJ
i j Xij
. . . . . .
ENDVIS
00 Definitions:
VISPE The keyword for invoking the Pedersen viscosity options.
ipvt PVT table number. If ipvt is not input, the Pedersen

viscosity correlation will be used for all equation of state
tables. If ipvt is input, the Pedersen viscosity parameters
will be used for only that particular table. Different
equations of state can use different Pedersen parameters.
i Index for ki.

Xij. Optional.
i Component i.
j Component j.

0.
ENDVIS This keyword marks the end of the Pedersen viscosity

option input.

proper viscosity prediction. To invoke the Pedersen viscosity option, a keyword
"VISPE" should be entered between the PVT data and the surface separation data
4-266 Tables R5000.0.1

input. The user has the option of specifying binary interacting coefficients Xij for
calculating the mixture critical temperature and k1 to k7 for calculating the
viscosity of the reference component. VISK and VISKJ cards are optional.
Default values will be used if they are not entered. The default values are zero for
all the interacting coefficients Xij and the following values for the coefficients kj.
Only those data overwriting the default values need to be entered. 00
00 k1 = 9.74602
k2 = 18.0834
k3 = 4126.66
k4 = 44.6055
k5 = 0.976544
k6 = 81.8134
k7 = 15649.9
00 Examples:
00 OILMF 1
0.0001 0.2917 0.0045 0.0024 0.1538 0.3003 0.1095 0.1377
GASMF 1
X X X X X X X X
VISPE
VISK
1 42.5
2 0.0002279
3 11770
4 600.3
5 16.49
6 1614
7 0.05552.
VISKJ
35 -0.36409
36 -0.38517
37 -0.8
38 -0.62763
ENDVIS
R5000.0.1 Tables 4-267

4.4.14 Gas Plant Data Input (GASPLANT) (VIP-COMP or VIP-ENCORE)
GASPLANT
NKEY ikey ibat
KEYCMP
vkcmp1 (vkcmp2... vkcmpj ... vkcmpNI)
(enter number of KEY component plus composition values for
interpolation, j = 1 to number of interpolation points, NI)
PLNTRY
pr1,1 (pr1,2 ... pr1,j ... pr1,NI)
pr2,1 (pr2,2 ... pr2,j ... pr2,NI)
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
pri,1 (pri,2 ... pri,j ... pri,NI)
. . . . . .
prNC,1 (prNC,2 ... prNC,j ... prNC,NI)
(enter the plant liquid molar recovery fractions for each
interpolation point, j = 1 to number of interpolation values, NI
and repeat for all components, i = 1 to the number of components,
NC)
00 Definitions:
NKEY Alpha label indicating that the key component plus

fraction number and battery are to be read. The cards
KEYCMP and PLNTRY defined below should follow
the NKEY card, as all values correspond to ibat, the
battery defined on this card.
ikey The number of the key component plus fraction to be

used in the liquid recovery fraction table look up. The
sum of the well stream over all mole fractions from the
key component plus all the following components are
used in the table look up of component liquid recovery
values.
ibat The battery number of the Gas Plant.
KEYCMP Alpha label indicating the key component plus over all
mole fractions are to be entered. These are the sum of key
component plus mole fractions that are to be used in the
liquid recovery fraction table look up. The key
component plus fraction is used for ibat, the battery
defined on the NKEY card.
vkcmp The value of the sum of key component plus fraction to

be used as an interpolation value. There are NI (number
of interpolation point values) to be read. They should
cover the range of sums that are to be expected in the run.
The range of values on this card should be between 0.
4-268 Tables R5000.0.1

and 1. NI is determined by the number of values read on

the card.
PLNTRY Alpha label indicating that the separate liquid recovery

fractions will be entered. The liquid recovery fraction is
the molar fraction of the component that will be
separated to the liquid stream. The plant recovery values
are for ibat, the battery that was defined on the NKEY
card.
pr The fraction of the component that will be separated to

the liquid stream in the Gas Plant. The liquid recovery
fractions are entered for each component as a function of
the key component plus mole fraction and one value must
be entered for NI points and for each component. The
data must be ordered so that the liquid recovery fractions
should be entered for component 1 for all values of key
component plus fraction interpolation points (NI). The
next card is for component 2 recovery fractions at NI
points. This continues until all component values have
been read. In all there should be (NI * NC) values read.
The values must be between 0. and 1.
00 Notes:
■ Input to a gas plant is the total well stream, while output is determined by the
molar liquid recovery fractions. There are no surface flash calculations as are
carried out with a normal surface separator.
■ A gasplant can be entered in VIP-CORE and/or the simulation modules.

Surface batteries in addition to those defined in VIP-CORE may be input, and
those defined in VIP-CORE can be redefined in the simulation modules.
■ The user may optionally enter the surface separator equation of state
parameters. These parameters will be used for the stock tank density
calculations to obtain the surface rates. The new equation of state parameters
must follow the last stage of the battery to which they apply. The values of the
separator equation of state parameters will default to the reservoir if not given.
R5000.0.1 Tables 4-269

00 Example:
C=================================
C GAS PLANT SURFACE SEPARATOR
C=================================
GASPLANT
NKEY 6 1
KEYCMP
C DEFINE KEY COMPONENT PLUS FRACTIONS (NC = 6 TO 8)
C NUMBER OF INTERPOLATION POINTS (NI = 11)
.9999 .108 .104 .098 .075 .065 .047 .028 .018 .010 .000
C DEFINE COMPONENT LIQUID RECOVERIES (NI = 11, NC = 8)
.0240 .0240 .0240 .0220 .0170 .0140 .0100 .0050 .0030 .0020 .0020
.0070 .0070 .0070 .0060 .0050 .0040 .0030 .0010 .0010 .0000 .0000
.0610 .0610 .0590 .0560 .0430 .0370 .0270 .0140 .0090 .0060 .0060
.1790 .1790 .1750 .1790 .1370 .1220 .0920 .0550 .0400 .0290 .0290
.4680 .4680 .4640 .4530 .4000 .3710 .3050 .2200 .1770 .1480 .1480
.9960 .9960 .9960 .9960 .9940 .9930 .9890 .9790 .9690 .9590 .9590
1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
4.4.15 Carbon Dioxide Solubility in Water Option (CO2TAB) (VIP-COMP)
NOTE: CO2 solubility tables must follow all mole fraction and surface separation
data.
00 Use of this option allows carbon dioxide to dissolve in water and provides for the
dependence of water volume factor and viscosity upon carbon dioxide content.
00 Use of this option is restricted as follows:
1. Temperature dependence is not allowed.
2. CO2 must be defined as component 1.
00 The input data describes water CO2 content and water properties for water at
equilibrium with 100% CO2 vapor.
(1) CO2TAB (STD)

(2) psw1 rsw1 bw1 cw1 vw1
psw2 rsw2 bw2 cw2 vw2
. . . . .
. . . . .
0. 0. bwn cwn vwn
4-270 Tables R5000.0.1

00 Definitions:
STD Indicates units of rsw1 are SCF of CO2/STB of water

(SM3/STM3). The default is mass of CO2/100 mass units
of water.
pswi Values of saturation pressure for CO2/water system, psia

(kPa).
rswi Values of quantity of CO2 dissolved in water at

equilibrium at pswi.
bwi Values of formation volume factor of CO2 saturated

water at pswi, RB/STB (M3/STM3).
cwi Values of water compressibility at pswi, vol/vol/psi (vol/

vol/kPa).
vwi Values of CO2 saturated water viscosity at pswi, cp.
00 Water formation volume factor is computed internally as follows:

sat
bw = bw (rsw)
sat
cw = cw (rsw)
sat
pw = psw (rsw)
sat sat
Bw = 1 ⁄ bw
sat sat sat

Bw = B w ( 1 + c w ( P – p w ) ) , STB/RB (STM3/M3)
00 Notes:
■ At least two data cards are required.
■ The last data card (pswn = 0, rswn = 0) defines pure water properties.
■ Saturated water volume factor, water compressibility, and water viscosity are
functions of water CO2 content only.
■ Aquifer blocks are initialized at equilibrium with the nonexistent oil phase.
R5000.0.1 Tables 4-271

4.5 Black Oil PVT + (VIP-ENCORE)

PVT property data are input using tables based on either 1) black-oil laboratory
data or 2) equilibrium K-values as a function of pressure. These tables are input
subject to the following restrictions: 00
■ Both table types cannot appear in the same dataset.
■ Table numbers for each type of table must increase consecutively.
■ The number of oil PVT tables read must be greater than or equal to the
maximum value in the IPVT array (Section 5.14).
■ Only one PVT table can apply to any one equilibrium region (see Section
5.28). However, one PVT table can apply to any number of different
equilibrium regions.
Saturated liquid is described by tabulating properties as functions of saturation

pressure. For each saturation pressure entry, values also need to be entered to
describe the undersaturated VO and BO curves. The undersaturated curves
describe VO and BO for pressures above the saturation pressure. See Figure 4-9. 00
00
Bo Vo
Figure 4-9: Liquid Volume Factor and Liquid Viscosity
00 Two distinct types of black oil tables may be entered. One type of input uses the
BOTAB table. This approach is best when the results of a differential liberation
experiment are available. The user can input the experimental results directly, and
the simulator can account for variations in produced gas gravity. Separator
calculations are treated independently, so that changes in separator conditions are
allowed. Internally, data is converted to K-value data and internal calculations are
performed using K-values and compositions.
00 Alternatively, black oil table data may be input with a combination of the
BOETAB, BOOTAB, BODTAB, BOGTAB, and BDGTAB tables. The internal
representation of these tables is more traditional, because black oil table data are
retained in their original input form. Additionally, it is expected that this data has
already been adjusted to implicitly account for separator conditions.
4-272 Tables R5000.0.1

00 The user may choose this alternate form of black oil table data, which we refer to
as the modified black oil approach, for a number of reasons. Among them are:
1. The modified approach interpolates directly from the input tables.
2. The modified approach can be used to control the amount of vaporization and
oil swelling. It can represent four different cases:
a. Oil swelling without vaporization. This is the traditional black oil model.
The BOTAB input format will always lead to some degree of oil
vaporization, because of non-zero K-values, but the modified approach
can ensure zero vaporization.
b. Vaporization without swelling.
c. Vaporization with swelling.
d. No vaporization or swelling, i.e., no mass transfer between hydrocarbon

phases.
3. The modified black oil tables are more flexible because they allow for
separate input of oil phase and gas phase tables. This can be considerably
more convenient, especially for computer-generated black oil data. The
modified tables are also considerably more flexible for the input of
undersaturated data, both in terms of the form of the data and the location of
the data points. They are also more convenient in that they allow data to be
monotonically increasing or decreasing.
00 The original BOTAB table does not allow for the direct specification of a heavy
component in the gas phase, so it cannot be used for gas condensate systems. The
modified tables allow the user to specify solution oil-gas ratios, which makes
them suitable for modeling gas condensate systems.
R5000.0.1 Tables 4-273

4.5.1 Black Oil Laboratory Data (VIP-ENCORE)

PVT data for VIP-ENCORE is entered directly from results routinely reported in
laboratory differential expansion and constant composition expansion
experiments performed at reservoir temperature. No adjustment should be made
for separator conditions, since VIP-ENCORE is an extended black-oil model in
which phase and volumetric behavior in the reservoir is distinct from that in the
separators. The separators are defined by direct input of laboratory separator test
data. 00
Alternatively, the conventional black-oil adjustment of the differential expansion

test data (oil volume factors, gas-oil ratios, and gas gravities) may be performed
and surface separation data omitted. A default separator is provided for this case
which gives "flash" volumetrics (oil volume factor and gas-oil ratio) equivalent to
the input "differential" volumetrics if the gas gravities have been set to the
constant surface gas value. Use of the adjusted data with default separators
simplifies VIP-ENCORE to the level of a conventional black-oil simulator in
which surface volumes of oil and gas are conserved. 00
Minimum data requirements include the following (items 2, 3, and 5 are adjusted
values if VIP-ENCORE is being run in the conventional black-oil mode): 00
1. Density and molecular weight of:
a. The residual oil from the differential expansion, or
b. The reservoir oil at the original bubblepoint.
2. Solution gas-oil ratio Rs as a function of pressure under saturated conditions.
3. Oil formation volume factor Bo as a function of pressure under saturated

conditions.
4. Gas compressibility factor (z-factor) or gas formation volume factor Bg as a

function of pressure for the equilibrium gas at each stage of the differential
expansion.
5. Gas gravity relative to air for the gas removed at each stage of the differential
expansion. In most "black-oil" models this is treated as a constant, but gas
gravity actually changes with pressure and is reported at each stage by the
PVT laboratory. If the correct pressure variation is unknown, a constant value
can be entered at each pressure.
6. Viscosity of oil as a function of pressure under saturated conditions. This is

normally measured from oil samples removed from a parallel experiment to
the one being used for volumetric data.
7. Gas viscosity as a function of pressure for the equilibrium gas. This is

normally calculated by the PVT laboratory, rather than being measured.
4-274 Tables R5000.0.1

8. The volume of undersaturated oil relative to the volume of the same oil at its
saturation pressure, as a function of pressure elevation above the saturation
pressure (p-psat). These values can be taken directly from the relative volume
data normally reported among the results of a constant composition expansion
experiment.
9. Viscosity of oil measured at undersaturated conditions relative to the viscosity

of the same oil at its saturation pressure. Values are tabulated as a function of
pressure elevation above the saturation pressure (p-psat).
Since the molecular weight of the residual oil is not usually reported in the
differential expansion test, the preferred method is to use values of oil density and
molecular weight at the original bubblepoint of the reservoir oil. The molecular
weight of the bubblepoint oil is easily calculated from the compositional analysis
of the reservoir fluid usually given in the reservoir fluid study. Residual oil
molecular weight can be approximated but will lead to inaccuracies in produced
oil molecular weight and molar production rates. Surface volumes will not be
affected. 00
The data for undersaturated conditions is normally available only for the original
oil sample. (Oil that is saturated at the measured bubblepoint of the reservoir.)
This is the only data required by the program, but in the event that undersaturated
data has been measured for samples at various stages of depletion, the additional
data can be used to better define volumetric behavior in the undersaturated region. 00
Similarly, oil properties at saturated conditions are normally reported only at

pressures at or below the original bubblepoint of the oil sample. In gas injection
projects oil may become saturated at pressures well above the original
bubblepoint. Data under such conditions can be determined from the "swelling
test" performed by some PVT laboratories. If such data is available, it should be
included in the data provided to the program. If unavailable, the user of the
program should extrapolate the available data to saturation pressures as high as
any that will be encountered in the simulation. Otherwise, the program will
extrapolate in a linear fashion as required during the course of the simulation. 00
Since the simulator solves all problems, including black-oil, using

multicomponent logic, differential liberation data is internally converted into a
compositional format. Properties derived from the input data include oil density,
oil z-factor, molecular weight of both oil and gas at each stage of expansion, mole
fraction of light and heavy components in both the oil and gas at each stage, and
the equilibrium K-values of each component at each stage. If the gas formation
volume factor Bg is input, the gas z-factor will also be derived. During the
simulation, K-values and z-factors are used for phase behavior and density
calculations, rather than Rs, Bo, and Bg values.
The PVT data for saturated conditions (Type 5 Data Cards) is subjected to a
consistency check that determines whether the data could lead to a nonpositive
total hydrocarbon compressibility. Total hydrocarbon compressibility is given by
the following equation:
R5000.0.1 Tables 4-275

1 dV h
00 c h = ------ --------- ,
V h dp
where Vh is the total hydrocarbon volume at reservoir conditions. The test used by
the program requires that the following equation be satisfied for all values of
pressure covered by the input data:
dR s dB
00 B g -------- – --------o- > 0 .
dp dp
This simply states that; for an increase in pressure, the reduction in total volume
due to gas going into solution must be greater than the increase due to oil
swelling. If Bg is in RB/MSCF, dRs/dp is in (MSCF/STB)/psi and dBo/dp is in
(RB/STB)/psi, the units will be correct. Bg should be evaluated at the lower
pressure.
The consistency check can be disabled by entering a NOCHK card in the utility
data (Section 2.2.11.3).
4-276 Tables R5000.0.1

4.5.2 Black Oil PVT Data (BOTAB) (VIP-ENCORE)
4.5.2.1 Three Phase Data
(1) BOTAB ipvt (itype)
DOB WTRO
DOR WTRO
(2) API WTRO
DOS WTOS PSAT
APIS WTOS PSAT
dob wtro
dor wtro
(3) api wtro
dos wtos psat
apis wtos psat
ZG
(4) PSAT RS BO GR VO VG
BG
zg
(5) psat rs bo gr vo vg
bg
(At least two data cards are required here.)
(6) PSAT psat1 (psat2). . . (psati)
(7) DP BOFAC VOFAC (BOFAC VOFAC) . . . (BOFAC VOFAC)
(8) dp bofac1 vofac1 (bofac2 vofac2) . . . (bofaci vofaci)

(Only one data card is required here.)
00 Definitions (1):
00 (1) BOTAB Alpha label indicating the data being read are differential
expansion data.
ipvt The PVT table number. This number corresponds to

values in the IPVT array (Section 5.14).
itype Oil type when the PVT interpolation option is in use. Not
used otherwise.
00 Definitions (2):
DOB Alpha label indicating that the data value that appears in
this location on the following card is the density of the
residual oil at standard conditions as defined in Section
2.2.4.
R5000.0.1 Tables 4-277

DOR Alpha label indicating that the data value that appears in
residual oil at reservoir temperature and standard
pressure as defined in Section 2.2.4.
API Alpha label indicating that the data value that appears in
this location on the following card is the API gravity of
the residual oil at standard conditions as defined in
Section 2.2.4.
DOS Alpha label indicating that the data value that appears in
this location on the following card is the density of
saturated oil at psat and reservoir temperature.
APIS Alpha label indicating that the data value that appears in
saturated oil at psat and reservoir temperature.
WTRO Alpha label indicating that the data value that appears in
this location on the following card is the molecular
weight of the residual oil. This alpha label must be used
if the previous alpha label on this data line is either DOB,
DOR, or API. When the PVT interpolation option is in
use, this label or WTOS must appear for the first oil type
only. Otherwise, this label must appear for all tables.
WTOS Alpha label indicating that the data value that appears in
weight of the saturated oil at psat. This alpha label must
be used if the previous alpha label on this data line is
either DOS or APIS. When the PVT interpolation option
is in use, this label or WTRO must appear for the first oil
type only. Otherwise, this label must appear for all tables.
PSAT Alpha label indicating that the data value that appears in
this location on the following card is the saturation
pressure at which the saturated oil density (dos or apis)
and molecular weight (wtos) are given.
4-278 Tables R5000.0.1

00 Definitions (3):
dob Density of the residual oil in the differential expansion

experiment at standard conditions, gm/cc (gm/cc).
dor Density of the residual oil in the differential expansion

experiment at reservoir temperature and standard
pressure, gm/cc (gm/cc).
api API gravity of the residual oil in the differential

expansion at standard conditions, °API (°API).
dos Density of the saturated oil in the differential expansion

experiment at psat and reservoir temperature, gm/cc (gm/
cc).
apis API gravity of the saturated oil in the differential

expansion experiment at psat and reservoir temperature,
°API (°API).
wtro Molecular weight of the residual oil. This can be

approximated if data is unavailable. A value in the range
of 175 to 200 is suitable in many cases. However, this
approximation will lead to errors in produced oil
molecular weight and molar production rates (surface
volumes will not be affected). If the saturation
(bubblepoint) value of molecular weight is known, it is
preferable to input wtos instead (along with dos or apis
and psat). The value wtro is entered only if either dob,
dor, or api is the previous entry on this data line. When
the PVT interpolation option is in use, this value (or
wtos) must be supplied for the first oil type only.
Otherwise, a value must be supplied for all tables.
wtos Molecular weight of the saturated oil at psat. This value

is entered only if either dos or apis is the previous entry
on this data line. Otherwise, wtro is entered. When the
PVT interpolation option is in use, this value (or wtro)
must be supplied for the first oil type only. Otherwise, a
value must be supplied for all tables.
psat The saturation pressure corresponding to dos or apis and

wtos. This value is entered only if wtos is the previous
entry on this data line.
R5000.0.1 Tables 4-279

00 Definitions (4):
PSAT Alpha label indicating that data values appearing in this

location on the following data cards are values of
saturation pressure at successive pressure steps in the
differential expansion experiment.
RS Alpha label indicating that data values appearing in this

solution gas-oil ratio.
BO Alpha label indicating that data values appearing in this

location on the following data cards are values of oil
formation volume factor.
ZG Alpha label indicating that data values appearing in this

location on the following data cards are values of gas
compressibility factor (gas z-factor).
BG Alpha label indicating that data values appearing in this

GR Alpha label indicating that data values appearing in this

gravity.
VO Alpha label indicating that data values appearing in this

saturated oil viscosity.
VG Alpha label indicating that data values appearing in this

viscosity.
00 Definitions (5):
psat Values of saturation pressure at successive pressure steps

in the differential expansion experiment, psia (kPa).
These values must be monotonically decreasing.
rs Values of solution gas-oil ratio corresponding to each

value of psat, SCF/STB (SM3/STM3).
bo Values of oil formation volume factor corresponding to

each value of psat, rb/STB (m3/STM3).
zg Values of gas compressibility factor (z-factor)

corresponding to each value of psat.
4-280 Tables R5000.0.1

bg Values of gas formation volume factors corresponding to

each value of psat, rb/MSCF (m3/SM3).
gr Values of gas gravity corresponding to each value of

psat. Values are measured as density relative to air at
standard conditions.
vo Values of saturated oil viscosity corresponding to each

value of psat, cp (cp).
vg Values of gas viscosity corresponding to each value of

psat, cp (cp).
00 Definitions (6):
PSAT Alpha label indicating that data values following the

label on this card are values of saturation pressure.
psati The value of saturation pressure to which the bofaci and

vofaci values that appear in this location correspond, psia
(kPa). Only one value of psati is required, since
undersaturated volume factor data are ordinarily
available only at the initial saturation pressure.
00 Definitions (7):
DP Alpha label indicating that data values appearing in this

location represent values of pressure relative to the
appropriate saturation pressure (p-psat).
BOFAC Alpha label indicating that data values appearing in this

location represent values of oil formation volume factor
at pressure p relative to the volume factor at pressure
psat. [bo(p)/bo(psat)].
VOFAC Alpha label indicating that data values appearing in this

location represent values of oil viscosity at pressure p
relative to the viscosity at pressure psat. [vo(p)/
vo(psat)].
00 Definitions (8):
dp Values of pressure relative to the corresponding

saturation pressure, psi (kPa). [p-psati].
bofaci Values of oil formation volume factor at pressure p

relative to the volume factor at pressure psati. [bo(p)/
bo(psati)].
vofaci Values of oil viscosity at pressure p relative to the

viscosity at pressure psati. [vo(p)/vo(psati)].
R5000.0.1 Tables 4-281

00 Notes:
1. There may only be one data card for:
a. a Type 6 Data Card,
b. a Type 7 Title Card,
c. each value of dp on a Type 8 Data Card.
2. The following data restrictions apply to the Type 5 Data Cards:
a. Saturation pressure must decrease (psatj < psatj-1).
b. The last psat value must equal the standard pressure PS (Section 2.2.4).
c. Solution gas-oil ratio must decrease (rsj < rsj-1).
d. Oil formation volume factor must decrease (boj < boj-1).
e. If applicable, gas formation volume factor must increase (bgj > bgj-1).
f. Oil viscosity must increase (voj > voj-1).
g. Gas viscosity must decrease (vgj < vgj-1).
3. The following data restrictions apply to the Type 6 Data Card:
a. Saturation pressure must be greater than the standard pressure PS

(Section 2.2.4).
b. If applicable, saturation pressure must decrease (psati < psati-1).
a. Relative pressure must be positive (dpj > 0).
b. If applicable, relative pressure must decrease (dpj < dpj-1).
c. Relative oil volume factor must be less than 1.0 (bofacij < 1.).
d. If applicable, relative oil volume factor must increase (bofacij > bofacij-
1).
e. Relative oil viscosity must be no less than 1.0 (vofacij ≥ 1.)
f. Relative oil viscosity must not increase (vofacij < vofacij-1).
5. The BOFAC and VOFAC alpha labels on the Type 7 Data Card are repeated
as a pair for each value of psati entered on the Type 6 Data Card.
6. The bofaci and vofaci values on the Type 8 Data Card are repeated as a pair
for each value of psati entered on the Type 6 Data Card.
4-282 Tables R5000.0.1

7. A non-zero value for solution gas-oil ratio (Type 5 Data Card) in the last entry
of the table (at standard pressure) is allowed but is not physically possible.
Gas cannot be liberated by cooling a saturated fluid from reservoir
temperature to standard temperature at constant (standard) pressure. A non-
zero value would indicate a composition change between the conditions for
the last entry in the table and standard conditions. This implied composition
change is not considered.
8. If the initial saturation pressure is not input (psat, Type 3 Data Card), the
default value is equal to the saturation pressure at the gas-oil contact in the
IEQUIL table (Section 4.2.1.2).
9. When the PVT interpolation option is in use, PVT data must be supplied for
each oil type option in each PVT region. The data order must be by increasing
region number. Within each region the data order must be by increasing oil
type number with API gravity decreasing as the oil type number increases.
Molecular weight data is required for the first oil type of each region and may
not be given for other oil types.
00 Example:
00 C
BOTAB 1
API WTRO
27.40 200
PSAT RS BO ZG GR VO VG
00 6014.7 1128.1 1.562 0.9163 0.80000 0.529 0.03286

5014.7 931.3 1.476 0.8819 0.80000 0.712 0.02893
4514.7 822.8 1.421 0.8647 0.80000 0.803 0.02697
3514.7 627.3 1.333 0.8212 0.80000 0.983 0.02349
2514.7 458.3 1.268 0.7990 0.80000 1.183 0.01979
2014.7 378.0 1.239 0.8059 0.80000 1.319 0.01655
1514.7 296.8 1.208 0.8262 0.80000 1.513 0.01655
1014.7 212.0 1.172 0.8579 0.80000 1.808 0.01415
514.7 122.5 1.129 0.9005 0.80000 2.215 0.01324
14.65 0.0 1.059 0.9551 0.80000 3.390 0.01255
R5000.0.1 Tables 4-283

4.5.2.2 WATEROIL Option
(1) BOTAB ipvt (itype)
DOB WTRO GR
(2) DOR WTRO GR
API WTRO GR
dob wtro gr
(3) dor wtro gr
api wtro gr
(4) PSAT RS BO VO
(5) psat rs bo vo
(6) PSAT psat1 (psat2). . . (psati)
(8) dp bofac1 vofac1 (bofac2 vofac2). . .(bofaci vofaci)

(Only one data card is required here.)
00 Definitions (1):
BOTAB Alpha label indicating the data being read are differential
expansion data.

itype Oil type when the PVT interpolation option is in use. Not
used otherwise.
00 Definitions (2):
2.2.4.
DOR Alpha label indicating that the data value that appears in
residual oil at reservoir temperature and standard
pressure as defined in Section 2.2.4.
4-284 Tables R5000.0.1


Section 2.2.4.
weight of the residual oil. When the PVT interpolation
option is in use, this label must appear for the first oil
type only. Otherwise, this label must appear for all tables.
GR Alpha label indicating that the data value appearing in

this location on the following card is the gas gravity of
the solution gas.
00 Definitions (3):
dob Density of the residual oil in the differential expansion

experiment at standard conditions, gm/cc (gm/cc).
dor Density of the residual oil in the differential expansion

experiment at reservoir temperature and standard
pressure, gm/cc (gm/cc).
api API gravity of the residual oil in the differential

expansion at standard conditions, °API (°API).

of 175 to 200 is suitable in many cases. When the PVT
interpolation option is in use, this value must appear for
the first oil type only. Otherwise, the value must appear
for all tables.
gr The gas gravity of the solution gas.
00 Definitions (4):

saturation pressure at successive pressure steps in the
differential expansion experiment.


R5000.0.1 Tables 4-285


00 Definitions (5):
psat Values of saturation pressure at successive pressure steps

in the differential expansion experiment, psia (kPa).
These values must be monotonically decreasing.

value of psat, SCF/STB (SM3/STM3).

each value of psat, rb/STB (m3/STM3).
vo Values of saturated oil viscosity corresponding to each

value of psat, cp (cp).
00 Definitions (6):

psati The value of saturation pressure to which the botaci and

votaci values that appear on the Type 8 Data Cards
correspond, psia (Kpa). Only one value of psati is
required, since undersaturated volume factor data are
ordinarily available only at the initial saturation pressure.
00 Definitions (7):

location on the Type 8 Data Cards represent values of
pressure relative to the appropriate saturation pressure
(p-psat).

location on the Type 8 Data Cards represent values of oil
formation volume factor at pressure p relative to the
volume factor at pressure psat. [bo(p)/bo(psat)].

location on the Type 8 Data Cards represent values of oil
viscosity at pressure p relative to the viscosity at pressure
psat. [vo(p)/vo(psat)].
00 Definitions (8):
4-286 Tables R5000.0.1


saturation pressure, as it appears on the Type 6 Data
Card, psi (kPa). [p-psati].

bo(psati)].

NOTE: The notes in Section 4.5.2.1 also apply to this section.
4.5.3 Gas PVT Data for the GASWATER Option (BGTAB) (VIP-ENCORE)
(1) BGTAB ipvt

(2) GR
(3) gr
ZG
(4) PSAT VG
BG
zg
(5) psat vg
bg
00 Definitions (1):
BGTAB Alpha label indicating the data being read are gas
properties.

00 Definitions (2):
GR Alpha label indicating that the value appearing in this

location on the following card is the gas gravity.
00 Definition (3):
gr Value of gas gravity.
R5000.0.1 Tables 4-287

00 Definitions (4):

pressure.



viscosity.
00 Definitions (5):
psat Values of pressure, psia (kPa).


each value of psat, rb/MSCF (m3/SM3). If applicable,
gas formation volume factor must increase (bg(j) > bg (j-
1)).

psat, cp (cp). Gas viscosity must decrease (vg(j) < vg(j-
1)).
NOTE: The notes in Section 4.5.2.1 also apply to this section.
4-288 Tables R5000.0.1

4.5.4 Modified Black Oil

00 Use the BOETAB keyword to specify both oil and gas properties in the same
table. Alternately, use the BOOTAB or BODTAB keyword to specify oil
properties separately. Then use the BDGTAB or BOGTAB keyword to specify gas
properties. Examples are provided at the end of this section.
4.5.4.1 BOETAB
(1)BOETAB ipvt
(2) DOB WTRO DGB

API GR
(3) dob wtro dgb

api gr
(4)PSAT RS RV BO BG VO VG
(5)psat rs rv bo bg vo vg
(At least two Type 5 data cards are required.)
⎛ psat ⎞ ⎛ ⎞
(6) PSAT
psat1
⎜ 2 ⎟ . . . ⎜ psat i ⎟
rs 1 ⎜ ⎟ ⎜ ⎟
RS ⎝ rs 2 ⎠ ⎝ rs i ⎠
(Only one Type 6 data card is required. Cards 7 and 8 must be
repeated for each Card 6.)
(7)
P BO VO ⎛
. ⎜ BO VO ⎞⎟ . . ⎛⎜ BO VO ⎞⎟
DP BOFAC VOFAC ⎝ BOFAC VOFAC ⎠ ⎝ BOFAC VOFAC ⎠
p ⎛ bo 2 vo 2 ⎞ ⎛ bo i vo i ⎞
bo 1 vo 1
(8) . ⎜ ⎟. . ⎜ ⎟
dp ⎜ ⎟ ⎜ ⎟
bofac 1 vofac 1 ⎝ bofac 2 vofac 2 ⎠ ⎝ bofac i vofac i ⎠
(Only one Type 8 data card is required for each Type 7 data
card.)
p1 ⎛ p2 ⎞ ⎛ pi ⎞
(9) P ⎜ ⎟. . . ⎜ ⎟
RVSAT rvsat 1 ⎜ rvsat ⎟ ⎜ rvsat ⎟
⎝ 2 ⎠ ⎝ i ⎠
BG VG ⎛ BG VG ⎞⎟ . . ⎛ BG VG ⎞⎟
(10) RV . ⎜ ⎜
BGFAC VGFAC ⎝ BGFAC VGFAC ⎠ ⎝ BGFAC VGFAC ⎠
⎛ ⎞ ⎛ ⎞
bg 1 vg 1 bg 2 vg 2 ⎟ bg i vg i ⎟
(11) rv .⎜ . . ⎜
⎜ ⎟ ⎜ ⎟
bgfac 1 vgfac 1 ⎝ bgfac 2 vgfac 2 ⎠ ⎝ bgfac i vgfac i ⎠
card.)
R5000.0.1 Tables 4-289

00 Definitions (1):
(1) BOETAB Alpha label indicating the data being read are extended
black oil data, with both oil and gas data read in the same
table.

values in the IPVT array.
00 Definitions (2):
2.2.4.
Section 2.2.4.
DOR, or API.
DGB Alpha label indicating that the data value that appears in
gas at standard conditions as defined in Section 2.2.4.
GR Alpha label indicating that the data value that appears in

this location on the following card is the specific gravity
of the gas at standard conditions as defined in Section
2.2.4.
Definitions (3): 00
dob Density of the residual oil at standard conditions, gm/cc

(gm/cc).
api API gravity of the residual oil at standard conditions,

°API (°API).

volumes will not be affected).
4-290 Tables R5000.0.1

dgb Density of the evolved gas at standard conditions, gm/cc

(gm/cc).
gr Specific gravity of the evolved gas at standard

conditions, dimensionless.
Definitions (4): 00

saturation pressure at successive pressure steps.

RV Alpha label indicating that data values appearing in this

solution oil-gas ratio.




viscosity.
00 Definitions (5):
psat Values of saturation pressure at successive pressure steps,

psia (kPa). These values must either be monotonically
decreasing, or monotonically increasing.

value of psat, SCF/STB (SM3/STM3). If the RSM
keyword is used, units of rs are in MSCF/STB(KSM3/
STM3). If values of psat are monotonically increasing,
values of rs must also be monotonically increasing. If
values of psat are monotonically decreasing, values of rs
must also be monotonically decreasing. To specify a dead
oil, all values of rs should be set to zero in the saturated
R5000.0.1 Tables 4-291

data table. For dead oils, data card types 6, 7, and 8 are
not allowed.
rv Values of solution oil-gas ratio corresponding to each

value of psat, STB/MSCF (SM3/STM3). If all values of
rv are zero in the saturated data table, data card types 9,
10, and 11 are not allowed.

each value of psat, rb/STB (m3/STM3). For a live oil,
(i.e. rs values are greater than 0) , values of bo must
monotonically increase if values of psat are
monotonically increasing, or values of bo must
monotonically decrease, if values of psat are
monotonically decreasing. For a dead oil, (i.e. rs values
are all equal to 0), values of bo must monotonically
decrease if values of psat are monotonically increasing,
and values of bo must monotonically increase if values of
psat are monotonically decreasing.

each value of psat, rb/MSCF (m3/SM3). For a dry gas,
(i.e. all rv values equal 0), values of bg must
monotonically increasing, or values of bg must
monotonically increase, if values of psat are
monotonically decreasing.
vo Values of saturated oil viscosity, cp (cp) corresponding to

each value of psat. For a live oil, (i.e. values of rs are
greater than 0), values of vo must monotonically
decrease, if values of psat are monotonically increasing,
and values of vo must monotonically increase, if values
of psat are monotonically decreasing, For a dead oil (i.e.
values of rs are all equal to 0), values of vo must
monotonically increasing, and values of vo must
monotonically decrease if values of psat are
vg Values of gas viscosity, cp (cp), corresponding to each

value of psat. For a dry gas (i.e. values of rv are all equal
to 0), values of vg must monotonically increase if values
of psat are monotonically increasing, and values of vg
must monotonically decrease if values of psat are
4-292 Tables R5000.0.1

NOTE: If all values of zero in the RS column, the oil phase does not contain any
solution gas. Therefore, input of Data Card Types 6, 7, and 8 is not
permitted.
NOTE: Data Card Types 6, 7, and 8 may be repeated as a group as many times as
are necessary.
Definitions (6): 00

label on this card are values of saturation pressure. The
user may choose to input either psat by inputting the
PSAT keyword or rs values by inputting the RS
keyword.
RS Alpha label indicating that data values following the

label on this card are values of solution gas-oil ratio at the
saturation pressure. The user may choose to input either
psat by inputting the PSAT keyword or rs values by
inputting the RS keyword.
psati The value of saturation pressure to which the boi or

bofaci and voi or vofaci values that appear in this
location correspond, psia (kPa). Only one value of psati
is required, since undersaturated volume factor data are
All values of psat entered must be greater than the
standard pressure PS. Values of psat must either
monotonically increase or monotonically decrease.
rsi The value of solution gas-oil ratio to which the boi or

location correspond, SCF/STB (SM3/STM3. Only one
value of rsi is required, since undersaturated volume
factor data are ordinarily available only at the initial
saturation pressure. Values of rs must either
00 Definitions (7):
P Alpha label indicating that data values appearing in this

location represent values of pressure. The user may
choose to either input relative pressures by inputting the
DP keyword, or absolute pressure by inputting the P
keyword.

R5000.0.1 Tables 4-293

appropriate saturation pressure (p-psati). The user may

keyword.

at pressure p or the equivalent solution gas-oil ratio, rs.



vo(psat)].
00 Definitions (8):
p Values of pressure, psi (kPa). Values of p must be greater

than the corresponding values of psat. Values of pressure
must either monotonically increase or monotonically
decrease.

saturation pressure, psi (kPa). [p-psati]. Values of dp
must be greater than 0. Also, values of dp must
boi Values of oil formation volume factor at pressure p.

Values of bo must be less than the corresponding value of
bo at psat. If values of p or dp are monotonically
decreasing, values of bo must be monotonically
increasing. If values of p or dp are monotonically
increasing, values of bo must be monotonically
decreasing.

bo(psati)]. Values of bofac must be less than 1. If values
of p or dp are monotonically decreasing, values of bofac
must be monotonically increasing. If values of p or dp
are monotonically increasing, values of bofac must be
4-294 Tables R5000.0.1

voi Values of oil viscosity at pressure p. Values of vo must be

greater than the corresponding value of vo at psat. If
values of p or dp are monotonically decreasing, values of
vo must be monotonically decreasing. If values of p or
dp are monotonically increasing, values of vo must be
monotonically increasing.

viscosity at pressure psati. [vo(p)/vo(psati)].Values of
vofac must be greater than 1. If values of p or dp are
monotonically decreasing, values of vofac must be
monotonically decreasing. If values of p or dp are
monotonically increasing, values of vofac must be
NOTE: If all values of zero in the RV column, a dry gas is defined. Therefore,
input of Data Card Types 9, 10, and 11 cannot be permitted.
NOTE: Data Card Types 9, 10, and 11 may be repeated as a group as many times
as are necessary. However, one set is required.
00 Definitions (9):
P Alpha label indicating that data values following the

label on this card are values of pressure. The user has a
choice of inputting pressures by using the keyword P or
of inputting saturated oil-gas ratios by using the keyword
RVSAT. P is preferred over RVSAT because solution
oil-gas ratios are not guaranteed to be monotonic. If the
RV values in the saturated part of the table are not
monotonic, data cannot be input with the RVSAT
keyword.
RVSAT Alpha label indicating that data values following the

label on this card are values of the corresponding
saturated oil-gas ratio at the pressure. The user has a
keyword.
pi The value of pressure to which the bgi or bgfaci and voi

and vofaci values that appear in this location correspond,
psia (kPa). Only one value of pi is required. Pressure
must be greater than the pressure at standard conditions,
R5000.0.1 Tables 4-295

ps. Pressure must either monotonically increase or

decrease.
rvsati The value of saturated oil-gas ratio to which the bgi or

bgfaci and voi and vofaci values that appear in this
location correspond, psia (kPa). Only one value of rvsati
is required. Oil-gas ratio must monotonically increase or
decrease.
Definitions (10): 00

location represent values of solution oil-gas ratio at
undersaturated conditions at that pressure.

location represent values of gas formation volume factor
at pressure p and solution oil-gas ratio, rv.
BGFAC Alpha label indicating that data values appearing in this

at pressure p and solution oil-gas ratio, rv, relative to the
volume factor at the saturated solution oil-gas ratio,
rvsat. [bg(rv)/bg(rvsat)].

location represent values of gas viscosity at pressure p
and solution oil-gas ratio, rv.
VGFAC Alpha label indicating that data values appearing in this

and solution oil-gas ratio, rv, relative to the viscosity at
the saturated solution oil-gas ratio, rvsat. [vo(rv)/
vo(rvsat)].
00 Definitions (12):
rv Values of solution oil-gas ratio, STB/MSCF (SM3/

STM3). Values of rv must monotonically increase or
decrease. Values of rv must be less than the
corresponding value at saturated conditions.
bgi Values of gas formation volume factor at pi and rv, RB/

MSCF (m3/SM3).
bgfaci Values of gas formation volume factor at solution oil gas

ratio rv relative to the volume factor at the saturated
solution oil-gas ratio, rvsati. [bo(rv)/bo(rvsati)].
vgi Values of gas viscosity at pressure pi and rv.
4-296 Tables R5000.0.1

vgfaci Values of gas viscosity at pressure pi and solution oil-gas

ratio, rv, relative to the viscosity at the saturated solution
oil-gas ratio, rvsati. [vg(rv)/vg(rvsati)].
4.5.4.2 BOOTAB
(1)BOOTAB ipvt
(2) DOB WTRO

API WTRO
(3) dob wtro

api wtro
(4)RS PSAT BO VO
(5)rs psat bo vo
⎛ psat ⎞
psat1 ⎛ psat ⎞
(6) PSAT ⎜ 2 ⎟
. . . ⎜ i ⎟
RS rs 1 ⎜ rs ⎟ ⎜ rs ⎟
⎝ 2 ⎠ ⎝ i ⎠

(7) P BO VO ⎛
.⎜ BO VO ⎞⎟ . . ⎛⎜ BO VO ⎞⎟
DP BOFAC VOFAC ⎝ BOFAC VOFAC ⎠ ⎝ BOFAC VOFAC ⎠
p bo 1 ⎛
vo 1 ⎞ ⎛ ⎞
bo 2 vo 2 bo i vo i
(8) .⎜ ⎟ . .⎜ ⎟
dp bofac 1 vofac 1 ⎜ ⎟ ⎜ ⎟
⎝ bofac 2 vofac 2 ⎠ ⎝ bofac i vofac i ⎠
(Only one Type 8 data card is required is for each Type 7
data card.)
00 Definitions (1):
(1) BOOTAB Alpha label indicating that live black oil data is being
read.

00 Definitions (2):
2.2.4.
R5000.0.1 Tables 4-297


Section 2.2.4.
DOR, or API.
Definitions (3): 00

(gm/cc).

°API (°API).

Definitions (4): 00




00 Definitions (5):

value of psat, SCF/STB (SM3/STM3). If the RSM
keyword is used, units of rs are in MSCF/STB(KSM3/
STM3). If values of psat are monotonically increasing,
values of rs must also be monotonically increasing. If
values of psat are monotonically decreasing, values of rs
must also be monotonically decreasing. To specify a dead
4-298 Tables R5000.0.1

oil, all values of rs should be set to zero in the saturated

data table. For dead oils, data card types 6, 7, and 8 are
not allowed.

decreasing, or monotonically increasing.

each value of psat, rb/STB (m3/STM3). For a live oil,
(i.e. rs values are greater than 0) , values of bo must
monotonically increasing, or values of bo must
monotonically decreasing. For a dead oil, (i.e. rs values
are all equal to 0), values of bo must monotonically
decrease if values of psat are monotonically increasing,
and values of bo must monotonically increase if values of
psat are monotonically decreasing.

monotonically increasing, and values of bg must

each value of psat. For a live oil, (i.e. values of rs are
greater than 0), values of vo must monotonically
decrease, if values of psat are monotonically increasing,
and values of vo must monotonically increase, if values
of psat are monotonically decreasing, For a dead oil (i.e.
values of rs are all equal to 0), values of vo must
monotonically increasing, and values of vo must
monotonically decrease if values of psat are

R5000.0.1 Tables 4-299

NOTE: If all values are zero in the RS column, the oil phase does not contain any
solution gas. Therefore, input of Data Card Types 6, 7, and 8 is not
permitted.
are necessary.
Definitions (6): 00

label on this card are values of saturation pressure. The
user may choose to input either psat by inputting the
PSAT keyword or rs values by inputting the RS
keyword.
RS Alpha label indicating that data values following the

label on this card are values of solution gas-oil ratio at the
saturation pressure. The user may choose to input either
psat by inputting the PSAT keyword or rs values by
inputting the RS keyword.
psati The value of saturation pressure to which the boi or

location correspond, psia (kPa). Only one value of psati
is required, since undersaturated volume factor data are
All values of psat entered must be greater than the
standard pressure PS. Values of psat must either
rsi The value of solution gas-oil ratio pressure to which the

boi or bofaci and voi or vofaci values that appear in this
location correspond, psia (kPa). Only one value of rsi is
required, since undersaturated volume factor data are
Values of rs must either monotonically increase or
monotonically decrease.
00 Definitions (7):

location represent values of pressure. The user may
keyword.

4-300 Tables R5000.0.1

appropriate saturation pressure (p-psati). The user may

keyword.

at pressure p or the equivalent solution gas-oil ratio, rs.



vo(psat)].
00 Definitions (8):
p Values of pressure, psi (kPa). Values of p must be greater

than the corresponding values of psat. Values of pressure
must either monotonically increase or monotonically
decrease.

saturation pressure, psi (kPa). [p-psati]. Values of dp
must be greater than 0. Also, values of dp must
boi Values of oil formation volume factor at pressure p.

Values of bo must be less than the corresponding value of
bo at psat. If values of p or dp are monotonically
decreasing, values of bo must be monotonically
increasing. If values of p or dp are monotonically
increasing, values of bo must be monotonically
decreasing.

bo(psati)]. Values of bofac must be less than 1. If values
of p or dp are monotonically decreasing, values of bofac
must be monotonically increasing. If values of p or dp
are monotonically increasing, values of bofac must be
R5000.0.1 Tables 4-301

voi Values of oil viscosity at pressure p. Values of vo must be

greater than the corresponding value of vo at psat. If
values of p or dp are monotonically decreasing, values of
vo must be monotonically decreasing. If values of p or
dp are monotonically increasing, values of vo must be

viscosity at pressure psati. [vo(p)/vo(psati)].Values of
vofac must be greater than 1. If values of p or dp are
monotonically decreasing, values of vofac must be
monotonically decreasing. If values of p or dp are
monotonically increasing, values of vofac must be
4.5.4.3 BODTAB
(1) BODTAB ipvt
00 (2) DOB WTRO

API WTRO
00 (3) dob wtro

api wtro
00 (4) PSAT BO VO
00 (5) psat bo vo
00 Definitions (1):
(1) BODTAB Alpha label indicating that dead black oil data is being
read.

00 Definitions (2):
2.2.4.
Section 2.2.4.
4-302 Tables R5000.0.1

DOR, or API.
Definitions (3): 00

(gm/cc).

°API (°API).

Definitions (4): 00



viscosity.
00 Definitions (5):

increasing or decreasing.

each value of psat, rb/STB (m3/STM3). Values of bo
monotonically increasing, and values of bo must

each value of psat. Values of vo must monotonically
increase if values of psat are monotonically increasing,
R5000.0.1 Tables 4-303

and values of vo must monotonically decrease if values

of psat are monotonically decreasing.
4-304 Tables R5000.0.1

4.5.4.4 BOGTAB
00 (1) BOGTAB ipvt
00 (2) DGB
GR
00 (3) dgb
gr
00 (4) PSAT RV BG VG
00 (5) psat rv bg vg
p1 ⎛ p ⎞ ⎛ ⎞
(6) P ⎜ 2 ⎟ . . . ⎜ pi ⎟
⎜ rvsat ⎟ ⎜ rvsat ⎟
00
RVSAT rvsat 1 ⎝ 2 ⎠ ⎝ i ⎠

⎛ VG ⎞⎟ ⎛
00 (7) RV BG VG . ⎜
BG
. . ⎜ BG VG ⎞⎟
BGFAC VGFAC ⎝ BGFAC VGFAC ⎠ ⎝ BGFAC VGFAC ⎠
⎛ ⎞ ⎛ ⎞
bg 1 vg 1 bg 2 vg 2 ⎟ bg i vg i ⎟
(8) rv .⎜ . . ⎜
⎜ ⎟ ⎜ ⎟
00
bgfac 1 vgfac 1 ⎝ bgfac 2 vgfac 2 ⎠ ⎝ bgfac i vgfac i ⎠

card.)
00 Definitions (1):
(1) BOGTAB Alpha label indicating that wet gas data is being read.

00 Definitions (2):

2.2.4.
00 Definitions (3):

(gm/cc).
R5000.0.1 Tables 4-305

gr Specific gravity of the evolved gas at standard

conditions, dimensionless.
00 Definitions (4):


solution oil-gas ratio.


viscosity.
00 Definitions (5):

rv Values of solution oil-gas ratio corresponding to each

value of psat, STB/MSCF (SM3/STM3). If all values of
rv are zero in the saturated data table, data card types 4,
5, and 6 are not allowed.


NOTE: If all values of zero in the RV column, a dry gas is defined. Therefore,
input of Data Card Types 6, 7, and 8 cannot be permitted.
4-306 Tables R5000.0.1

are necessary. However, one set is required.
00 Definitions (6):
P Alpha label indicating that data values following the

label on this card are values of pressure. The user has a
keyword.
RVSAT Alpha label indicating that data values following the

label on this card are values of the corresponding
saturated oil-gas ratio at the pressure. The user has a
keyword.
pi The value of pressure to which the bgi or bgfaci and voi

and vofaci values that appear in this location correspond,
psia (kPa). Only one value of pi is required. Pressure
must be greater than the pressure at standard conditions,
ps. Pressure must either monotonically increase or
decrease.
rvsati The value of saturated oil-gas ratio to which the bgi or

bgfaci and voi and vofaci values that appear in this
location correspond, psia (kPa). Only one value of rvsati
is required. Oil-gas ratio must monotonically increase or
decrease.
Definitions (7): 00

location represent values of solution oil-gas ratio at
undersaturated conditions at that pressure.

at pressure p and solution oil-gas ratio, rv.
R5000.0.1 Tables 4-307


at pressure p and solution oil-gas ratio, rv, relative to the
volume factor at the saturated solution oil-gas ratio,
rvsat. [bg(rv)/bg(rvsat)].

and solution oil-gas ratio, rv.

and solution oil-gas ratio, rv, relative to the viscosity at
the saturated solution oil-gas ratio, rvsat. [vo(rv)/
vo(rvsat)].
00 Definitions (8):
rv Values of solution oil-gas ratio, STB/MSCF (SM3/

STM3). Values of rv must monotonically increase or
decrease. Values of rv must be less than the
corresponding value at saturated conditions.
bgi Values of gas formation volume factor at pi and rv, RB/

MSCF (m3/SM3).
bgfaci Values of gas formation volume factor at solution oil gas

ratio rv relative to the volume factor at the saturated
solution oil-gas ratio, rvsati. [bo(rv)/bo(rvsati)].
vgi Values of gas viscosity at pressure pi and rv.
vgfaci Values of gas viscosity at pressure pi and solution oil-gas

ratio, rv, relative to the viscosity at the saturated solution
oil-gas ratio, rvsati. [vg(rv)/vg(rvsati)].
4-308 Tables R5000.0.1

4.5.4.5 BDGTAB
00 (1) BDGTAB ipvt
00 (2) DGB
GR
00
00 (3) dgb
gr
00 (4) PSAT BG VG
00 (5) psat bg vg
00 Definitions (1):
(1) BDGTAB Alpha label indicating that dry gas data is being read.

00 Definitions (2):

2.2.4.
00 Definitions (3):

(gm/cc).
gr Specific gravity of the evolved gas in the differential

expansion at standard conditions, dimensionless.
00 Definitions (4):


R5000.0.1 Tables 4-309


viscosity.
00 Definitions (5):


each value of psat, rb/MSCF (m3/SM3). Values of bg
must monotonically decrease, if values of psat are

value of psat. Values of vg must monotonically increase
if values of psat are monotonically increasing, and values
of vg must monotonically decrease if values of psat are
4-310 Tables R5000.0.1

4.5.4.6 Examples
00 Example 1: Specification of dead oil and live gas tables:
00 C DEAD OIL TABLE

00 BODTAB 1
00 DOB WTRO
00 42.5 200.
00 C SATURATED DATA
00 PSAT BO VO
00 280. 1.1258 0.1962
00 780. 1.1132 0.1966
00 1280. 1.1024 0.2051
00 1780. 1.0927 0.2100
00 2280. 1.0841 0.2200
00 2780. 1.0764 0.2300
00 3280. 1.0693 0.2452
00 3780. 1.0630 0.2815
00 4280. 1.0570 0.3378
00 4780. 1.0516 0.4435
00 C NO UNDERSATURATED DATA FOR DEAD OIL!
00
00 C LIVE GAS DATA

00 BOGTAB 1
00 DGB
00 0.495
00 C
00 C SATURATED DATA
00 C
00 PSAT RV BG VG
00 280. 0.02207 12.5134 0.0144
00 780. 0.01806 4.3571 0.0149
00 1280. 0.01797 2.5938 0.0157
00 1780. 0.01963 1.8368 0.0168
00 2280. 0.02590 1.4251 0.0184
00 2780. 0.02590 1.1728 0.0202
00 3280. 0.02590 1.1728 0.0202
00 3780. 0.03406 0.8917 0.024
00 4280. 0.03779 0.8094 0.0270
00 4780. 0.04004 0.7486 0.0292
00 C
00 C UNDERSATURATED DATA
00 C
00 P 280. 780. 1280.
R5000.0.1 Tables 4-311

00 RV BG VG BG VG BG VG
00 0. 12.5694 0.0143 4.4010 0.0147 2.6341 0.0154
00 P 1780. 2280.
00 RV BG VG BG VG
00 0. 1.8760 0.0164 1.4631 0.0175
00 P 2780. 3280. 3780.
00 0. 1.2086 0.0189 1.0388 0.0203 0.9191 0.0218
00 P 4280 4780
00 RV BG VG BG VG
00 0. 0.8309 0.0234 0.7636 0.0249
00
4-312 Tables R5000.0.1

00 Example 2: Combination of oil and gas tables from Example 1 into a single
table.
00 BOETAB 1
00 DOB WTRO DGB
00 42.5 200. 0.495
00 C
00 C SATURATED DATA
00 C
00 PSAT RS RV BO BG VO VG
00 280 0.0 0.02207 1.1258 12.5134 0.1962 0.0144
00 780 0.0 0.01806 1.1132 4.3571 0.1966 0.0149
00 1280 0.0 0.01797 1.1024 2.5938 0.2051 0.0157
00 1780 0.0 0.01963 1.0927 1.8368 0.2100 0.0168
00 2280 0.0 0.02590 1.0841 1.4251 0.2200 0.0184
00 2780 0.0 0.02590 1.0764 1.1728 0.2300 0.0202
00 3280 0.0 0.02590 1.0693 1.1728 0.2452 0.0202
00 3780 0.0 0.03406 1.0630 0.8917 0.2815 0.024
00 4280 0.0 0.03779 1.0570 0.8094 0.3378 0.0270
00 4780 0.0 0.04004 1.0516 0.7486 0.4435 0.0292
00 C
00 C UNDERSATURATED DATA
00 C
00 P 280. 780. 1280.
00 0. 12.5694 0.0143 4.4010 0.0147 2.6341 0.0154
00 P 1780. 2280.
00 RV BG VG BG VG
00 0. 1.8760 0.0164 1.4631 0.0175
00 P 2780. 3280. 3780.
00 0. 1.2086 0.0189 1.0388 0.0203 0.9191 0.0218
00 P 4280 4780
00 RV BG VG BG VG
00 0. 0.8309 0.0234 0.7636 0.0249
00
00
R5000.0.1 Tables 4-313

00 Example 3:
00 C Separate black live oil and live gas tables, with different pressure
C entries. RSM keyword invoked, so solution gas-oil ratio divided by
C 1000.
00 C
00 BOOTAB
00 DOB WTRO
00 48.25 200.
00 C
00 C SATURATED DATA
00 C
00 RS PSAT BO VO
00 0.00001 14.7 1.103 1.126
00 0.040 264.7 1.126 0.960
00 0.084 514.7 1.152 0.809
00 0.187 1014.7 1.203 0.703
00 0.292 1514.7 1.252 0.615
00 0.399 2014.7 1.303 0.535
00 0.511 2514.7 1.357 0.450
00 0.627 3014.7 1.415 0.387
00 0.757 3514.7 1.483 0.316
00 0.884 3900.0 1.539 0.270
00 1.400 5000.0 1.639 0.270
00 C
00 C UNDERSATURATED OIL DATA SET 1
00 C
00 RS 0.00001 0.040 0.084
00 P BO VO BO VO BO VO
00 5514.7 0.9688 1.127 0.9979 0.961 1.0302 0.810
00 C
00 RS 0.187 0.292 0.399
00 5514.7 1.0932 0.704 1.1544 0.616 1.2176 0.536
00 C
00 C
00 RS 0.511 0.627 0.757
00 5514.7 1.2838 0.451 1.354 0.388 1.4342 0.317
00 RS 0.884 1.40
00 P BO VO BO VO
00 5514.7 1.503 0.271 1.624 0.280
4-314 Tables R5000.0.1

00 6014.7 1.497 0.273 1.620 0.285

00 C
00 C
00 C GAS DATA TABLE
00 C
00 BOGTAB
00 DGB
00 0.056
00 C
00 C SATURATED DATA
00 PSAT RV BG VG
00 14.7 0.04309 223.714 0.0130
00 264.7 0.04111 12.370 0.0133
00 514.7 0.03818 6.334 0.0136
00 1014.7 0.03519 3.196 0.0143
00 1514.7 0.03612 2.127 0.0153
00 2014.7 0.03719 1.592 0.0165
00 2514.7 0.04110 1.275 0.0179
00 3014.7 0.046 1.072 0.0195
00 3514.7 0.04822 0.936 0.0213
00 3900.0 0.05 0.862 0.0224
00 4514.7 0.05 0.785 0.0246
00 C
00 C UNDERSATURATED GAS DATA
00 C
00 P 2514.7 4514.7
00 RV BG VG BG VG
00 0. 1.275 0.0179 0.785 0.0246
R5000.0.1 Tables 4-315

4.6 K-value Tabular Data (VIP-ENCORE)

Data which define equilibrium K-values as a function of pressure for two or more
components may optionally be entered in VIP-ENCORE. The data described
below are required and if not measured may be provided by DESKTOP-PVT. K-
value tables may be entered for either a black-oil or a gas condensate sample. The
data requirements are as follows: 00
1. Gas compressibility factor (z-factor) as a function of pressure for the

equilibrium gas at each step of a differential expansion or for the primary gas
at each step of a constant volume depletion.
2. Gas viscosity as a function of pressure at each step.
3. Oil compressibility factor (z-factor) as a function of pressure at each step.
4. Oil viscosity as a function of pressure at each step
5. Oil phase mole fraction of the first component and/or the gas phase mole
fraction of the last component at each pressure step.
6. Equilibrium K-values for each component as a function of pressure only for

each step.
7. The volume of undersaturated oil relative to the volume of the same oil at its
experiment for an oil sample. For a gas condensate sample, the values may be
estimated or calculated with DESKTOP-PVT.
8. Viscosity of oil measured at undersaturated conditions relative to the viscosity

of the same oil at its saturation pressure. Values are tabulated as a function of
pressure elevation above the saturation pressure (p-psat).
9. The volume of undersaturated gas relative to the volume of the same gas at its
experiment for a gas sample.
10. Viscosity of gas measured at undersaturated conditions relative to the

viscosity of the same gas at its saturation pressure. Values are tabulated as a
function of pressure elevation above the saturation pressure (p-psat).
11. Initial phase compositions and component molecular weights.
4.6.1 Start of K-Value Data Input (KVALUES)

00 This card should be used only with VIP-ENCORE.
4-316 Tables R5000.0.1

00 The K-value tabular data must be preceded by the alpha label KVALUES.
KVALUES
4.6.2 K-Value Component Names (COMPONENTS)

00 The alphanumeric labels that will be used to identify the components are defined
here.
COMPONENTS
cmp1 cmp2 . . . cmpnc
00 Definitions:
cmp Component name. An alphanumeric label containing up

to 6 characters. A component name contained in either
Table 4-1 or Table 4-2 will cause the tabulated properties
to be automatically loaded.
00 Example:
00 C************************
KVALUES
COMPONENTS
4.6.3 K-Value Component Molecular Weights (PROPERTIES)

00 Molecular weight data for each component are defined here.
PROPERTIES
COMP MW
cmp1 mw1
. .
. .
. .
cmpnc mwnc
00 Definitions:
R5000.0.1 Tables 4-317

cmpi Component name for component i. Must be identical to

one of the names included in the COMPONENTS data.
mwi The molecular weight of component i.
NOTE: Repeat the data card containing cmpi and mwi for each component.
Properties data must be entered for any components whose names are not
included in either Table 4-1 or Table 4-2. The properties whose names
do appear in Table 4-1 or Table 4-2 can be selectively modified with this
card.
For any value when the default is acceptable, enter the alpha label X.
00 Example:
00 C KVALUES CASE
COMPONENTS
ONE TWO THREE
PROPERTIES
COMP MW
ONE mw1
TWO mw2
THREE mw3
ENDKV
4.6.4 End of K-Value Components (ENDKV)

00 The ENDKV card terminates the reading of the component data.
ENDKV
4-318 Tables R5000.0.1

4.6.5 K-Value Tables (KVTAB)

(1) KVTAB itab

(2) (PSAT COMPSAT)
(3) (psat compsat1 ... compsatNC)
⎛ ⎞
(4) ⎜ ZRO ⎟
⎜ DRO ⎟
⎜ ⎟
⎝ APIRO ⎠
⎛ ⎞
(5) ⎜ zro ⎟
⎜ dro ⎟
⎜ ⎟
⎝ apiro ⎠
X1
(6) PSAT ZG VG ZO VO YNC KV
X1 YNC
x1
(7) psat zg vg zo vo ync kv1 . . . kvNC
x1 ync
(8) PSAT psat1 (psat2) . . . (psati)

(10) dp bofac1 vofac1 (bofac2 vofac2). . .(bofaci vofaci)
(Only one data card is required.)
(11) PSAT psat1 (psat2) . . . (psatj)
(12) DP BGFAC VGFAC (BGFAC VGFAC) ... (BGFAC VGFAC)
(13) dp bgfac1 vgfac1 (bgfac2 vgfac2) ... (bgfacj vgfacj)
(Only one data card is required)
Cards (8), (9), (10) are required if X1 is input on card (6).

Cards (11), (12), (13) are required if YNC is input on card (6).
All 6 cards are required if both X1 and YNC are input on card (6).
00 Definitions (1):
KVTAB Alpha label indicating that a table of K-values is being

read.
itab The K-value table number. This number corresponds to

R5000.0.1 Tables 4-319

00 Definitions (2):
PSAT Alpha label indicating that the data value appearing in

this location on the following card is the initial saturation
pressure in the differential expansion or constant volume
depletion experiment.
COMPSAT Alpha label indicating that the values appearing in the

remaining NC locations on the following cards are the
saturated oil mole fractions at the initial saturation
pressure.
00 Definitions (3):
psat Value of initial saturation pressure in the differential

expansion or constant volume depletion experiment, psia
(kPa).
compsat Mole fraction of component j in the saturated oil at the

initial saturation pressure.
00 Definitions (4):
ZRO Alpha label indicating that the value appearing in this

location on the following card is the residual oil Z-factor
at standard temperature and pressure.
DRO Alpha label indicating that the value appearing in this

location on the following card is the residual oil density
at standard temperature and pressure. This label may be
used only if a Type 2 Title Card and a Type 3 Data Card
are entered.
APIRO Alpha label indicating that the value appearing in this

location on the following card is the API gravity of the
residual oil at standard temperature and pressure. This
label may be used only if a Type 2 Title Card and a Type
3 Data Card are entered.
00 Definitions (5):
zro Value of residual oil Z-factor at standard temperature and

pressure. Used only for default separator properties
(Section 4.9.1).
dro Value of residual oil density at standard temperature and

pressure, gm/cc (gm/cc). This value may be entered only
if a Type 2 Title Card and a Type 3 Data Card are also
entered.
4-320 Tables R5000.0.1

apiro Value of residual oil API gravity at standard temperature

and pressure, °API (°API). This value may be entered
only if a Type 2 Title Card and a Type 3 Data Card are
also entered.
00 Definitions (6):

pressure at successive pressure steps in a differential
expansion or constant volume depletion experiment.


viscosity.
ZO Alpha label indicating that data values appearing in this

compressibility factor (oil z-factor).

viscosity.
X1 Alpha label indicating that data values appearing in this

phase mole fraction of the first component.
YNC Alpha label indicating that data values appearing in this

phase mole fraction of the last (NC) component.
KV Alpha label indicating that the remaining NC locations

on the following data cards are equilibrium K-values.
00 Definitions (7):
psat Values of pressure, psia (kPa).


psat, cp (cp).
zo Values of oil compressibility factor (z-factor)

R5000.0.1 Tables 4-321

vo Values of oil viscosity corresponding to each value of

psat, cp (cp).
x1 Values of oil mole fraction of the first component

ync Values of gas mole fraction of the last (nc) component

kv1...NC K-values for each component corresponding to each

value of psat.
00 Definitions (8):

psati Value of saturation pressure to which the bofaci and

vofaci values that appear on the Type 10 Data Cards must
correspond, psia (kPa). At least one value of psati is
required.
00 Definitions (9):

pressure relative to saturation pressure (p-psat).

oil formation volume factor at pressure p relative to the
volume factor at pressure psat. [bo(p)/bo(psat)].

oil viscosity at pressure p relative to the viscosity at
pressure psat. [vo(p)/vo(psat)].
00 Definition (10):
dp Incremental values of pressure relative to the saturation

pressure, psi (kPa) [p-psat].

bo(psati)].

4-322 Tables R5000.0.1


label on this card are values of saturation pressure
(dewpoint).
psatj Value of saturation pressure (dewpoint) to which the

bgfacj and vgfacj values that appear on the Type 13 Data
Cards must correspond, psia (kPa). Only one value of
psatj is required, since undersaturated volume factor data
are ordinarily available only at the initial saturation
pressure.

pressure relative to the appropriate saturation pressure
(p-psat).

gas formation volume factor at pressure p relative to the
volume factor at pressure psat. [bg(p)/bg(psat)].

gas viscosity at pressure p relative to the viscosity at
pressure psat. [vg(p)/vg(psat)].
00 Definition (13):
dp Incremental values of pressure relative to the saturation

pressure, psi (kPa) [p-psat].
bgfacj Values of gas formation volume factor at pressure p

relative to the volume factor at pressure psatj. [bg(p)/
bg(psatj)].
vgfacj Values of gas viscosity at pressure p relative to the

viscosity at pressure psatj. [vg(p)/vg(psatj)].
R5000.0.1 Tables 4-323

00 Notes:
1. There may only be one data card for:
a. a Type 8 (Type 11) Data Card,
b. a Type 9 (Type 12) Title Card,
c. each value of dp on a Type 10 (Type 13) Data Card.
a. Saturation pressure must decrease (psatj < psatj-1).
b. The last saturation pressure value must equal the standard pressure PS
(Section 2.2.4).
c. Gas viscosity must decrease (vgj < vgj-1).
d. Oil viscosity must increase (voj > voj-1).
e. Oil composition cannot be equal (x1j ≠ x1j-1).
f. Gas composition cannot be equal (yncj ≠ yncj-1).
3. The following data restrictions apply to the Type 8 (Type 11) Data Card:
a. Saturation pressure must be greater than the standard pressure PS

(Section 2.2.4).
b. If applicable, saturation pressure must decrease (psati < psati-1).
4. The following data restrictions apply to the Type 10 (Type 13) Data Cards:
a. Relative pressure must be positive (dpj > 0.).
b. If applicable, relative pressure must decrease (dpj < dpj-1).
c. Relative oil (gas) volume factor must be less than 1.0 (bofacij <1.).
d. If applicable, relative oil (gas) volume factor must increase (bofacij

>bofacij-1).
e. Relative oil (gas) viscosity must be no less than 1.0 (vofacij ≥ 1.).
f. If applicable, relative oil (gas) viscosity must not increase (vofacij <
vofacij-1).
5. The BOFAC and VOFAC alpha labels on the Type 9 (Type 12) Data Card are
repeated as a pair for each value of psati entered on the Type 8 (Type 11) Data
Card.
4-324 Tables R5000.0.1

6. The bofaci and vofaci values on the Type 10 (Type 13) Data Card are repeated
as a pair for each value of psati entered on the Type 8 (Type 11) Data Card.
7. The optional residual oil Z-factor (Type 5 Data Card) is used to define the oil
Z-factor for the default separator. If not input, the default separator oil Z-
factor is set equal to that in the last Type 7 Data Card (which should be at
standard pressure) corrected for temperature. Since this approximation
neglects oil density variation between reservoir and standard temperature,
errors in surface volumes will result if the default separator is used for
separation and a Type 5 Data Card is not input.
4.6.6 Initial Fluid Composition Data (VIP-ENCORE)
00 VIP-COMP PVT Property Data (Section 4.4) must also be entered.
4.6.7 Example of K-Value Input Data (VIP-ENCORE)

The following template shows the data requirements for a three-component gas
condensate system: 00
00 KVALUES
COMPONENTS
ONE TWO THREE
PROPERTIES
COMP MW
ONE MW1
TWO MW2
THREE MW3
ENDKV
KVTAB 1
PSAT ZG VG ZO VO X1 KV
psat zg vg zo vo x1 kv1 kv2 kv3
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
PSAT psat1
DP BOFAC VOFAC
dp bofac vofac
. . . .
. . .
. . .
GASMF 1 1
y1 y2 y3
OILMF 1 1
x1 x2 x3
R5000.0.1 Tables 4-325

4.7 Dead Oil PVT Property Data (VIP-THERM)

When no volatile components are present in the reservoir, two options are
available for the representation of oil PVT properties. Oil must be represented by
a single component (nc = 1, ncv = 0). Although gas does not exist in the reservoir,
gas is allowed to evolve upon surface separation by entering a fixed surface gas-
oil ratio and gas gravity. This provides for the case in which the reservoir has
previously been depleted to low pressure at which a small amount of solution gas
remains in the oil.
In the Dead Oil PVT Property Tables option, oil density, enthalpy, and viscosity
are input in tabular form as functions of temperature and pressure. In the Dead Oil
PVT Properties Correlations option, oil density is represented by compressibility
and coefficient of thermal expansion, oil enthalpy is represented by a constant
heat capacity, and oil viscosity is input as a function of temperature.

ways for dead-oil thermal models: 00
1. Specified as a constant value (Section 2.2.4).
2. Specified by equilibrium region in the IEQUIL table (Section 4.2.1.1),

overriding the constant value in option 1.
3. Specified as a function of depth (Section 4.7.1 or 4.7.2), overriding values in

options 1 and 2.

pressure versus depth curves by equilibruim region, from which initial
variation of temperature by gridblock. This results in errors in the computed
initial gridblock pressure. Saturations are not a problem in dead oil models
unless there is an initial steam cap with a gas-oil transition zone (non-zero
capillary pressure curves). These errors may be avoided only by specifying all
erroneous initial gridblock fluid properties as gridblock array data.
4.7.1 Dead Oil PVT Property Tables Option

When using this option, required data for the oil include molecular weight, density
at standard conditions, and values of density, enthalpy, and viscosity as a function
of temperature and pressure over the ranges expected during simulation. Oil
densities and enthalpies are calculated by linear interpolation. Oil viscosity is
interpolated based on a linear relationship between log (log viscosity) and log
(temperature).
4-326 Tables R5000.0.1

OILTABLES
MWOIL mwoil
DOSTD dostd
(RSF GR )
(rsf gr )
DOTAB
NP np
T t1 t2 t3 . . .
P
p1 d11 d12 d13 . . .
p2 d21 d22 d23 . . .
p3 d31 d32 d33 . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
HOTAB
NP np
T t1 t2 t3 . . .
P
p1 h11 h12 h13 . . .
p2 h21 h22 h23 . . .
p3 h31 h32 h33 . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
VOTAB
(VOMIN vomin)
NP np
T t1 t2 t3 . . .
P
p1 v11 v12 v13 . . .
p2 v21 v22 v23 . . .
p3 v31 v32 v33 . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
(TTAB ieqr))
(DEPTH T)
(depth1 t1)
(depth2 t2)
(. .)
(. .)
Definitions:
OILTABLES Alpha label indicating that the data being read are Dead
Oil PVT Property Tables.
MWOIL Alpha label indicating that the next entry on this line is
the oil molecular weight.
mwoil Value of oil molecular weight.
DOSTD Alpha label indicating that the next entry on this line is
the oil density at standard conditions.
R5000.0.1 Tables 4-327

dostd Value of oil density at standard conditions, gm/cc (gm/

cc).
RSF Alpha label indicating that the entry in this location on

the following card is the surface gas-oil ratio. (Optional.)
GR Alpha label indicating that the entry in this location on

the following card is the surface gas gravity. (Optional.)
rsf Value of surface gas-oil ratio, SCF/STB (SM3/STM3).

Optional.
gr Value of surface gas gravity (relative to air). (Optional.)
DOTAB Alpha label indicating that the following data describe

the oil density table.
HOTAB Alpha label indicating that the following data describe

the oil enthalpy table.
VOTAB Alpha label indicating that the following data describe

the oil viscosity table.
NP Alpha label indicating that the next entry on this line is

the number of pressure entries in the table.
np Value of the number of pressure entries in the table. This

value must be the same in the density, enthalpy, and
viscosity tables.
T Alpha label indicating that the following entries on this

line are the table temperature entries.
tj Values of table temperature entries. The number and

values of the table temperature entries must be the same
in all tables except for the temperature versus depth table,
°F (°C).
P Alpha label indicating that the first entry on the next np

card is a table pressure entry.
pi Values of table pressure entries. The number and values

of table pressure entries must be the same in all tables,
psia (kPa).
dij Values of oil density at pi and tj, gm/cc (gm/cc).
hij Values of oil enthalpy at pi and tj, Btu/lb mole (kJ/kg

mole).
vij Values of oil viscosity at pi and tj, cp (cp).
4-328 Tables R5000.0.1


TTAB Alpha label indicating that the following data is a

temperature versus depth table. (Optional)
ieqr Equilibrium region to which the temperature versus

depth table applies. Default is 1. (Optional)
DEPTH Alpha label indicating that the entries in this location on

the following data cards are the depth values in the
temperature versus depth table.
T Alpha label indicating that the entries appearing in this

location on the following data cards are the temperature
values in the temperature versus depth table.
depthi Values of depth in temperature versus depth table, ft (m).
NOTE: 1. The number and values of the temperature and pressure entries in the
DOTAB, HOTAB, and VOTAB tables must be the same.
2. The minimum table dimensions for the DOTAB, HOTAB, and

VOTAB tables are 2 by 2 (two temperature and two pressure entries).
3. Properties at conditions outside of the tables are extrapolated.
4.7.2 Dead Oil PVT Property Correlations Option

Input data requirements for this option are greatly simplified over those for the
Dead Oil PVT Property Tables Option due to the following assumptions:
1. Oil density varies linearly with temperature and pressure.
2. Oil heat capacity is constant (oil enthalpy varies linearly with temperature and
is independent of pressure).
3. Oil viscosity is a function of temperature only.
Required data for the oil include molecular weight, density at standard conditions,
compressibility, coefficient of thermal expansion, heat capacity and values of
viscosity as a function of temperature.
R5000.0.1 Tables 4-329

Oil compressibility is defined as
δDO 1
CTEOIL = ------------ --------------------
δP DOSTD
and the oil coefficient of thermal expansion is defined as
δDO 1
CTEOIL = – ------------ --------------------
δT DOSTD
4-330 Tables R5000.0.1

Oil density is therefore given by
DO = DOSTD * (1 + COIL * (P - PS) - CTEOIL * (T - TS))
Oil enthalpy is given by
HO = CPOIL * (T - TS)
Oil viscosity is interpolated from the viscosity versus temperature data assuming a
linear relationship between log (log viscosity) and log (temperature).
OILPROPS
MWOIL mwoil
DOSTD dostd
COIL coil
CTEOIL cteoil
CPOIL cpoil
VISOIL
(VOMIN vomin)
T VISCOSITY
t1 v1
t2 v2
. .
. .
(RSF GR)
(rsf gr)
(TTAB ieqr)
(DEPTH T)
(depth1 t1)
(depth2 t2)
(. .)
(. .)
Definitions:
OILPROPS Alpha label indicating that the data being read are Dead
Oil PVT Correlations data.
MWOIL Alpha label indicating that the next entry on this line is
the oil molecular weight.
mwoil Value of oil molecular weight.
DOSTD Alpha label indicating that the next entry on this card is
the oil density at standard conditions.
dostd Value of oil density at standard conditions, gm/cc (gm/

cc).
RSF Alpha label indicating that the entry in this location on

the following card is the surface gas-oil ratio. (Optional)
GR Alpha label indicating that the entry in this location on
R5000.0.1 Tables 4-331

the following card is the surface gas gravity. (Optional)
rsf Value of surface gas-oil ratio, SCF/STB (SM3/STM3).

(Optional)
gr Value of surface gas gravity (relative to air). (Optional)
COIL Alpha label indicating that the next entry on this card is
the oil compressibility.
coil Value of oil compressibility, psia-1 (kPa-1).
CTEOIL Alpha label indicating that the next entry on this card is
the oil coefficient of thermal expansion.
cteoil Value of oil coefficient of thermal expansion, °R-1 (°K-1).
CPOIL Alpha label indicating that the next entry on this card is
the oil heat capacity.
cpoil Value of oil heat capacity, Btu/LB °R (J/G °K).
VISOIL Alpha label indicating that the following data describe

the oil viscosity table.

T Alpha label indicating that the entries in this location on

the following cards are the temperatures in the viscosity
table.
VISCOSITY Alpha label indicating that the entries in this location on

the following data cards are the viscosities in the
viscosity table.
ti Values of temperature in tables, °F (°C).
vi Values of viscosity in viscosity table, cp (cp).
TTAB Alpha label indicating that the following data is a

temperature versus depth table. (Optional)
ieqr Equilibrium region to which the temperature versus

depth table applies. Default is 1. (Optional)
DEPTH Alpha label indicating that the entries in this location on

the following data cards are the depth values in the
4-332 Tables R5000.0.1

T Alpha label indicating that the entries in this location on

the following data cards are the temperature values in the
depthi Values of depth in temperature versus depth table, ft (m).
R5000.0.1 Tables 4-333

4.8 Surface Separation Data (VIP-COMP or VIP-THERM)

00 Surface separation data must immediately follow the PVT Property Data
(Section 4.4).
Surface Separation Data may be entered in VIP-CORE and/or the simulation

module. 00
Each separator battery may contain an arbitrary number of stages. Each stage
contains one feed stream and two output streams, one vapor and one liquid. Each
of the two output streams can itself be split into two streams, each of which may
be fed to (1) any downstream separator stage, (2) the gas sales line, or (3) the oil
sales line. 00
The default separator is single stage at standard temperature and pressure. A vapor
fraction of 1.0 is assigned the destination GAS (gas sales line) and a liquid
fraction of 1.0 is assigned the destination OIL (oil sales line). Surface separator
equation-of-state parameters cannot be entered without entering all of the
separator data, and default values are calculated from reservoir values considering
temperature dependency (Reference 17). 00
Both the default and the input separators can be accessed for surface volume
calculations by means of the REGSEP Card (Section 9.2). 00
4.8.1 EOS Separator Data (SEPARATOR)
SEPARATOR ibat
(PVTTABLE ipvt)
(1) STAGE TEMP PRES VFRAC VDEST LFRAC LDEST
(2) n tn pn vfn1 vdn1 lfn1 ldn1
(3) X X X vfn2 vdn2 lfn2 ldn2
(Type 2 and 3 Data Cards are repeated as
necessary to define all the stages of separation.)
00 Definitions:
ibat List of separator battery numbers.
ipvt EOS table number used for separator flash calculations.

If the particular EOS table has EOSSEP data, the
EOSSEP parameters will be used for the calculations. If
the PVTTABLE number is not input, EOS table 1 will be
assumed.
n Separator stage number. Values range from 1 to the total

number of stages.
tn Operating temperature of separator stage n, °F (°C).
4-334 Tables R5000.0.1

pn Operating pressure of separator stage n, psia (kPa).
vfn1 Fraction of the vapor stream leaving separator stage n to

be sent to the destination indicated by vdn1. Values must
lie in the range 0-1. If vfn1 is less than 1.0, then one Type
3 Data Card must be provided for this stage so that vfn1
and vfn2 sum to 1.0.
vdn1 Destination of the first vapor stream leaving stage n.

Alternatives include a downstream separator stage, the
gas sales line, and vent.
⎧ m ( stage number )
⎪
vd n1 = ⎨ GAS ( alpha label )
⎪
⎩ VENT ( alpha label )
lfn1 Fraction of the liquid stream leaving separator stage n to
be sent to the destination indicated by ldn1. Values must
lie in the range 0-1. If lfn1 is less than 1.0, then one Type
3 Data Card must be provided for this stage so that lfn1
and lfn2 sum to 1.0.
ldn1 Destination of the first liquid stream leaving stage n.

Alternatives include a downstream separator stage and
the oil sales line.
ld n1 = ⎨
⎩ OIL ( alpha label )
X Alpha label that must be entered in the first three

locations on the Type 3 Data Card.

be sent to the destination indicated by vdn2. The values
of vfn1 and vfn2 must sum to exactly 1.0.
vdn2 Destination of the second vapor stream leaving stage n.

the gas sales line.

be sent to the destination indicated by ldn2. The values of
lfn1 and lfn2 must sum to exactly 1.0.
ldn2 Destination of the second liquid stream leaving stage n.

the oil sales line.
NOTE: 1. Stock tank conditions should be entered as the last stage of separation
R5000.0.1 Tables 4-335

in order to obtain the stock tank liquid volume.
2. The user may optionally enter surface separator equation-of-

state parameters. Because Ωa and Ωb parameters, binary
interaction coefficients and volume shift factors at reservoir
conditions are sometimes not adequate for describing fluid
behavior during surface separations, an option to change these
parameters is provided. If entered, these data must immediately
follow the data for the last stage of the separator battery to
which they apply. The user may override the data for any or all
stages for a battery.
00 Example:
00 C ========================================
C COMPOSITIONAL SEPARATOR BATTERY
C ========================================
SEPARATOR 1
STAGE TEMP PRES VFRAC VDEST LFRAC LDEST
1 100.0 665.0 1. GAS 1. 2
2 132.0 100.0 1. GAS 1. 3
3 126.0 40.0 1. GAS 1. 4
4 149.0 15.0 1. GAS 1. 4
5 60.0 14.7 1. GAS 1. OIL
4.8.2 Surface Separator OMEGA Data (OMEGAS)
OMEGAS istg
Ωa1 . . . Ωanc
OMEGBS istg
Ωb1 . . . Ωbnc
00 Definitions:
OMEGAS Alpha label indicating that surface separator Ωa values

will be entered.
OMEGBS Alpha label indicating that optional surface separator Ωb

values will be entered.
istg The separator stage in the current battery to which the

equation-of-state parameters apply.
Ωai Values of Ωa for each hydrocarbon component.
Ωbi Values of Ωb for each hydrocarbon component.
4-336 Tables R5000.0.1

4.8.3 Surface Separator Binary Interaction Coefficients (DJKSEP)
DJKSEP cmpj istg

cmpk djk
ENDSEP
00 Definitions:
DJKSEP Alpha label indicating that optional surface separator

binary interaction coefficients will be entered.
cmpj Component name of first component in a binary mixture.

interaction coefficients apply.
cmpk Component name of second component in a binary

mixture.
djk Binary interaction coefficient for mixtures of component

j and component k.
ENDSEP Alpha label indicating the end of the input of this set of
DJKSEP data. The DJKSEP data for a component can be
terminated by another DJKSEP card or by an ENDSEP
card.
4.8.4 Surface Separator Volume Shift Factor (VSHFTS)
VSHFTS istg
vshfts1... vshftsnc
00 Definitions:
VSHFTS Alpha label indicating that optional surface separator

volume shift factors will be entered.

shift factors apply.
vshftsi Surface separator volume shift factor for component i at

stage istg.
R5000.0.1 Tables 4-337

4.9 Surface Separation Data with BOTAB PVT Data (VIP-

ENCORE)
00 Surface separation data must immediately follow the PVT Property Data
(Section 4.5).
00 Surface separation data may be entered in VIP-CORE and/or the simulation

modules. However, more options are available in VIP-CORE.
When “black-oil” type problems are run in VIP-ENCORE, the PVT data are
converted into a multicomponent format, including the use of K-values and z-
factors to calculate the phase behavior and volumetric behavior of both oil and
gas. This treatment makes it possible for separator conditions to be exactly
modeled, while using differential expansion data to describe fluid behavior in the
reservoir. This eliminates the conflict between differential and flash volumetrics
that creates difficulty for conventional black-oil simulators. 00
The types and format of surface separation data depend upon the type of PVT
Property Data which is input (black-oil laboratory data or K-value tabular data,
see Section 4.4). 00
Both the default and the input separators can be accessed for surface volume
calculations by means of the REGSEP Card (Section 9.2). 00
For black-oil laboratory PVT data input, there are four options for the treatment of
separators. 00
00 These options are not mutually exclusive, i.e., any number of input separator
data options may be used in the same run. Order is not important.
00 Default Separator (only for use with adjusted PVT data)
00 Separator K-value Input
00 Separator Test Data Input
00 Black-oil Separator Data Input
The second option is a slightly modified version of the separator data input format
given in the Simulation Modules Manual. 00
Use of the default separator implies that the differential liberation data have been
adjusted for flash conditions in the conventional manner (see Section 2.2.2.2
(VIP-ENCORE)). If no adjustments are made and the default separator is used,
significant errors in surface volumes will result. 00
4-338 Tables R5000.0.1

4.9.1 Default Separator

Default separators should be used only when VIP-ENCORE is being run in
the conventional black-oil mode (the PVT data have been appropriately
adjusted). See Section Section 4.5.1. 00
Default separator K-values and liquid compressibility factors are calculated from
input laboratory differential liberation data (PVT property data). One separator
battery is created for each PVT property table. Each separator is single stage at
standard temperature and pressure with a vapor fraction of 1.0 sent to the
destination GAS (gas sales line) and a liquid fraction of 1.0 sent to the destination
OIL (oil sales line) (see separator configuration data below.) 00
K-values are calculated from the differential liberation data using the calculated
composition of the total gas liberated from the initial saturation pressure to
standard pressure and the composition of the liquid at standard pressure. A liquid
compressibility factor at standard conditions is calculated for each battery using
the residual oil density and molecular weight input in or derived from the
differential liberation data. 00
If a non-zero value for gas-oil ratio at standard pressure was input in the PVT
data, use of the default separator will result in a match between the separation gas-
oil ratio at the initial saturation pressure and the “effective” input gas-oil ratio at
the initial saturation pressure. The “effective” gas-oil ratio is equal to the
difference between the input gas-oil ratio and the gas-oil ratio at standard
pressure. See Note 7 at end of Section 4.5.2.1. 00
4.9.2 Separator K-Value Input (SEPARATOR)

Input data format for this option is similar to that given in the reference manual for
the simulation modules. In earlier documentation it has been suggested that one
use the K-values derived for the last step in the differential liberation experiment.
This may lead to large errors in surface volumes. This option should be used only
when accurate separator K-values and liquid density are known. When using this
option, one must take great care to insure that the input K-values are consistent
with the internally defined component molecular weights, which are printed out in
the default separator properties table. 00
00 The data required for this option include the following:
1. Definition of the separator configuration. This includes the number of stages,

the destinations of the two outflow streams leaving each stage, and the
fraction of each outflow stream that flows to each destination.
2. The density of the oil product (stock tank oil) leaving the last separator stage.
3. The molecular weight of the stock tank oil or the saturation pressure of the
saturated oil feed.
R5000.0.1 Tables 4-339

4. The equilibrium K-values for each component in the system for each stage of
separation.
SEPARATOR ibat
PVTTABLE ipvt
(1) STAGE VFRAC VDEST LFRAC LDEST
(2) n vfn1 vdn1 lfn1 ldn1
(3) X vfn2 vdn2 lfn2 ldn2
(Data Cards are repeated as necessary to define all of the
stages of separation.)
PSATF
(4) DLIQ
MWL
psatf
(5) dliq
mwl
(6) KVALUES
(7) COMP STAGE 1 (STAGE 2 . . . STAGE n)
(8) comp kval1 (kval2 . . . kvaln)
(Enter one of these cards for each component in the fluid
system.)
00 Definitions:
ipvt PVT table number describing the fluid to which this

separation data applies. Used for deriving table of
differential versus flash volumetrics and for calculating a
liquid molecular weight if none is entered.
STAGE Alpha label indicating that the data values appearing in

this location on the following data cards are values of
separator stage number.
VFRAC Alpha label indicating that the data values appearing in

this location on the following data cards are vapor stream
fractions.
VDEST Alpha label indicating that the data values appearing in

this location on the following data cards are vapor stream
destinations.
LFRAC Alpha label indicating that the data values appearing in

this location on the following data cards are liquid stream
fractions.
4-340 Tables R5000.0.1

LDEST Alpha label indicating that the data values appearing in

this location on the following data cards are liquid stream
destinations.

number of stages.


⎪
⎪
3 Data Card must be provided for this stage, so that lfn1

the oil sales line.
ld n1 = ⎨
X Alpha label that must be entered in the first location on

the Type 3 Data Card.


the gas sales line.

R5000.0.1 Tables 4-341


the oil sales line.
DLIQ Alpha label indicating that the data value appearing in

this location on the following data card is the density of
the stock tank oil.
PSATF Alpha label indicating that the data value appearing in

this location on the following data card is the saturation
pressure of the feed fluid.
MWL Alpha label indicating that the data value appearing in

this location on the following data card is the molecular
weight of the stock tank oil.
dliq Density of the oil product (stock tank oil) leaving the last
separator stage, gm/cc (gm/cc).
psatf Saturation pressure of the feed (saturated oil from PVT

table ntab) in the separator test from which the data were
derived, psia (kPa).
mwl Molecular weight of the stock tank oil.
comp Component name (or number).
kvali Equilibrium K-value for this component for stage i.
NOTE: Since the separator data should correspond to a fluid described in one of
the PVT tables, psatf should be input instead of mwl. Molecular weight
can and will be calculated (if not input) from the input K-values and the
differential liberation data.
This option may not be used in conjunction with the PVT interpolation
option.
Each separator battery may contain any number of stages. Each stage contains one
feed stream and two output streams: vapor and liquid. Each of the two output
streams can itself be split into two streams, each of which may be fed to any
downstream separator stage, the gas sales line or the oil sales line. 00
4-342 Tables R5000.0.1

00 Example:
00 C==============================================
C BLACK-OIL AND K-VALUE SINGLE STAGE SEPARATOR
C==============================================
SEPARATOR 1
STAGE VFRAC VDEST LFRAC LDEST
1 1. GAS 1. OIL
DLIQ MWL
0.8966 200
00 C
KVALUES
COMP STAGE 1
1 89.4
2 0.0056
4.9.3 Separator Test Data Input (SEPTEST)

This option uses standard separator test data normally given in a laboratory fluid
analysis to derive separator K-values and the standard condition liquid
compressibility factor. If these data are available and applicable, this option is the
preferable method for separator treatment. 00
SEPTEST ibat
PVTTABLE ntab (itype)
PSATF BOF
psatf bof
P T GOR BOSTG GR
p1 t1 gor1 bostg1 gr1
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
pns tns gorns bostgns grns
(enter one data card for each stage)
00 Definitions:
ntab PVT table number for the fluid to which these data apply.
itype Oil type when the PVT interpolation option (BOTINT) is

in use. Not used otherwise.
psatf Saturation pressure of the saturated oil feed, psi (kPa).
R5000.0.1 Tables 4-343

bof “Flash” oil formation volume factor for feed of saturated

oil from PVT table ntab at psatf.
pn Operating pressure of separator stage n, psia (kPa).
tn Operating temperature of separator stage n, °F(°C).
gorn Liberated gas-oil ratio of stage n, SCF/STB (SM3/

STM3).
bostgn Separator volume factor of the liquid leaving stage n.
grn Gas gravity of the gas leaving stage n.
NOTE: Separator configuration (as described in Section 4.9.2) is defined

automatically with a vapor fraction of 1.0 of the vapor stream from each
stage sent to the destination GAS (gas sales line), a liquid fraction of 1.0 of
the liquid stream from each stage sent to the next stage, and the liquid
stream of the last stage sent to the destination OIL (oil sales line).
Only one stage is allowed when the PVT interpolation option is in use.
4-344 Tables R5000.0.1

4.9.4 Black-oil Separator Data Input (BOSEP)

This card should be used only with VIP-ENCORE.
This option is provided for cases in which laboratory separator test data is not
available or applicable, but a flash oil formation volume factor and gas-oil ratio
are known or estimated. These values must correspond to feed of saturated oil at
some pressure in one of the BOTAB tables. A stock tank oil compressibility factor
is calculated using the residual oil density from PVT table ntab and a stock tank
oil molecular weight computed internally by material balance.
If the stock tank oil density or the stock tank oil molecular weight or the surface
gas gravity is known or can be estimated, then it is preferable to use the Separator
Test Data input option (with a single stage) as given in the previous subsection.
The required surface gas gravity can be calculated from stock tank oil density or
molecular weight by using the equations:
S
5.6146 ⋅ 62.428 ⋅ RT ( BOF ⋅ DES – DENO )
GR = -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
S
GOR ⋅ 29 ⋅ P
00 and
S
DOS ⋅ BOF GOR ⋅ P
00 DENO = WTO --------------------------- – -------------------------------------------------
WTOS S
5.6146 ⋅ 62.428 ⋅ RT
00 where
DENO = stock tank oil density, g/cc.
WTO = stock tank oil molecular weight.
GR = surface gas gravity.
BOF = flash oil formation volume factor, rb/STB.
GOR = flash gas-oil ratio, SCF/STB.
DOS = density of the saturated oil feed at reservoir conditions, g/

cc.
WTOS = molecular weight of the saturated oil feed.
R = gas constant, 10.736 psia ft3/LB mole °R.
Ps = standard pressure, psia.
Ts = standard temperature, °R.
BOSEP ibat
PVTTABLE ntab
R5000.0.1 Tables 4-345

PSATF BOF GOR

psatf bof gor
00 Definitions:
ntab PVT table number for the fluid to which these data apply.
psatf Saturation pressure of the saturated oil feed, psia (kPa).
bof Flash value of oil formation volume factor for feed of

saturated oil from PVT table ntab at psatf.
gor Value of the gas-oil ratio observed at the surface, SCF/

STB (SM3/STM3).
NOTE: This option may not be used in conjunction with the PVT interpolation
option.
4.10 Separator Data with KVTAB PVT Data (VIP-ENCORE)

Default separators should only be used when the K-value table has been derived
from conventionally adjusted (for flash conditions) differential expansion data.
This is not recommended, since the separation data should be obtained the same
way as the K-value table - by regressing to match laboratory data using
DESKTOP-PVT. The separation data should be directly input from DESKTOP-
PVT results. 00
A default separator is created for each input PVT property table. Each default
separator is single stage at standard conditions with a vapor fraction of 1.0 sent to
the destination GAS (gas sales line) and a liquid fraction of 1.0 sent to the
destination OIL (oil sales line) (see separator configuration data below). 00
Default separator K-values are equal to those in the last entry of the KVTAB table
(at standard pressure). If a residual oil Z-factor is input in the KVTAB table
(Section 4.6), this is the default separator value. If not, the default separator oil Z-
factor is given by the oil z-factor in the last entry of the table (at standard pressure)
corrected for temperature. Since this neglects oil density variation between
reservoir and standard temperature, some error in oil surface volume will result. 00
Separator properties may be input using the same format as given in the reference
manual for the simulation modules. The required data include: 00
1. Definition of the separator configuration. This includes the number of stages,

the destinations of the two outflow streams leaving each stage, and the
fraction of each outflow stream that flows to each destination.
2. The density of the oil product (stock tank oil) leaving the last separator stage.
4-346 Tables R5000.0.1

3. The molecular weight of the stock tank oil.
4. The equilibrium K-values for each component in the system for each stage of
separation.
R5000.0.1 Tables 4-347

4.10.1 K-Values Separation Data (SEPARATOR)
SEPARATOR ibat
(1) STAGE VFRAC VDEST LFRAC LDEST
(2) n vfn1 vdn1 lfn1 ldn1
(3) X vfn2 vdn2 lfn2 ldn2
(Type 2 and 3 Data Cards are repeated as necessary to
define all of the stages of separation.)
(4) DLIQ MWL
(5) dliq mwl
(6) KVALUES
(7) COMP STAGE 1 (STAGE 2 . . . STAGE n)
(8) comp kval1 (kval2 . . . kvaln)
(Enter one of these cards for each component in the fluid
system.)
00 Definitions:

number of stages.


⎪
⎪
3 Data Card must be provided for this stage, so that lfn1

the oil sales line.
4-348 Tables R5000.0.1

ld n1 = ⎨
X Alpha label that must be entered in the first location on

the Type 3 Data Card.


the gas sales line.


the oil sales line.
dliq Density of the oil product (stock tank oil) leaving the last
separator stage, gm/cc (gm/cc).
mwl Molecular weight of the stock tank oil.
comp Component name (or number).
kvali Equilibrium K-value for this component for stage i.
00 Example:
00 C=============================================
C BLACK-OIL AND K-VALUE SINGLE STAGE SEPARATOR
C=============================================
SEPARATOR 1
STAGE VFRAC VDEST LFRAC LDEST
1 1. GAS 1. OIL
DLIQ MWL
0.8966 200
C
KVALUES
COMP STAGE 1
1 89.4
2 0.0056
R5000.0.1 Tables 4-349

4.11 Water Property Regions

00 Multiple water property regions are available in a very similar manner as
hydrocarbon property regions. They can be defined via two different methods;
one for multiple water types for multiple horizons, and a second for more complex
treatment including property variations with salinity as well as pressure. If neither
of these is required, then the water PVT constants can be input with the Physical
Property Constants (DWB) parameters. If two or more different water types are
required, with essentially constant but different salinities, then the PVTW data can
be used to define the different pressure-dependent water PVT parameters for each
region. The PVTWSAL data must be used if there is a significant variation in
properties due to salinity within one or more of the regions.
4.11.1 Region Constants (PVTW)

00 This data may be used to define the water property constants for one or more
water PVT regions. PVTW and PVTWSAL data may not both be entered.
00 PVTW and PVTWSAL data may not both be entered.
PVTW IPVTW PBASEW DWB BWI CW VW (VWP)

ipvtw pbasew dwb bwi cw vw (vwp)
(repeat data card as necessary)
00 Definitions:
ipvtw Water porosity table number/region number. This

number corresponds to values in the IPVTW array
(Section 5.14).
pbasew Reference pressure for water compressibility calculations

in this region, psia (kPa). If not enterred on either
PVTW or PVTWSAL cards, pbasew is set to the pbase
value on the CONSTANTS card (Section 2.2.4.1). If the
CONSTANTS card is not entered, pbasew is set to the
pinit value of the first equilibrium region (Section 4.2.1
or Section 4.2.2).
dwb Density of the stock tank water in this region, gm/cc (gm/
cc).
bwi Water formation volume factor at pbasew in this region,

rb/STB (m3/STM3).
cw Water compressibility in this region, psi-1 (kPa-1).
vw Water viscosity at pbasew, cp (cp).
4-350 Tables R5000.0.1

vwp Derivative of water viscosity with respect to pressure in

this region, cp/psia (cp/kPa). Default is 0.
4.11.2 Salinity-Dependent Data (PVTWSAL)

00 This data must be used to define the water property variations with salinity as well
as pressure for one or more water PVT regions. PVTWSAL and PVTW data may
not both be entered.
00 PVTWSAL and PVTW data may not both be entered.
PVTWSAL ipvtw pbasew

SALINT DWB BWI CW VW (VWP)
salint dwb bwi cw vw (vwp)
(repeat data card as necessary)
00 Definitions:
ipvtw Water property table number/region number. This

number corresponds to values in the IPVTW array
(Section 5.14).
pbasew Reference pressure for water compressibility calculations

in this region, psia (kPa). If not entered on either PVTW
or PVTWSAL cards, pbasew is set to the pbase value on
the CONSTANTS card (Section 2.2.4.1). If the
CONSTANTS card is not entered, pbasew is set to the
pinit value of the first equilibrium region (Section 4.2.1
or Section 4.2.2).
salint Water salinity, user-defined units. In each table, water

salinity values must increase.
dwb Density of the stock tank water for salinity salint, gm/cc
(gm/cc).
bwi Water formation volume factor at pbasew for salinity

salint, rb/STB (m3/STM3).
cw Water compressibility for salinity salint, psi-1 (kPa-1).
vw Water viscosity at pbasew for salinity salint, cp (cp).
vwp Derivative of water viscosity with respect to pressure for

salinity salint, cp/psia (cp/kPa). Default is 0.
4.12 Compaction Tables (CMT)

00 Also see Section 2.2.7.11.
R5000.0.1 Tables 4-351

The compaction tables provide for user input of pore volume and permeability
changes based on fluid pressure history. When the compaction option is invoked
with the COMPACT card in utility data, and compaction tables are provided as
shown in this section, then the pore volumes and transmissibilities used by the
simulator are multiplied by reduction factors prior to use. Well perforation
permeability thicknesses (KH) are also multiplied by reduction factors. The
factors are looked up in the compaction tables using either the current gridblock
pressure (reversible option) or the minimum historical gridblock pressure
(irreversible option; default) in each block. If more than one compaction table is
provided, the ICMT array (Section 5.19) is used to determine which one applies to
each gridblock. 00
CMT ncmt
P PVMULT TAMULT (TVMULT)
p pvmult tamult (tvmult)
(At least two data cards are required.)
00 Definitions:
CMT Alpha label indicating that the data being read is a

compaction table.
ncmt Compaction table number. The ICMT array (Section

5.19) is used to relate this table number to a gridblock.
The values on the data cards following this title card appear in the order defined
by this title card. The alpha labels must appear in the order shown. 00
P Alpha label indicating that the data values appearing in

pressure.
PVMULT Alpha label indicating that the data values appearing in

this location on the following data cards are pore volume
multipliers.
TAMULT Alpha label indicating that the data values appearing in

this location on the following data cards are areal
transmissibility multipliers.
TVMULT Alpha label indicating that the data values appearing in

this location on the following data cards are vertical
transmissibility multipliers. Optional.
00 p Pressure, psia (kPa). Values must the greater than zero

and must increase.
pvmult Pore volume multiplier.
tamult Areal transmissibility multiplier.
4-352 Tables R5000.0.1

tvmult Vertical transmissibility multiplier. If TVMULT is not

read, tvmult = tamult.
4.13 Water Induced Rock Compaction Tables (WIRCT)

The water induced rock compaction tables provide for user input of pore volume
and permeability changes based on water saturation history. When the compaction
tables are provided as shown in this section, then the pore volumes and
transmissibilities used by the simulator are multiplied by reduction factors prior to
use. The factors are interpolated from the water induced rock compaction tables
using the maximum historical gridblock water saturation (irreversible) minus the
gridblock water saturation at time zero. If more than one compaction table is
provided, the IWIRC array (Section 5.21) is used to determine which one applies
to each gridblock. 00
WIRCT nwct (card 1)

SWINIT swinit (card 2)
DSW PVMULT TAMULT(TVMULT) (card 3)
dsw pvmult tamult (tvmult) (card 4)
(At least two data cards 4 are required.)
00 Definitions:
WIRCT Alpha label indicating that the data being read is a water
induced rock compaction table.
nwct Water induced rock compaction table number. The

IWIRC array Section(5...) is used to relate this table
number to a gridblock.
SWINIT Alpha label indicating that the next data value on this
card is initial water saturation
swinit Initial water saturation that applies to the following table

section. Valid values are between 0.0 and 1.0
The alpha labels on title Card 3 must appear in the order shown. 00
DSW Alpha label indicating that the data values appearing in

water saturation changes.
PVMULT Alpha label indicating that the data values appearing in

this location on the following data cards are pore volume
multipliers.
TAMULT Alpha label indicating that the data values appearing in

this location on the following data cards are areal
transmissibility multipliers.
R5000.0.1 Tables 4-353

TVMULT Alpha label indicating that the data values appearing in

this location on the following data cards are vertical
transmissibility multipliers. Optional.
The values on Card 4 must appear in the order shown. There must be a minimum
of two Card 4 data cards 00
dsw Water saturation change, fraction. Values must be

between 0.0 and 1.0 and must increase.
pvmult Pore volume multiplier. Values must be between 0.0 and

1.0 and must decrease.
tamult Areal transmissibility multiplier. Values must be greater

than or equal to 0.0.
tvmult Vertical transmissibility multiplier. Values must be

greater than or equal to 0.0. If TVMULT is not read,
tvmult = tamult.
NOTE: Cards 2 through 4 can be repeated as necessary for each WIRCT card. The
values of swinit within a particular table must increase consecutively.
00 Example:
00 C
C
WIRCT 1
SWINIT 0.06
DSW PVMULT TAMULT TVMULT
.01 1.0 1.0 1.0
.05 0.95 0.95 0.95
.1 0.9 0.9 0.9
1. 0.8 0.8 0.8
00 SWINIT 0.12
.01 1.0 1.0 1.0
.05 0.95 0.95 0.95
.1 0.9 0.9 0.9
00 SWINIT 0.2
.01 1.0 1.0 1.0
.05 0.95 0.95 0.95
1. 0.8 0.8 0.8
00 SWINIT 0.3
.01 1.0 1.0 1.0
4-354 Tables R5000.0.1

1. 0.8 0.8 0.8
00 WIRCT 2
SWINIT 0.06
.01 1.0 1.0 1.0
.05 0.95 0.95 0.95
1. 0.8 0.8 0.8
00 SWINIT 0.3
.01 1.0 1.0 1.0
.1 0.9 0.9 0.9
1. 0.8 0.8 0.8
4.14 Three and Four Component Miscible Data (Not available in

VIP-THERM)
To invoke the miscible flood option, a MIS card must appear in the initialization
utility data. 00
The original three-component Todd and Longstaff option is automatically invoked

with a MIS card and an input value of 2 for the number of hydrocarbon
components, NCOMP, on the grid system data card. In this case, the black-oil
table “BOTAB” is required to describe the PVT properties and VLE for solvent
and dead oil. In the three-component option, the solvent is assigned as the first
component and the dead oil as the second component. The four-component
miscible option is automatically invoked with a MIS card and an input value of 3
for the number of hydrocarbon components, NCOMP, on the grid system data
card. In this case, the light oil component is assigned as the first component, the
heavy oil component (dead oil) as the second component and the injected solvent
as the third component. In addition to the typical black-oil table BOTAB that
specifies the PVT properties and VLE for the light and the heavy oil components,
the user is required to input a solvent property table, SLVTAB, immediately
following the black oil table. 00
Note that in black-oil mode, with the multiple PVT table option, the user is
required to enter consecutively all BOTAB tables, followed by the same number
of SLVTAB and MISPTB tables (in pairs), i.e. for each PVT region, a SLVTAB
table must be immediately followed by an MISPTB table. After all SLVTAB and
MISPTB tables are entered, an MWS card must be input. 00
In the four-component miscible option, the simulator assumes that the solvent is
absent during initialization. Thus, the user is not required to input the initial
component mole fractions. 00
For the miscible model, there are two options for separators; default and separator
K-value input. Detailed descriptions of the options and the input requirements are
given in this section. The other two options (separator test data input and black-oil
R5000.0.1 Tables 4-355

separator data) for the conventional black-oil model are not applicable. For the
default option, a large K-value (10E6) is used for the solvent component, if short
solvent property tables (P, BS and VS only in SLVTAB tables) are entered. The
component names for the three hydrocarbon components to be entered in the
separator K-value input option are “light,” “heavy,” and “solvent,” which
correspond to Components 1, 2, and 3, respectively. 00
The data cards that specify the injected solvent composition should take into
account the position of the solvent component. In the simulation modules, pure
solvent injection in the three and four-component cases would be input as: 00
00 C 3 component
YINJ wl
1. 0.
and
C 4 component
YINJ wl
0.0 0.0 1.0
respectively, where wl is the solvent injection well list. Note that the solvent is
identified as the first hydrocarbon component in the three-component case and the
third hydrocarbon component in the four-component case. 00
The miscible option is compatible with both IMPES and implicit formulations of
VIP. The only difference in the input requirements between the IMPES and the
implicit formulations is the specification of the miscibility pressure transition
zone in the ALPHA card (see the Utility Data section). 00
A technical description of this method can be found in Chapter 16 of the VIP-

EXECUTIVE Technical Manual. 00
4.14.1 Solvent PVT Properties (SLVTAB)
SLVTAB (itab)
P BS (or ZS) VS (KS ZSO VSO)
p bs (or zs) vs (ks zso vso)
(at least two data cards are required here)
00 Definitions:
itab The PVT table number, optional. Only one PVT table if
itab is omitted.

pressure.
4-356 Tables R5000.0.1

BS Alpha label indicating that data values appearing in this

location on the following data cards are values of solvent
ZS Alpha label indicating that data values appearing in this

compressibility factor.
VS Alpha label indicating that data values appearing in this

viscosity.
KS Alpha label indicating that data values appearing in this

phase equilibrium K-values, optional.
ZSO Alpha label indicating that data values appearing in this

compressibility factor in the oil phase, optional.
VSO Alpha label indicating that data values appearing in this

viscosity in the oil phase, optional.
p Values of pressure, psia (Kpa).
bs Values of solvent formation volume factor corresponding

to each value of p, rb/MSCF (m3/STM3).
zs Values of solvent compressibility factor corresponding to

each value of p.
vs Values of solvent viscosity corresponding to each value

of p, cp (cp).
ks Values of solvent equilibrium K-value corresponding to

each value of p, optional.
zso Values of solvent compressibility factor in oil phase

corresponding to each value of p, optional.
vso Values of solvent viscosity in oil phase corresponding to

each value of p, cp (cp), optional.
The values of p in each solvent table must be monotonically decreasing, and the
last entry must be 14.65 psia. There must be either three (no KS, ZSO, VSO labels
and their corresponding values in the data cards) or six entries in each data card. If
KS, ZSO, VSO and their corresponding values are omitted from the solvent
tables, the solvent is assumed to be insoluble in the pseudo-oil phase. 00
R5000.0.1 Tables 4-357

If Format (2) in the ALPHA card is used, the user must enter a miscibility
pressure table immediately after each solvent table. The format for the miscibility
pressure table is described on the following card. 00
4.14.2 Miscibility Pressure Table (MISPTB)

00 Four Component (Gas, Oil, Solvent, Water) Case:
MISPTB (itab)
Z1
z11 z12 ... z1n
(at least two z1 values are required here)
Z3 z3
MISP
misp1 misp2 ... mispn
(the MISP lines are repeated for each new Z3 line)
00 Alternatively:
MISPTB (itab)
Y1
y11 y12 ..... y1n
(at least two y1 values are required here)
MISP
misp1 misp2 ........ mispn
00 Three Component (Oil, Solvent, Water) Case:
MISPTB (itab)
Z1
z11 z12 ....... z1n
(at least two z1 values are required here)
MISP
misp1 misp2 ........mispn
00 Definitions:
MISPTB Keyword indicating the data being read are miscibility

pressure data.
Y1 Alpha label indicating that data values appearing on the

following data cards are values of the gas molar fractions
in the gas pseudo-phase (gas-solvent mixture).
y1i ith value of the gas component in the gas pseudo-phase.
Z1 Alpha label indicating that data values appearing on the

following data cards are values of the total molar
4-358 Tables R5000.0.1

fractions of the solvent component for three-component

or the gas component for four-component.
z1i ith value of the component total molar fraction.
Z3 Alpha label indicating that a value of the solvent total

molar fraction is being read, in four-component cases
only.
z3 Value of the solvent total molar fraction.
MISP Alpha label indicating that data values on the following

data cards are values of miscibility pressure.
mispi Values of miscibility pressure corresponding to the total

composition (z1 in three-component and z1i, z3 in four-
component), psia (Kpa). The MISP and mispi cards are
repeated for each new z3 value, in four-component cases.
At least two values of z1 (or y1) must be entered and the values of z1 (or y1) must
be monotonically increasing. In three-component cases, no gas is allowed and
misp is simply a function of solvent mole fraction (z1). In four-component cases,
when gas (z1) and solvent (z3) mole fractions are both specified, misp values
must be input for each combination (one set for each z3 value). The values of z3
must also be monotonically increasing. Alternatively, the gas pseudo-phase (y1)
can be specified. The number of misp values must be equal to the number of z1
values in three-component cases. Values not specified in four-component cases
will be filled with the last misp value entered. 00
4.14.3 Solvent Molecular Weight (MWS)
MWS mws
00 Definition:
mws Value of the solvent molecular weight.
R5000.0.1 Tables 4-359

4.15 Matrix-Fracture Transfer (VIP-DUAL) (Available in VIP-

COMP or VIP-ENCORE)
Coats’ method (Reference 29) is used to model the transfer of gas and oil between
matrix and fractures. This method is always used when DUAL is invoked. 00
4.15.1 Surface Tension Ratio Tables (SIGT)

The surface tension ratio tables provide for user input of gas-oil surface tension
and density difference variation with pressure for each PVT region. 00
SIGT itab
P SIGR (DGOG)
p sigr (dgog)
. . .
. . .
. . .
(At least two data cards are required.)
00 Definitions:
SIGT Alpha indicating that a table of surface tension ratios is

being read.
itab The table number. This number corresponds to values in

the IPVT array (Section 5.14).
P Alpha label indicating that the data values that appear in

this location for the following cards are values of
pressure.
SIGR Alpha label indicating that the data values appearing in

gas-oil surface tension ratios.
DGOG Alpha label indicating that the data values appearing in

gas-oil density difference. Optional.
p Values of pressure, psia (kPa).
sigr Values of surface tension ratios corresponding to each

value of p.
σ ( p )-
sigr ( p ) = -------------
σ ( po )
σ = surface tension
po = pressure used to generate the matrix capillary
4-360 Tables R5000.0.1

pressure curve entered in the SGT table, see Section

4.3.1.2. This is usually the initial reservoir pressure.
dgog Values of oil-gas density difference, corresponding to

each value of p, gm/cc (gm/cc).
NOTE: 1. At least two data cards are required.
2. If the dgog data is omitted, values corresponding to the

pressure entries will be calculated internally.
00 Example:
00 SIGT 1
P SIGR DGOG
14.7 100.0 .7795
1688.7 66.6667 .5934
2044.7 52.2222 .5666
2544.7 36.6607 .5299
3005.7 24.4444 .4972
3567.7 14.2222 .4597
4124.7 8.0 .4247
4558.7 4.9333 .3986
4949.7 2.8333 .3760
5269.7 1.7222 .3570
5559.7 1.0 .3411
7014.7 0.5556 .2676
4.15.2 Gas-Oil Gravity Drainage Parameter (BETAG)
BETAG irck betag
00 Definitions:
BETAG Alpha label.
irck The rock type number. This number corresponds to the

values in the ISAT array.
betag Values of the betag parameter.
NOTE: Rock types with no specified values of betag will default to betag = 1.0.
R5000.0.1 Tables 4-361

4.16 Hydraulic Fracture Option (Not available in VIP-THERM)

00 This option is explained in Section 2.2.17.
4.16.1 Beta (Turbulance) Factors (HYDBETA)

00 The non-Darcy flow behaviors within the hydraulic fracture gridblocks can be
described through the Beta (turbulance) factors. For each proppant type, the Beta
factors can be correlated as a function of effective permeability, through the
equation form below using two constant values. These values must be entered for
all layers; however, if the fracture does not extend into a gridblock, its factors
should be set to zero, as well as its porosity set to zero.
HYDBETA
a1 a2 ... anf*NZ
b1 b2 ... bnf*NZ
00 Definitions:
nf Number of gridblocks in the X direction comprising the

fracture (defined by HYDFRAC card in Section
2.2.17.1).
a Exponent terms in the Beta factors.
b Coefficients in the Beta factors.
NOTE:
b
Beta = -------------------------------------------
a
( tamult ( P ) ⋅ k D )
KX-
where KD = ----------- Darcies.
1000
4-362 Tables R5000.0.1

4.17 Equation of State Interpolation Option(Not available in VIP-

THERM)
00 Both VIP-COMP and VIP-ENCORE must be active.
00 The equation of state interpolation option (EOSINT) is designed for a reduction of

the CPU time required for phase-equilibrium calculations and linearization of the
equation of state in outer iterations of timesteps.
00 In the EOSINT option, saturation pressure, recovery factors of hydrocarbon

components, and liquid and vapor compressibility factors are determined as
tabular functions of pressure, temperature, and fluid compositions. The equation
of state (EOS) is applied for the automatic generation of these functions in VIP-
CORE. Then, the tabular functions of the recovery and compressibility factors are
used for phase-equilibrium calculations in different timesteps of the reservoir
simulation instead of the equation of state. These functions (EOS interpolation
tables) are applied for the determination of compositions and densities of liquid
and vapor hydrocarbon phases.
00 The EOSINT option can be applied for the phase-equilibrium calculations in any
or all of
■ reservoir grid cells
■ separator batteries
■ well tubing strings (surface pipeline network system)
00 For example, it can be applied only in separator batteries and surface pipeline
network system.
00 Parameters of the equation of state must be formulated because the EOS is applied
for the generation of the EOS interpolation tables.
00 The user should define
■ maximum and minimum pressure on the PMIN and PMAX cards;
■ temperature entries of the EOS interpolation tables on the TEMPERATURE

card;
■ composition entries of the tables using the CMP card or simulations of the
PVT tests.
00 Initial compositions of the reservoir fluids defined after the OILMF, GASMF, or
COMPOSITION cards are automatically included in the list of the composition
entries.
00 Simulations of PVT tests (differential expansion, constant volume depletion,
R5000.0.1 Tables 4-363

swelling, and/or multiple contact tests) can be applied in VIP-CORE for the
automatic generation of the composition entries. The fluid compositions
calculated in different stages of simulated PVT tests are automatically included in
the list of the composition entries. Also, these compositions are output in a file
(Fortran Unit 77) in the format of the CMP card. Liquid and vapor densities,
viscosities, and compressibility factors in different stages of the differential
expansion and multiple contact tests are also included in this file.
00 The user can divide the composition entries into paths. Path numbers can be
defined in the CMP, SWELLTEST, DIFEXPTEST, CONVDPTEST, and
MULCONTEST cards.
00 The pressure entries of the EOS interpolation option are calculated internally.
NPMAX pressure entries are selected in the undersaturated region (from the
saturation pressure to the maximum pressure), and NPMAX pressure entries are
selected in the saturated region (from the minimum pressure to the saturation
pressure). The parameter NPMAX can be defined by the user on the DIM card.
The pressure increment selected in the undersaturated region near the saturation
pressure is much smaller than outside of this region.
00 The EOS interpolation tables are generated in VIP-CORE. The simulator

calculates
■ saturation pressure (bubblepoint or dewpoint pressure) for all combinations of

composition and temperature entries;
■ K-values at the saturation pressure for all combinations of composition and

temperature entries;
■ recovery factors for all combinations of composition, temperature, and

pressure entries below the saturation pressure;
■ liquid and vapor compressibility factors for all combinations of composition,

temperature, and pressure entries.
00 An EOS interpolation table is generated for each equililibrium region. The

number of this table corresponds to the equilibrium region number. In the
EOSINT option, separator batteries and links, well connections, and node
connections of the surface network system need to be assigned to equilibrium
regions/EOS interpolation tables. By default they will each be assigned to region/
table one. A region/table number can be assigned to a separator battery by
entering a PVTTABLE card after the SEPARATOR card. A region/table number
can be assigned to a link, well connection, or node connection by entering PVT
table numbers on the LINK, NODCON, or WELCON cards in the simulation
module.
00 Different equations of state can be used to generate each EOS interpolation table.
This is accomplished by associating EOS numbers to each equilibrium region on
4-364 Tables R5000.0.1

the IEQUIL card.
00 An EOS interpolation table is also generated for each separator battery in VIP-
CORE. For this reason, all separator descriptions (the SEPARATOR cards) must
be included in the VIP-CORE input deck rather than in the simulation module
input deck.
00 A multidimensional interpolation procedure is used for the calculations of the K-

values, recovery factors, and compressibility factors between table entries. The
simulator applies
■ cubic spline interpolation in pressure,
■ linear spline interpolation in composition,
■ linear spline interpolation in temperature,
■ linear spline interpolation between compositional paths.
00 The cubic spline interpolation in pressure is applied to assure the continuity of

derivatives of the interpolated functions with respect to pressure.
00 Two procedures are implemented for the interpolation in composition:
■ linear spline interpolation based on the following interpolation function:

nc
F(Z) = ∑ ( ci × zi ) , (Eq. 14-1)

i=1
00 linear spline interpolation based on the following distance between two

composition vectors:
nc
j 2
D ( Z j, Z ) = ∑ ( zi – zi ) × ci .
i=1
00 The non-negative coefficients ci can be defined by the user using the

COEFFICIENT card.
00 The MDI keyword must be included on the EOSINT card to apply the
multidimensional interpolation procedure based on the distance. The path
definitions are ignored in this case and the interpolation between compositional
paths is not applied.
00 The following path interpolation function is used for the interpolation between
compositional paths:
R5000.0.1 Tables 4-365

nc
Fp ( Z ) = ∑ ( cpi × zi ) .
i=1
00 The coefficients c p1, c p2, …, c pnc can be input by the user on the
COEFFICIENT PATH card.
00 All input cards of the EOSINT option must be input in the TABLES section after
the EOSINT card. All input cards required for the simulation of a PVT test must
be input after the corresponding DIFEXPTEST, CONVDPTEST, SWELLTEST,
or MULCONTEST card. Several PVT tests can be simulated.
00 The CPU memory requirements for the EOS interpolation option are determined
internally. Therefore, input on the DIM card is not required.
4.17.1 EOS Interpolation Option (EOSINT)
EOSINT (param1) (param2)...
Definitions:
param One or more of the following alpha labels may be

included:
NORESERVOIR Alpha label indicating that the EOS interpolation
option is not to be used for the phase equilibrium
calculations in reservoir gridblocks.
NOSEPARATOR Alpha label indicating that the EOS interpolation
calculations in separator batteries.
NONETWORK Alpha label indicating that the EOS interpolation
calculations in well tubing strings and surface pipeline
network system.
MDI Alpha label indicating that the multidimensional
interpolation based on the distance between two
composition vectors is to be used.
STOP Alpha label indicating that the simulation must be
stopped if current pressure or temperature in a grid
cell, well tubing string, or surface pipeline network
device is outside the pressure or temperature range of
the EOS interpolation tables.
4-366 Tables R5000.0.1

ANARES Alpha label indicating that analytical calculation of

compressibility factors is used in reservoir grid blocks.
Default uses interpolation function for the
compressibility factor calculation.
ANASEP Alpha label indicating that analytical calculation of
compressibility factors is used in separator batteries.
This is the default option.
ANANET Alpha label indicating that the analytical calculation of
compressibility factors is used in well tubing strings
and surface pipeline network system. Default uses
interpolation function for the compressibility factor
calculation.
NOANSP Alpha label indicating that interpolation function is
used in compressibility factors calculation in separator
batteries.
PRTTAB Alpha label indicating that the output of the EOS
interpolation table is requested. Interpolation
functions, saturation pressure, pressure entries, vapor
and liquid compressibility factors, and recovery factor
for each component will be output in a file (Fortran
Unit 77) for each region and temperature.
00 Example:
00 C
C The EOS interpolation option is to be used for the phase-equilibrium
C calculations in separator batteries and well tubing strings
C (surface facility system).
C
EOSINT NORESERVOIR
R5000.0.1 Tables 4-367

4.17.2 Temperature Entries of EOS Interpolation Tables (TEMPERATURE)
TEMPERATURE t1 t2 …
Definition:
t Temperature entry of the EOS interpolation tables, °F

(°C). Values must be increasing.
NOTE: The reservoir temperature TRES specified on the DWB card is applied as
the temperature entry of the EOS interpolation tables if the
TEMPERATURE card is not included.
00 Example
C
C Temperature entries of the EOS interpolation tables.
C
TEMPERATURE 100 150 180
4.17.3 Maximum Pressure Entry of EOS Interpolation Tables (PMAX)
PMAX pmax
Definition:
pmax Maximum pressure entry of the EOS interpolation

tables, psia (kPa).
NOTE: 12,000 psia is applied as the maximum pressure entry of the EOS
interpolation tables if the PMAX card is not included.
00 Example:
C
C Maximum pressure entry of the EOS interpolation tables.
C
PMAX 4600
4-368 Tables R5000.0.1

4.17.4 Minimum Pressure Entry of EOS Interpolation Tables (PMIN)
PMIN pmin
Definition:
pmin Minimum pressure entry of the EOS interpolation

tables, psia (kPa).
NOTE: The standard pressure PS specifed on the DWB card is applied as the
minimum pressure entry of the EOS interpolation tables if the PMIN card
is not included.
00 Example:
C
C Minimum pressure entry of the EOS interpolation tables.
C
PMIN 940
4.17.5 Composition Entries of EOS Interpolation Tables (CMP)
ALL
CMP (ipath)
iequil
1 1 1
psat1 z1 z2 … z nc
2 2 2
psat2 z1 z2 … z nc
.
.
.
nz nz nz
psatnz z1 z2 … z nc
Definitions:
ALL Alpha label indicating that the specified composition

entries are to be used for all EOS interpolation tables.
iequil Equilibrium region (EOS interpolation table) number.
ipath Compositional path number. Default is 1. This param-
eter is ignored if the MDI keyword is included on the
EOSINT card.
psat Initial guess of the saturation pressure for the specified
composition, psia (kPa).
R5000.0.1 Tables 4-369

j
zi Mole fraction of the i-th hydrocarbon component in
the j-th composition entry. The sum of zi, i=1, ..., nc
must be 1.
00 Example
C
C Composition entries of the EOS interpolation table.
C
CMP 1 1
C psat Z
2235.24 .4892781 .0303435 .0714230 .2044471 .1533799 .0511285
2163.28 .4783313 .0306918 .0728783 .2089891 .1568294 .0522801
2091.33 .4671521 .0310449 .0743667 .2136294 .1603513 .0534556
2019.37 .4557324 .0314028 .0758894 .2183714 .1639480 .0546560
1947.41 .4440639 .0317654 .0774476 .2232186 .1676224 .0558822
4.17.6 Coefficients of Interpolation Function (COEFFICIENTS)
COEFFICIENTS (PATH)
c1 c2 … cn
⎛d d2 … d n⎞
⎝ 1 ⎠
Definitions:
PATH Alpha label indicating that the coefficients of the path

interpolation function are input on this card.
c Coefficient of the (path) interpolation function.
Default is the molecular weight of the corresponding
hydrocarbon component. This parameter is ignored if
the MDI keyword is included on the EOSINT card.
d Coefficient of the interpolation function. This parame-

ter cannot be input with the PATH option. Also, this
parameter is ignored if the MDI keyword is included
in the EOSINT card.
4-370 Tables R5000.0.1

NOTE: When d-coefficients are input, the following extended interpolation

function is used:
n
∑ ci zi
F ( z ) = -----------------
i=1
n
-
∑ di zi
i 1
Otherwise, a linear interpolation function is used:
n
F(z) = ∑ ci zi
i=1
00 Example:
C
C Coefficients of the path interpolation function.
C
COEFFICIENT PATH
0. 10. 0. 0. 0. 0.
4.17.7 Maximum Number of Outer Iterations (ITNMAX)
ITNMAX itnmax
Definition:
itnmax Maximum number of outer iterations during the simu-

lation run. Recovery and compressibility factors are
not recalculated after outer iteration number itnmax.
Default is 6.
00 Example:
C
C Number of outer iterations in
C which recovery and compressibility factors are recalculated.
C
ITNMAX 4
R5000.0.1 Tables 4-371

4.17.8 Minimum Increment of the Interpolation Function (DELTA)
DELTA delta
00 Definition:
delta Minimum increment of the interpolation function. If

an absolute difference between values of the interpola-
tion function in two composition entries is smaller
than delta, one of these entries is ignored. Default
value is 1.e-6. This parameter is ignored if the MDI
keyword is included on the EOSINT card.
00 Example
C
DELTA 0.00001
4-372 Tables R5000.0.1

4.17.9 Oil and Gas Composition Output (OUTPUT)
ROILCM
RGASCM
OUTPUT (iequil isepnum istnum)
SOILCM
SGASCM
Definitions:
ROILCM Alpha label indicating that the output of oil composi-

tions is requested. Saturation pressure, oil composi-
tion, density, viscosity, compressibility factors will be
output in a file (Fortran Unit 73) for all combinations
of temperature, composition, and pressure entries of
the EOS interpolation table. The oil compositions will
be output in the format of the CMP card.
RGASCM Alpha label indicating that the output of gas composi-
tions is requested. Saturation pressure, gas composi-
tion, density, viscosity, compressibility factors will be
output in a file (Fortran Unit 74) for all combinations
of temperature, composition, and pressure entries of
the EOS interpolation table. The gas compositions will
SOILCM Alpha label indicating that the output of oil composi-
tions in some stage of a separator battery is requested.
Saturation pressure and oil composition will be output
in a file (Fortran Unit 75) for all composition entries of
the EOS interpolation table. The oil compositions will
SGASCM Alpha label indicating that the output of gas composi-
tions in some stage of a separator battery is requested.
Saturation pressure and gas composition will be output
in a file (Fortran Unit 76) for all composition entries of
the EOS interpolation table. The gas compositions will
iequil Equilibrium region number. Default is 1.
isepnum Separator battery number. Default is 1.
R5000.0.1 Tables 4-373

istnum Stage number of the separator battery. If the stage

number is zero and output of the separator oil compo-
sition is requested, the oil composition in the oil sales
line will be output. If the stage number is zero and out-
put of the separator gas composition is requested, the
gas composition in the gas sales line will be output.
00 Example:
C
C Output of oil compositions in the entries of the EOS interpolation
C table in Equilibrium Region 2.
C
OUTPUT ROILCM 2
C
C Output of oil compositions in the entries of the EOS interpolation
C table in oil sales line of Separator Battery 2.
C
OUTPUT SOILCM 1 2 0
4.17.10 Automatic Generation of Composition Entries of EOS Interpolation

Tables
4.17.10.1 Swelling PVT Test Simulation (SWELLTEST)
ALL
SWELLTEST (ipath)
iequil
OILCM x 1 x 2 … x nc
GASCM y 1 y 2 … y nc
(GASFRAC f 1 f 2 … f nf )
(NGASFR ngasfr)
(PSAT psat)
Definitions:
ALL Alpha label indicating that the calculated composi-

tions in different stages of the PVT test are to be
included in all EOS interpolation tables.
EOSINT card.
4-374 Tables R5000.0.1

OILCM Alpha label indicating that the oil composition is input

on this card.
xi Molar fraction of the i-th hydrocarbon component in
the oil. This sum of xi, i=1, ..., nc must be 1.
GASCM Alpha label indicating that the gas composition is
input on this card.
yi Molar fraction of the i-th hydrocarbon component in
the gas. This sum of yi, i=1, ..., nc must be 1.
GASFRAC Alpha label indicating that the gas fractions in differ-
ent stages of the PVT test are input on this card.
fi Gas fraction in the i-th stage of the PVT test.
NGASFR Alpha label indicating that the number of the stages in
the PVT test is input on this card.
ngasfr Number of stages in the PVT test. Gas fractions in
these stages are calculated by equally dividing the
interval from 0 to 1 in ngasfr+1 subintervals. Default
is 5.
PSAT Alpha label indicating that saturation pressure is input
on this card.
psat Initial approximation of the saturation pressure in the
first stage of the PVT test, psia (kPa).
NOTE: If GASFRAC and NGASFR data are both entered, the NGASFR data is
ignored.
00 Example:
C
C Swelling test simulation
C
SWELLTEST ALL 1
C Oil Composition
OILCM .50 .03 .07 .20 .15 .05
C Gas Composition
GASCM .77 .20 .03 0.0 .0 .0
C Number of the stages in the swelling test.
NGASFR 10
R5000.0.1 Tables 4-375

4.17.10.2 Differential Expansion PVT Test Simulation (DIFEXPTEST)
⎛ OIL ⎞
DIFEXPTEST
ALL ⎜ ⎟ (ipath)
iequil
⎜ GAS ⎟
⎝ BOTH ⎠
COMP z 1 z 2 … z nc
(PRINPS prinps)
(NPRNPS nprnps)
(PRES p 1 p 2 … p np
(NPRES npres)
(NGASFR ngasfr)
(PSAT psat)
(TEMP t 1 t 2 … t nt )
(WBOTAB itab)
Definitions:

OIL Alpha label indicating that the oil compositions in dif-
ferent stages of the PVT test are to be included in the
EOS interpolation table. The oil composition will be
used as the fluid composition in the next stage. This is
the default.
GAS Alpha label indicating that the gas compositions in dif-
EOS interpolation table. The gas composition will be
used as the fluid composition in the next stage.
BOTH Alpha label indicating that the oil and gas composi-
included in the EOS interpolation table. The oil com-
position will be used as the fluid composition in the
next stage. A swelling test between oil and gas in the
first stage of the differential expansion test is also sim-
ulated.
EOSINT card.
4-376 Tables R5000.0.1

COMP Alpha label indicating that the fluid composition in the

first stage of the PVT test is input on this card.
zi Molar fraction of the i-th hydrocarbon component in
the fluid. The sum of zi, i=1, ..., nc must be 1.
PRINPS Alpha label indicating that the pressure interval near
the calculated saturation pressure in the PVT test is
input on this card.
prinps Pressure interval near the saturation pressure in the
PVT test, psia (kPa). Default is 20.
NPRNPS Alpha label indicating that the number of stages in the
PVT test where the pressures in these stages are near
the calculated saturation pressure is input on this card.
The pressure interval from (saturation pressure minus
PRINPS) to the saturation pressure is equally divided
into nprnps stages.
nprnps Number of stages in the PVT test where the stage pres-
sure is near the saturation pressure. Default is 10.
PRES Alpha label indicating that the pressure values in dif-
ferent stages of the PVT test are input on this card.
pi Pressure in the i-th stage of the PVT test, psia (kPa). If
the pressure specified is larger than the saturation pres-
sure minus PRINPS, it will be ignored.
NPRES Alpha label indicating that the number of the stages in
npres Number of stages in the PVT test. From minimum
pressure pmin to the calculated saturation pressure
minus prinps, the pressure is divided equally into
npres-nprnps+1 stages. From saturation pressure
nprnps stages. Default is 5.
ent stages of the swelling PVT test are input on this
card. This card is used only if the keyword BOTH is
included on the DIFEXPTEST card.
fi Gas fraction in the i-th stage of the swelling PVT test.
the swelling PVT test is input on this card. This card is
used only if the keyword BOTH is included on the
DIFEXPTEST card.
R5000.0.1 Tables 4-377

ngasfr Number of stages in the swelling PVT test. Gas frac-

tions in these stages are calculated by equally dividing
the interval from 0 to 1 in ngasfr+1 subintervals.
Default is 5.
on this card.
TEMP Alpha label indicating that the temperature values in
the PVT test are input on this card.
t Temperature used in the PVT test. The differential
expansion test is repeated several times if the number
of the temperature values is larger than one. Default is
the reservoir termperature TRES specified on the
DWB card.
WBOTAB Alpha label indicating that, for each temperature t on
the TEMP card, the black-oil table generated from this
differential expansion test will be written to Fortran
Unit 77.
itab The black-oil table number being used for the first
temperature. The table number will increase consecu-
tively for each temperature.
NOTE: If PRES and NPRES data are both entered, the NPRES data is ignored. If
GASFRAC and NGASFR data are both entered, the NGASFR data is
ignored.
00 Example:
C
C Differential expansion test simulation
C
DIFEXPTEST 1 BOTH 1
C Number pressure entries
NPRES 20
C Fluid composition in the differential expansion test
COMP .50 .03 .07 .20 .15 .05
Number of gas fractions in the swelling test.
NGASFR 10
4.17.10.3 Constant Volume Depletion PVT Test Simulation
4-378 Tables R5000.0.1

(CONVDPTEST)
⎛ OIL ⎞
ALL ⎜ GAS ⎟
CONVDPTEST ⎜ ⎟ (ipath)
iequil ⎜ BOTH ⎟
⎝ TOTAL ⎠
COMP z 1 z 2 … z nc
(PRINPS prinps)
(NPRNPS nprnps)
(PRES p 1 p 2 … p np )
(NPRES npres)
(NGASFR ngasfr)
(PSAT psat)
Definitions:

OIL Alpha label indicating that the oil compositions in dif-
EOS interpolation table.
GAS Alpha label indicating that the gas compositions in dif-
EOS interpolation table.
BOTH Alpha label indicating that the oil and gas composi-
included in the EOS interpolation table. A swelling
test between oil and gas in the first stage of the con-
stant volume depletion test is also simulated.
TOTAL Alpha label indicating that the total compositions in
different stages of the PVT test are to be included in
the EOS interpolation tables. This is the default.
EOSINT card.
R5000.0.1 Tables 4-379

COMP Alpha label indicating that the fluid composition in the

first stage of the PVT test is input on this card.
zi Molar fraction of the i-th hydrocarbon component in
the fluid. The sum of zi, i=1, ..., nc must be 1.
PRINPS Alpha label indicating that the pressure interval near
the calculated saturation pressure in the PVT test is
input on this card.
prinps Pressure interval near the saturation pressure in the
PVT test, psia (kPa). Default is 20.
NPRNPS Alpha label indicating that the number of stages in the
PVT test where the pressures in these stages are near
the calculated saturation pressure is input on this card.
The pressure interval from (saturation pressure minus
PRINPS) to the saturation pressure is equally divided
into nprnps stages.
nprnps Number of stages in the PVT test where the stage pres-
sure is near the saturation pressure. Default is 10.
PRES Alpha label indicating that the pressure values in dif-
ferent stages of the PVT test are input on this card.
pi Pressure in the i-th stage of the PVT test, psia (kPa). If
the pressure specified is larger than the saturation pres-
sure minus PRINPS, it will be ignored.
NPRES Alpha label indicating that the number of the stages in
npres Number of stages in the PVT test. From minimum
pressure pmin to the calculated saturation pressure
npres-nprnps+1 stages. From saturation pressure
nprnps stages. Default is 5.
ent stages of the swelling PVT test are input on this
card. This card is used only if the keyword BOTH is
included on the CONVDPTEST card.
fi Gas fraction in the i-th stage of the swelling PVT test.
the swelling PVT test is input on this card. This card is
used only if the keyword BOTH is included on the
CONVDPTEST card.
4-380 Tables R5000.0.1

ngasfr Number of stages in the swelling PVT test. Gas frac-

tions in these stages are calculated by equally dividing
the interval from 0 to 1 in ngasfr+1 subintervals.
Default is 5.
on this card.
t Temperature used in the PVT test. The constant vol-
ume depletion test is repeated several times if the
number of the temperature values is larger than one.
Default is the reservoir termperature TRES specified
on the DWB card.
ignored.
00 Example:
00 C
C Constant volume depletion test simulation
C
CONVDPTEST 1 TOTAL 1
C Number pressure entries
NPRES 25
C Fluid compositon
COMP .50 .03 .07 .20 .15 .05
PRINPS 20.
NPRNPS 11
4.17.10.4 Multiple Contact PVT Test Simulation (MULCONTEST)
⎛ FORWARD ⎞
MULCONTEST
ALL ⎜ ⎟ (ipath)
iequil
⎜ BACKWARD ⎟
⎝ BOTH ⎠
OILCM x 1 x 2 … x nc
GASCM y 1 y 2 … y nc
NFLASH nflash
R5000.0.1 Tables 4-381

(PRES p 1 p 2 … p np )
(NPRES npres)
(NGASFR ngasfr)
(PSAT psat)
Definitions:

FORWARD Alpha label indicating that the simulation of a forward
multiple contact PVT test is requested.
BACKWARD Alpha label indicating that the simulation of a back-
ward multiple contact PVT test is requested.
BOTH Alpha label indicating that the simulation of forward
and backward multiple contact PVT tests is requested.
This is the default.
ipath Path number. Default is 1. This parameter is ignored if
the MDI keyword is included on the EOSINT card.
OILCM Alpha label indicating that the oil composition is input
on this card.
xi Molar fraction of the i-th hydrocarbon component in
the oil. The sum of xi, i=1, ..., nc must be 1.
GASCM Alpha label indicating that the composition of injected
gas is input on this card.
yi Molar fraction of the i-th hydrocarbon component in
the injected gas. The sum of yi, i=1, ..., nc must be 1.
NFLASH Alpha label indicating that the number of the stages in
nflash Number of stages in the PVT test.
PRES Alpha label indicating that the pressure values in the
PVT test are input on this card.
4-382 Tables R5000.0.1

p Pressure in the PVT test, psia (kPa). The simulation of

the multiple contact test is repeated several times if the
number of the pressure values on this card is larger
than one.
NPRES Alpha label indicating that the number of the pressure
values in the PVT test is input on this card. The simu-
lation of the multiple contact test is repeated several
times if the number of the pressure values on this card
is larger than one.
npres Number of pressure values in the PVT test. The pres-
sure values are calculated by equally dividing the
interval from minimum pressure pmin to calculated
saturated pressure in npres+1 subintervals. Default is
5.
GASFRAC Alpha label indicating that the gas fractions in the
PVT test are input on this card.
f Gas fraction in the PVT test. The simulation of the
multiple contact test is repeated several times if the
number of the gas fractions on this card is larger than
one.
NGASFR Alpha label indicating that the number of the gas frac-
tions in the PVT test is input on this card. The simula-
tion of the multiple contact test is repeated several
times if the number of the gas fractions on this card is
larger than one.
ngasfr Number of the gas fractions in the PVT test. Gas frac-
tions are calculated by equally dividing the interval
from 0 to 1 in ngasfr+1 subintervals. Default is 5.
on this card.
t Temperature used in the PVT test. The multiple con-
tact test is repeated several times if the number of the
temperature values is larger than one. Default is the
reservoir temperature TRES specified on the DWB
card.
R5000.0.1 Tables 4-383

ignored.
00 Example
C
C Multiple contact test simulation.
C
MULCON ALL BACKWARD 1
C Oil Composition
OILCM .50 .03 .07 .20 .15 .05
C Injected Gas Composition
GASCM .77 .20 .03 0.0 .0 .0
C Number of the stages in the PVT test
NFLASH 10
C Pressure in the PVT test
PRES 2000
C Gas fraction in the PVT test
GASFRAC 0.525
4.18 Fracture Modeling (VIP-THERM)

Formation breakdown due to steam injection is known to occur in some
unconsolidated media and tarsands. This breakdown, or fracturing, will occur in
the region of the reservoir in which the stress in the formation exceeds the fracture
stress, which is a function of pressure, temperature, and formation composition.
Since coupling of a rigorous three- dimensional formation stress model and the
simulator conservation equations is not currently practical, simplified methods
have been devised to model the formation breakdown phenomena.
Two methods are currently available in VIP-THERM for predicting the effect on
permeability (or flow transmissibility) in the fractured region. The first method is
the empirical model of Beattie, Boberg, and McNab (Reference 32). The second
method is more rigorous and involves coupling of VIP-THERM to SIMTECHs’
fracture mechanics model TARFRAC through the fracture interface TFRACINT
(Reference 39). TARFRAC must be independently licensed by the user from
SIMTECH Consulting Services Ltd. in order to use this method, in which
TARFRAC is executed (stand-alone) to generate a dynamic fracture growth
description. This description is then read in as data to VIP-THERM through the
fracture interface TFRACINT which modifies flow transmissibilities in the
fractured region and by default computes pseudo relative permeabilities (which
can be turned off) of oil, gas, and water for gridblocks in the fractured region.
Pseudo relative permeabilities are not available in the first method.
4-384 Tables R5000.0.1

4.18.1 Porosity Deformation Model

In both methods, the porosity deformation model of Beattie, Boberg, and McNab
(Reference 32) is used to model the effect of fracturing on porosity. This is an
empirical model consistent with the behavior of unconsolidated sands and
tarsands for the effect on porosity of fracturing and subsequent recompaction.
Porosity behavior is shown in Figure 4-10.
Ce
φmax
FR = B/A
Ce 2
3
Ce
Cr
A 4 Cd
B Ce
φo 1
R I
Pbase Pr Pd
Figure 4-10: Porosity Deformation Model
Point R refers to the reference pressure at which porosity φο (POR array) is

specified. Point I refers to an arbitrary initial condition. All porosity-pressure
relationships shown in Figure 4-10 are described by
φ = φref ⋅ EXP ( C ⋅ ( P – Pref ) )
As pressure increases from point I, porosity follows Equation with φref = φo, C =
Ce, and Pref = Pbase until pressure reaches the dilation, or fracture, pressure Pd.
Between point I and point l, the curve is reversible. If pressure continues to
increase above point l, then porosity follows the irreversible dilation curve until
either pressure declines or the specified maximum value of porosity is reached. If
pressure continues to increase once the maximum porosity is reached, then
compressibility reverts to the original elastic value Ce and the porosity behavior is
reversible. The dilation curve is fixed and is given by Equation with φref = φo ⋅
EXP(Ce ⋅ (Pd - Pbase)), C = Cd, and Pref = Pd. If pressure begins to decrease from
a point on the dilation curve, such as point 2, porosity follows Equation
reversibly with φref = φ2, C = Ce, and Pref = P2. As pressure decreases below the
recompaction pressure Pr, recompaction occurs and porosity follows Equation
irreversibly with φref = φ3, C = Cr, and Pref = Pr . Cr is calculated from a specified
parameter FR, Þwhich is defined as the fraction of total dilation that is not
recovered on recompaction to P = O and which is shown in Figure 4-10 as the
ratio of B to A. As pressure increases from a point on the recompaction curve
(point 4), porosity follows Equation reversibly until either the dilation curve or
the recompaction curve defined by points 3 and 4 is intersected. Once
R5000.0.1 Tables 4-385

recompaction occurs, the recompaction curve is fixed until dilation occurs

subsequently. If pressure decreases to Pr immediately following dilation, a new
recompaction curve is computed from FR and the new value of A.
The default value of Pbase shown in Figure 4-10 is PINIT for equilibrium region 1
in the EQUIL table (Section 4.2). If PINIT(1) is greater than Pd, then Pbase must
be reset to some value less than Pd as shown below.
PORDEF PD PR CRD FR PORMAX (PBASE)

pd pr crd fr pormax (pbase)
Definitions:
pd Dilation (fracture) pressure, psia (kPa).
pr Recompaction pressure, psia (kPa).
crd Dilatant rock compressibility, psia-1 (kPa-1).
fr Fraction of total dilation not recovered on recompaction

to P = O.
pormax Maximum allowable value of porosity.
pbase Reference pressure for reference porosity (POR array),

psia (kPa). Optional, but required if PINIT (1) > Pd.
NOTE: 1. PD, PR, CRD, and FR may optionally be specified as gridblock array
data described in Section 5.48. Elastic rock compressibility Ce is
taken as the CR value specified either in the constant data (Section
2.2.4.2) or the array data (Section 5.23).
2. The porosity deformation model is not required in conjunction with

SIMTECH’s fracture model, but no other method for predicting the
effect of fracturing on porosity is available.
4.18.2 Permeability Models
4.18.2.1 Method of Beattie, Boberg, and McNab (Reference 32)
In this method, permeability behavior is modeled as a function of porosity and

user-specified permeability multipliers as:
⎛ KMUL ⋅ ( φ – φ 0 )⎞
k = k 0 ⋅ EXP ⎜ -----------------------------------------⎟
⎝ ( 1 – φ0 ) ⎠
4-386 Tables R5000.0.1

Values of KMUL are specified as array data (Section 5.48) for each flow direction
(including diagonal directions for NINEPT option) in such a manner as to define
the fracture plane.
4.18.2.2 SIMTECH Method
Documentation of the SIMTECH method will be provided at the users’ request

after verification of TARFRAC licensing from SIMTECH.
4.19 Rock Heat Capacity Tables (VIP-THERM)

Rock heat capacity may be treated as a linear function of temperature as described
in Section 2.2.4.2 and Section 5.45 or may be entered as a tabular function of
temperature as described here. In either case, the input heat capacity values
correspond to the solid (non-porous) rock matrix and are internally modified by a
factor of (1- initial porosity) to account for porosity.
Rock heat capacity table numbers are assigned to gridblocks with the ICPRTB
array which is described in Section 5.49.
CPRTAB icprtb
T CPR
t1 cpr1
t2 cpr2
. .
. .
. .
Definitions:
CPRTAB Alpha label indicating that the data which follow are rock
heat capacity tables.
icprtb Rock heat capacity table number.
T, CPR Column headers for temperature and heat capacity data.
ti Temperature, °F (°C).
cpri Rock heat capacity, Btu/FT3 °F (kJ/M3°C).
NOTE: 1. Temperature values in the tables must be input in increasing order.
2. All CPRTAB tables must appear together.
4.20 Chemical Reactions (REACTION Card) (VIP-THERM
R5000.0.1 Tables 4-387

Compositional) (Reference 42)

00 An unlimited number of irreversible chemical reactions may be specified
involving any number of components specified on the COMPONENTS card.
Water (an implicitly defined component) may also be specified as a reactant or
product using the label H2O. The reaction rate expression is of the same form of
that given in the reference, but the definition of terms are generalized so that it
may apply to homogeneous reactions (those involving reactants in a single fluid
phase):
00 nreactants
Rate = V A e(-Ea / (R T)) Π (Ci)ni
i=1
00 where R is the gas constant, T is temperature, Ea is the activation energy, A is the

rate constant, Ci is the concentration of reactant i,and ni is the reaction order in
component i. The volume term V is user-defined as total system volume (fluid
plus rock, as in the reference), fluid volume, or phase volume. The reactant molar
concentrations Ci are defined as the number of moles of component i in a
specified phase divided by the specified volume (total, fluid, or phase). Reactant
concentrations and volume terms are given by:
Ci = φ Sm ρm xim ; V = Vt (total volume option)
Ci = Sm ρm xim ; V = Vt φ (fluid volume option)
Ci = ρm xim ; V = Vt φ Sm (phase volume option)
00 where φ is porosity, Sm and ρm are the saturation and molar density of reactant i's
phase, and xim is the mole fraction of component i in its reacting phase. Units of
the various model parameters are discussed at the end of this section.
00 Fully implicit treatment of all variables would lead to application of the

instantaneous reaction rate at the new time level to the entire timestep. As in the
reference, temperature T and phase saturations Sm are defined as the average of
the old and new time level values in order to better approximate the average
reaction rate over the timestep. If a phase saturation is zero at the old time level or
for any iterate value, then Sm is re-defined at the new time level. All other
variables (densities and mole fractions) are defined at the new time level.
00 The phase volume option should be used for, and is allowed only for,
homogeneous reactions. The fluid volume option is recommended for
heterogeneous reactions. The total volume option is not recommended except to
match results from other simulators which may use this representation. This
option results in reactant concentrations which depend on porosity, which is
intuitively incorrect. Adding rock volume to a system while maintaining fluid
volume and saturations constant should not change the reaction rate. This is not
true in the total volume option except for first-order reactions (reaction order is
equal to the sum of reactant orders).
00 The reaction model is fairly rigorous for homogeneous reactions, but is a simple
4-388 Tables R5000.0.1

approximation to the actual process for heterogeneous reactions, which involves

complex factors such as saturation distributions within gridblocks, pore structure,
interfacial areas, and diffusion rates. The use of fluid volume average
concentrations approximates some of these effects, in that increasing saturations
of non-reacting phases decreases the effective reactant concentrations and the rate
of reaction for heterogeneous reactions of order greater than one.
00 The input data allow specification of model parameter units for ease of use. The
units of rate are moles of first reactant consumed per unit time (MUNIT/TUNIT),
concentrations are in moles of reactant per unit volume (MUNIT/VUNIT), molar
energies (activation energy and heat of reaction, units may be independently
specified) are in energy per mole (EUNIT).
R5000.0.1 Tables 4-389

00 Default units are:
English Metric Lab
MUNIT lb moles kg moles g moles
TUNIT days days hours
VUNIT cubic ft cubic m liters
EUNIT Btu/lb mole j/g mole j/g mole
00 Any of the above units given for any quantity may be specified for each reaction.
VUNIT may be additionally specified as barrels or cubic centimeters. EUNIT
may be additionally specified as calories/g mole. The units of the rate constant A
are (VUNIT / MUNIT)n-1/ TUNIT where n is the order of reaction.
REACTION nr (card 1)
si cmpi PLUS sj cmpj PLUS ... = sk cmpk PLUS sl cmpl PLUS ...
(card 2)
ORDER ni nj ... (card 3)
PHASE W W ... (card 4)
O O ...
G G ...
VOLUME PHASE (vunit) (card 5)
FLUID
TOTAL
A a (card 6)
EACT eact (eunit) (card 7)
HR hr (eunit) (card 8)
( MOLES munit ) (card 9)
( TIME tunit ) (card 10)
4-390 Tables R5000.0.1

00 Definitions:
nr Reaction number. Default maximum is 5, which may be

increased by specification of the NRXMAX parameter
on the DIM card.
si Stoichiometric coefficient for component cmpi.
cmpi Either a component name or number, or the label

H2O for water.
PLUS Alpha label indicating multiple reactants or products.
ORDER Alpha label indicating that the following values on this

line are the reaction orders in each reactant.
ni Reaction order in reacting component i.
PHASE Alpha label indicating that the following alpha

labels on this line indicate the fluid phase containing each
reactant as:
W water,
O oil, or
G gas.
VOLUME Alpha label indicating that the alpha label which follows
defines the volume basis for concentrations and the
volume term in the reaction rate expression as:
PHASE Phase volume, valid only for homogeneous reactions (the

reactants are contained within a single phase),
FLUID Total fluid volume, or
TOTAL Total system volume (fluid plus rock).
vunit One of the following alpha labels, used to change the

default units of volume:
FT3 cubic feet,
BBL barrels,
M3 cubic meters,
L liters, or
CC cubic centimeters.
A Alpha label indicating that the following value on this

line is the reaction rate constant.
R5000.0.1 Tables 4-391

a Reaction rate constant. Units are

(VUNIT/MUNIT)n-1 / TUNIT where n is the overall
order of reaction.
EACT Alpha label indicating the following value on this line is

the activation energy.
eact Activation energy, Btu/lb mole (kj/kg mole).
eunit One of the following alpha labels, used to change the

default units for activation energy and/or heat of reaction:
BLBM Btu/lb mole,
JGM joules/g mole, or
CGM cal/g mole.
HR Alpha label indicating that the following value on this

line is the heat of reaction.
hr Value for the heat of reaction, Btu/lbmole

(j/gmole).
MOLES Alpha label indicating that the following alpha label

specifies the units to be used for moles.
munit One of the following alpha labels, used to change the

default units of moles:
LBM lb moles,
KGM kg moles, or
GM g moles.
TIME Alpha label indicating that the following alpha label

specifies the units to be used for time.
tunit One of the following alpha labels, used to change the

default units of time:
DAYS days, or
HRS hours.
NOTE: 1. Reaction numbers must be greater than zero and less than or equal to
the total number of reactions specified.
2. For multiple reactions, reaction data must be input in order of
4-392 Tables R5000.0.1

increasing reaction number.
3. O or G may be specified for the defined components (those on

the COMPONENTS card). G may not be specified for the non-
volatile components.
4. Stoichiometric coefficients must satisfy mass balance (within a

small tolerance), i.e., si Mi + sj Mj + ... = sk Mk + sl Ml + ...,
where M is the component molecular weight.
5. O or G may be specified for the defined components (those on

the COMPONENTS card). G may not be specified for the non-
volatile components.
R5000.0.1 Tables 4-393

4-394 Tables R5000.0.1

Chapter
5
00000 Grid Data Arrays
5.1 Array Data

The grid data must immediately follow the table data. 00
Arrays described in this section are input using the array input options described
in Section 1.5.2, and can be modified using the array modification cards described
in Sections 1.5.4 and 6.1. 00
Several different combinations of array data can be used to describe reservoir

properties. However, there are consistency requirements for the data described in
Section 5.1 through Section 5.40. The valid combinations are summarized below.
The user must first choose the appropriate combination of arrays from the
bracketed options. The parentheses ( ) indicate optional data, while a choice must
be made among the arrays in each vertically aligned group. These are schematics
only; these are not data. 00
In VIP-THERM, only combinations 1-4 are valid, and in each of those the
following arrays are additionally required: CPR0, DTX0 (or DTR0), DTY0 (or
KTTH0) and KTZ0. 00
R ⎛ DZNET
⎞ KR KTHETA KZ DEPTH
1) DTHETA DZ ⎜ ⎟ POR
DR ⎝ NETGRS ⎠ KRF KTF KZF MDEPTH
⎛ DZNET
⎞ KX KYF KZ DEPTH
2) DX DY DZ ⎜ ⎟ POR
⎝ NETGRS ⎠ KXF KYF KZF MDEPTH
3) DXB DYB DZB (DZBNET) KX KY KZ POR DEPTH

KXF KYF KZF MDEPTH
4) DZCORN
XCORN YCORN ZCORN DZBCOR ( ZCORNE ) ( ZCORNW ) ( ZCORSW ) ( NETGRS ) KX KY KZ POR
DZVCOR
5) DZCORN
XCORN YCORN ZCORN DZBCOR ( ZCORNE ) ( ZCORNW ) ( ZCORSW ) ( NETGRS ) TX TY TZ PV
DZVCOR
R5000.0.1 Grid Data Arrays 5-395

6) TX TY TZ (TXYL TXYR) PV MDEPTH

TR TTHETA DEPTH
Certain arrays must be read before other arrays. For example, the thickness array
must precede the depth array. Order restrictions are specified in the array
description. 00
Array data are defined at gridblock centers unless otherwise specified in the array
description. 00
When using the DUAL option (Section 2.2.13.1) these arrays represent the matrix
properties. Fracture properties are input using the following sets of keywords: 00
TEX ⎛ ⎞
1) R ... KRFEFF KTFEFF KZFEFF PORF ⎜ DEPF ⎟
SIGMA
DR ⎝ MDEPF ⎠
LX LY LZ
TEX ⎛ ⎞
2) DX ... SIGMA KRFEFF KTFEFF KZFEFF PORF ⎜ DEPF ⎟
⎝ MDEPF ⎠
LX LY LZ
TEX ⎛ ⎞
3) DXB ... SIGMA KRFEFF KTFEFF KZFEFF PORF ⎜ DEPF ⎟
⎝ MDEPF ⎠
LX LY LZ
TEX ⎛ ⎞
4) XCORN ... POR SIGMA KRFEFF KTFEFF KZFEFF PORF ⎜ DEPF ⎟
⎝ MDEPF ⎠
LX LY LZ
5) [ XCORN ... PV TEX TXF TYF TZF PVF (MDEPF) ]
TX ... TEX TXF TYF TZF (TXYLF TXYRF) PVF ⎛ DEPF ⎞

6) ⎜ ⎟
TR TRF TTHETF ⎝ MDEPF ⎠
5-396 Grid Data Arrays R5000.0.1

5.2 Start of Array Data (ARRAYS)
ARRAYS
The general format of array data is: 00
aname option (amin amax nl)

values
Definitions: 00
aname Array name as specified in this section.
amin Minimum value for data values (optional, unless amax

or nl specified).
amax Maximum value for data values (optional, unless amin

or nl specified).
nl Number of areal planes for which data will be

specified - used only with the LNXVAR, LNYVAR,
LNZVAR and LNVAL input options.
values Data values are entered as necessary for the array

option being used.
Certain arrays must be read before other arrays. For example, the thickness array
must precede the depth array. Order restrictions are specified in the individual
array writeups. 00
Array data are defined at gridblock centers unless otherwise specified in the array
description. 00
The array data must be preceded by the alpha label ARRAYS. 00
Examples: 00
ARRAYS
C
C GRIDBLOCK DIMENSIONS
C
DX CON
66.67007
C
DY CON

66.67007
C
DZ ZVAR
7.2 4.4 15.8
C
C GRIDBLOCK TOPS
C 00
5.3 Grid Definition
5.3.1 X (R) Non-Corner Point Grid Dimension (DX, DXB, DR, R)
array option (amin amax nl)

Enter data values as required.
These grid dimensions are usually input using the XVAR (RVAR) option. 00
Definitions: 00
Rectangular Grid: 00
DX, ft (m) Incremental length of each gridblock in the x direction,

measured along the horizontal.
DXB, ft (m) Incremental length of each gridblock in the x direction,

measured along the bedding plane.
Radial Grid: 00
DR, ft (m) Radial increment of each gridblock, measured along

the horizontal.
R, ft (m) Radius to the outer edge of each gridblock, measured

along the horizontal from the origin.
Example: 00
ARRAYS
C
DX XVAR
100 150 200 00

5.3.2 X Direction Corner Point Location (XCORN)
XCORN option (amin amax nl)

Definition: 00
XCORN, ft(m) X direction coordinate of each corner point in the grid.

(NX+1) * (NY+1) * (NZ+1) values are required.
Values must not decrease with increasing I index; i.e.,
XCORN(I,J,K) ≤ XCORN(I+1, J,K).
Example: 00
ARRAYS
XCORN VALUE
C FIRST LAYER
0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 8000 9000 10000
0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 8000 9000 10000
0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 8000 9000 10000
0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 8000 9000 10000
0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 8000 9000 10000
0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 8000 9000 10000
0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 8000 9000 10000
0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 8000 9000 10000
0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 8000 9000 10000
0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 8000 9000 10000
C SECOND LAYER
0.00 956.52 1913.04 2869.57 3826.09 4782.61 5739.13 6695.65 7652.17
8608.70 9565.2
0.00 956.52 1913.04 2869.57 3826.09 4782.61 5739.13 6695.65 7652.17
8608.70 9565.22
0.00 956.52 1913.04 2869.57 3826.09 4782.61 5739.13 6695.65 7652.17
8608.70 9565.22
0.00 956.52 1913.04 2869.57 3826.09 4782.61 5739.13 6695.65 7652.17
8608.70 9565.22
0.00 956.52 1913.04 2869.57 3826.09 4782.61 5739.13 6695.65 7652.17
8608.70 9565.22
0.00 956.52 1913.04 2869.57 3826.09 4782.61 5739.13 6695.65 7652.17
8608.70 9565.22
0.00 956.52 1913.04 2869.57 3826.09 4782.61 5739.13 6695.65 7652.17
8608.70 9565.22
0.00 956.52 1913.04 2869.57 3826.09 4782.61 5739.13 6695.65 7652.17
8608.70 9565.22
0.00 956.52 1913.04 2869.57 3826.09 4782.61 5739.13 6695.65 7652.17
8608.70 9565.22
0.00 956.52 1913.04 2869.57 3826.09 4782.61 5739.13 6695.65 7652.17
8608.70 9565.22

C THIRD LAYER
0.00 886.96 1773.91 2660.87 3547.83 4434.78 5321.74 6208.70 7095.65
7982.61 8869.57
0.00 886.96 1773.91 2660.87 3547.83 4434.78 5321.74 6208.70 7095.65
7982.61 8869.57
0.00 886.96 1773.91 2660.87 3547.83 4434.78 5321.74 6208.70 7095.65
7982.61 8869.57
0.00 886.96 1773.91 2660.87 3547.83 4434.78 5321.74 6208.70 7095.65
7982.61 8869.57
0.00 886.96 1773.91 2660.87 3547.83 4434.78 5321.74 6208.70 7095.65
7982.61 8869.57
0.00 886.96 1773.91 2660.87 3547.83 4434.78 5321.74 6208.70 7095.65
7982.61 8869.57 00
0.00 886.96 1773.91 2660.87 3547.83 4434.78 5321.74 6208.70 7095.65

7982.61 8869.57
0.00 886.96 1773.91 2660.87 3547.83 4434.78 5321.74 6208.70 7095.65
7982.61 8869.57
0.00 886.96 1773.91 2660.87 3547.83 4434.78 5321.74 6208.70 7095.65
7982.61 8869.57
0.00 886.96 1773.91 2660.87 3547.83 4434.78 5321.74 6208.70 7095.65
7982.61 8869.57
C FOURTH LAYER
0 800 1600 2400 3200 4000 4800 5600 6400 7200 8000
0 800 1600 2400 3200 4000 4800 5600 6400 7200 8000
0 800 1600 2400 3200 4000 4800 5600 6400 7200 8000
0 800 1600 2400 3200 4000 4800 5600 6400 7200 8000
0 800 1600 2400 3200 4000 4800 5600 6400 7200 8000
0 800 1600 2400 3200 4000 4800 5600 6400 7200 8000
0 800 1600 2400 3200 4000 4800 5600 6400 7200 8000
0 800 1600 2400 3200 4000 4800 5600 6400 7200 8000
0 800 1600 2400 3200 4000 4800 5600 6400 7200 8000
0 800 1600 2400 3200 4000 4800 5600 6400 7200 8000 00

5.3.3 Y (THETA) Non-Corner Point Grid Dimension (DY, DYB, DTHETA)

These grid dimensions are usually input using the YVAR (THVAR) option. 00
Definitions: 00
Rectangular Grid: 00
DY, ft (m) Incremental length of each gridblock in the y direction,

measured along the horizontal.
DYB, ft (m) Incremental length of each gridblock in the y direction,

measured along the bedding plane.
Radial Grid: 00
DTHETA, degrees Incremental angle spanned by each gridblock,

measured in a horizontal plane.
5.3.4 Y Direction Corner Point Location (YCORN)
YCORN option (amin amax nl)

Definition: 00
YCORN, ft(m) Y direction coordinate of each corner point in the grid.

(NX+1) * (NY+1) * (NZ+1) values are required.
Values must not increase with increasing J index; i.e.,
YCORN (I,J,K) ≥ YCORN (I,J+1,K).
Example: 00
ARRAYS
YCORN VALUE
C FIRST LAYER
10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000
8000 8000 8000 8000 8000 8000 8000 8000 8000 8000 8000
7000 7000 7000 7000 7000 7000 7000 7000 7000 7000 7000
6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000
5000 5000 5000 5000 5000 5000 5000 5000 5000 5000 5000
4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000
3000 3000 3000 3000 3000 3000 3000 3000 3000 3000 3000
2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000

00000000000
C SECOND LAYER
8021.74 8021.74 8021.74 8021.74 8021.74 8021.74 8021.74 8021.74 8021.74
8021.74 8021.74
7130.43 7130.43 7130.43 7130.43 7130.43 7130.43 7130.43 7130.43 7130.43
7130.43 7130.43
6239.13 6239.13 6239.13 6239.13 6239.13 6239.13 6239.13 6239.13 6239.13
6239.13 6239.13
5347.83 5347.83 5347.83 5347.83 5347.83 5347.83 5347.83 5347.83 5347.83
5347.83 5347.83
4456.52 4456.52 4456.52 4456.52 4456.52 4456.52 4456.52 4456.52 4456.52
4456.52 4456.52
3565.22 3565.22 3565.22 3565.22 3565.22 3565.22 3565.22 3565.22 3565.22
3565.22 3565.22
2673.91 2673.91 2673.91 2673.91 2673.91 2673.91 2673.91 2673.91 2673.91
2673.91 2673.91
1782.61 1782.61 1782.61 1782.61 1782.61 1782.61 1782.61 1782.61 1782.61
1782.61 1782.61
891.30 891.30 891.30 891.30 891.30 891.30 891.30 891.30 891.30 891.30
891.30 891.30
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
0 0
C THIRD LAYER
6456.52 6456.52 6456.52 6456.52 6456.52 6456.52 6456.52 6456.52 6456.52
6456.52 6456.52
5739.13 5739.13 5739.13 5739.13 5739.13 5739.13 5739.13 5739.13 5739.13
5739.13 5739.13
5021.74 5021.74 5021.74 5021.74 5021.74 5021.74 5021.74 5021.74 5021.74
5021.74 5021.74 00
4304.35 4304.35 4304.35 4304.35 4304.35 4304.35 4304.35 4304.35 4304.35

4304.35 4304.35
3586.96 3586.96 3586.96 3586.96 3586.96 3586.96 3586.96 3586.96 3586.96
3586.96 3586.96
2869.57 2869.57 2869.57 2869.57 2869.57 2869.57 2869.57 2869.57 2869.572
869.57 2869.57
2152.17 2152.17 2152.17 2152.17 2152.17 2152.17 2152.17 2152.17 2152.17
2152.17 2152.17
1434.78 1434.78 1434.78 1434.78 1434.78 1434.78 1434.78 1434.78 1434.78
1434.78 1434.78
717.39 717.39 717.39 717.39 717.39 717.39 717.39 717.39 717.39 717.39
717.39 717.39
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
0.00 0.00
C FOURTH LAYER
4500 4500 4500 4500 4500 4500 4500 4500 4500 4500 4500
4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000
3500 3500 3500 3500 3500 3500 3500 3500 3500 3500 3500

3000 3000 3000 3000 3000 3000 3000 3000 3000 3000 3000
2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500
2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000
1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500
1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00
5.4 Gross Thickness - Z grid dimension
5.4.1 Gross Vertical Thickness, Non-Corner Point Grid (DZ)
DZ option (amin amax nl)

Gross thickness usually is input using the ZVAR or VALUE option. It must
precede the DEPTH or MDEPTH array (non-corner-point grids). 00
Definition: 00
DZ, ft (m) Gross vertical thickness of each gridblock. Net

thickness is assumed equal to gross thickness if no
DZNET or NETGRS array is read.
5.4.2 Gross Stratum Thickness, Non-Corner Point Grid (DZB)
DZB option (amin amax nl)

Gross thickness usually is input using the ZVAR or VALUE option. It must
precede the DEPTH or MDEPTH array (non-corner-point grids). 00
Definition: 00
DZB, ft (m) Gross stratum thickness of each gridblock, measured

perpendicular to the bedding plane. Net stratum
thickness is assumed equal to gross thickness if no
DZBNET array is read.
Example: 00
ARRAYS
DZB ZVAR
1.0 2.0 3.0 00

5.4.3 Corner Point Gross Vertical Thickness (DZCORN)
DZCORN option (amin amax nl)

Definition: 00
DZCORN, ft (m) Gross vertical thickness below each corner point,

measured as the depth difference between each corner
point and the corresponding corner point in the next
layer below it. Net thickness is assumed equal to gross
thickness if no NETGRS array is read.
This gross thickness array must precede the ZCORN array. This array requires
(NX+1) * (NY+1) * NZ values and is used only to process the LAYER or DIP
options for the ZCORN array. 00
5.4.4 Corner Point Gross Stratum Thickness (DZBCOR)
DZBCOR option (amin amax nl)

Definition: 00
DZBCOR, ft (m) Gross stratum thickness below each corner point,

measured perpendicular to the bedding plane. When
this array is used, the XCORN and YCORN values are
adjusted so that the line from a corner point in one
layer to the corresponding corner point in the next
layer down is perpendicular to the bedding plane. Net
stratum thickness is assumed equal to gross thickness
if no NETGRS array is read.
This gross thickness array is usually input using the VALUE option. It must
precede the ZCORN array. This array requires (NX+1) * (NY+1) * NZ values and
is used only to process the LAYER or DIP options for the ZCORN array. 00

5.4.5 Depth Corner Point Gross Stratum Thickness (DZVCOR)
DZVCOR option (amin amax nl)

Definition: 00
DZVCOR, ft (m) Gross stratum thickness below each corner point,

measured as the depth difference between a corner
point in one layer and the corresponding corner point
in the next layer down. This data differs from the use
of the DZCORN array in that the XCORN and
YCORN values are adjusted so that the line from a
corner point in one layer to the corresponding corner
point in the next layer down is perpendicular to the
bedding plane. Net stratum thickness is assumed equal
to gross thickness if no NETGRS array is read.
This gross thickness array is usually input using the VALUE option. It must
precede the ZCORN array. This array requires (NX+1) * (NY+1) * NZ values and
is used only to process the LAYER or DIP options for the ZCORN array. 00
5.5 Net Thickness - Z Grid Dimension
5.5.1 Net Vertical Thickness, Non-Corner Point Grid (DZNET)
DZNET option (amin amax nl)

Net thickness usually is input using the ZVAR or VALUE option. The net pay is
assumed to be evenly distributed across the entire gross interval. If both gross and
net thicknesses are input, gross thickness is used only in the calculations of depth
and vertical transmissibility; net thickness is used to determine pore volume and
areal transmissibility. 00
Definition: 00
DZNET, ft (m) Net vertical thickness of each gridblock. Used only

when gross vertical thickness is specified with the DZ
array. If net and gross thickness are equal, use the DZ
array.

5.5.2 Net Stratum Thickness, Non-Corner Point Grid (DZBNET)
DZBNET option (amin amax nl)

Net thickness usually is input using the ZVAR or VALUE option. The net pay is
assumed to be evenly distributed across the entire gross interval. If both gross and
net thicknesses are input, gross thickness is used only in the calculations of depth
and vertical transmissibility; net thickness is used to determine pore volume and
areal transmissibility. 00
Definition: 00
DZBNET, ft (m) Net stratum thickness of each gridblock, measured

perpendicular to the bedding plane. Used only when
gross stratum thickness is specified with the DZB
array. If net and gross thickness are equal, use the DZB
array.
5.5.3 Ratio Net Vertical Thickness to Gross Thickness (NETGRS)
NETGRS option (amin amax nl)

Definition: 00
NETGRS Ratio of net vertical thickness to gross thickness of

each gridblock. Default is 1.
Net/Gross ratio usually is input using the ZVAR or VALUE option. Net/Gross
ratio is used to calculate net from gross thickness. The net pay is assumed to be
evenly distributed across the entire gross interval. Gross thickness is used in the
calculations of depth and vertical transmissibility; net thickness is used to
determine pore volume and areal transmissibility. 00
Can be used with both non-corner point and corner-point grids. 00
5.5.4 Fracture Block Net to Gross Vertical Thickness Ratio (NETGF)
NETGF option (amin amax nl)


Definition: 00
NETGF Ratio of net vertical thickness to gross thickness of

each fracture gridblock. Default is NETGRS, (the
matrix values).
Net/Gross ratio usually is input using the ZVAR or VALUE option. Net/Gross
ratio is used to calculate net from gross thickness. The net pay is assumed to be
evenly distributed across the entire gross interval. Gross thickness is used in the
calculations of depth and vertical transmissibility; net thickness is used to
determine pore volume and areal transmissibility. 00
Can be used with both non-corner point and corner-point grids. 00

5.6 Depth - Non-Corner Point Grid
5.6.1 Depth to Top of Gridblock (DEPTH)
DEPTH option (amin amax nl)

Enter data values as required
Depth usually is input using the LAYER, DIP, or ZVAR option. 00
Definition: 00
DEPTH, ft (m) Depth to the top of each gridblock, measured from an

arbitrary datum, positive downward.
5.6.2 Depth to Center of Gridblock (MDEPTH)
MDEPTH option (amin amax nl)

Depth usually is input using the LAYER, DIP, or ZVAR option 00
Definition: 00
MDEPTH, ft (m) Depth to the center of each gridblock, measured from

an arbitrary datum, positive downward.
Example: 00
MDEPTH LAYER
20*120.0 00
5.7 Depth - Corner Point Description

Cartesian and radial grid meshes impose limits on the physical reservoir
characteristics which can be represented. An example of this would be the
specification of fault planes, which must occur at block boundaries and are
restricted to vertical displacement. 00
Since the reservoir simulator deals with block properties and interblock
connections only, any system which can be described in these terms can be
modelled. Corner point gridding permits the user to define the eight corners of
each gridblock and generates the required simulation properties. The user is
cautioned that generation of non-orthogonal connections between gridblocks can
lead to errors in flow calculations, because the resulting cross terms in the
equations are ignored. 00

5.7.1 Depth to Each Corner Point (ZCORN)
ZCORN option (amin amax nl)

Definition: 00
ZCORN, ft (m) Depth to each corner point, measured from an arbitrary

datum, positive downward. (NX+1)*(NY+1)*(NZ+1)
data values are required. In a faulted grid system, this
depth is interpreted as the depth of the southeast corner
of each block (viewed with the (1,1) block in the
northwestern corner and the (NX,NY) block in the
southeastern corner of each layer). The depths of the
other three corners of each block may be input using
the ZCORNE, ZCORNW, or ZCORSW arrays.
5.7.2 Depth to NE Corner Point (ZCORNE)
ZCORNE option (amin amax nl)

Definition: 00
ZCORNE, ft (m) Depth to the northeast corner of each block in each

layer, measured from an arbitrary datum, positive
downward. NX*NY*(NZ+1) data values are required.
In a faulted grid system, this depth is used, in
conjunction with the XCORN, YCORN and ZCORN
arrays, to locate the exact position of the corner point
so that the depth value is honored and the grid remains
valid (e.g., without holes or overlapping blocks).
Example: 00
ZCORNE ZVAR
100 200 250 00

5.7.3 Depth to NW Corner Point (ZCORNW)
ZCORNW option (amin amax nl)

Definition: 00
ZCORNW, ft (m) Depth to the northwest corner of each block in each

conjunction with the XCORN, YCORN, and ZCORN
Example: 00
ZCORNW LAYER
20*110.0 00
5.7.4 Depth to SW Corner Point (ZCORSW)
ZCORSW option (amin amax nl)

Definition: 00
ZCORSW, ft (m) Depth to the southwest corner of each block in each

conjunction with the XCORN, YCORN, and ZCORN

Example: 00
ZCORSW ZVAR
50*200.0 00
5.7.5 Depth to Bottom Corner Point (ZBOT)
ZBOT option (amin amax nl)

Definition: 00
ZBOT, ft (m) Depth to each bottom corner point, measured from an

arbitrary datum, positive downward.
(NX+1)*(NY+1)*NZ data values are required. In a
faulted grid system, this depth is interpreted as the
depth of the southeast corner of each block bottom
(viewed with the (1,1) block in the northwestern corner
and the (NX, NY) block in the southeastern corner of
each layer). The depths of the other three bottom
corners of each block may be input using the
ZBOTNE, ZBOTNW, or ZBOTSW arrays.
Example: 00
ZBOT ZVAR
15.3 18 00
5.7.6 Depth to NE Bottom Corner Point (ZBOTNE)
ZBOTNE option (amin amax nl)

Definition: 00
ZBOTNE, ft (m) Depth to the northeast bottom corner of each block in

each layer, measured from an arbitrary datum, positive
downward. NX*NY*NZ data values are required. In a
faulted grid system, this depth is used, in conjunction
with XCORN, YCORN, and ZCORN arrays, to locate
the exact position of the bottom corner point so that the
depth value is honored and the grid remains valid (e.g.,
without holes or overlapping blocks).

Example: 00
ZBOTNE ZVAR
15.3 18 00
5.7.7 Depth to NW Bottom Corner Point (ZBOTNW)
ZBOTNW option (amin amax nl)

Definition: 00
ZBOTNW, ft (m) Depth to the northwest bottom corner of each block in

without holes or overlapping blocks).
Example: 00
ZBOTNW ZVAR
15.3 18 00
5.7.8 Depth to SW Bottom Corner Point (ZBOTSW)
ZBOTSW option (amin amax nl)

Definition: 00
ZBOTSW, ft (m) Depth to the southwest bottom corner of each block in

without holes or overlapping blocks.)

Example: 00
ZBOTSW ZVAR
15.3 18 00
5.7.9 Depth to Point on a Depth Line (ZLNCOR)
ZLNCOR option (amin amax nl)

Definition: 00
ZLNCOR, ft (m) Depth to a point on a depth line in each block of two

layers. This option is used for the specification of
depth lines in the LINE corner position option. The
options LNXVAR, LNYVAR, LNZVAR or LNVAL
can be used. If this array is not input then the values of
the array ZCORN in the first two layers are used for
the specification of z-coordinates of two points on the
depth lines.
Example: 00
ZLNCOR ZVAR
15.3 18 00
5.8 Fracture Block Depth (DEPF, MDEPF)

When the DUAL option has been specified, different depths for the fracture
blocks than for the matrix blocks can be entered. If not entered, the depths will be
the same as for the matrix blocks. 00

Definitions: 00
DEPF, ft (m) Depth to the top of each fracture block measured from
an arbitrary datum, positive downward.
MDEPF, ft (m) Depth to the center of each fracture block measured

from an arbitrary datum, positive downward.

5.9 Porosity / Pore Volume (POR, PV)

Enter one of the following two arrays. 00

Definitions: 00
POR, fraction Porosity of each gridblock. If both net and gross

thickness are input, porosity should correspond to the
net thickness.
PV, rb (m3) Pore volume of each gridblock.
Example: 00
POR CON
0.3 00
5.10 Fracture Porosity / Pore Volume (PORF, PVF)

When the DUAL option has been specified the user must enter one of the
following two arrays. 00

Definitions: 00
PORF, fraction Fracture porosity of each gridblock. If both net and

gross thickness are input, porosity should correspond
to the net thickness.
PVF, rb (m3) Fracture pore volume of each gridblock.
The PORF array must be used with the POR array. The PVF array must be used
with the PV array. 00

5.11 Permeability / Transmissibility
5.11.1 X (R) Direction (KX, KXF, TX, KR, KRF, TR)

If both net and gross thickness are input, permeability will be used with net
thickness (DZNET or DZBNET) to calculate transmissibility. Enter one of the
following arrays. 00

Omit if NX = 1 or NR = 1. (except with VIP-DUAL) 00
Definitions: 00
Rectangular Grid:
KX, md (md) Permeability controlling flow in the x direction,

applied to the gridblock center.
KXF, md (md) Permeability controlling flow in the x direction,
applied at the gridblock face. The value input for
block (i,j,k) is the permeability at the block face
between cells (i-1,j,k) and (i,j,k). For i = 1, KXF is
zero.
TX, rb-cp/day/psi The x-direction transmissibility of gridblock (i,j,k) is
(m3-cp/day/kPa) defined at the boundary between blocks (i-1,j,k)
and (i,j,k) and controls flow between them. For i = 1,
TX is zero.
Radial Grid:
KR, md (md) Permeability controlling flow in the r direction,

applied to the radial gridblock center.
KRF, md (md) Permeability controlling flow in the r direction,
between cells (i-1,j,k) and (i,j,k). For i = 1, KRF is
zero.
TR, rb-cp/day/psi The r-direction transmissibility of gridblock (i,j,k) is
(m3-cp/day/kPa) defined at the boundary between blocks (i-1,j,k) and
(i,j,k) and controls flow between them. For i = 1, TR
is zero.
Example: 00

KXF ZVAR
10 20 25 00
5.11.2 Y (Theta) Direction (KY, KYF, TY, KTHETA, KTF, TTHETA)


Omit if NY = 1 or NTHETA = 1. (except with VIP-DUAL) 00
Definitions: 00
Rectangular Grid:
KY, md (md) Permeability controlling flow in the y direction,

KYF, md (md) Permeability controlling flow in the y direction,
between cells (i,j-1,k) and (i,j,k). For j = 1, KYF is
zero.
TY, The y direction transmissibility of gridblock (i,j,k) is
rb-cp/day/psi defined at the boundary between blocks (i,j-1,k) and
(m3-cp/day/kPa) (i,j,k) and controls flow between them. For j = 1, TY
is zero.
Radial Grid:
KTHETA, md (md) Permeability controlling flow in the theta direction,

applied to the radial gridblock center.
KTF, md (md) Permeability controlling flow in the theta direction,
between cells (i,j-1,k) and (i,j,k). For j = 1, KTF is
zero.
TTHETA, The theta-direction transmissibility of gridblock
rb-cp/day/psi (i,j,k) is defined at the boundary between blocks (i,j-
(m3-cp/day/kPa) 1,k) and (i,j,k) and controls flow between them. For j
= 1, TTHETA is zero.

5.11.3 Z Direction (KZ, KZF, TZ)

If both net and gross thickness are input, permeability will be used with gross
thickness (DZ or DZB) to calculate transmissibility. Enter one of the following
arrays. 00

Omit if NZ = 1. (except with VIP-DUAL) 00
Definitions: 00
KZ, md (md) Permeability controlling flow between the layers,

KZF, md (md) Permeability controlling flow in the z direction,
between cells (i,j,k-1) and (i,j,k). For k = 1, KZF is
zero.
TZ, The z-direction transmissibility of gridblock (i,j,k)
rb-cp/day/psi (m3-cp/ is defined at the boundary between blocks (i,j,k-1)
day/kPa) and (i,j,k) and controls flow between them. For k =
1, TZ is zero.
5.11.4 Diagonal (XY) Directions (TXYL, TXYR)

The TXYL and TXYR arrays may only be entered if the nine-point finite
difference operator option is in use (Section 2.2.6.5). 00
If the nine-point finite difference operator option is invoked (Section 2.2.6.5) and
permeabilities are input, all transmissibilities in the xy plane (x, y, and diagonal
directions) are calculated using the method of Coats and Modine (Reference 3). 00
The use of the nine-point option is subject to the following conditions: 00
Cartesian grid system
No corner points
BLITZ solver (see Simulation Modules Manual)
NX > 1, NY > 1

The gridblock face permeability input option is ignored in the nine-point

transmissibility calculations; i.e., the input values are used as block values. 00
Definitions: 00
TXYL, The left diagonal-direction transmissibility of

rb-cp/day/psi gridblock (i,j,k) is defined (at an imaginary
(m3-cp/day/kPa) boundary) between blocks (i-1,j-1,k) and (i,j,k) and
controls flow between them. For i=1 and for j=1,
TXYL is zero.
TXYR, The right diagonal-direction transmissibility of
rb-cp/day/psi gridblock (i,j,k) is defined (at an imaginary
(m3-cp/day/kPa) boundary) between blocks (i+1,j-1,k) and (i,j,k) and
controls flow between them. For i=NX and for j=1,
TXYR is zero.
5.11.5 Well PI Upscaled Permeabilities (KWX, KWY, KWZ)

When the COARSEN (Section 8.1) option is used, permeabilities have to be
upscaled. The permeability arrays KX, KY, KZ are used for transmissibility
calculations and are upscaled using flow based algorithms from the UPSCALE
card (Section 2.2.22). In certain types of calculations, such as well PI and J-
function calculations, flow based upscaling is not appropriate. 00
The KWX, KWY, KWZ arrays are used for these other calculations. If only one of
the sets of arrays KX, KY, KZ or KWX, KWY, KWZ is input, the set not input
will default to the input set. 00
The method for upscaling these well PI permeabilities may be specified on the
UPSCALE card (Section 2.2.22). 00

5.12 Fracture Permeability / Transmissibility (VIP-DUAL)

When the DUAL option has been specified the user must enter one keyword from
each of the three following groups of keywords. Fracture permeability is entered
as an effective permeability, 00
k = kf * φf
where kf is the actual permeability of the fractures themselves and φf is the

fracture porosity. The effective permeability is that measured by a well test in a
fractured reservoir. (Reference 7) 00

5.12.1 X (R) Direction (KXFEFF, TXF, KRFEFF, TRF)

array option
Definitions: 00
Rectangular grid:
KXFEFF, md (md) Fracture effective permeability controlling flow in

the x direction, applied to the gridblock center.
TXF, The x-direction fracture transmissibility of gridblock
rb-cp/day/psi (i,j,k) is defined at the boundary between blocks (i-
(m3-cp/day/kPa) 1,j,k) and (i,j,k) and controls flow between them. For
i=1, TXF is zero.
Radial grid:
KRFEFF, md (md) Fracture effective permeability controlling flow in

the r direction, applied to the gridblock center.
TRF, The r-direction fracture transmissibility of gridblock
rb-cp/day/psi (i,j,k) is defined at the boundary between blocks (i-
(m3-cp/day/kPa) 1,j,k) and (i,j,k) and controls flow between them. For
i=1, TRF is zero.
5.12.2 Y (THETA) Direction (KYFEFF, TYF, KTFEFF, TTHETF)

array option
Definitions: 00
Rectangular grid:
KYFEFF, md (md) Fracture effective permeability controlling flow in

the y direction, applied to the gridblock center.

TYF, The y-direction fracture transmissibility of

rb-cp/day/psi gridblock (i,j,k) is defined at the boundary between
(m3-cp/day/kPa) blocks (i,j-1,k) and (i,j,k) and controls flow between
them. For j=1, TYF is zero.
Radial grid:
KTFEFF, md (md) Fracture effective permeability controlling flow in

the theta direction, applied to the gridblock center.
TTHETF The theta-direction fracture transmissibility of
rb-cp/day/psi gridblock (i,j,k) is defined at the boundary between
(m3-cp/day/kPa) blocks (i,j-1,k) and (i,j,k) and controls flow between
them. For j=1, TTHETF is zero.
5.12.3 Z Direction (KZFEFF, TZF)

If both net and gross thickness are input, permeability will be used with gross
thickness (DZ or DZB) to calculate transmissibility. Enter one of the following
arrays. 00
array option
Definitions: 00
Rectangular grid:
KZFEFF, md (md) Fracture effective permeability controlling flow in

the z direction, applied to the gridblock center.
TZF, The z-direction fracture transmissibility of gridblock
rb-cp/day/psi (i,j,k) is defined at the boundary between blocks
(m3-cp/day/kPa) (i,j,k-1) and (i,j,k) and controls flow between them.
For k=1, TZF is zero.
5.12.4 Diagonal (XY) Directions (TXYLF, TXYRF)
array option
The TXYLF and TXYRF arrays may only be entered if the nine-point finite
difference operator option is in use (Section 2.2.6.5). 00
If the nine-point finite difference operator option is invoked (Section 2.2.6.5) and

fracture permeabilities are input, all fracture transmissibilities in the xy plane (x,
y, and diagonal directions) are calculated using the method of Coats and Modine
(Reference 3). 00
The use of the nine-point option is subject to the following conditions: 00
Cartesian grid system
No corner points
BLITZ solver (see Simulation Modules Manual)
NX > 1, NY > 1
Definitions: 00
TXYLF, The left diagonal-direction fracture transmissibility

rb-cp/day/psi of gridblock (i,j,k) is defined (at an imaginary
(m3-cp/day/kPa) boundary) between blocks (i-1,j-1,k) and (i,j,k) and
controls flow between them. For i=1 and for j=1,
TXYLF is zero.
TXYRF, The right diagonal-direction fracture
rb-cp/day/psi transmissibility of gridblock (i,j,k) is defined (at an
(m3-cp/day/kPa) imaginary boundary) between blocks (i+1,j-1,k) and
(i,j,k) and controls flow between them. For i=NX
and for j=1, TXYRF is zero.
5.12.5 Well PI Upscaled Permeabilities (KWXF, KWYF, KWZF)

When the COARSEN (Section 8.1) option is used, permeabilities have to be
upscaled. The permeability arrays KXF, KYF, KZF are used for transmissibility
calculations and are upscaled using flow based algorithms from the UPSCALE
card (Section 2.2.22). In certain types of calculations, such as well PI and J-
function calculations, flow based upscaling is not appropriate. 00
The KWXF, KWYF, KWZF arrays are used for these other calculations. If only
one of the sets of arrays KXFEFF, KYFEFF, KZFEFF or KWXF, KWYF, KWZF
is input, the set not input will default to the input set. 00
The method for upscaling these well PI permeabilities may be specified on the
UPSCALE card (Section 2.2.22). 00
array option

5.13 Rock and Fluid Property Assignment

The ISAT and ISATI arrays may be entered with the directional relative
permeability option. See Section 1.5.2.9 for details. 00
5.13.1 Primary Saturation Table (ISAT)
ISAT option (amin amax nl)

Definition: 00
ISAT, integer Integer values that distinguish areas containing rock

types which require unique saturation-dependent tables
for inter-gridblock flow. Each value in the ISAT array
directly refers to a set of relative permeability/capillary
pressure table input. Default sets the entire array to 1;
i,e., either only one set of relative permeability and
capillary pressure tables is input or only the first set is
used. A set of tables consists of a table of water
saturation functions (SWT) plus a table of gas
saturation functions (SGT). If the hysteresis option has
been selected, the ISAT array refers to drainage
relative permeability/capillary pressure tables. The
initialization procedure always uses the tables assigned
by ISAT.
The ISAT array is required if more than one set of saturation-dependent tables
(relative permeabilities and capillary pressures) is input to describe inter-
gridblock flow (see Saturation Dependent Tables). 00
5.13.2 Imbibition Saturation Table for Hysteresis (ISATI)
ISATI option (amin amax nl)

Definition: 00
ISATI, integer Integer values that distinguish areas containing rock

types which require unique saturation-dependent tables
for inter-gridblock flow, for use only when the
hysteresis option has been selected. The ISATI array
refers to imbibition relative permeability/capillary
pressure tables. Default sets the entire array to 1; i.e.,
either only one set of relative permeability and
capillary pressure tables is input or only the first set is

used to describe inter-gridblock flow for the imbibition

process. A set of tables consists of a table of water
saturation functions (SWT) plus a table of gas
saturation functions (SGT).
The ISATI array is required if relative permeability or capillary pressure

hysteresis is selected and the user chooses to enter the imbibition curves (see
Saturation Dependent Tables). A value of ISATI equal to the value of ISAT for a
gridblock disables hysteresis for that gridblock. 00
5.13.3 Fracture Primary Saturation Table (ISATF)
ISATF option (amin amax nl)

The ISATF array is only required when the DUAL option is in use and the user
requires different numbered rock types in the fracture than the matrix. In this case,
both the ISAT and the ISATF arrays are entered. If the ISATF array is omitted the
rock type for the fractures defaults to the rock type for the matrix. This does not,
however, mean that by default the same saturation tables are used for the fracture
and matrix but just that if a gridblock uses matrix saturation table 1 (SWT and
SGT) it also uses fracture saturation table 1 (SWTF and SGTF). 00
Definition: 00
ISATF, integer Definition as for the ISAT array. If omitted the ISATF
array defaults to the same values as in the ISAT array.
5.13.4 Fracture Imbibition Saturation Table for Hysteresis (ISATIF)
ISATIF option (amin amax nl)

The ISATIF array is only required when the DUAL option is in use and the user
requires different numbered imbibition rock types in the fracture than the matrix.
In this case, both the ISATI and the ISATIF arrays are entered. If the ISATIF array
is omitted the rock type for the fractures defaults to the rock type for the matrix.
This does not, however, mean that by default the same saturation tables are used
for the fracture and matrix but just that if a gridblock uses matrix saturation table 1
(SWT and SGT) it also uses fracture saturation table 1 (SWTF and SGTF). 00
Definition: 00
ISATIF, integer Definition as for the ISATI array. If omitted the

ISATIF array defaults to the same values as in the
ISATI array.

5.14 Fluid Property Tables
5.14.1 PVT Property Table (IPVT)
IPVT option (amin amax nl)

The IPVT array is required if more than one set of PVT property tables is input
(see Section 4.5). At present the IPVT array is inactive in VIP-COMP and VIP-
THERM. It is recommended that the IPVT number should be entered on the
IEQUIL card instead of entering this array (Section 4.2.). 00
Definition: 00
IPVT, integer Integer values distinguishing areas with differing PVT

properties. Each value in the IPVT array directly refers
to a set of input PVT tables. Default sets the entire
array to 1; i.e., only one set of PVT tables is input.
Only one value of IPVT can apply within any one
equilibrium region, as defined by the IEQUIL array
(Section 5.28).
5.14.2 Water Property Table (IPVTW)
IPVTW option (amin amax nl)

The IPVTW array is required if more than one set of water property tables
(PVTW, Section 4.11.1 or PVTWSAL, Section 4.11.2) is input. It is
recommended that the IPVTW number should be entered on the IEQUIL card
(Section 4.2) instead of entering this array. 00
Definition: 00
IPVTW, integer Integer values distinguishing areas with differing water

properties. Each value in the IPVTW array directly
refers to a set of input PVTW/PVTWSAL tables.
Default sets the entire array to 1; i.e., only one set of
water tables is input, or no water tables are input. Only
one value of IPVTW can apply within any one
equilibrium region, as defined by the IEQUIL array
(Section 5.28).
00

5.15 Output Regions (IREGION)

IREGION option (amin amax nl)

The output region information is required if more than one grouping of output
data is desired. 00
Definition: 00
IREGION, integer Integer values defining different regions for output

purposes. Gridblocks with the same integer value are
grouped together and considered a single region for
output of average pressure, cumulative injected
volumes, cumulative produced volumes, net influx,
and current fluids in place in the Region Summary.
Default sets the entire array to 1.
The extra region (XREG) option may be used to assign gridblocks to more than
one output region. See Section 5.16. 00
Example: 00
C--------------------------------------------------------
C ARRAY DATA
C--------------------------------------------------------
ARRAYS
...................
IREGION ZVAR
1 2 3
MOD
35 37 2 2 1 1 =4 00
34 37 3 3 1 1 =4
34 37 4 4 1 1 =4 00
5.16 Extra Regions (XREG)

The XREG (extra regions) option is used to assign gridblocks to more than one
output region. This option only applies to the IREGION array. 00
The XREG cards must follow the IREGION array specification and any MOD or
VMOD cards that apply to it. These extra regions are identified by an X next to
the region number on the Initial Fluids in Place report in VIP-CORE and the
Region Summary reports in the simulation modules. The totals printed on these

reports do not include the calculated values of the extra regions. 00
The following restrictions apply when using the XREG option: 00
■ A gridblock may be contained in at most 4 regions. That is, its original output
region and 3 extra regions.
■ The maximum number of original output regions is 99 and the maximum

number of extra regions is 99. For example, if there are 70 original output
regions the maximum range of extra regions is 71-169. This restriction does
not apply if extra regions are not being assigned.
Only one title card containing the keyword XREG is required, but the data cards
may be repeated as necessary. 00
XREG
i1 i2 j1 j2 k1 k2 (= v)
Definitions: 00
XREG Indicates that extra output regions are being defined. 00
Gridblock locations are defined by indices I, J, K in reference to the (x,y,z) or

(r,θ,z) grid. Extra output regions are assigned to elements of the IREGION
array that fall in the portion of the grid defined by: 00
i1 ≤ I ≤ i2
j1 ≤ J ≤ j2
k1 ≤ K ≤ k2 00
v Region number assigned to the indicated portion of the

IREGION array. This value must be less than or equal
to 99 and greater than the largest value in the
IREGION array. The "=" sign must precede the value.
If this value is not specified, then enough values must

be provided on the following data cards for all blocks
of the designated portion of the grid. The number of
values required is:
(k2 - k1 + 1) * (j2 - j1 +1) * (i2 - i1 +1)
Examples: 00
IREGION ZVAR
1 2 3 4 5
XREG
1 4 2 3 1 2 =6

1 4 2 3 3 5 =7
1 2 1 2 1 5 =8
1 2 3 4 1 5 =9 00
XREG
1 4 2 3 1 2
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 00
5.17 Output Regions (IREGF)
IREGF option (amin amax nl)

The IREGF array is only required when the DUAL option is in use and the user
requires different numbered output regions in the fracture than the matrix. In this
case, both the IREGION and the IREGF arrays are entered. If the IREGF array is
omitted, the output region for the fractures defaults to the output region for the
matrix. 00
Definition: 00
IREGF, integer Definition as for the IREGION array. If omitted, the

IREGF array defaults to the same values as in the
IREGION array.
The extra region (XREG) option may be used to assign fracture blocks to more
than one output region by using the XREG card after the IREGF array. See
Section 5.16. 00
5.18 Reservoir Temperature (TEMP) (VIP-COMP or VIP-

THERM)
The TEMP array may be used to define a fixed temperature distribution in VIP-
COMP or the initial temperature distribution in VIP-THERM. 00





4.4.11.4.
Entering temperature as a function of depth and areal location (4.4.11.4)

is discouraged, since the areal temperature variation is not accounted for
in the calculation of equilibrium phase pressures versus depth. See option
4 below for further discussion of this problem.

these initial gridblock fluid properties (only the pressure aray in the thermal
TEMP option (amin amax nl)

Definition: 00
TEMP, °F (°C) Reservoir temperature in each gridblock. If not entered

and temperature was not specified in the composition
versus depth table (Sections 4.4.12.3, 4.4.12.4, 4.7.1,
and 4.7.2), TRES is assumed.

5.19 Compaction Regions (ICMT)
ICMT option (amin amax nl)

The ICMT array is required if more than one set of COMPACTION tables is input
(see Section 4.12). 00
Definition: 00
ICMT, integer Integer values distinguishing areas with differing

compaction properties. Each value in the ICMT array
directly refers to a set of input COMPACTION tables.
Default sets the entire array to 1; i.e., only one set of
COMPACTION tables is input.
The ICMT array may be entered only if the COMPACT card is entered in the
utility data (Section 2.2.7.11). 00
5.20 Fracture Compaction Regions (ICMTF)
ICMTF option (amin amax nl)

The ICMTF array is only required when the DUAL option is in use and the
compaction properties for the fracture are different from those for the matrix. In
this case, both the ICMT and the ICMTF arrays are entered. If the ICMTF array is
omitted, the compaction table used for each fracture block will be the same as the
table used for the corresponding matrix block. 00
Definition: 00
ICMTF, integer Definition as for the ICMT array. If omitted, the

ICMTF array defaults to the values in the ICMT array.
5.21 Water Induced Rock Compaction Regions (IWIRC)
IWIRC option (amin amax nl)

The IWIRC array is required if more than one set of WATER INDUCED ROCK
COMPACTION tables are input (Section 4.13). 00
Definition: 00

IWIRC, integer Positive integer values distinguishing different water

induced rock compaction regions. Each value in the
IWIRC array directly refers to a set of input water
induced rock compaction tables (Section 4.13).
Default sets the entire array to 1.
5.22 Fracture Water Induced Rock Compaction Regions(IWIRCF)
IWIRCF option (amin amax nl)

The IWIRCF array is only required when the DUAL option is in use and the water
induced rock compaction properties for the fracture are different from those for
the matrix. In this case, both the IWIRC and IWIRCF arrays are entered. 00
Definition: 00
IWIRCF, integer Positive integer values distinguishing different fracture

water induced rock compaction regions. Each value in
the IWIRCF array directly refers to a set of input water
induced rock compaction tables (Section 4.13).
Default sets the array to IWIRC.
5.23 Rock Compressibility (CR)
CR option (amin amax nl)

Definition: 00
CR, psi-1(kPa-1) Rock compressibility of each gridblock.
Rock compressibility can be given a value for each gridblock. Typically rock
compressibility can be expressed as a function of porosity. Values specified by the
CR card will replace the value specified by the DWB card. 00
5.24 Fracture Compressibility (CRF)
CRF option (amin amax nl)


The CRF array is only required when the DUAL option is in use and the fracture
compressibilities are different from the matrix compressibilities. In this case, both
the CR and the CRF arrays are entered. If the CRF array is omitted, the fracture
compressibilities will be set equal to the corresponding matrix compressibilities. 00
Definition: 00
CRF, psi-1 (kPa-1) Fracture compressibility of each gridblock.
Fracture compressibility can be given a value for each gridblock. Typically rock
compressibility can be expressed as a function of porosity. Values specified by the
CRF card will replace those specified by the DWB card. 00
5.25 Transmissibility Regions (ITRAN)
ITRAN option (amin amax nl)

Definition: 00
ITRAN, integer Positive integer values distinguishing different

transmissibility regions. These values are used to
modify the inter/intra region transmissibility using the
MULTIR option (Section 1.7). Default sets the entire
array to 1.
5.26 Fracture Transmissibility Regions (ITRANF)
ITRANF option (amin amax nl)

Definition: 00
ITRANF, integer Positive integer values distinguishing different fracture

transmissibility regions. These values are used to
modify the inter/intra region transmissibility using the
MULTIR option (Section 1.7). Default sets the array to
ITRAN.
5.27 Turbidite Reservoir Option (Not available in VIP-THERM)

The turbidite reservoir option models the sand-shale fluid (water) exchange within
any simulation gridblock that consists of multiple sand and shale sublayers using
an analytic, linear aquifer model. In this model, all shale sublayers within each
gridblock are assumed to have the same thickness, and all sand sublayers also

have the same thickness. The model represents each half-shale-sublayer by a

linear aquifer. The sand-shale fluid exchange calculation follows the approach of
Carter and Tracy aquifer model. Notice that for the linear aquifer model, the PD
(tD) function is a universal function that is independent of the aquifer size. This
function is internally generated in VIP-CORE. 00
For a turbidite gridblock, the shale sublayers should be considered non-pay.

Consequently, the net-to-gross ratio or the net thickness of the gridblock must be
specified, and the porosity, compressibility, and areal permeabilities of the sand
sublayers must be used. Also, an effective vertical permeability must be specified
to account for the existence of shale sublayers. This effective vertical permeability
is in general negligibly small and should have little or no effect on the simulation
results. 00
The turbidite reservoir option is compatible with both the IMPES and IMPLICIT
formulations in the simulation modules. It can be used in both regular Cartesian
and radial grid systems. The use of this option in a corner point grid system is not
recommended because of its irregular geometry. The option should not be used in
conjunction with the dual porosity option and is not yet compatible with the water
tracking option. 00
The turbidite reservoir option is automatically invoked by the SCLFCT array

input. This array specifies whether a given gridblock is to be treated as a turbidite
gridblock and the number of shale sublayers within each turbidite gridblock. Two
additional (TCTBD and BTBD) arrays must also be entered to complete the
description of the turbidite reservoir system. The TCTBD array specifies the time
constant for each gridblock, and the BTBD array specifies the capacity of each
linear aquifer (i.e., each half-shale-sublayer within a gridblock). 00
5.27.1 Scaling Factor (SCLFCT)
SCLFCT option (amin amax nl)

Definition: 00
SCLFCT Number of linear aquifers in each gridblock. For a

gridblock with n sand and n shale sublayers, SCLFCT
should have a value of 2n. A value of 0 means that the
gridblock will be treated as a regular gridblock with no
sand-shale fluid exchange.
Any gridblock within the reservoir may be specified either as a regular gridblock
or a turbidite gridblock. Non-zero TCTBD and BTBD values must be specified
for all gridblocks with non-zero SCLFCT values. 00
Examples: 00
SCLFCT CON

0.
MOD
6 10 1 3 1 1 =6
1 5 1 2 2 2 = 10. 00
6 10 1 3 3 3 = 20. 00
5.27.2 Time Constant (TCTBD)
TCTBD option (amin amax nl)

Definitions: 00
TCTBD, day-1 Time constant used to convert time to dimensionless

time for turbidite gridblocks.
TCTBD = (4b * kz,shale) / (Ct,shale * φshale * μw * H2)
where
b 0.006328 for conventional units; 8.527 x

10-5 for metric units.
kz,shale Vertical permeabilities in shale

sublayers, md (md).
Ct,shale Shale total compressibility, 1/psia (1/

kPa).
φshale Shale porosity, fraction.
μw Viscosity of water contained in shale, cp

(cp).
H Thickness of each shale sublayer, ft (m).
The TCTBD array must be specified if the SCLFCT array is entered. Non-zero
TCTBD values must be entered for all gridblocks with non-zero SCLFCT values.
Gridblocks with zero SCLFCT values will be treated as non-turbidite gridblocks
without sand-shale fluid exchange, regardless of their TCTBD values. 00
Examples: 00
TCTBD ZVAR
6.7645E-3 1.6911E-3 6.7645E-3 0. 00

5.27.3 Shale Capacity (BTBD)
BTBD option (amin amax nl)

Definitions: 00
BTBD Shale capacity, rb/psia (m3/kPa).

BTBD = (Ct,shale * φshale * A * H) / (2 * a1).
where
Ct,shale Shale total compressibility, 1/psia (1/

kPa).
φshale Shale porosity, fraction.
A Gridblock horizontal area, ft2 (m2).
H Thickness of each shale sublayer, ft (m).
a1 5.6146 for conventional units; 1.0 for

metric units.
The BTBD array must be specified if the SCLFCT array is entered. Non-zero
BTBD values must be entered for all gridblocks with non-zero SCLFCT values.
Gridblocks with zero SCLFCT values will be treated as non-turbidite gridblocks
without sand-shale fluid exchange, regardless of their BTBD values. 00
Examples: 00
BTBD ZVAR
3.3840E-3 6.7680E-3 3.3840E-3 0. 00
5.28 Equilibrium Regions (IEQUIL)
IEQUIL option (amin amax nl)

The IEQUIL array is required if more than one set of fluid contacts is input (see
Section 4.2). 00
Definition: 00
IEQUIL, integer Integer values defining distinct regions for equilibrium

purposes. Each region may have different water-oil
and gas-oil contacts. Each value in the IEQUIL array

directly refers to an equilibrium region defined by an

IEQUIL card in the tabular data (Section 4.2). Default
sets the entire array to 1; i.e., only one set of contacts
input for equilibrium data. Only one type of oil, as
defined by the IPVT array (Section 5.14), may be
present in any one equilibrium region. On the other
hand, any number of equilibrium regions may contain
the same type of oil.
5.29 Water Salinity (SAL)
SAL option (amin amax nl)

Definition: 00
SAL, user-defined Initial water salinity of each gridblock. Default sets

the salinity of each gridblock to the maximum salinity
value in the salinity table (PVTWSAL) to which the
gridblock is assigned.
The SAL array may be entered only if the PVTWSAL data has been entered
(Section 4.11.2). 00
5.30 User-Specified Initialization
5.30.1 Pressure and Saturation Overreads (P, SW, SG)

The gridblock pressure, gas saturation, and water saturation arrays may be input to
define the initial conditions. 00

Definitions: 00
P, psia (kPa) Pressure of each gridblock at the beginning of the run

(time = 0).
SW, fraction Average water saturation of each gridblock at the

beginning of the run (time = 0).
SG, fraction Average gas saturation of each gridblock at the


NOTE: 1. Saturation pressure may not be overread.
2. The program will automatically equilibrate the non-specified

initial conditions by adjusting the capillary pressure in each
block unless a NONEQ card is read in the utility data (Section
2.2.8.1).
3. If both SW and SG are read, and SW + SG > 1.0 for any

gridblock, then the user must specify either KEEPSW or
KEEPSG in the utility data. KEEPSW will honor SW and
calculate SG = 1 - SW. KEEPSG will honor SG and calculate
SW = 1 - SG.
5.30.2 Gas Composition Overread (YI)

The YI array may only be read in a compositional problem; i.e., the number of
components is greater than 2. 00
The mole fraction for each component in the gas phase for each gridblock may be
input. The format of the array input is very similar to other array data input. 00
YI cmp1 option (min max)

values
.
.
.
YI cmpnc option (min max)
values
.
.
Definitions: 00
YI Alpha label indicating the mole fraction of component

cmpi in the gas phase is being defined for each
gridblock at the beginning of the run (time = 0).
cmpi Alphanumeric component name for component i. Must

be identical to one of the names included in the
COMPONENT data.
NOTE: If the mole fractions for any component are overread, then the mole
fractions must be overread for all components.

5.30.3 Oil Composition Overread (XI)

The XI array may only be read in a compositional problem; i.e., the number of
The mole fraction for each component in the oil phase for each gridblock may be
input. The format of the array input is very similar to other array data input. 00
XI cmp1 option (min max)

values
.
.
.
XI cmpnc option (min max)
values
.
.
Definitions: 00
XI Alpha label indicating the mole fraction of component

cmpi in the oil phase is being defined for each

COMPONENT data.
5.31 User-Specified Fracture Initialization (VIP-DUAL)
5.31.1 Pressure and Saturation Overreads (PF, SWF, SGF)

The gridblock fracture pressure, fracture gas saturation, and fracture water
saturation arrays may be input to define the initial conditions within the fracture. 00

Definitions: 00
PF, psia (kPa) Fracture pressure of each gridblock at the beginning of

the run (time = 0).

SWF, fraction Average fracture water saturation of each gridblock at

the beginning of the run (time = 0).
SGF, fraction Average fracture gas saturation of each gridblock at the

NOTE: 1. Fracture saturation pressure may not be overread.
2. The program will automatically equilibrate the non-specified

initial conditions by adjusting the capillary pressure in each
block unless a NONEQ card is read in the utility data (Section
2.2.8.1).
Example: 00
PF CON
20 00
5.31.2 Gas Composition Overread (YIF)

The YIF array may only be read in a compositional problem; i.e., the number of
The mole fraction for each component in the fracture gas phase for each gridblock
may be input. The format of the array input is very similar to other array data
input. 00
YIF cmp1 option (min max)

values
.
.
.
YIF cmpnc option (min max)
values
.
.
Definitions: 00
YIF Alpha label indicating the mole fraction of component

cmpi in the fracture gas phase is being defined for each

COMPONENT data.
NOTE: If the mole fractions for any components are overread, then the

mole fractions must be overread for all components.
Example: 00
YIF CO2 CON

0.2
YIF N2 CON
0.8 00
5.31.3 Oil Composition Overread (XIF)

The XIF array may only be read in a compositional problem; i.e., the number of
The mole fraction for each component in the fracture oil phase for each gridblock
may be input. The format of the array input is very similar to other array data
input. 00
XIF cmp1 option (min max)

values
.
.
.
XIF cmpnc option (min max)
values
.
.
Definitions: 00
XIF Alpha label indicating the mole fraction of component

cmpi in the fracture oil phase is being defined for each

COMPONENT data.
5.32 Normalized Saturation-Dependent Functions

If the saturation-dependent functions for gridblocks are entered as generic curves,
the endpoints of the curves must be defined appropriately for each gridblock. In
these cases, the values of the connate water saturation, the residual water
saturation, the water saturation at residual oil, and the maximum water saturation

and/or the connate gas saturation, the residual gas saturation, the gas saturation at
residual oil, and the maximum gas saturation are assigned to each gridblock.
These values are entered on a block-by-block basis in the SWL, SWR, SWRO,
SWU, SGL, SGR, SGRO, and SGU arrays. Also, the values of oil relative
permeability at connate water saturation and water (or gas) relative permeability
at residual oil saturation are assigned to each gridblock. These values are entered
on a block-by-block basis in the KROLW and KRWRO (or KRGRO) arrays. In a
GASWATER problem the values of gas relative permeability at residual water
saturation are entered in the KRGRW array. 00
All of the above arrays may be entered with the directional relative permeability
option. See Section 1.5.2.9 for details. 00
All of the above arrays are duplicated for DUAL cases, with an "F" appended to
the array name (e.g., SWL becomes SWLF). 00
The user can select the two-point scaling of relative permeability table endpoints,
or the default three-point scaling (four-point for capillary pressures), by use of the
END2P option. The two-point scaling approach was the only method available in
VIP-EXECUTIVE Version 1.6R, and earlier versions. In the two-point case, each
curve is scaled over its entire length (from residual/irreducible saturation to the
saturation at which it attains a maximum). In the three-point case, all curves in a
table are scaled together (retaining the relative kr and Pc characteristics of the
curves). In this case, which is the default scaling method, all endpoints serve to
break the table up into partitions, with scaling being done in each partition
independently. As an example, water-oil table relative permeabilities would be
scaled in two sections; from water saturations of Swr to Swro and from Swro to
1. 00
If any saturation endpoint is not specified, rock data will be used. The following
consistency checks are performed for each gridblock: 00
SGL should not exceed 1-SWU.
SGU should not exceed 1-SWL.
SWL should not exceed SWR.
SGL should not exceed SGR.
SWRO should not exceed SWU.
SGRO should not exceed SGU.
5.32.1 Water-Oil Normalized Saturations
5.32.1.1 Connate (Minimum) Water Saturation (SWL)
SWL option (amin amax nl)

Entered data values as required.

5.32.1.2 Residual Water Saturation (SWR)
SWR option (amin amax nl)

NOTE: If the SWR array is entered, the SWRO array must also be entered.
5.32.1.3 Water Saturation at Residual Oil (SWRO)
SWRO option (amin amax nl)

NOTE: If the SWRO array is entered, the SWR array must also be entered.
5.32.1.4 Maximum Water Saturation (SWU)
SWU option (amin amax nl)

5.32.1.5 Maximum Trapped Gas Saturation (SGTR)
SGTR option (amin amax nl)

5.32.1.6 Fracture Connate (Minimum) Water Saturation (SWLF)
SWLF option (amin amax nl)

NOTE: 1. The SWLF array is required only when the DUAL option is in
use and the user requires different values than would be derived
from the appropriate fracture saturation tables (based on the
ISATF array).
2. If one of the SWL or SWLF arrays is needed, both must be

entered.

5.32.1.7 Fracture Residual Water Saturation (SWRF)
SWRF option (amin amax nl)

NOTE: 1. The SWRF array is required only when the DUAL option is in
ISATF array).
2. If one of the SWR or SWRF arrays is needed, both must be

entered.
3. If the SWRF array is entered, the SWROF array must also be

entered.
5.32.1.8 Fracture Water Saturation at Residual Oil (SWROF)
SWROF option (amin amax nl)

NOTE: 1. The SWROF array is required only when the DUAL option is
in use and the user requires different values than would be
derived from the appropriate fracture saturation tables (based
on the ISATF array).
2. If one of the SWRO or SWROF arrays is needed, both must be

entered.
3. If the SWROF array is entered, the SWRF array must also be

entered.
5.32.1.9 Fracture Maximum Water Saturation (SWUF)
SWUF option (amin amax nl)

NOTE: 1. The SWUF array is required only when the DUAL option is in
ISATF array).

2. If one of the SWU or SWUF arrays is needed, both must be

entered.
5.32.2 Gas-Oil Normalized Saturations
5.32.2.1 Connate (Minimum) Gas Saturation (SGL)
SGL option (amin amax nl)

5.32.2.2 Residual Gas Saturation (SGR)
SGR option (amin amax nl)

NOTE: If the SGR array is entered, the SGRO array must also be entered.
5.32.2.3 Gas Saturation at Residual Oil (SGRO)
SGRO option (amin amax nl)

NOTE: If the SGRO array is entered, the SGR array must also be entered.
5.32.2.4 Maximum gas saturation (SGU)
SGU option (amin amax nl)

5.32.2.5 Gas Saturation at Residual Water (SGRW)
SGRW option (amin amax nl)

NOTE: SGRW is used in the two-curve water relative permeability option

and the GASWATER option.

5.32.2.6 Fracture Connate (Minimum) Gas Saturation (SGLF)
SGLF option (amin amax nl)

NOTE: 1. The SGLF array is required only when the DUAL option is in
ISATF array).
2. If one of the SGL or SGLF arrays is needed, both must be

entered.
5.32.2.7 Fracture Residual Gas Saturation (SGRF)
SGRF option (amin amax nl)

NOTE: 1. The SGRF array is required only when the DUAL option is in
ISATF array).
2. If one of the SGR or SGRF arrays is needed, both must be

entered.
3. If the SGRF array is entered, the SGROF array must also be

entered.
5.32.2.8 Fracture Gas Saturation at Residual Oil (SGROF)
SGROF option (amin amax nl)

NOTE: 1. The SGROF array is required only when the DUAL option is in
ISATF array).
2. If one of the SGRO or SGROF arrays is needed, both must be

entered.

3. If the SGROF array is entered, the SGRF array must also be

entered.
5.32.2.9 Fracture Maximum Gas Saturation (SGUF)
SGUF option (amin amax nl)

NOTE: 1. The SGUF array is required only when the DUAL option is in
ISATF array).
2. If one of the SGU or SGUF arrays is needed, both must be

entered.
5.32.2.10 Fracture Gas Saturation at Residual Water (SGRWF)
SGRWF option (amin amax nl)

NOTE: 1. SGRUF is used in the two-curve water relative permeability

option.
2. The SGRWF array is required only when the DUAL option is

3. If one of the SGRW or SGRWF arrays is needed, both must be

entered.
5.32.3 Normalized Relative Permeability Endpoints
5.32.3.1 Kro at Connate Water Saturation (KROLW)
KROLW option (amin amax nl)


5.32.3.2 Krw at Residual Oil (KRWRO)
KRWRO option (amin amax nl)

5.32.3.3 Krg at Residual Oil (KRGRO)
KRGRO option (amin amax nl)

5.32.3.4 Krg at Residual Water (KRGRW)
This array may only be entered in a GASWATER problem. 00
KRGRW option (amin amax nl)

5.32.3.5 Fracture Kro at Connate Water (KROLWF)
KROLWF option (amin amax nl)

NOTE: 1. The KROLWF array is required only when the DUAL option is
2. If one of the KROLW or KROLWF arrays is needed, both must

be entered.
5.32.3.6 Fracture Krw at Residual Oil (KRWROF)
KRWROF option (amin amax nl)

NOTE: 1. The KRWROF array is required only when the DUAL option is

2. If one of the KRWRO or KRWROF arrays is needed, both must

be entered.
5.32.3.7 Fracture Krg at Residual Oil (KRGROF)
KRGROF option (amin amax nl)

NOTE: 1. The KRGROF array is required only when the DUAL option is
2. If one of the KRGRO or KRGROF arrays is needed, both must

be entered.
5.33 Vertical Equilibrium Fraction
5.33.1 Water-Oil VE (FVEWO)

The FVEWO array allows the degree of water-oil VE to vary in each block. The
values can vary from zero to one for each block, one signifying 100% VE and
zero signifying 100% rock values. That is, 00
krwtotal = (1 - FVEWO) krwrock + FVEWO krwVE . 00
FVEWO option (amin amax nl)

Definition: 00
FVEWO, fraction Degree of water-oil VE in each gridblock. One

signifies 100% VE and zero signifies 100% rock
values.
NOTE: The FVEWO array may be entered only if the VEWO card is
entered in the utility data (Section 2.2.10.1).

5.33.2 Gas-Oil VE (FVEGO)

The FVEGO array allows the degree of gas-oil VE to vary in each block. It is
defined and used in the same sense as FVEWO. 00
FVEGO option (amin amax nl)

Definition: 00
FVEGO, fraction Degree of gas-oil VE in each gridblock. One signifies

100% VE and zero signifies 100% rock values.
NOTE: The FVEGO array may be entered only if the VEGO card is entered
in the utility data (Section 2.2.10.2).
5.34 Vertical Equilibrium Fraction (VIP-DUAL)

When the DUAL option is in use, if the FVEWO array has been specified for the
matrix blocks, then the FVEWOF array must be specified for the fracture blocks.
Similarly, if the FVEGO array has been specified, then so must the FVEGOF
array be specified. 00
5.34.1 Water-oil VE (FVEWOF)

The FVEWOF array allows the degree of water-oil VE to vary in each fracture
block. The values can vary from zero to one for each fracture block, one
signifying 100% VE and zero signifying 100% rock values. 00
FVEWOF option (amin amax nl)

Definition: 00
FVEWOF, fraction Degree of water-oil VE in each fracture block. One

values.
5.34.2 Gas-Oil VE (FVEGOF)

The FVEGOF array allows the degree of gas-oil VE to vary in each fracture
block. It is defined and used in the same sense as FVEWOF. 00
FVEGOF option (amin amax nl)

Definition: 00
FVEGOF, fraction Degree of gas-oil VE in each fracture block. One

values.
5.35 Matrix Fracture Exchange Transmissibility (VIP-DUAL)

The matrix fracture exchange transmissibility defines the exchange of fluids
between the matrix rock and fractures in each gridblock. The user may enter data
relating to the exchange term in one of the following ways: 00
5.35.1 Matrix Block Size (LX, LY, LZ)

The exchange term is calculated from the matrix block size as discussed in
Reference 7. 00

Definitions: 00
LX, ft (m) Matrix block size in the x direction.
LY, ft (m) Matrix block size in the y direction.
LZ, ft (m) Matrix block size in the z direction.
Example: 00
LX CON
100
5.35.2 Exchange Shape Factor (SIGMA)
SIGMA option (amin amax nl)

Definition: 00
SIGMA, ft-2 (m-2) Exchange shape factor for gridblock (i,j,k).

5.35.3 Exchange Transmissibility (TEX)
TEX option (amin amax nl)

Definition: 00
TEX, rb-cp/day/psi Matrix fracture exchange transmissibility.

(m3-cp/day/kPa)
NOTE: 1. The permeability arrays KX (or KXF), KY (or KYF), KZ (or

KZF) must be entered to use either the matrix block size option
or the exchange shape factor option. Thus, if the pore volume
and transmissibility arrays have been input, only the exchange
transmissibility array TEX can be specified.
2. The exchange transmissibility is defined as (for field units):
TEX = .001127 kma σ Δx Δy Δz, 00
⎛ KX KY KZ ⎞
where kma σ = ⎜ ---------- + ---------- + ----------⎟ ( 1 – PORF )
⎝ LX 2 LY 2 LZ 2⎠
or is specified directly. The term kma is a harmonic average of

matrix and fracture permeabilities.
Example: 00
TEX CON
0.1

5.36 Matrix-Fracture Diffusion (VIP-DUAL)
5.36.1 Diffusion Exchange Shape Factor (SIGMAD)
SIGMAD option (amin amax nl)

Definition: 00
SIGMAD, ft-2 (m-2) Diffusion exchange shape factor sigma D for gridblock
(i,j,k). If SIGMAD is not specified and the diffusion
option is active (Section 2.2.13.3), SIGMAD defaults
to SIGMA (Section 5.35.2).
Example: 00
SIGMAD CON
0.8 00
5.36.2 Gas Diffusion Mass Transfer Coefficient (TDIFFG)
TDIFFG option (amin amax nl)

Definition: 00
TDIFFG, Gas diffusion mass transfer coefficient for gridblock

rb/D (rm3/D) (i,j,k).
5.36.3 Oil Diffusion Mass Transfer Coefficient (TDIFFO)
TDIFFO option (amin amax nl)

Definition: 00
TDIFFO, Oil diffusion mass transfer coefficient for gridblock

rb/D (rm3/D) (i,j,k).

5.37 Fluid Tracking (Not available in VIP-THERM)
5.37.1 Oil Tracked Fluid Number (OILTRF)
OILTRF option (amin amax nl)

Definition: 00
OILTRF Initial tracked fluid number assignment of the oil in

every gridblock.
For a transition block that contains a gas-oil contact, if a CONTACT card is

entered, the data on the CONTACT card supercedes the OILTRF value. 00
5.37.2 Gas Tracked Fluid Number (GASTRF)
GASTRF option (amin amax nl)

Definition: 00
GASTRF Initial tracked fluid number assignment of the gas in

every gridblock.
For a transition block that contains a gas-oil contact, if a CONTACT card is

entered, the data on the CONTACT card supercedes the GASTRF value. 00
5.37.3 Fractional Flow Exponent for Extraneous Water Tracking (TKWEXP)

The TKWEXP array may optionally be input in either the VIP-CORE data or with
OVER/VOVER cards in the simulation modules, if the water tracking option has
been invoked. 00
TKWEXP option (amin amax nl)

Definition: 00
TKWEXP Exponent used in calculating the fractional flow terms

for the extraneous tracked water types. The exponent
determines preferential flow between the insitu water
and all other water types. The default is 1.0, which
yields fractional flow as a function of normalized
tracked water type saturation. A value greater than 1

increases the preferential flow of insitu water, while a

value less than 1 reduces it.
5.38 Three and Four Component Miscible
5.38.1 Mixing Parameter for Effective Viscosity (OMGV)
OMGV option (amin amax nl)

Definition: 00
OMGV Mixing parameter for effective viscosity calculation.
The OMGV array allows the user to input variable values for viscosity mixing
parameter in miscible option (invoked by the MIS card). This array overrides the
omegav value specified in the MIS card of the Initialization Data section. The
omegav value will be used if this card is omitted. 00
Example: 00
OMGV ZVAR
0.5 0.6 0.7 00
5.38.2 Mixing Parameter for Effective Density (OMGD)
OMGD option (amin amax nl)

Definition: 00
OMGD Mixing parameter for effective density calculation.
The OMGD array allows the user to input variable values for density mixing
parameter in miscible option (invoked by the MIS card). This array overrides the
omegad value specified in the MIS card of the Initialization Data section. The
omegad value will be used if this card is omitted. 00

Example: 00
OMGD ZVAR
0.5 0.6 0.7 00
5.39 Time-Dependent Compressibility - Creep Option (Not available

in VIP-THERM)
The time-dependent compressibility (creep) option includes a time-delayed
compaction due to creep in addition to the standard instantaneous compaction
represented by the rock compressibility. In this option, the time-dependent portion
of the rate of pore volume change is assumed to be proportional to the difference
between the current strain state and a prescribed equilibrium state. 00
To invoke the creep option, the following three arrays must be specified. 00
5.39.1 Reservoir Rock Rate Constant (CREEPB)
CREEPB option (amin amax nl)

Definition: 00
CREEPB, day-1 Parameter B in the creep option. This is the reservoir

rock rate constant and is inversely proportional to the
characteristic time constant of the material (time
needed for the rock to creep and reach its relaxed
condition).
Example: 00
CREEPB ZVAR
6.169 1.227 3.000
5.39.2 Equilibrium State Total Rock Compressibility (CREEPC)
CREEPC option (amin amax nl)

Definition: 00
CREEPC, Parameter C∞ in the creep option. This is the total rock

psi-1 (kPa-1) compressibility at the equilibrium state.
Example: 00

CREEPC CON
1.E-5
5.39.3 Creep Exponent (CREEPM)
CREEPM option (amin amax nl)

Definition: 00
CREEPM Parameter m in the creep option. This is the creep

exponent; i.e., the long-term reservoir compressibility.
Example: 00
CREEPM ZVAR
17.1 15.65 16.3
5.40 Connection Transmissibility Modification

If flow transmissibilities, and thermal transmissibilities in VIP-THERM, are not
directly entered then they are calculated by VIP based on the values of
permeability, thermal conductivity, and gridblock dimension. These
transmissibility values are modified by the values of the transmissibility multiplier
arrays. The values of the transmissibility multiplier arrays may be entered directly
and/or modified by the MULT option. The MULT option allows the user to
modify transmissibilities in the plus and minus directions, and to enter
transmissibility multipliers for non-standard connections separate from standard
connections. MULT cards can only be entered after all ARRAY data has been
entered. 00
Transmissibilities and pore volumes can also be modified using OVER and
VOVER cards. Separate options are available in PRINT ARRAYS output or in the
initialization MAP file to report transmissibility multiplier values before and after
the effects of OVER/VOVER cards. 00
Transmissibilities are also modified when fault data is entered. If transmissibility

multiplier values are entered on fault cards then they will supercede any values
that were previously entered. These new values will be reflected in PRINT
ARRAYS output and in the initialization MAP file. 00
If transmissibility arrays are not entered then a default value of one is used. 00
5.40.1 X Direction Transmissibility Multiplier (TMX)
TMX option (amin amax nl)

Definition: 00
TMX The x direction transmissibility multiplier for

gridblock (i,j,k) is defined at the boundary between
blocks (i-1,j,k) and (i,j,k) and controls flow between
them. For i = 1, TMX is zero.
NOTE: Omit if NX = 1.
The TMX values modify transmissibilities calculated for standard and

nonstandard connections. New values of this array which are specified in the
MULT option or on fault cards will be reflected in output generated by PRINT
ARRAYS and in the MAP file. The values of this array will not be modified if
transmissibilities are further modified by OVER or VOVER cards. 00
5.40.2 Y Direction Transmissibility Multiplier (TMY)
TMY option (amin amax nl)

Definition: 00
TMY The y direction transmissibility multiplier for

blocks (i,j-1,k) and (i,j,k) and controls flow between
them. For j = 1, TMY is zero.
NOTE: Omit if NY = 1.
The TMY values modify transmissibilities calculated for standard and

5.40.3 Z Direction Transmissibility Multiplier (TMZ)
TMZ option (amin amax nl)

Definition: 00

TMZ The z direction transmissibility multiplier for

blocks (i,j,k-1) and (i,j,k) and controls flow between
them. For k = 1, TMZ is zero.
NOTE: Omit if NZ = 1.
The TMZ values modify transmissibilities calculated for standard and

5.40.4 R Direction Transmissibility Multiplier (TMR)
TMR option (amin amax nl)

Definition: 00
TMR The r direction transmissibility multiplier for gridblock

(i,j,k) is defined at the boundary between blocks (i-
1,j,k) and (i,j,k) and controls flow between them. For i
= 1, TMR is zero.
NOTE: Omit if NR = 1.
The TMR values modify transmissibilities calculated for standard and

5.40.5 Theta Direction Transmissibility Multiplier (TMTH)
TMTH option (amin amax nl)

Definitions: 00
TMTH The theta direction transmissibility multiplier for

them. For j = 1, TMTH is zero.

NOTE: Omit if NTHETA = 1.
The TMTH values modify transmissibilities calculated for standard and

5.40.6 Left Diagonal Direction Transmissibility Multiplier (TMXYL)
TMXYL option (amin amax nl)

Definition: 00
TMXYL The left diagonal-direction transmissibility multiplier

for gridblock (i,j,k) is defined at the boundary between
blocks (i-1,j-1,k) and (i,j,k) and controls flow between
them. For i=1 and for j = 1, TMXYL is zero.
If the nine-point differencing operator is invoked (NINEPT Card) and

permeabilities are input, then the calculated values of TXYL are modified by this
array. The values of this array will not be modified if transmissibilities are
modified by OVER or VOVER cards. 00
5.40.7 Right Diagonal Direction Transmissibility Multiplier (TMXYR)
TMXYR option (amin amax nl)

Definition: 00
TMXYR The right diagonal-direction transmissibility multiplier

blocks (i+1,j-1,k) and (i,j,k) and controls flow between
them. For i = NX and for j = 1, TMXYR is zero.
If the nine-point differencing operator is invoked (NINEPT Card) and

permeabilities are input, then the calculated values of TXYR are modified by this
array. The values of this array will not be modified if transmissibilities are
modified by OVER or VOVER cards. 00

5.40.8 Fracture X Direction Transmissibility Multiplier (TMXF)
TMXF option (amin amax nl)

The TMXF array is only required when the DUAL option is in use and the
fracture transmissibility multipliers are different from the matrix multipliers. In
this case both the TMX and the TMXF arrays are entered. If the TMXF array is
omitted, the multipliers will be set equal to the corresponding matrix multipliers. 00
Definition: 00
TMXF Definition as for the TMX array. If omitted, the TMXF

array defaults to the values in the TMX array.
5.40.9 Fracture Y Direction Transmissibility Multiplier (TMYF)
TMYF option (amin amax nl)

The TMYF array is only required when the DUAL option is in use and the
this case both the TMY and the TMYF arrays are entered. If the TMYF array is
omitted, the multipliers will be set equal to the corresponding matrix multipliers. 00
Definition: 00
TMYF Definition as for the TMY array. If omitted, the TMYF

array defaults to the values in the TMY array.
5.40.10 Fracture Z Direction Transmissibility Multiplier (TMZF)
TMZF option (amin amax nl)

The TMZF array is only required when the DUAL option is in use and the fracture
transmissibility multipliers are different from the matrix multipliers. In this case
both the TMZ and the TMZF arrays are entered. If the TMZF array is omitted, the
multipliers will be set equal to the corresponding matrix multipliers. 00
Definition: 00
TMZF Definition as for the TMZ array. If omitted, the TMZF

array defaults to the values in the TMZ array.

5.40.11 Fracture R Direction Transmissibility Multiplier (TMRF)
TMRF option (amin amax nl)

The TMRF array is only required when the DUAL option is in use and the fracture
transmissibility multipliers are different from the matrix multipliers. In this case
both the TMR and the TMRF arrays are entered. If the TMRF array is omitted, the
multipliers will be set equal to the corresponding matrix multipliers. 00
Definition: 00
TMRF Definition as for the TMR array. If omitted, the TMRF

array defaults to the values in the TMR array.
5.40.12 Fracture Theta Direction Tranmissibility Multiplier (TMTHF)
TMTHF option (amin amax nl)

The TMTHF array is only required when the DUAL option is in use and the
this case both the TMTH and the TMTHF arrays are entered. If the TMTHF array
is omitted, the multipliers will be set equal to the corresponding matrix
multipliers. 00
Definition: 00
TMTHF Definition as for the TMTH array. If omitted, the

TMTHF array defaults to the values in the TMTH
array.
5.40.13 Fracture Left Diagonal Direction Transmissibility Multiplier (TMXYLF)
TMXYLF option (amin amax nl)

The TMXYLF array is only required when the DUAL option is in use and the
this case both the TMXYL and the TMXYLF arrays are entered. If the TMXYLF
array is omitted, the multipliers will be set equal to the corresponding matrix
multipliers. 00
Definition: 00

TMXYLF Definition as for the TMXYL array. If omitted, the

TMXYLF array defaults to the values in the TMXYL
array.
5.40.14 Fracture Right Diagonal Direction Transmissibility Multiplier

(TMXYRF)
TMXYRF option (amin amax nl)

The TMXYRF array is only required when the DUAL option is in use and the
this case both the TMXYR and the TMXYRF arrays are entered. If the TMXYRF
array is omitted, the multipliers will be set equal to the corresponding matrix
multipliers. 00
Definition: 00
TMXYRF Definition as for the TMXYR array. If omitted, the

TMXYRF array defaults to the values in the TMXYR
array.
5.40.15 X Direction Thermal Transmissibility Multiplier (TTMX) (VIP-THERM)
TTMX option (amin amax n1)

Definition: 00
TTMX The x direction thermal transmissibility multiplier for

them. For i = 1, TTMX is zero.
NOTE: Omit if NX = 1.
The TTMX values modify thermal transmissibilities calculated for standard and
thermal transmissibilities are further modified by OVER or VOVER cards. 00

5.40.16 Y Direction Thermal Transmissibility Multiplier (TTMY) (VIP-THERM)
TTMY option (amin amax n1)

Definition: 00
TTMY The y direction thermal transmissibility multiplier for

them. For j = 1, TTMY is zero.
NOTE: Omit if NY = 1.
The TTMY values modify thermal transmissibilities calculated for standard and
5.40.17 Z Direction Thermal Transmissibility Multiplier (TTMZ) (VIP-THERM)
TTMZ option (amin amax n1)

Definition: 00
TTMZ The z direction thermal transmissibility multiplier for

blocks (i,j,k-1) and (i,j,k) and controls flow between
them. For k = 1, TTMZ is zero.
NOTE: Omit if NZ = 1.
The TTMZ values modify thermal transmissibilities calculated for standard and
5.40.18 R Direction Thermal Transmissibility Multiplier (TTMR) (VIP-THERM)
TTMR option (amin amax n1)

Definition: 00
TTMR The r direction thermal transmissibility multiplier for

them. For i = 1, TTMR is zero.
NOTE: Omit if NR = 1.
The TTMR values modify thermal transmissibilities calculated for standard and
5.40.19 Theta Direction Thermal Transmissibility Multiplier (TTMTH) (VIP-

THERM)
TTMTH option (amin amax n1)

Definitions: 00
TTMTH The theta direction thermal transmissibility multiplier

them. For j = 1, TTMTH is zero.
NOTE: Omit if NTHETA = 1.
The TTMTH values modify thermal transmissibilities calculated for standard and

5.41 COARSEN Control Integer (ICOARS)

The ICOARS array is used by the COARSEN (Section 8.1) option as an indicator
flag to skip coarsening in the indicated regions. 00
ICOARS, integer Gridblocks with ICOARS values other than 0 are not
coarsened, even if they are part of COARSEN data.
5.42 Bulk Volume Multiplier (MULTBV)

MULTBV, real The bulk volume calculated from the corner point
geometry is multiplied by MULTBV values. The
operation also effects the pore volume.

5.43 Inactive Gridblock Indicators

Gridblocks are considered inactive if their pore volume is zero. A zero gridblock
pore volume results when any of porosity (POR), net thickness (DZNET), or net/
gross ratio (NETGRS) is zero. 00
Additionally, gridblocks can be specifically made inactive by entering the

DEADCELL and/or LIVECELL indicator arrays. 00
NOTE: A gridblock will be inactive if any of the POR, DZNET, NETGRS,

DEADCELL, or LIVECELL conditions are satisfied.
5.43.1 Inactive Gridblock Indicator (DEADCELL)
DEADCELL option (amin amax nl)

Definition: 00
DEADCELL, integer Inactive gridblock indicator (values 1 or 0). A value of

1 indicates an inactive gridblock; a value of 0 indicates
an active gridblock.
5.43.2 Active Gridblock Indicator (LIVECELL)
LIVECELL option (amin amax nl)

Definition: 00
LIVECELL, integer Active gridblock indicator (values 1 or 0). A value of 1

indicates an active gridblock; a value of 0 indicates an
inactive gridblock.

5.44 Function Input Option (FUNCTION)

The function input option can be applied in reservoir simulations to: 00
■ Calculate average values of rock property arrays in specified gridblocks using

information about their values in some reservoir locations.
■ Represent some correlations between reservoir rock properties.
Functional dependencies can be represented in tabular or analytical forms. If the

tabular function option is applied, known values of output arrays at given values
of input arrays should be input as function table entries. In this case, an
interpolation procedure is applied for the determination of the values of the output
arrays in reservoir gridblocks. In the analytical function option, the values of the
output arrays in the gridblocks are calculated as an analytical function of input
array values. 00
Advanced multidimensional spline interpolation technique is used for the tabular

function representation. The order of the spline and the number of the points of
the function table, which are used for the interpolation, are defined internally
minimizing the interpolation error. In general, the different number of the function
table entries are used for the calculation of the function values in different
gridblocks. However, the user can control the number of the function table entries
which are used for the interpolation and the spline order using the parameter m in
the FUNCTION card and the DRANGE card. 00
The entries of the function table can be input in arbitrary order. However, they are
internally sorted for each gridblock in increasing order of a distance between
values of the input variables in the gridblock and in the function table. The first m
entries of the sorted function table which satisfy the constraints defined in the
DRANGE card are used for the interpolation. 00
The function procedure can be executed only for selected blocks. These blocks are
defined by the FUNCTION, BLOCKS, and/or RANGE INPUT cards. 00
The optional ANALYT, BLOCKS, RANGE INPUT, RANGE OUTPUT,

DRANGE, and VOLAVR cards can be input in arbitrary order. 00
A numerical integration technique is applied in the VOLAVR procedure for the

calculation of the volume-averaged values of output variables. The numbers of the
quadrature points in the X, Y, and Z directions in corner point geometry models
can be input in the CORNER card. They are set to three in rectangular geometry
models. This procedure is not implemented for radial geometry models. 00
Input or output variables in the function option can be integer arrays like ISAT,
ISATI, IREGION, IPVT, ICMT, and/or IEQUIL. They are internally transformed
in a real data type and, then, the standard function option is applied. 00

Note that when IREGION is used as an input or output array, and extra regions
have been defined, the extra region values are not involved in the FUNCTION
calculations. For IREGION as input, only the original region number is used in
the function table lookup. For IREGION as output, only the original region
number is replaced; the extra region numbers are retained. 00
Analytical functions can be applied using the ANALYT card. In this case, the
function table entries, DRANGE and VOLAVR cards are ignored. In the ABS,
EXP, EXP10, LOG, LOG10, SQRT, SIN, COS, GE, LE, POLYN analytical
functions, only the first input array is used. All other input arrays are ignored. In
the DIV, MULT, ADD, SUBT, MIN, MAX analytical functions, the first two input
arrays are used. All other input arrays are ignored. If the number of the input
arrays in the DIV, MULT, ADD, SUBT, MIN, MAX analytical functions is equal
to one, the second input array is assumed to be equal to the first input array. 00
FUNCTION (reg_type) (m p1 p2 . . . pN)

(GRID name)
(r1,r2,...,rL)
(ANALYT function_type (a0 a1 ... an))
(BLOCKS i1 i2 j1 j2 k1 k2)
(RANGE INPUT xmin1 xmax1 . . . xminN xmaxN)
(RANGE OUTPUT ymin1 ymax1 . . . yminK ymaxK)
(DRANGE dr1 dr2 . . . drN)
(VOLAVR)
inp_arr1...inp_arrN OUTPUT out_arr1...out_arrK
Function table entries as required.
Definitions: 00
FUNCTION The function input table is defined.
reg_type Type of regions in which function input option is applied.

One of the following: ISAT, ISATI, IREGION, IEQUIL,
ICMT, IPVT, ITRAN, IWIRC.
m Maximum number of the function table entries which can

be used for the interpolation. The
default value is the number of the entries in the function

table.
p1...pN Shifts of the first, second, ... , and N-th input arrays. They
are deducted from the values of the input variables in the
function table. The default values are zero.
r1,...,rL Region numbers. The function input option is applied

only in gridblocks which belong to one of these regions.

ANALYT Analytical function option.
function_type Analytical function type. The following analytical

functions can be used:
POLYN is the polynomial of the n-th order. The

polynomial order n can be not larger than nine. The value
of the output array (y) in a gridblock is determined as y =
ao xn + a1 xn-1+ . . . + an, where x is the value of the first
input array in the gridblock;
ABS is the absolute value y = |x|;
EXP is the exponential function y = ex;
EXP10 is the exponential function y = 10x;
LOG is the natural logarithm y = ln|x|;
LOG10 is the common logarithm y = log10|x|;
SQRT is the square root ( y = x ); ;
SIN is the sine of degrees y = sin(x);
COS is the cosine of degrees y = cos(x);
GE is the step function
x, ifx greater than or equal to a 0

y =
a 1 , otherwise;
LE is the step function
x, if x is less than or equal to a 0

y =
a 1 , otherwise;
ADD is the sum of the values of the two input arrays in a

gridblock y = x1 + x2;
SUBT is the difference of the values of the two input

arrays in a gridblock y = x1 - x2;
DIV is the ratio of the values of the two input arrays in a

gridblock

( x 1 ⁄ x 2 ) ,if x 2 is not equal tozero,

y = ,
x1 ;
MULT is the product of the values of the two input arrays

in a gridblock y = x1 × x2;
MIN is the minimum of the values of the two input arrays

in a gridblock y = min (x1,x2);
MAX is the maximum of the values of the two input

arrays in a gridblock y = max (x1,x2);
a0,a1,...,an Coefficients of the polynomial or step function;
BLOCKS Range of blocks is defined. The function input option is

applied only in gridblocks from this range.
i, j, k Gridblock locations are defined by indices i,j,k in

reference to the (x,y,z) or (r,theta,z) grid. The function
input option is applied to gridblocks that fall in the
portion of the grid defined by:
i1 ≤ I ≤ i2,
j1 ≤ J ≤ j 2,
k1 ≤ K ≤ k2.
If the BLOCKS card is not specified, the default values

are:
i1 = j1 = k1 = 1,
i2 = NX, j2 = NY, k2 = NZ.
RANGE INPUT Ranges of input variables are defined.
xmin,xmax Minimum and maximum values of the input variables.

The function input option is applied only in gridblocks in
which input variables xi belong to the specified ranges:
xmini ≤ xi ≤ xmaxi, i=1, ..., N
If the RANGE INPUT card in not specified, the default

values are:
xmin1 = xmin2 = . . . = xminN = -1.e+12,

xmax1 = xmax2 = , . . = xmaxN = 1.e+12.
RANGE OUTPUT Ranges of output variables are defined.
ymin,ymax Minimum and maximum values of the output variables.

The output variable is set to the maximum value if the

interpolated value of the variable is larger than the

maximum value. The output variable is set to the
minimum value if the interpolated value of the variable is
smaller than the minimum value.
If the RANGE OUTPUT card is not specified, the default

values are:
ymin1 = ymin2 = . . . = yminK = -1.e+12,

ymax1 = ymax2 = . . . = ymaxK = 1.e+12.
DRANGE Ranges of function table entries are defined.
dr1,...,drN Maximum distances from the input point. The j-th entry
of the function table (xj,1, xj,2,...,xj,N) is used for the
interpolation of the output variables at the input point (x1,
x2, ..., xN) only if the following constraints are satisfied
|x1 - xj,1 | ≤ dr1,

|x2 - xj,2 | ≤ dr2,
....
|xN - xj,N | ≤ drN.
If the DRANGE card is not specified, the default values

are:
dr1 = dr2 = . . . = drN = 1.e+12.
VOLAVR The volume-averaged procedure is applied. The volume-

averaged values of the output variables in gridblocks are
calculated. Only the XC, YC, and MDEPTH arrays can
be used as input variables in the procedure. If the
VOLAVR keyword is not included the output variables
are calculated at block centers.
inp_arr Name of an input array (input variable). One of the

following array names can be used:
WORKA1, WORKA2, WORKA3

XC, YC, THETA, DX, DY, DZ, DZNET, NETGRS,
DXB, DYB, DZB, DZBNET, MDEPTH, R, DR,
DTHETA, ZCORNW, ZCORNE, ZCORSW, ZBOT,
ZBOTNW, ZBOTNE, ZBOTSW,
POR, KX, KY, KZ, KXF, KYF, KZF, KR, KTHETA,
KRF, KTF, CR,
TMX, TMY, TMZ, TMXYL, TMXYR, TMR, TMTH,

TMXF, TMYF, TMZF, TMXYLF, TMX YRF, TMRF,
TMTHF, KMULX, KMULY, KMULZ, KMULR,
KMULTH, KWHYS, KOHYS, CRD, CRR, PD, PR, FR,
PORMAX, PORMIN, CPR0, KTX0, KTY0, KTZ0,

KTR0, KTTH0, TXT0, TYT0, TZT0, TRT0, TTHT0,

ICPRTB, TTMX, TTMY, TTMZ, TTMR, TTMTH
PV, TX, TR, TY, TTHETA, TZ, TXYR, TXYL,

ISAT, ISATI, IPVT, IPVTW,IREGION, IEQUIL, ICMT,
ITRAN, IWIRC, SW, SG, P, TEMP, FVEWO, FVEGO,
SWL, SWR, SWRO, SWU, SGL, SGR, SGRO, SGU,
SGRW, KROLW, KRWRO, KRGRO,
ISATX+, ISATX-, ISATY+, ISATY-,

ISATZ+, ISATZ-, ISATA, ISATV,
ISTIX+, ISTIX-, ISTIY+, ISTIY-,

ISTIZ+, ISTIZ-, ISTIA, ISTIV,
SWLX+, SWLX-, SWLY+, SWLY-,

SWLZ+, SWLZ-, SWLA, SWLV,
SWRX+, SWRX-, SWRY+, SWRY-,

SWRZ+, SWRZ-, SWRA, SWRV,
SWROX+, SWROX-, SWROY+, SWROY-,

SWROZ+, SWROZ-, SWRA, SWROV,
SWUX+, SWUX-, SWUY+, SWUY-,

SWUZ+, SWUZ-, SWUA, SWUV,
SGLX+, SGLX-, SGLY+, SGLY-,

SGLZ+, SGLZ-, SGLA, SGLV,
SGRX+, SGRX-, SGRY+, SGRY-,

SGRZ+, SGRZ-, SGRA, SGRV,
SGROX+, SGROX-, SGROY+, SGROY-,

SGROZ+, SGROZ-, SGROA, SGROV,
SGUX+, SGUX-, SGUY+, SGUY-,

SGUZ+, SGUZ-, SGUA, SGUV,
SGRWX+, SGRWX-, SGRWY+, SGRWY-,

SGRWZ+, SGRWZ-, SGRWA, SGRWV,
KOLWX+, KOLWX-, KOLWY+, KOLWY-, KOLWZ+,

KOLWZ-, KOLWA, KOLWV,
KWROX+, KWROX-, KWROY+, KWROY-,

KWROZ+, KWROZ-, KWROA, KWROV,
KGROX+, KGROX-, KGROY+, KGROY-,

KGROZ+, KGROZ-, KGROA, KGROV.

In addition, for VIP-DUAL , one of the following array

names can also be used.
NETGF, MDEPF, PORF, KXFEFF, KYFEFF, KZFEFF,

KRFEFF, KTFEFF, CRF, PVF, TXF, TYF, TZF, TRF,
TTHETF, TXYRF, TXYLF, TEX, LX, LY, LZ,
TDIFFG, TDIFFO, SIGMA, SIGMAD,
ISATF, ISATIF, IREGF, ICMTF, ITRANF, IWIRCF,
SWF, SGF, PF, FVEWOF, FVEGOF, SWLF, SWRF,
SWROF, SWUF, SGLF, SGRF, SGROF, SGUF, SGRWF,
KROLWF, KRWROF, KRGROF,
ISATFX+, ISATFX-, ISATFY+, ISATFY-,

ISATFZ+, ISATFZ-, ISATFA, ISATFV,
ISTIFX+, ISTIFX-, ISTIFY+, ISTIFY-,

ISTIFZ+, ISTIFZ-, ISTIFA, ISTIFV,
SWLFX+, SWLFX-, SWLFY+, SWLFY-,

SWLFZ+, SWLFZ-, SWLFA, SWLFV,
SWRFX+, SWRFX-, SWRFY+, SWRFY-,

SWRFZ+, SWRFZ-, SWRFA, SWRFV,
SWROFX+, SWROFX-, SWROFY+, SWROFY-,

SWROFZ+, SWROFZ-, SWROFA, SWROFV,
SWUFX+, SWUFX-, SWUFY+, SWUFY-,

SWUFZ+, SWUFZ-, SWUFA, SWUFV,
SGLFX+, SGLFX-, SGLFY+, SGLFY-,

SGLFZ+, SGLFZ-, SGLFA, SGLFV,
SGRFX+, SGRFX-, SGRFY+, SGRFY-,

SGRFZ+, SGRFZ-, SGRFA, SGRFV,
SGROFX+, SGROFX-, SGROFY+, SGROFY-,

SGROFZ+, SGROFZ-, SGROFA, SGROFV,
SGUFX+, SGUFX-, SGUFY+, SGUFY-,

SGUFZ+, SGUFZ-, SGUFA, SGUFV,
SGRWFX+, SGRWFX-, SGRWFY+, SGRWFY-,

SGRWFZ+, SGRWFZ-, SGRWFA, SGRWFV,
KOLWFX+, KOLWFX-, KOLWFY+, KOLWFY-,

KOLWFZ+, KOLWFZ-, KOLWFA, KOLWFV,
KWROFX+, KWROFX-, KWROFY+, KWROFY-,

KWROFZ+, KWROFZ-, KWROFA, KWROFV,

KGROFX+, KGROFX-, KGROFY+, KGROFY-,

KGROFZ+, KGROFZ-, KGROFA, KGROFV.
Several names can be included. The array names XC,

YC, and MDEPTH can be used to input the x-, y-, and z-
coordinates of points in rectangular and corner point
geometry models. The array names R, THETA, and
MDEPTH can be used to input coordinates of points in
radial geometry models.
WORKA1, WORKA2, WORKA3 are temporary work

arrays that can be read in or defined as OUTPUT arrays.
OUTPUT This keyword separates the names of the input and output
arrays.
out_arr Name of an output array (output variable). One of the

following names can be used:
WORKA1, WORKA2, WORKA3

NETGRS, POR, KX, KY, KZ, KXF, KYF, KZF, KR,
KTHETA, KRF, KTF, CR,
PV, TX, TR, TY, TTHETA, TZ, TXYR, TXYL,
ISAT, ISATI, IPVT, IPVTW, IREGION, IEQUIL, ICMT,
ITRAN, IWIRC, SW, SG, P, TEMP, FVEWO, FVEGO,
SWL, SWR, SWRO, SWU, SGL, SGR, SGRO, SGU,
SGRW, KROLW, KRWRO, KRGRO,
TMX, TMY, TMZ, TMXYL, TMXYR, TMR, TMTH,

TMXF, TMYF, TMZF, TMXYLF, TMX YRF, TMRF,
TMTHF, KMULX, KMULY, KMULZ, KMULR,
KMULTH, KWHYS, KOHYS, CRD, CRR, PD, PR, FR,
PORMAX, PORMIN, CPR0, KTX0, KTY0, KTZ0,
KTR0, KTTH0, TXT0, TYT0, TZT0, TRT0, TTHT0,
ICPRTB, TTMX, TTMY, TTMZ, TTMR, TTMTH
ISATX+, ISATX-, ISATY+, ISATY-,

ISATZ+, ISATZ-, ISATA, ISATV,
ISTIX+, ISTIX-, ISTIY+, ISTIY-,

ISTIZ+, ISTIZ-, ISTIA, ISTIV,
SWLX+, SWLX-, SWLY+, SWLY-,

SWLZ+, SWLZ-, SWLA, SWLV,
SWRX+, SWRX-, SWRY+, SWRY-,

SWRZ+, SWRZ-, SWRA, SWRV,
SWROX+, SWROX-, SWROY+, SWROY-,

SWROZ+, SWROZ-, SWRA, SWROV,

SWUX+, SWUX-, SWUY+, SWUY-,

SWUZ+, SWUZ-, SWUA, SWUV,
SGLX+, SGLX-, SGLY+, SGLY-,

SGLZ+, SGLZ-, SGLA, SGLV,
SGRX+, SGRX-, SGRY+, SGRY-,

SGRZ+, SGRZ-, SGRA, SGRV,
SGROX+, SGROX-, SGROY+, SGROY-,

SGROZ+, SGROZ-, SGROA, SGROV,
SGUX+, SGUX-, SGUY+, SGUY-,

SGUZ+, SGUZ-, SGUA, SGUV,
SGRWX+, SGRWX-, SGRWY+, SGRWY-,

SGRWZ+, SGRWZ-, SGRWA, SGRWV,
KOLWX+, KOLWX-, KOLWY+, KOLWY-, KOLWZ+,

KOLWZ-, KOLWA, KOLWV,
KWROX+, KWROX-, KWROY+, KWROY-,

KWROZ+, KWROZ-, KWROA, KWROV,
KGROX+, KGROX-, KGROY+, KGROY-,

KGROZ+, KGROZ-, KGROA, KGROV.
In addition, for VIP-DUAL , one of the following array

names can also be used.
NETGF, PORF, KXFEFF, KYFEFF, KZFEFF, KRFEFF,

KTFEFF, CRF, PVF, TXF, TYF, TZF, TRF, TTHETF,
TXYRF, TXYLF, TEX, LX, LY, LZ,
TDIFFG, TDIFFO, SIGMA, SIGMAD,
ISATF, ISATIF, IREGF, ICMTF, ITRANF, IWIRCF,
SWF, SGF, PF, FVEWOF, FVEGOF, SWLF, SWRF,
SWROF, SWUF, SGLF, SGRF, SGROF, SGUF, SGRWF,
KROLWF, KRWROF, KRGROF,
ISATFX+, ISATFX-, ISATFY+, ISATFY-,
ISATFZ+, ISATFZ-, ISATFA, ISATFV,
ISTIFX+, ISTIFX-, ISTIFY+, ISTIFY-,

ISTIFZ+, ISTIFZ-, ISTIFA, ISTIFV,
SWLFX+, SWLFX-, SWLFY+, SWLFY-,

SWLFZ+, SWLFZ-, SWLFA, SWLFV,
SWRFX+, SWRFX-, SWRFY+, SWRFY-,

SWRFZ+, SWRFZ-, SWRFA, SWRFV,

SWROFX+, SWROFX-, SWROFY+, SWROFY-,

SWROFZ+, SWROFZ-, SWROFA, SWROFV,
SWUFX+, SWUFX-, SWUFY+, SWUFY-,

SWUFZ+, SWUFZ-, SWUFA, SWUFV,
SGLFX+, SGLFX-, SGLFY+, SGLFY-,

SGLFZ+, SGLFZ-, SGLFA, SGLFV,
SGRFX+, SGRFX-, SGRFY+, SGRFY-,

SGRFZ+, SGRFZ-, SGRFA, SGRFV,
SGROFX+, SGROFX-, SGROFY+, SGROFY-,

SGROFZ+, SGROFZ-, SGROFA, SGROFV,
SGUFX+, SGUFX-, SGUFY+, SGUFY-,

SGUFZ+, SGUFZ-, SGUFA, SGUFV,
SGRWFX+, SGRWFX-, SGRWFY+, SGRWFY-,

SGRWFZ+, SGRWFZ-, SGRWFA, SGRWFV,
KOLWFX+, KOLWFX-, KOLWFY+, KOLWFY-,

KOLWFZ+, KOLWFZ-, KOLWFA, KOLWFV,
KWROFX+, KWROFX-, KWROFY+, KWROFY-,

KWROFZ+, KWROFZ-, KWROFA, KWROFV,
KGROFX+, KGROFX-, KGROFY+, KGROFY-,

KGROFZ+, KGROFZ-, KGROFA, KGROFV.
Several names can be included. The interpolation

procedure is executed for every output variable
independently.
WORKA1, WORKA2, WORKA3 are used to store

intermediate values for later use as an inp-arr for
subsquent FUNCTION operations.
Every function table entry should be input on one line. It should consist of N
values of the input variables and K correspondent values of the output variable.
The function table entries can be input in arbitrary order. 00
NOTE: 1. FUNCTION cards must appear after all array input and before
any MULT card or fault data. Several FUNCTION cards can be
included in the data set.
2. Note that when IREGION is used as an input or output array,

and extra regions have been defined, the extra region values are

not involved in the FUNCTION calculations. For IREGION as

input, only the original region number is used in the function
table lookup. For IREGION as output, only the original region
number is replaced; the extra region numbers are retained.
Examples: 00
C Problem 1.
C Define the volume-averaged values of the permeability KX in
C Blocks (5,1,1)and (6,1,1) using its values in seven reservoir locations
FUNCTION
BLOCKS 5 6 1 1 1 1
VOLAVR
XC YC MDEPTH OUTPUT KX
4000 9000 8335 300
4210 9200 8335 304.455
4300 9300 8335 303.3
4400 9400 8335 304.4
4500 9600 8335 305.8
4600 9800 8335 306.6
5000 10000 8335 311
C 00
C Problem 2.
C Define the permeability KX as a function of the porosity POR
C and the critical water saturation SWR in gridblocks from the
C second and fourth output regions, in which the critical water
C saturation values
C are in the range [0.18,0.2].
C
FUNCTION IREGION
24
RANGE INPUT 0.18 0.2
SWR POR OUTPUT KX
0.1909 0.2 10.4767
0.1909 0.4 83.8135
0.1909 0.6 282.871
0.1909 0.8 670.508
C
C Problem 3.
C Define permeability KX as the following analytical function
C of porosity POR :
C KX = 10(17.06715 POR - 2.70903).
C Set permeability to zero, if its calculated value is less than one.
C
FUNCTION

ANALYT POLYN 17.06715 - 2.70903

POR OUTPUT KX
C
FUNCTION
ANALYT EXP10
KX OUTPUT KX
C
FUNCTION
ANALYT GE 1 0
KX OUTPUT KX 00
5.45 Reference Rock Specific Heat Capacity (CPR0) (VIP-THERM)

Reference values of rock specific heat capacity correspond to values at standard
temperature. Actual values are calculated from the reference values using the
equation:
CPR = CPR0 (1 + DCPRDT (T - TS))
CPR0, Btu/FT3 °F
(KJ/M3°C) Reference rock heat capacity of each gridblock.
5.46 Reference Thermal Conductivity (VIP-THERM)

Reference values of thermal conductivity correspond to liquid-filled pore volume.
Actual values are calculated from the reference values using the equation:
KT = KT0 (1 - DKDSG*SG)
where KT is thermal conductivity.
5.46.1 X(R) Direction

Omit if NX=1 or NR=1.
Rectangular Grid:
KTX0 Reference thermal conductivity in the x-direction,

applied to the gridblock center, Btu/D ft. °F(W/M°K).
Radial Grid:
KTR0 Reference thermal conductivity in the r direction applied

to the gridblock center, Btu/D ft °F (W/M°K).
5.46.2 Y(Theta) Direction

Omit if NY=1 or NTHETA=1

Enter one of the following arrays:
Rectangular Grid:
KTY0 Reference thermal conductivity in the y direction, applied

to the gridblock center, Btu/D ft. F (W/M °K).
Radial Grid:
KTTH0 Reference thermal conductivity in the theta direction,

applied to the gridblock center, Btu/D ft. °F (W/M °K).
5.46.3 Z Direction
Omit if NZ=1
Enter one of the following arrays:
KTZ0 Reference thermal conductivity in the z direction, applied

to the gridblock center, Btu/D ft. °F (W/M °K).
5.47 Water-Oil Hysteresis Arrays (VIP-THERM)
5.47.1 KWHYS Array

The KWHYS array is used to specify the value of Kwrev (Section 4.3.5). Default
is 1.0. A value of zero results in initialization to the krw imbibition (water-wet) or
drainage (oil-wet) curve. Values must lie between zero and one.
KWHYS, fraction Value of Kwrev defined in Section 4.3.5.
5.47.2 KOHYS Array

The KOHYS array is used to specify the value of Korev (Section 4.3.5). Default is
1.0.
KOHYS, fraction Value of Korev defined in Section 4.3.5.

5.48 Beattie et. al Fracture Model Arrays (VIP-THERM)

Scalar parameters specified in the PORDEF data (Section 4.18) may optionally be
specified as gridblock arrays.
PD, psia (kPa) Dilation pressure.
PR, psia (kPa) Recompaction pressure.
CRD, psia-1 (kPa-1) Dilant rock compressibility.
FR, fraction Permanent fraction of total dilation on recompaction to P

= 0.
The elastic rock compressibility (CR) may be specified as a gridblock array as

described in Section 5.23.
Permeability multipliers for the fracture model (Section 4.18.2.1, Reference 32)
must be specified in each flow direction, including diagonal directions if the
NINEPT option is in use.
Rectangular Grid:
KMULX X-direction permeability multiplier, applied to

transmissibility at i - 1/2.
KMULY Y-direction permeability multiplier, applied to

transmissibility at j - 1/2.
KMULZ Z-direction permeability multiplier, applied to

transmissibility at k - 1/2.
For NINEPT option:
KMLXYR +x, -y direction permeability multiplier, applied to

transmissibility at i + 1/2, j - 1/2.
KMLXYL -x, -y direction permeability multiplier, applied to

transmissibility at i - 1/2, j - 1/2.
Radial Grid:
KMULR R-direction permeability multiplier, applied to

transmissibility at i - 1/2.
KMULTH Thetha-direction permeability multiplier, applied to

transmissibility at j - 1/2.
KMULZ Z-direction permeability multiplier, applied to

transmissibility at k - 1/2.

5.49 Rock Heat Capacity Variations (ICPRTB) (VIP-THERM)

The ICPRTB array is required if more than one set of rock heat capacity tables
(Section 4.19) are to be used.
ICPRTB, integer Integer values that distinguish areas containing rock

types which require unique heat capacity description.
Each value in the ICPRTB array directly refers to a rock
heat capacity table input. Default sets the entire array to
1.

Chapter
6
Fault Data
00000
6.1 Fault Option

Also see Section 2.2.9.2. 00
The VIP-CORE Fault option automatically allows a layer on one side of a fault to
flow into one or more different layers on the other side of a fault, as illustrated in
Figure 6-1, without additional "model layers".
Figure 6-1: Faulted Reservoir In Cross-Section
VIP-CORE models faulted reservoirs subject to the following restrictions and

guidelines:
1. The standard Fault option assumes that the faults occur at gridblock faces and
that the fault throw (depth difference along the fault) is constant in the z
direction. (That is, if a fault occurs at the interface between blocks (I-1,J,1)
and (I,J,1), then it also occurs, with the same throw, at the interfaces between
blocks (I-1,J,K) and (I,J,K) for all K, NP1 ≤ K ≤ NP2. NP1 and NP2 default to
1 and NZ, respectively.) By using the corner-point option, it is possible to
model a sloping fault by defining the blocks along the fault to have sloping
faces. In this case, the fault is still "logically vertical" since blocks in any
column of the grid remain adjacent only to blocks in one of the four
surrounding (North, South, East, or West) columns.
2. Within a particular column of blocks, the displacement is uniform. The

amount of the shift can vary areally, and for sloping faults, the actual shift
R5000.0.1 Fault Data 6-481

along the fault face depends on the angle between the face and the vertical for
each block.
3. Permeabilities at gridblock centers must be specified. TX, TY, KXF, and KYF
are not valid input in the presence of faults.
4. When faults are modelled using a non-corner-point grid, VIP-CORE sets

DX=DXB, DY=DYB, and DZ=DZB.
5. When possible, specify uniform thicknesses for each layer.
6. Depths in non-corner-point grids must be correctly specified in the DEPTH or

MDEPTH array to reflect the presence of faults; i.e., the simulator makes no
automatic adjustments. Similarly, the entries in the ZCORN array must be set
to correctly give the depth of the southeast corner of each block in each layer
of grid points. The simulator will automatically compute the ZCORNE,
ZCORNW, and ZCORSW arrays to reflect the faults.
7. In non-corner point grids fault connections will be correctly calculated when

gaps occur between layers (gridblock thicknesses less than depth differences
between gridblocks).
8. Specify the same fault displacement, fshift, as indicated by the depth

differences. Be sure to use the proper sign (negative or positive) for the fault
displacement variable found on the FX and FY cards.
9. When possible, use the "LAYER" option on the "DEPTH" card to specify
depths.
6-482 Fault Data R5000.0.1

6.2 Start of Fault Data (FAULTS)

A FAULTS card must precede all of the fault description data.
FAULTS
(FNAME fname)
Definitions:

group of blocks defined by the following FX, FY, etc.
data. A grid block will be assigned to a name based on
the last definition encountered. By default no identifying
name is assigned.

the first 256.
NOTE: 1. FNAME identifiers can also be assigned using the OVER, and
R5000.0.1 Fault Data 6-483

6.3 Standard Fault Data (FX, FR, FY, FTHETA, FXCORN,

FYCORN)
To describe a fault, the areal location, vertical displacement, and modification of
fault fluid flow transmissibility and fault heat conduction (thermal)
transmissibility (VIP-THERM only) must be specified. The FX and FY cards may
be used for this purpose for any grid. Additionally, the FXCORN and FYCORN
cards may be used for corner-point grids. The layer connections are generated
automatically. Omit the tmt data for VIP-COMP or VIP-ENCORE.
FX
FR i j1 (-j2) ±fshift (*tm *tmt)
or
FY
FTHETA j i1 (-i2) ±fshift (*tm *tmt)
or
FXCORN i j1 (-j2)
±fshift(j1) ±fshift(j1+1) ... ±fshift(j2)
(tm(j1) tm(j1+1) ... tm(j2-1))
(tmt(j1) tmt(j1+1) ... tmt(j2-1))
or
FYCORN j i1 (-i2)
fshift(i1) ±fshift(i1+1) ... ±fshift(i2)
(tm(i1) tm(i1+1) ... tm(i2-1))
(tmt(i1) tmt(i1+1) ... tmt(i2-1))
Definitions:
FX (FR), Alpha label indicating an x(r) direction fault is being

FXCORN described. An x(r) direction fault is defined at the
boundary between blocks (i-1,j,k) and (i,j,k).
i Gridblock number describing an x(r) direction fault.
The fault is at the gridblock face between blocks i-1
and i.
j1, j2 An FX/FR (FXCORN) fault begins at block (point) J
= j1 and extends through block (point) J = j2. The "-"
means up through and including j2. There are no
spaces between the sign and j2. If j2 is not entered, the
default is j2 = j1 for FX/FR and j2 = j1+1 for
FXCORN.
FY(FTHETA), Alpha label indicating a y(theta) direction fault is
FYCORN being described. A y(theta) direction fault is defined at
the boundary between blocks (i,j-1,k) and (i,j,k).
j Gridblock number describing a y(theta) direction fault.
The fault is at the gridblock face between blocks j-1
and j.
6-484 Fault Data R5000.0.1

i1, i2 An FY/FTHETA (FYCORN) fault begins at block

(point) I = i1 and extends through block (point) I = i2.
The "-" means up through and including i2. There are
no spaces between the sign and i2. If i2 is not entered,
the default is i2 = i1 for FY/FTHETA and i2 = i1+1 for
FYCORN.
fshift The amount of fault displacement, ft (m). A positive
amount indicates a downward fault shift, where I (J) is
"deeper" than I-1 (J-1). (Should be equal to the differ-
ence in depth or ZCORN values entered.) For
FXCORN (FYCORN) data, there needs to be either
one or j2-j1+1 (i2-i1+1) fshift values. If only one is
given, it is used along the entire fault.
tm Multiplier of the flow transmissibility across the fault.
Applies to transmissibilities for all blocks along the
areal extent of the fault described on the data card,
over the entire vertical displacement. For FX/FR (FY/
FTHETA) data, there are no spaces between the multi-
plier and tm, *tm. The default is 1. For FXCORN
(FYCORN) data, the multiplier sign is not entered; the
default is 1. There needs to be either one or j2-j1 (i2-i1)
tm values. If only one is given, it is used for all blocks
along the fault.
tmt Enter for VIP-THERM only. Multiplier of the thermal
transmissibility across the fault. Applies to thermal
tranmissibilities for all blocks along the areal extent of
the fault described on the data card, over the entire
vertical displacement. For FX/FR (FY/FTHETA) data,
there are no spaces between the multiplier and tmt,
*tmt. For FX/FR (FY/FTHETA) data, if any multi-
plier (tm or tmt) is specified, then both tm and tmt
must be specified. The default is 1. For FXCORN
(FYCORN) data, the multiplier sign is not entered; the
default is 1. There needs to be either one or j2-j1 (i2-i1)
tmt values. If only one is given, it is used for all
blocks along the fault. For FXCORN (FYCORN)
data, tmt is not required if tm is specified, but tm
must be specified if tmt is to be specified.
R5000.0.1 Fault Data 6-485

Example: X (I) 00
/
/
/
/
//////// /
/
/////
/
/
/
FAULT
FX 3 1 -2 -20.1
FY 3 3 -4 20.1
FX 5 3 -15.5
FY 4 5 10. *1.5
FX 6 4 -5 -5 *2 00
or 00
FAULT
FXCORN 3 1 -3
-20.1
FYCORN 3 3 -5
20.1
FXCORN 5 3 -4
-15.5
FYCORN 4 5 -6
10 00
1.5
FXCORN 6 4 -6
-5
2 00
6-486 Fault Data R5000.0.1

6.4 Specification of a Conductive Fault (LEAKY) (Not available in

VIP-THERM)
Fault cards FX, FY, FR, FTHETA, FXCORN, and FYCORN specify a fault shift.
The LEAKY card specifies that the fault described by the preceding fault card is a
conductive fault. This card must immediately follow the fault card.
LEAKY ileaky
Definitions:
LEAKY Keyword indicating that the fault described in the

preceding fault card is a conductive fault.
ileaky The input conductive fault number. Any number of

interconnecting faults may be assigned to the same
conductive fault. The user must ensure that the faults
assigned to the same conductive fault are
interconnected. The program does not check the
interconnectivity.
Example:
C Conductive fault #1
FX 3 1 -2 -20
LEAKY 1
FY 3 3 -4 20.
LEAKY 1
FX 5 3 -15.
LEAKY 1
FY 4 5 10.
LEAKY 1
C Non-Conductive fault
FX 10 2 -5 -10.
C Conductive-fault #2
FY 8 3 -8 10.
LEAKY 2
NOTE: For faults identified as conductive (leaky), fault connections will not be
generated. These faults are assumed to be infinitely conductive with
negligible storage.
R5000.0.1 Fault Data 6-487

6.5 Arbitrary Gridblock Connections
6.5.1 Non-Corner-Point Connections (FLTXC, FLTRC, FLTYC, FLTTC)

When using the standard Fault option it is possible to specify connections between
gridblocks by using the FLTXC (FLTRC) card for x(r) direction faults and the
FLTYC (FLTTC) card for y(theta) direction faults. These cards may also be used
to modify the transmissibility between two blocks connected as a result of a fault
specified with an FX (FR) or FY (FTHETA) card. The tt values are specified for
VIP-THERM only. Do not enter for VIP-COMP or VIP-ENCORE.
FLTXC ( TRNS0 )
FLTRC ( TRNS0 )
i j k 1 k2 t tt
(repeat as necessary)
or
FLTYC ( TRNS0 )
FLTTC ( TRNS0 )
i j k 1 k2 t tt
Definitions:
FLTXC (FLTRC) Alpha label indicating an x(r) direction fault is being

described.
FLTYC (FLTTC) Alpha label indicating a y(theta) direction fault is
being described.
TRNS0 Alpha label indicating that the TX and TXT0 arrays
(for FLTXC/FLTRC) or the TY and TYT0 arrays (for
FLTYC/FLTTC) are to be zeroed for all gridblocks in
the column defined by (i,j).
i The x(r) direction index. For an x(r) direction fault, the
fault is at the gridblock face between blocks i-1 and i.
For y(theta) direction faults, the x(r) direction index
for both blocks is i.
j The y(theta) direction index. For a y(theta) direction
fault, the fault is at the gridblock face between blocks
j-1 and j. For x(r) direction faults, the y(theta) direc-
tion index for both blocks is j.
k1 The z direction index of the gridblock on the "right" of
the fault. The indices of this gridblock are (i, j, k1).
6-488 Fault Data R5000.0.1

k2 The z direction index of the gridblock on the "left" of

the fault. The indices of this gridblock are (i-1, j, k2)
for x(r) direction faults and (i, j-1, k2) for y(theta)
direction faults.
t Transmissibility for the connection across the fault.
This replaces any other transmissibility defined for the
pair of blocks. Units for t are STB-CP/PSI-DAT
(STM3-CP/KPA-DAY).
tt Thermal transmissibility for the connection across the
fault. Enter only in VIP-THERM. This replaces any
other thermal transmissibility defined for the pair of
blocks. Units for tt are BTU/DAY-½°F (W/°C).
NOTE: 1. If the same fault connection is described more than once, the last
transmissibility value specified will be used.
2. When this option is activated, a -1 is printed in the Fault Arrays to

indicate the gridblock has a fault connection defined with this option.
Also, a -1 is printed as the value for shared thickness in the Fault Tables.
6.5.2 Arbitrary Gridblock Connections (FTRANS)

It is also possible to specify arbitrary connections between gridblocks by using the
FTRANS card. The data include the specifications of the two blocks and the value
to be used for the interblock transmissibility and a value for the thermal
transmissibility in VIP-THERM. FTRANS cards may also be used to modify the
transmissibility between two blocks connected (1) as a result of a fault specified
with an FX, FXCORN, FY, or FYCORN card, (2) as a result of automatic fault
generation due to data read for the ZCORNE, ZCORNW, ZCORSW, and CORP
arrays, or (3) as a result of the automatic detection of pinchouts. The simulator
will not permit FTRANS cards to define or modify the connection between two
blocks that would ordinarily be connected in a standard unfaulted grid; the OVER
and VOVER cards can be used for this purpose. Do not enter tt values for VIP-
COMP or VIP-ENCORE.
FTRANS
(GRID name)
(FNAME fname)
i1 j1 k1 i2 j2 k2 t (tt)
Definitions:
R5000.0.1 Fault Data 6-489


group of connections defined by the following i1 j1 k1
etc. data. A connection will be assigned to a name based
on the last definition encountered. By default no
identifying name is assigned.

the first 256.
i1 X(R) direction index for the block on the "left" of

the fault.
j1 Y(Theta) direction index for the block on the "left"
of the fault.
k1 Z direction index for the block on the "left" of the
fault.
i2 X(R) direction index for the block on the "right" of
the fault.
j2 Y(Theta) direction index for the block on the "right"
of the fault.
k2 Z direction index for the block on the "right" of the
fault.
This replaces any other transmissibility defined for
the pair of blocks. Units for t are the same as those
for transmissibilities read for the standard
transmissibility arrays.
tt Thermal transmissibility for the connection across
the fault. Enter only in VIP-THERM. This replaces
any other thermal transmissibility defined for the
pair of blocks. Units for tt are BTU/DAY-½°F (W/
°C).
6-490 Fault Data R5000.0.1

6.6 Arbitrary Gridblock Connections (VIP-DUAL)
6.6.1 Non-Corner-Point Connections for Fracture Blocks (FLTXCF, FLTRCF,

FLTYCF, FLTTCF)
When using the standard Fault option it is possible to specify connections between
fracture gridblocks by using the FLTXCF (FLTRCF) card for x(r) direction faults
and the FLTYCF (FLTTCF) card for y(theta) direction faults. These cards may
also be used to modify the transmissibility between two fracture blocks connected
as a result of a fault specified with an FX (FR) or FY (FTHETA) card.
FLTXCF ( TRNS0 )
FLTRCF ( TRNS0 )
i j k 1 k2 t
or
FLTYCF ( TRNS0 )
FLTTCF ( TRNS0 )
i j k 1 k2 t
Definitions: 00
FLTXCF Alpha label indicating an x(r) direction fault is being

(FLTRCF) described.
FLTYCF Alpha label indicating a y(theta) direction fault is
(FLTTCF) being described.
TRNS0 Alpha label indicating that the TXF array (for
FLTXCF/FLTRCF) or the TYF array (for FLTYCF/
FLTTCF) is to be zeroed for all gridblocks in the
column defined by (i,j).
i The x(r) direction index. For an x(r) direction fault,
the fault is at the fracture gridblock face between
blocks i-1 and i. For y(theta) direction faults, the x(r)
direction index for both fracture blocks is i.
j The y(theta) direction index. For a y(theta) direction
fault, the fault is at the fracture gridblock face
between blocks j-1 and j. For x(r) direction faults,
the y(theta) direction index for both fracture blocks
is j.
k1 The z direction index of the fracture gridblock on the
"right" of the fault. The indices of this gridblock are
(i, j, k1).
R5000.0.1 Fault Data 6-491

k2 The z direction index of the fracture gridblock on the

"left" of the fault. The indices of this gridblock are
(i-1, j, k2) for x(r) direction faults and (i, j-1, k2) for
y(theta) direction faults.
This replaces any other transmissibility defined for
the pair of fracture blocks. Units for t are the same
as those for transmissibilities read for the standard
NOTE: 1. If the same fault connection is described more than once, the last
transmissibility value specified will be used.
2. When this option is activated, a -1 is printed in the Fault Arrays to

indicate the fracture gridblock has a fault connection defined with this
option. Also, a -1 is printed as the value for shared thickness in the
Fault Tables.
6.6.2 Arbitrary Gridblock Connections for Fracture Blocks in VIP-DUAL

(FTRANF)
It is also possible to specify arbitrary connections between fracture gridblocks by
using the FTRANF card. The data include the specifications of the two blocks and
the value to be used for the interblock
transmissibility. FTRANF cards may also be used to modify the transmissibility

between two blocks connected (1) as a result of a fault specified with an FX,
FXCORN, FY, or FYCORN card, (2) as a result of automatic fault generation due
to data read for the ZCORNE, ZCORNW, and ZCORSW arrays, or (3) as a result
of the automatic detection of pinchouts. The simulator will not permit FTRANF
cards to define or modify the connection between two blocks that would
ordinarily be connected in a standard unfaulted grid; the OVER and VOVER
cards can be used for this purpose.
FTRANF
(GRID name)
(FNAME fname)
i1 j1 k1 i2 j2 k2 t
Definitions: 00
6-492 Fault Data R5000.0.1


group of connections defined by the following i1 j1 k1
etc. data. A connection will be assigned to a name based
on the last definition encountered. By default no
identifying name is assigned.

the first 256.
i1 X(R) direction index for the fracture block on the "left"

of the fault.
j1 Y(Theta) direction index for the fracture block on the

"left" of the fault.
k1 Z direction index for the fracture block on the "left" of

the fault.
i2 X(R) direction index for the fracture block on the "right"

of the fault.
j2 Y(Theta) direction index for the fracture block on the

"right" of the fault.
k2 Z direction index for the fracture block on the "right" of

the fault.
t Transmissibility for the connection across the fault. This

replaces any other transmissibility defined for the pair of
fracture blocks. Units for t are the same as those for
transmissibilities read for the standard fracture
R5000.0.1 Fault Data 6-493

6.7 Automatic Fault Generation

The simulator will automatically generate faults if the corner-point option is in
use, if appropriate data is specified for the ZCORNE, ZCORNW, and ZCORSW
arrays. In this case the FX, FY, FXCORN, and FYCORN cards will not cause the
creation of new fault connections; they only serve to associate transmissibility
multipliers with faults defined implicitly from the corner-point depth data. The
FTRANS cards may still be used as described in Section 6.5.
6.8 Automatic Pinchout Detection

For corner-point grids (defined using XCORN, YCORN, ... etc. or with the LGR
option) the simulator will automatically detect the presence of pinched-out layers
and generate non-zero transmissibility between the layers above and below the
pinched-out layer as appropriate. A gridblock will be considered pinched-out if it
has thickness less than the tolerance specified on the PINCHOUT card. Multiple
pinched-out layers are permitted and will be handled appropriately. The
PINCHOUT card (see Section 2.2.9.1) may be used to turn on both the fault and
corner-point options in place of the FAULTS and CORNER cards in utility data.
6-494 Fault Data R5000.0.1

Chapter
7
00000 Overread Options
7.1 Transmissibility / Pore Volume Modification Options

These cards must appear after all grid data input. The order of data
following OVER/VOVER must be COARSEN, MULTIR, MULTFL,
REGION/REGSEP/REGDTM, INFLUX/FLUX, when such data are input.
The transmissibility/pore volume arrays may be modified at initialization. This is

accomplished with OVER/VOVER cards. Any number of OVER/VOVER cards
can be used. The modification described by each card is performed at the time the
card is read; hence, these changes are order-dependent. When using the corner
point option with automatically generated fault connections, transmissibility
overreads can be processed using the MULT keyword. As well as modifying the
interblock transmissibilities, these cards also modify the transmissibilities across
faults between blocks with modified transmissibilities, whereas the OVER/
VOVER cards will only modify normal interblock connection transmissibilities.
Care should be taken not to specify, for example, both OVER TX cards and
MULT cards with overlapping ranges as this will result in normal interblock
transmissibilities being modified twice. The pore volume OVER/VOVER are
applied after the TOLPV checks.
R5000.0.1 Overread Options 7-495

7.2 Override Modification (OVER)

These cards are order-dependent.
The OVER card is used to apply a constant arithmetic operation to a portion of the
grid system. Only one title card is required, but the data cards may be repeated as
necessary. The parentheses indicate optional values. They are not part of the data.
Array names are shown in parentheses since any combination of the arrays can
appear on the title card. Do not use parentheses during input. The array names can
appear in any order. The order of #v’s on the data cards corresponds to the order of
the array names. Although several array names can appear on one OVER card, it
is generally less confusing to have "sets" of OVER cards, with each set modifying
only one array.
OVER array (array) (array) (array)

(GRID name)
(FNAME fname)
i2 j2 k2
i1 j1 k1 #v (v2) (#v (v2)) (#v (v2)) (#v (v2))
NX NY NZ
Definitions:
OVER Indicates array changes are to be made using the OVER

option.
array One or more of the following array names.
PV The pore volume array is to be

altered.
TX (TR) The x(r) direction transmissibilities

are to be altered.
TY (TTHETA) The y(theta) direction

transmissibilities are to be altered.
TZ The z direction transmissibilities are

to be altered.
TXYL The (-x, -y) direction

TXYR The (+x, -y) direction

7-496 Overread Options R5000.0.1

JFUNC The Leverett J-Function multiplier is

to be altered.
JFUNC = ∅
----
k
In VIP-THERM only, one of the follow array names.
VB Total block volume is to be altered.

A value of zero indicates an
“inactive” cell through which no
flow of fluids or heat will occur. A
value of zero also causes the pore
volume to be set to zero. The value
of VB is not otherwise used.
TXT0 (TRT0) The x(r)-direction thermal

transmissibilities are to altered.
TYT0 (TTHT0) The y(theta)-direction thermal

TZT0 The z-direction thermal


specified on the OVER card. The assignment is only
done if the array is a transmissibility array. A grid block
will be assigned to a name based on the last definition

the first 256.

(r,θ,z) grid. Modifications are applied to array elements lying in the portion of the
grid defined by:
i1 ≤ I ≤ i2
j1 ≤ J ≤ j2
k1 ≤ K ≤ k2 ,

where i1, j1, k1 are numeric, i2 is numeric or NX, j2 is numeric or NY, and
k2 is numeric or NZ.

+ add
- subtract
/ divide
* multiply
= equal
GE values smaller than v will be set equal to v2
LE values larger than v will be set equal to v2

#v, except when # is GE or LE.

corresponding array by using the specified operation.
v2 The step value required for the GE and LE operators.
NOTE: 1. The TXYL and TXYR arrays will be used only if the nine-point option
has been invoked (Section 2.2.6.5).
2. FNAME identifiers can also be assigned using other OVER and

Examples:
OVER TZ
1 37 1 29 1 3 *0.
Example with multiple arrays
OVER TX TY TZ
12 56 18 *.1 *.1 *.05
Example with step operator
OVER PV
1 37 1 29 1 3 GE 10. 0.0

7.3 Override Modification for VIP-DUAL (OVER)

The following are additional keywords when the DUAL option is invoked. Their
use and effect is analogous to the normal use of the OVER card.
OVER array (array) (array)

(GRID name)
(FNAME fname)
i2 j2 k2
i1 j1 k1 #v (v2) ((#v) (v2)) ((#v) (v2))
NX NY NZ
Definitions:
OVER Indicates array changes are to be made using the OVER

option.
array One or more of the following array names.
PVF The fracture pore volume array is to

be altered.
TXF (TRF) The x(r) direction fracture

TYF (TTHETF) The y(theta) direction fracture

TZF The z direction fracture

TXYLF The (-x,-y) direction fracture

TXYRF The (+x,-y) direction fracture

TEX The exchange transmissibilities are

to be altered.
TDIFFG The gas diffusion mass transfer

coefficients are to be altered.
TDIFFO The oil diffusion mass transfer

NOTE: 1. The TXYLF and TXYRF arrays will be used only if the nine-point
option has been invoked (Section 2.2.6.5).

2. The TDIFFG and TDIFFO arrays will be used only if the

diffusion option has been invoked (Section 2.2.13.3).

7.4 Value Override (VOVER)

The VOVER card modifies the specified array data with an individual value for
each changed gridblock. A minimum of 2 cards must follow the VOVER card.
The first contains the locations describing the gridblocks to be changed. The
second card contains the altered values for those gridblocks. A new VOVER card
and its corresponding data cards are read for each different portion of the grid
system being altered.
VOVER array
(GRID name)
(FNAME fname)
i2 j2 k2
i1 j1 k1 (op)
NX NY NZ
values as necessary
Definitions:
VOVER Indicates changes are to be made to the specified array by

replacing selected values.
array One of the following array names:
PV The pore volume array is to be

altered.
TX(TR) The x(r) direction transmissibilities

are to be altered.
TY (TTHETA) The y(theta) direction

TZ The z direction transmissibilities are

to be altered.
TXYL The (-x,-y) direction

TXYR The (+x,-y) direction


JFUNC The Leverett J-Function multiplier is

to be altered.
JFUNC = ∅
----
k
VB Total block volume is to be altered.

A value of zero indicates an
“inactive” cell through which no
flow of fluids or heat will occur. A
value of zero also causes the pore
volume to be set to zero. The value
of VB is not otherwise used.
TXT0 (TRT0) The x(r)-direction thermal

transmissibilities are to altered.
TYT0 (TTHT0) The y(theta)-direction thermal

TZT0 The z-direction thermal


specified on the VOVER card. The assignment is only
done if the array is a transmissibility array. A grid block
will be assigned to a name based on the last definition

the first 256.

(r,θ,z) grid. Modifications will be applied to array elements lying in the portion of
the grid defined by:
i1 ≤ I ≤ i2
j1 ≤ J ≤ j2
k1 ≤ K ≤ k2 ,

where i1, j1, k1 are numeric, i2 is numeric or NX, j2 is numeric or NY, and
k2 is numeric or NZ.
op is an optional keyword that defines the operation to apply to the array. Any of
the following keywords may be used:
ADD add
SUB subtract
DIV divide
MULT multiply
EQ equal (this is the default).
Enough values must be read to replace all array elements in the designated
portion of the grid. The number of values required is:
(k2 - k1 + 1) * (j2 - j1 + 1) * (i2 - i1 + 1).
The order of replacement is by x(r)-direction rows. All rows for the first xy
(rθ) plane are entered in order of increasing J index, followed by the
remaining planes in order of increasing K index.
NOTE: 1. Only one array can be changed with each VOVER card.
2. The TXYL and TXYR arrays will be used only if the nine-point

Example:
VOVER TX
57 67 1 7 2 2 EQ
77*0.

7.5 Value Override for VIP-DUAL (VOVER)

The following are additional keywords available when the DUAL option is
invoked. Their use and effect is analogous to the normal use of the VOVER card.
VOVER array
(GRID name)
(FNAME fname)
i2 j2 k2
i1 j1 k1 (op)
NX NY NZ
values as necessary
Arrays
TEX TXF TYF TZF TRF TTHETF TXYLF TXYRF
Definitions:
VOVER Indicates array changes are to be made using the VOVER

option.
array One of the following array names:
PVF The fracture pore volume array is to

be altered.
TXF (TRF) The x(r) direction fracture

TYF (TTHETF) The y(theta) direction fracture

TZF The z direction fracture

TXYLF The (-x,-y) direction fracture

TXYRF The (+x,-y) direction fracture

TEX The exchange transmissibilities are

to be altered.
TDIFFG The gas diffusion mass transfer

TDIFFO The oil diffusion mass transfer


NOTE: 1. Only one array can be changed with each VOVER card.
2. The TXYLF and TXYRF arrays will be used only if the nine-point
3. The TDIFFG and TDIFFO arrays will be used only if the diffusion


Chapter
8
Grid Coarsening1
00000
8.1 Grid Coarsening (COARSEN)

Grids can be coarsened by combining adjacent cells to form a coarse cell. Flow
between coarse cells is through nonstandard transmissibility connections that are
computed automatically. Well locations in VIP-EXEC are specified with respect
to the original fine grid dimensions.
COARSEN (gridname) ⎛ AUTO⎞

⎝ SEAL⎠
⎛ MCOARSE ⎞
⎝ Enter data values as required (see Figure 8.1) ⎠
⎛ i1 i2 j1 j2 k1 k2 ( n xc nyc nzc )
⎞
⎜ ⎟
⎜ (X nx 1 nx 2 nx 3 … … … … nx nxc ) ⎟
⎜ ⎟
⎜ (Y ny 1 ny 2 ny 3 … … … … ny nyc ) ⎟
⎜ ⎟
⎝ (Z nz 1 nz 2 nz 3 … … … … nz nzc ) ⎠
You can continue to enter sets of data as needed
You can use the i1, i2, ... window option to define the number of coarse blocks
formed in each coordinate direction. Or you can use the MCOARSE option to
define the coarse blocks by gridcell number as shown below.
1. Not available in VIP-THERM.
R5000.0.1 Grid Coarsening 8-505

In the illustration, the original grid is shown on the left. The MCOARSE values
shown in the center (with no formatting requirements except a space between each
number), represents the coarsened gridblock values from left to right.
Original Grid MCOARSE Values Resulting Coarsened Grid

1 2 3 4
1 1 2 3 4 1 1 3 3
2 5 6 7 8 MCOARSE 1 1 3 3
1 1 3 3 1 1 3 3
9 9 11 11 9 9 11 11
3 9 10 11 12 9 9 11 11
4 13 14 15 16 9 9 11 11
Figure 8-1: MCOARSE Values
Definitions:
COARSEN Keyword for introducing the grid coarsening data. The

order of data must be OVER/VOVER, COARSEN,
MULTIR, MULTFL, REGION/REGSEP/REGDTM,
INFLUX/FLUX, when such data are input.
gridname Name of grid being coarsened. Default is the root grid.
AUTO Detects faults, and varying integer properties within a

coarsened block, and skips the coarsening for such
blocks, thus preserving the fine-scale details. (Note that
this option is available only for i1, i2, etc. window input,
not for MCOARSE data.
The default will coarsen across faults, creating flow

across faults within each layer.
SEAL When coarsening across faults, does not connect layers

that are not connected by a standard connection in the
fine grid.
The default will coarsen across faults, creating flow

across faults within each layer.
MCOARSE Keyword for defining the coarsening through an array of

integer values, one for each gridblock. Gridblocks with
the same MCOARSE values are grouped into a single
gridblock. Gridblocks with MCOARSE values of zero or
8-506 Grid Coarsening R5000.0.1

negative will automatically get reset so that the

MCOARSE values become the corresponding gridblock
numbers. The MCOARSE array option can be followed
by I1, I2, etc. data options.
i1,i2, j1,j2, k1, k2 Indices defining a portion of the grid to be coarsened.

This line may be repeated to coarsen multiple portions of
the grid.
nxc,nyc,nzc Number of coarse blocks formed in each coordinate

direction, from the portion of the grid defined by
i1,i2,j1,j2,k1,k2. Default is 1,1,1 i.e. one coarse cell is
created.
X,Y,Z Optional keywords that allow control of the grouping of

the fine gridblocks into coarse gridblocks.
nx1,nx2,... Number of fine gridblocks in each corresponding coarse

gridblock along the x direction.
ny1,ny2,... Number of fine gridblocks in each corresponding coarse

gridblock along the y direction.
nz1,nz2,... Number of fine gridblocks in each corresponding coarse

gridblock along the z direction.
NOTE: 1) When X,Y,Z data are not specified, then nxc,nyc,nzc need to be
integer fractions of (i2-i1+1),(j2-j1+1),(k2-k1+1) respectively.
2) When X,Y,Z data are specified,

nxc
∑ nxi = i2 – i1 + 1
i=1
nyc
∑ nyi = j2 – j1 + 1
i=1
nzc
∑ nzi = k2 – k1 + 1
i=1
3) Coarsening at parent-child LGR interfaces is not allowed.
4) Coarse block integer properties (ISAT, ISATI, IEQUIL,
IREGION, IPVT, IPVTW, ITRAN, IWIRC, ICMT, OILTRF,
GASTRF) are assigned from the fine blocks that sum to the
largest pore volume for a particular index.
R5000.0.1 Grid Coarsening 8-507

Example:
COARSEN
2 3 1 1 1 3 1 1 3
4 5 1 2 1 3 1 1 3
1 7 6 10 1 3 2 2 3
X 3 4
Y 3 2
11 20 11 20 1 3 5 5 3
COARSEN REFINE1
2 3 1 1 1 3 1 1 3
4 5 1 2 1 3 1 1 3
1 7 6 10 1 3 2 2 3
X 3 4
Y 3 2
11 20 11 20 1 3 5 5 3
8-508 Grid Coarsening R5000.0.1

Chapter
9
Region Data
00000

9.1 Assign Output Region Names (REGION)

REGION cards permit the user to assign region names to output regions defined
by the IREGION (and/or IREGF) array (Section 5.15). One REGION card is input
for each region name assignment.
REGION ireg1 regnam1

. . .
. . .
. . .
REGION iregn regnamn
Definitions:
iregi Region number defined in the IREGION (and/or IREGF)

data.
regnami Region name for region number iregi. The first character
in the name must be alphanumeric. Only the first six (6)
characters of the name are used. Default is blanks.
All REGION cards must precede any REGSEP or REGDTM da1ta.
Example:
REGION 1 SAG
REGION 2 SHUB
REGION 3 SAD
REGION 4 WESAG
REGION 5 WESHUB
REGION 6 WESAD
R5000.0.1 Region Data 9-509

9.2 Assign Output Regions Separator Batteries (REGSEP)

The REGSEP card is used to assign separator batteries to output regions for
surface volume calculations. If more than one PVT type is specified, and/or more
than one separator battery is input, then a REGSEP card is required. Only one
REGSEP card is allowed.
REGSEP ibat1 . . . ibatnreg
Definitions:
ibati Separator battery number for output region number i.

Alternatives include the battery number of a separator
input in the separator data (Section 4.9), a value of -npvt
which accesses a default separator, and a value of 0:
⎧ nbat ( input battery )

⎪
ibat i = ⎨ – npvt ( default separator )
⎪
⎩ 0
A value of 0 will result in the default value -1 being used
for surface volume calculations in VIP-CORE, and no
surface volumes will be reported for that region in the
region report in the simulation modules.
nreg Maximum output region number defined in the

IREGION/XREG data.
NOTE: 1. The REGSEP card must follow the REGION cards and must precede
any REGDTM data.
2. Continuation cards may be used to specify all the battery numbers. Do

not specify the REGSEP keyword on these continuation cards.
3. If a REGSEP card is not entered, the entire REGSEP array is

initialized to 1 if separator battery 1 is defined or to -1 (default
separator) if separator battery 1 is not defined.
9-510 Region Data R5000.0.1

9.3 Specify Datum Depth Each Output Region (REGDTM)

The REGDTM card permits the user to specify the datum depth to be used for
each output region in the calculation of the datum pressure in the region summary.
Only one REGDTM card is allowed.
dtm 1 dtm nreg

REGDTM . . .
X X
Definitions:
dtmi Datum depth for output region i to use in the calculation

of datum pressure, ft (m). The default is the datum depth
specified for equilibrium region 1 (Section 4.2).
X Alpha label indicating the default value of the datum

depth specified for equilibrium region 1 (Section 4.2)
will be used for the output region whose place is
occupied by the label.
nreg Maximum output region number defined in the

IREGION/XREG data.
NOTE: 1. The REGDTM card must follow any REGION or REGSEP cards.
2. Continuation cards may be used to specify all the datum depth values.
Do not specify the REGDTM keyword on these continuation cards.
Example:
A problem with four output regions will use the default datum for regions
2 and 3.
REGDTM 5673.3 X X 5684.6
R5000.0.1 Region Data 9-511

9-512 Region Data R5000.0.1

Chapter
10
Grid Boundary Flux 1
00000
10.1 Introduction
In VIP, boundary flux is handled by including source/sink terms in the interblock

flow equations for edge blocks. The outer boundaries of the grid are normally
treated as sealing barriers to flow. Two specific boundary flux cases are
considered: 1) use of an aquifer influence function to represent a surrounding
body of water, and 2) inclusion of flux from a course grid simulation run as the
boundary conditions for a fine grid model.
10.2 Analytical Aquifer

In the descriptions that follow, reference is made to "aquifers" that supply fluid to
the grid. The model calculates fluid influx by the Carter-Tracy method or the
Fetkovich method. A comprehensive discussion of aquifer treatments is given in
Frick and Taylor (Reference 8).
The influx option is subject to the following restrictions and guidelines:
1. A gridblock can receive fluid from only one influx region.
2. Within the data for an influx region, a gridblock can be referenced more than
once. The data assigned to each gridblock is cumulative; therefore, the influx
data are order dependent.
3. Influx data should not refer to zero pore volume blocks. Such a reference is a
fatal error for data entry when using the VALUE option. If the WINDOW
option is used in the influx description, the zero pore volume blocks are
ignored, depending on the sinf option used.
4. To use the XCALC, YCALC, and ZCALC options, the DX, DY, DZ,
XCORN...or CORP, KX, KY, and KZ arrays must be entered in the array data
(Section 4.2).
1. Not available in VIP-THERM.
R5000.0.1 Grid Boundary Flux 10-513

10.2.1 Carter-Tracy Aquifer Influx (INFLUX)
The Carter-Tracy (Reference 9) method provides good approximations to the Van

Everdingen and Hurst (Reference 17) analytical solutions for influx. The title and
data cards must appear in the order shown.
INFLUX ninf (ncttrw)

WTR CT
NBINF BINF TC (LINFAC) (PAQI DAQI)
nbinf binf tc (linfac) (paqi daqi)
IINF JINF KINF SINF (ALL)
iinf jinf kinf sinf
(repeat as required)
(GRID name)
(VALUE)
(WINDOW
i1 i2 j1 j2 k1 k2 sinf)
(ENDAQ)
⎛ TD PD ⎞
⎜ ⎟
⎝ td pd ⎠
Definitions:
INFLUX Indicates that the data being read are influx data.
ninf The identifying number of the "aquifer" being described.
ncttrw Optional index to the tracked water type to be used for

this influx source.
WTR Indicates water is the fluid entering the grid.
CT Carter-Tracy Method is to be used.
The titles on the third card must appear as shown.
nbinf The total number of gridblocks receiving fluid from this

"aquifer". The value of nbinf need only be estimated if
an "ENDAQ" is included in the gridblock cards.
binf The parameter B1 as defined by Carter and Tracy, rb/psia

(cm/kPa).
2
2π φ c t hr e s
binf = ----------------------------
-
α1
10-514 Grid Boundary Flux R5000.0.1

where
φ = Average porosity of the "aquifer"

expressed as a fraction.
ct = Total compressibility of the fluid and

rock in the "aquifer", 1/psia (1/kPa).
h = Net thickness of the "aquifer", ft (m).
re = Radius to the perimeter of the reservoir,

ft (m). (The boundary between the
reservoir and the "aquifer".)
s = Fraction of a circle that the boundary

between the reservoir and the aquifer
completes.
α1 = 5.6146 for conventional units. 1.0 for

metric units.
tc The value used to convert time to dimensionless time, 1/

day.
α2 k
tc = -------------------
-2
ct φ μ d
where
α2 = 0.006328 for conventional units;

8.527x10-5 for metric units.
k = Average permeability of the "aquifer",

md (md).
μ = Average viscosity of the fluid contained

in the "aquifer", cp (cp).
d = re as described above for radial

"aquifers". Length of the "aquifer", ft
(m) for linear "aquifers".
linfac A linear multiplier applied to the water influx. This can

be used to adjust the strength of the aquifer without the
need to change the parameters. Default is 1.

paqi Initial aquifier pressure, psia (kPa), at the reference

depth, daqi.
daqi Reference depth, ft (m), for the initial aquifer pressure,

paqi.
The titles on the fifth card must appear as shown. The optional fifth keyword
controls possible connections to non-aquifer gridblocks
ALL Connect all specified blocks to aquifer. Default skips

blocks that are above the water-oil contact.
The number of data cards following the fifth card must equal nbinf, unless an
"ENDAQ" card is given.
iinf x(r) direction index of a gridblock attached to this

"aquifer".
jinf y(theta) direction index of a gridblock attached to this

"aquifer".
kinf z direction index of a gridblock attached to this "aquifer".
sinf Scale factor used to allocate the total "aquifer" influx/

efflux among the gridblocks attached to the "aquifer".
These are normalized within the program, so values have
only relative meaning. They will usually reflect the cross-
sectional area times the permeability of the gridblock
faces attached to the "aquifer".
sinf may be any of the following: 00
=n The scale factor is set to "n".

+n The scale factor is increased by "n".
n The scale factor is increased by "n".
-n The scale factor is decreased by "n".
*n The scale factor is multiplied by "n".
/n The scale factor is divided by "n". 00
XCALC The scale factor is calculated in the x(r)

direction. 00
YCALC The scale factor is calculated in the

y(theta) direction. 00
ZCALC The scale factor is calculated in the z

direction. 00
For the WINDOW option, there are six additional options

which enable the user to easily assign an aquifer to an

irregular grid boundary. Starting on the specified face of

the window and moving inward, the aquifer is attached to
the first active gridblock encountered within the window.
The options are:
I- Aquifer connects to the i- faces

I+ Aquifer connects to the i+ faces
J- Aquifer connects to the j- faces
J+ Aquifer connects to the j+ faces
K- Aquifer connects to the k- faces
K+ Aquifer connects to the k+ faces
The following keywords may also appear in these Data Cards: 00
GRID Data applies to a particular grid. 00
name Name of the grid. Default is ROOT. 00
VALUE Puts the reading of these Data Cards into VALUE mode,
ends WINDOW mode. Reads data cards of the form iinf,
jinf, kinf, and sinf.
WINDOW Puts the reading of these Data Cards into WINDOW

mode, ends VALUE mode.
In this mode, data must be entered as follows: 00
i1 i2 j1 j2 k1 k2 sinf 00
The range specified is the same as that given by the

MOD card (Section 1.5.4.1).
ENDAQ Indicates the end of the influx data cards.

(optional) 00
NOTE: If TD, PD data are not supplied, an infinite radial aquifer will be assumed,
and the corresponding tables for an infinite radial aquifer will be used by
default.
The titles, TD and PD, on this card must appear as shown. 00
The first data card must have both td and pd equal to zero. Enough values
should be entered to extend to dimensionless times beyond the time to be
simulated or until a linear extrapolation of the last two values will provide
satisfactory results. 00
td Dimensionless time.
(td = tc * t)

pd Dimensionless pressure. See Reference 9 for a discussion

and tables of values.
Examples: 00
A 10x15x6 grid system is modeled with a bottom water aquifer. 00
For the bottom water aquifer: 00
INFLUX 1
WTR CT
...
IINF JINF KINF SINF
WINDOW
1 10 1 15 6 6 ZCALC 00
To modify a few blocks: 00
9 10 14 15 6 6 *2
10 10 15 15 6 6 *2 00
The modifications to block (10,15,6) result in a cumulative multiplier of 4.
To set some values to zero: 00
1 2 1 2 6 6 =0
VALUE
1 3 6 =0
3 1 6 =0
ENDAQ
TD PD
... 00
To attach another aquifer to the right flank of the reservoir: 00
INFLUX 2
WTR CT
... 00
IINF JINF KINF SINF

WINDOW
5 10 1 15 1 5 I+ 00
The final VIP-CORE input data stream is: 00
INFLUX 1
WTR CT
NBINF BINF TC
(enter values) 00

IINF JINF KINF SINF

WINDOW
1 10 01 15 6 6 ZCALC
9 10 14 15 6 6 *2
10 10 15 15 6 6 *2
1 02 01 02 6 6 =0
VALUE
1 3 6 =0
3 01 6 =0
ENDAQ
TD PD
(enter td pd values) 00

10.2.2 Fetkovich Aquifer Influx (INFLUX)
The Fetkovich method (Reference 32) utilizes the pseudo steady-state aquifer
productivity index and an aquifer material balance to represent the system. The
title and data cards must appear in the order shown.

WTR FET
NBINF PI ]
AWIP [ (PAQI DAQI)
VWAQ CT
nbinf pi ]
awip
vwaq ct
[ (paqi daqi)
IINF JINF KINF SINF (ALL)

iinf jinf kinf sinf
(GRID name)
(VALUE)
(WINDOW
i1 i2 j1 j2 k1 k2 sinf)
(ENDAQ)
Definitions:
INFLUX Indicates that the data being read are influx data.
ninf The identifying number of the "aquifer" being described.
ncttrw Optional index to the tracked water type to be used for

this influx source.
WTR Indicates water is the fluid entering the grid.
FET Fetkovich method is to be used.
The titles on the third card must appear as shown.
nbinf The total number of gridblocks receiving fluid from this

"aquifer". The value of nbinf need only be estimated if
an "ENDAQ" is included in the gridblock cards.

pi Aquifer productivity index, rb/day/psi(m3/day/kPa).

(Total influx rate per day per unit pressure difference.)
7.08 ⋅ k ⋅ h
pi = -------------------------------------, for radial flow
re
μ ⎛ ln ⎛ ----⎞ – α 3⎞
⎝ ⎝ r o⎠ ⎠
α4 ⋅ k ⋅ b ⋅ h
pi = ----------------------------, for linear flow
μd
where
k = Average permeability of the "aquifer",

md (md).
h = Net thickness of the "aquifer", ft (m).
ro = Radius to the perimeter of the reservoir,

ft (m). (The boundary between the
reservoir and the "aquifer.")
re = Radius to the perimeter of the aquifer, ft

(m).
α3 = 0.75 for no-flow outer boundary; 0 for

constant pressure outer boundary.
α4 = 3.381 for no-flow outer boundary; 1.127

for constant pressure outer boundary.
b = Width of the linear aquifer, ft (m).
μ = Average viscosity of the fluid contained

in the "aquifer", cp (cp).
d = re as described above for radial

"aquifers." Length of the "aquifer", ft
(m) for linear "aquifers."
awip Initial volume of encroachable water in the aquifer, rb

(cm) awip = ct wi pi.

where
ct = Total compressibility of the fluid and

rock in the "aquifer", 1/psia (1/kPa).
wi = Initial aquifer volume of water in place,

rb(cm).
pi = Initial aquifer pressure at the

hydrocarbon/water contact, or at the
specified reference depth, if entered, psia
(kPa).
vwaq Initial aquifer volume of water in place, rb (cm). (wi as

defined as above.)
ct Total compressibility of the fluid and rock in the

"aquifer", 1/psia (1/kPa).
paqi Initial aquifier pressure, psia (kPa), at the reference

depth, daqi.
daqi Reference depth, ft (m), for the initial aquifer pressure,

paqi.
The titles on the fifth card must appear as shown. The optional fifth keyword
controls possible connections to non-aquifer gridblocks
ALL Connect all specified blocks to aquifer. Default skips

blocks that are above the water-oil contact.
The number of data cards following the fifth card must equal nbinf, unless
an "ENDAQ" card is given.
iinf x(r) direction index of a gridblock attached to this

"aquifer".
jinf y(theta) direction index of a gridblock attached to this

"aquifer".
kinf z direction index of a gridblock attached to this "aquifer".
sinf Scale factor used to allocate the total "aquifer" influx/

efflux among the gridblocks attached to the "aquifer".
These are normalized within the program, so values have
only relative meaning. They will usually reflect the cross-
sectional area times the permeability of the gridblock
faces attached to the "aquifer".
sinf may be any of the following: 00

=n The scale factor is set to "n".

+n The scale factor is increased by "n".
n The scale factor is increased by "n".
-n The scale factor is decreased by "n".
*n The scale factor is multiplied by "n".
/n The scale factor is divided by "n". 00
XCALC The scale factor is calculated in the x(r)

direction. 00
YCALC The scale factor is calculated in the

y(theta) direction. 00
ZCALC The scale factor is calculated in the z

direction. 00
For the WINDOW option, there are six additional options

which enable the user to easily assign an aquifer to an
irregular grid boundary. Starting on the specified face of
the window and moving inward, the aquifer is attached to
the first active gridblock encountered within the window.
The options are:
I- Aquifer connects to the i- faces

I+ Aquifer connects to the i+ faces
J- Aquifer connects to the j- faces
J+ Aquifer connects to the j+ faces
K- Aquifer connects to the k- faces
K+ Aquifer connects to the k+ faces
The following keywords may also appear in these Data Cards: 00
GRID Data applies to a particular grid. 00
name Name of the grid. Default is ROOT. 00
VALUE Puts the reading of these Data Cards into VALUE mode,
ends WINDOW mode. Reads data cards of the form iinf,
jinf, kinf, and sinf.
WINDOW Puts the reading of these Data Cards into WINDOW

mode, ends VALUE mode.
In this mode, data must be entered as follows: 00
i1 i2 j1 j2 k1 k2 sinf 00
The range specified is the same as that given by the MOD

card (Section 1.5.4.1).

ENDAQ Indicates the end of the influx data cards.

(optional) 00
10.3 Coarse Grid, Fine Grid Boundary Flux

VIP-EXECUTIVE provides the capability to define rectangular regions of the
reservoir grid for which boundary flux calculations will be performed in the
simulation module. The program may be run in OUTPUT mode so that calculated
boundary flux is reported in the output listing and recorded in a disk file.
Additionally, the program may be run in INPUT mode where the boundary flux
file (FORTRAN Unit 16) from an OUTPUT mode run is used as input data to the
program. In INPUT mode, the boundary flux data is used in the same manner as
sink or source information. That is, the equivalent of a production/injection well is
defined internal to the program for each boundary block.
The combination of these two modes allows the user great flexibility in
developing a reservoir study. An initial program run in OUTPUT mode for a
large, coarsely gridded reservoir can provide boundary flux information for a
subset of the reservoir that is to be studied in greater detail. The subsequent run of
the finely gridded portion of the reservoir uses the boundary flux information to
include the effects of gridblocks in the reservoir that are outside the area of
detailed interest. The program may also be used effectively in OUTPUT mode to
determine the direction and type of fluid flow across any gridblock boundary in
the reservoir.
The frequency of flux output from the simulation module is controlled by the
WFLUX card.
10.3.1 Flux Across a Grid Perimeter (FLUX)

Input Mode: 00
FLUX nflux
INPUT
(MOBWT)
⎛ ADJUST FINE ⎞
⎜ ⎟
⎝ FLXOIL ⎠
(VEOFF)
(CFXOFF)
COARSE
NX NY NZ
nxc nyc nzc
I1 I2 J1 J2 K1 K2
i1c i2c j1c j2c k1c k2c
(NOVEAD G or O or W)

(ic1 ic2 jc1 jc2 kc1 kc2)

(VEONLY G or O or W)
(VEAREA G or O or W)
(SEGAREA O or W)
FINE
I1 i1f(1) . . . i1f(nxx)
I2 i2f(1) . . . i2f(nxx)
J1 j1f(1) . . . j1f(nxx)
J2 j2f(1) . . . j2f(nxx)
K1 k1f(1) . . . k1f(nxx)
K2 k2f(1) . . . k2f(nxx)

Output Mode: 00
FLUX nflux
OUTPUT
(CUMFLUX)
(VEDIST)
⎛ ⎛ ON ⎞⎞
⎜ CMPFLX ⎜ ⎟⎟
⎝ ⎝ OFF ⎠⎠
i1 i2 j1 j2 k1 j2
Definitions: 00
nflux Identifying number of the boundary flux region being

described.
INPUT Alpha label indicating that the boundary flux region

being described is in INPUT mode. For a boundary flux
region in INPUT mode, boundary flux data will be input
from a disk file into the simulation module.
MOBWT Alpha label indicating that boundary efflux should be

allocated to gridblocks based upon the product of fluid
mobility and gridblock cross-sectional area. If MOBWT
is not specified, efflux will be allocated based only upon
gridblock cross-sectional area.
ADJUST Alpha label indicating that efflux partitioning should be

done on the basis of fine block only. When this option is
used, any unavailable phase efflux for the fine block is
adjusted by equivalent efflux of another phase from the
same fine block. If it is not possible to remove another
phase, no additional action is taken. If the ADJUST card
is not specified, no efflux partitioning is done. The
ADJUST keyword must be followed by either the FINE
or the FLXOIL keyword:
FINE Alpha label indicating that only two changes

of phase allocation are to be performed -
conversion of unavailable gas phase efflux to
oil phase and conversion of unavailable oil
phase efflux to water phase.
FLXOIL Alpha label indicating that following the

above two conversions, the following two
additional conversions are to be performed -
unavailable water phase to oil phase and
unavailable oil phase to gas phase.

VEOFF Influx allocation in the INPUT mode is done using the

fully segregated (or vertical equilibrium) assumption, if
fluid contact values are available in the flux file.
However, the alpha label VEOFF can be specified to use
the fully dispersed option even if contact values are
available in the flux file. This card is not required if the
flux file does not contain fluid contact data.
CFXOFF Component influx option is automatically invoked in the

INPUT mode if component influxes are available in the
flux file. However, CFXOFF can be specified to use
phase molar influxes and fine-grid phase compositions
for the calculation of component influxes even if
component influxes are available in the flux file. This
card is not required if the flux file does not contain
component influx data.
COARSE Alpha label indicating that data which follows this card
defines the grid correspondence for the coarse grid
model.
nxc Number of gridblocks in the x(r) direction for the coarse

grid model.
nyc Number of gridblocks in the y(theta) direction for the

coarse grid model.
nzc Number of gridblocks in the z direction for the coarse

grid model.
Gridblock locations are defined by indices I, J, and K in reference to the (x,y,z) or

(r,θ,z) grid. The current boundary flux region, nflux, contains all gridblocks lying
in the portion of the grid defined by:
i1c < I < i2c

j1c < J < j2c
k1c < K < k2c 00
NOVEAD Alpha label indicating that no VE influx allocation

should be done for the following set of coarse blocks. In
this case influx allocation is based on cross-sectional area
or the product of mobility and cross-sectional area if the
MOBWT option is being used.
VEONLY Alpha label indicating that influx allocation for the

following set of coarse blocks should be based on height
of fluid contacts only.
VEAREA Alpha label indicating that influx allocation for the

following set of coarse blocks should be based on the

product of height of fluid contact and cross-sectional

area. This is the default for all coarse blocks for all
phases.
SEGAREA Alpha label indicating that the influx will be allocated to

all fine blocks (dispersed) below the gas-oil contact for
the appropriate phase (O or W) for the following set of
coarse blocks. In addition, the influx allocation should be
based on the product of height of fluid contact and cross-
sectional area.
Alpha label indicating the phase to which each of these options applies
G Influx allocation method applies to gas phase influx. 00
O Influx allocation method applies to oil phase influx. 00
W Influx allocation method applies to water phase influx. 00
FINE Alpha label indicating that data which follows this card
defines the grid correspondence for the fine grid model.
The next six cards define the correspondence of fine gridblocks to coarse
gridblocks. Each data card contains an alpha label followed by an appropriate
number of values, depending upon the direction indicated by the label. If
necessary, more than one card may be used to enter the values, but the label
should not be repeated on subsequent cards.
For these cards the following values are defined:
nxx = ic2 - ic1 + 1

nyy = jc2 - jc1 + 1
nzz = kc2 - kc1 + 1 00
I1 Alpha label indicating that the values on this card define

the beginning index of the fine gridblocks contained in
the flux region of the coarse model in the x(r) direction
between indices ic1 and ic2. A total of nxx values must
be entered on one or more cards.
I2 Alpha label indicating that the values on this card define

the last index of the fine gridblocks contained in the flux
region of the coarse model in the x(r) direction between
indices ic1 and ic2. A total of nxx values must be entered
on one or more cards.
J1 Alpha label indicating that the values on this card define

the flux region of the coarse model in the y(θ) direction

between indices jc1 and jc2. A total of nyy values must

J2 Alpha label indicating that the values on this card define

region of the coarse model in the y(θ) direction between
indices jc1 and ic2. A total of nyy values must be entered
on one or more cards.
K1 Alpha label indicating that the values on this card define

the flux region of the coarse model in the z direction
between indices kc1 and kc2. A total of nzz values must
K2 Alpha label indicating that the values on this card define

region of the coarse model in the z direction between
indices kc1 and kc2. A total of nzz values must be
entered on one or more cards.
nflux Identifying number of the boundary flux region being

described.
OUTPUT Alpha label indicating that the boundary flux region

being described is in OUTPUT mode. For a boundary
flux region in OUTPUT mode, a disk file of boundary
flux data will be created in the simulation module.
CUMFLUX Alpha label indicating that cumulative flux values are

written to the flux file in the OUTPUT mode. Flux rates
are calculated from cumulative flux in the INPUT mode.
If the CUMFLUX card is not specified, instantaneous
flux rates are written to the flux file.
VEDIST Alpha label indicating that the location of the gas-oil

contact and the oil-water contact in each coarse block
(determined using vertical equilibrium approximation) is
written to the flux file in the OUTPUT mode. If the
VEDIST card is not specified, no contact information is
written to the flux file.
CMPFLX Alpha label indicating whether component influxes are

written to the flux file in OUTPUT mode. The label
CMPFLX or CMPFLX ON indicates that component
molar fluxes as well as phase molar fluxes are written to
the flux file. The label CMPFLX OFF indicates that only
phase molar fluxes are written to the flux file. If the
CMPFLX card is not specified, the default option is ON
for Todd-Longstaff miscible models and OFF for
compositional and black-oil models.

Gridblock locations are defined by indices I, J, and K in reference to the (x,y,z) or

(r,θ,z) grid. The current boundary flux region, nflux, contains all gridblocks lying
in the portion of the grid defined by:
i1 < I < i2
j1 < J < j2
k1 < K < k2. 00
The data given above are used to define a rectangular subregion of the reservoir
for which boundary flux calculations will be performed in the simulation module.
This data must appear in the order shown.
For each boundary flux region in INPUT mode in VIP-CORE, the simulation
module expects to input boundary flux data from a file prepared from a program
run in OUTPUT mode. The data given above are used to define a correspondence
between the reservoir grid and the boundary flux regions from a previous run of
the program in OUTPUT mode. It is assumed in this treatment that each gridblock
in the coarsely gridded model contains an integral number of gridblocks in the
finely gridded model.
The component influx option (CMPFLX) writes the component molar fluxes to
the flux file (OUTPUT mode) and applies these fluxes to fine-grids with net
influxes (INPUT mode). Numerically, this option is more rigorous than the phase
influx option that uses phase molar influxes and fine-grid phase compositions for
the component influx calculation. The CMPFLX option should be used if the
influx compositions are expected to be significantly different from the fine-grid
phase compositions during the fine-grid run.

1 2 3 4 5 6
2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1
3
2
3
4 4
5
6
7
5 8
9
Fine Grid
6
Coarse Grid
Figure 10-1: Schematic Representation of Boundary Flux Feature
Examples: 00
The data given below completely describes the coarse and fine grid models,
assuming that boundary flux will be allocated based upon fluid mobility. 00
For the coarse grid model: 00
FLUX 1
OUTPUT
CUMFLUX
VEDIST
CMPFLX ON
2 5 3 5 1 1 00
For the fine grid model: 00
FLUX 1
INPUT

MOBWT
ADJUST FINE
COARSE
NX NY NZ
6 8 1
l1 l2 J1 J2 K1 K2
2 5 3 5 1 1
NOVEAD O
2 5 3 5 1 1
VEAREA G
2 4 4 4 1 1
2 2 5 5 1 1
VEONLY W
3 5 5 5 1 1
SEGAREA O
3 5 5 5 1 1
FINE
I1 1 4 6 9
I2 3 5 8 10
J1 1 3 6
J2 2 5 9
K1 1
K2 1 00

Chapter
11
00000 Local Grid Refinement
11.1 Introduction
The LGR option is compatible with rectangular, radial and corner-point coarse
(ROOT) grids. Once a ROOT grid has been defined, it can be refined and each
refined grid can be further refined, with the exception that if the refinement is a
radial grid, then the radial grid cannot be further refined. There is no limit to the
number of grids or levels of refinements.
11.2 Grid Definition

The ROOT grid is first defined using one of the options described in Section
2.2.3. The refinement grids are then defined using a nested data structure as will
be described below.
11.3 Grid Refinement (LGR)

The LGR keyword indicates that the grid is to be refined. This line is followed by
data defining the refinements. An ENDLGR keyword ends the grid refinement
data mode.
LGR (name)
grid refinement data
ENDLGR
Definitions: 00
LGR Start of the grid refinement data structure.
name Name of the coarse grid. Default is ROOT.
ENDLGR End of grid refinement data.
R5000.0.1 Local Grid Refinement 11-533

11.3.1 Grid Refinement Data

Grid refinements can be either cartesian or radial. Radial refinements are
constrained within either a row or column of a cartesian grid. Radial grid
refinements cannot be refined.
11.3.1.1 Cartesian Grid Refinement
The following specifies a cartesian refinement. The order of the data is important.
CARTREF name
i1 i2 j1 j2 k1 k2
nx1 nx2 nx3 .........nx(i2-i1+1)
ny1 ny2 ny3 .........ny(j2-j1+1)
nz1 nz2 nz3 .........nz(k2-k1+1)
(OMITLIST m1 m2 m3 ......)
(OMIT io1 io2 jo1 jo2 ko1 ko2)
(INGRID in1 in2 jn1 jn2 kn1 kn2)
(CARTREF name) (RADXREF name) (RADYREF name) (RADZREF name)
nested refinement
(ENDREF)
ENDREF
Definitions:
CARTREF A cartesian grid is being defined.
name Name of grid being defined.
i1, i2, j1, j2, k1, k2 Indices defining the portion of the coarse grid to be
refined.
nx1, nx2, . . . Number of x direction fine gridblocks for each of the

corresponding coarse gridblocks.
ny1, ny2, . . . Number of y direction fine gridblocks for each of the

nz1, nz2, . . . Number of z direction fine gridblocks for each of the

OMITLIST List of coarse gridblocks to be removed from the

refinement grid. Can be repeated as needed.
11-534 Local Grid Refinement R5000.0.1

m1, m2, . . . Gridblock numbers for the portion of the coarse grid to
be removed from the refinement. Gridblock numbering is
relative to the coarse grid and increases in the I-direction
first, then the J-direction, then the K-direction.
OMIT Range of coarse gridblocks to be removed from the

io1, io2, jo1, . . . Indices defining the portion of the coarse grid to be
removed from the refinement.
i1 ≤ io1, io2 ≤ i2
j1 ≤ jo1, jo2 ≤ j2
k1 ≤ ko1, ko2 ≤ k2
INGRID Range of coarse gridblocks to be included in the

in1, in2, jn1, . . . Indices defining the portion of the coarse grid to be
included in the refinement.
i1 ≤ in1, in2 ≤ i2
j1 ≤ jn1, jn2 ≤ j2
k1 ≤ kn1, kn2 ≤ k2
ENDREF End of data defining a refined grid.
11.3.1.2 Radial Grid Refinement
The following specifies a radial refinement along the z axis of a coarse grid. The
order of the data is important.
RADZREF name
i j k1 k2
nr ntheta ri (RMIN rmin)
nz1 nz2 nz3 .........nz(k2-k1+1)
xw1 xw2 xw3 .........xw(k2-k1+2)
yw1 yw2 yw3 .........yw(k2-k1+2)
(OMIT i i j j ko1 ko2)
(INGRID i i j j kn1 kn2)
ENDREF
Definitions:
RADZREF Define a radial grid whose z axis is aligned with the z

axis of the coarse grid.

i, j, k1, k2 Indices defining the portion of the coarse grid to be

refined.
nr Number of refined gridblocks in the r direction.
ntheta Number of refined gridblocks in the theta direction.

Ntheta can be 1 or any integer multiple of 4.
ri Inner radius, ft(m). This is the distance from the origin to

the inner edge of the first gridblock. ri must be greater
than zero.
RMIN Alpha label.
rmin Minimum outer radius allowed for the inner most ring of
blocks. Default is zero or whatever is specified by the
global RMIN data (Section 11.12).

xw1, xw2, . . . X locations of the well intersections with the boundaries

of the coarse gridblocks (fractions). A value of 0.5 means
that the well (origin of radial grid) is at the center of the
coarse gridblock.
yw1, yw2, . . . Y locations of the well intersections with the boundaries

coarse gridblock.


i, i, j, j, ko1, ko2 Indices defining the portion of the coarse grid to be

k1 ≤ ko1, ko2 ≤ k2

i, i, j, j, kn1, kn2 Indices defining the portion of the coarse grid to be


k1 ≤ kn1, kn2 ≤ k2
The following specifies a radial refinement along the y axis of a coarse grid. The
RADYREF name
i j1 j2 k
nz1 nz2 nz3 .........nz(j2-j1+1)
xw1 xw2 xw3 .........xw(j2-j1+2)
zw1 zw2 zw3 .........zw(j2-j1+2)
(OMIT i i jo1 jo2 k k)
(INGRID i i jn1 jn2 k k)
ENDREF
Definitions:
RADYREF Define a radial grid whose z axis is aligned with the y

i, j1, j2, k Indices defining the portion of the coarse grid to be

refined.

ri Inner radius ft(m). This is the distance from the origin to

the inner edge of the first grid lock. ri must be greater
than zero.
RMIN Alpha label.

xw1, xw2, . . . X locations of the well intersections with the boundaries

coarse gridblock.

zw1, zw2, . . . Z locations of the well intersections with the boundaries

coarse gridblock.


i, i, jo1, jo2, k, k Indices defining the portion of the coarse grid to be

j1 ≤ jo1, jo2 ≤ j2

i, i, jn1, jn2, k, k Indices defining the portion of the coarse grid to be

j1 ≤ jn1, jn2 ≤ j2
The following specifies a radial refinement along the x axis of a coarse grid. The
RADXREF name
i1 i2 j k
nz1 nz2 nz3 .........nz(i2-i1+1)
yw1 yw2 yw3 .........yw(i2-i1+2)
zw1 zw2 zw3 .........zw(i2-i1+2)
(OMIT io1 io2 j j k k)
(INGRID in1 in2 j j k k)
ENDREF
Definitions:
RADXREF Define a radial grid whose z axis is aligned with the x


i1, i2, j, k Indices defining the portion of the coarse grid to be

refined.

ri Inner radius ft(m). This is the distance from the origin to

the inner edge of the first gridblock. ri must be greater
than zero.
RMIN Alpha label.
nz1, nz2, . . . Number of z direction fine grid blocks for each of the
yw1, yw2, . . . Y locations of the well intersections with the boundaries

coarse gridblock.
zw1, zw2, . . . Z locations of the well intersections with the boundaries

coarse gridblock.


io1, io2, j, j, k, k Indices defining the portion of the coarse grid to be

i1 ≤ io1, io2 ≤ i2
INGRID Range of coarse grid blocks to be included in the

in1, in2, j, j, k, k Indices defining the portion of the coarse grid to be


i1 ≤ in1, in2 ≤ i2
Example 1:
NX NY NZ NCOMP
5 5 1 2
LGR BASEGRID
CARTREF REF1
2 4 2 4 1 1
2 3 2
2 2 2
1
RADZREF RAD
3 3 1 1
3 4 .25
1
2*0.5
2*0.5
ENDREF
ENDREF
ENDLGR

Example 2:
NX NY NZ NCOMP OR NX NY NZ NCOMP
5 5 1 2 5 5 1 2
LGR BASEGRID LGR BASEGRID
CARTREF REF1 CARTREF REF1
2 4 2 4 1 1 2 4 2 4 1 1
2 3 2 2 3 2
2 2 2 2 2 2
1 1
OMIT 4 4 3 3 1 1 OMIT 3 4 3 4 1 1
OMIT 3 4 4 4 1 1 INGRID 3 3 3 3 1 1
ENDREF ENDREF
ENDLGR ENDLGR

Example 3:
NX NY NZ NCOMP
5 5 1 2
LGR BASEGRID
CARTREF REF1
2 4 2 4 1 1
2 3 2
2 2 2
1
OMIT 2 4 2 4 1 1
INGRID 3 4 2 2 1 1
INGRID 2 3 3 3 1 1
INGRID 2 2 4 4 1 1
ENDREF
ENDLGR

Example 4:
NX NY NZ NCOMP
5 5 1 2
LGR BASEGRID
CARTREF REF1
1 2 1 2 1 1
2*3
2*3
1
ENDREF
CARTREF REF2
4 5 4 5 1 1
2*3
2*3
1
ENDREF
ENDLGR

Example 5:
NX NY NZ NCOMP
5 5 1 2
LGR BASEGRID
CARTREF REF1
2 4 2 4 1 1
2 3 2
3*2
1
CARTREF REF2
2 3 3 4 1 1
3 2
4 2
1
ENDREF
ENDREF
ENDLGR

11.4 Array Data

Array data is introduced grid by grid. All Array data must be together and grid
order is important. Array data for the ROOT grid is required. Array data are
propagated recursively to the children grids as soon as they are read in. The
propagation therefore restricts the order, and data for parent grids need to precede
those of its children. Any array data for any child grid can be entered separately to
replace the values generated by the propagation process. Permeability arrays at
gridblock faces are not allowed with the LGR option.
⎛ NAME ⎞
Arrays ⎝ ALL LGRS ⎠
Definitions:
Arrays Start of array data for grid (name).
name Name of grid for which the following array data applies.
Default is ROOT.
ALL LGRS The ARRAYS data section will be read in a loop for each
LGR grid, but excluding the ROOT grid.
11.5 Array Data Propagation

The data for the following arrays apply to gridblock faces and are propagated
only to the appropriate fine gridblock faces.
TMX, TMR, TMXF, TMRF

TMY, TMTH, TMYF, TMTHF
TMZ, TMZF
TMXYL, TMXYLF, TMXYR, TMXYRF
Transmissibility multipliers (MULT) Section 1.6
11.6 Array Input Option

Array data of children grids (that has been assigned through propagation) can be
modified using the MOD or VMOD options, Section 1.5.4. The NONE option for
a child array indicates that no data will be input and any MOD or VMOD options
will apply to the inherited data. The modified data is then propagated to the grid’s
children.

Example:
ARRAYS
POR CON
0.3
.
.
.
ARRAYS CHILD1
POR NONE
VMOD
2 4 2 3 1 1 EQ
0.25 0.26 2*0.27 0.29 0.3
11.7 Saturation and Relative Permeability Endpoint Arrays

Endpoint arrays can be assigned to children grids without having assigned any
values to their parent’s grid. Any unassigned gridblocks or any assigned negative
values will be reset to the rock data.
11.8 Grid Geometry

Any of the options previously available for defining a single grid with the
exception of the bedding plane geometry DXB, DYB, etc. can be used to describe
the ROOT grid. The LGR option requires eight (x, y, z) coordinates for each
gridblock: these will be calculated internally. An additional data input option
(CORP ARRAY Section 11.9) allows the input of the eight corner points directly.
The corner points of children grids are either input using the CORP ARRAY data
or are calculated internally from the coordinates of the parent gridblocks. The
corner point calculation uses the normalized DX, DY, DZ arrays of children
blocks to determine gridblock spacing. Absence of DX, DY, DZ array data
(default) will produce a uniform spacing of children blocks within their parent
block.
11.9 Corner Point Data (CORP)

The CORP array consists of eight (x, y, z) coordinate values for each gridblock.
The size of the CORP array is therefore 24 times the number of gridblocks in a
grid. The (x, y) values of CORP data for different children grids need not all be
relative to the same origin. Each child grid is rotated and translated in a horizontal
plane so as to align with its corresponding parent grid. However, the z (depth)
values of different CORP arrays are required to be relative to the same reference
and consistent with other depth values used elsewhere in the input data.
CORP (EIGHT)

Definitions:
CORP, ft(m) (x, y, z) coordinate values. 24*NX*NY*NZ data values

are required. The default order is (x1, y1, z1), (x2, y2,
z2), (x3, y3, z3) ............. (x8, y8, z8)
i x
j 2
1
y
z
4 3
k
5 6
8 7
EIGHT Alternative order of CORP data.
(x1, x2, x4, x3, x5, x6, x8, x7),

(y1, y2, y4, y3, y5, y6, y8, y7),
(z1, z2, z4, z3, z5, z6, z8, z7)
11.9.1 Modify by a Constant (MODX,MODY,MODZ)

The MODX, MODY, MODZ options are used to apply constant arithmetic
operations to a portion of the x,y, and z data entered with the CORP keyword. All
eight corner point values of each gridblock included in the portion of the grid
specified will be modified. The MODX, MODY, and MODZ data need to
immediately follow the CORP data. Multiple data cards may follow a MODX,
MODY, or MODZ keyword.
MODX
MODY
MODZ
i1 i2 j1 j2 k1 k2 #v
Definitions: 00
MODX Indicates that changes are to be made to the x coordinate

values.

MODY Indicates that changes are to be made to the y coordinate

values.
MODZ Indicates that changes are to be made to the z coordinate

values.

(r,θ,z) grid. Modifications are applied to x, y or z coordinate elements that fall in
the portion of the grid defined by:
i1 ≤ I ≤ i2
j1 ≤ J ≤ j2
k1 ≤ K ≤ k2
# An operator that describes how the coordinate values are

to be modified. Any of the following symbols may be
used:
+ add
- subtract
/ divide
* multiply
= equal

#v.

x,y,z coordinate arrays, according to the specified
operation.
Example: CORP
INCLUDE grid.inc
MODZ
1 10 1 10 1 3 *3.048

11.10 Handedness of Coordinates (RIGHTHANDED)

The coordinate system used internally and drawn in Section 11.9 is left-handed.
Corner-point data systems that are right-handed must be identified by use of the
keyword RIGHTHANDED as part of the utility data. If not identified, right-
handed systems will calculate negative pore volumes. CORP array data read for
ROOT and children grids must be either all left-handed or all right-handed.
RIGHTHANDED
Definitions:
RIGHTHANDED CORP array data are right-handed.

i x
2
j 1
y
z
4 3
k
5 6
8 7

11.11 Transmissibility Calculations
11.11.1 Harmonic Integration (HARTRAN)
HARTRAN (iquad jquad kquad)
Definitions:
HARTRAN Transmissibilities are calculated using a harmonic

integration of the space defined by the block corners.
This is the default.
iquad, jquad, kquad Number of quadrature points in the x, y, and z

directions, respectively, used by the integration. The
integration is performed from the centroid of the
block to each of the six faces separately, and iquad,
jquad, kquad are used for each of the six directions.
This results in six half transmissibilities for each
gridblock. Default is (3, 3, 3).
1 ≤ iquad, jquad, kquad ≤ 3
11.11.2 No Integration (NEWTRAN)
NEWTRAN
Definitions:
NEWTRAN Transmissibilities are calculated by considering paths

from the gridblock centroid to each of the six face
centroids. The normals of each of the face areas with the
corresponding paths are then used in the calculations.
11.11.3 Rectangular or Radial ROOT Grid (BLOCKTR)

ROOT grids that are defined with DX, DY, DZ or DR, DTHETA, DZ options are
converted to corner-point grids internally. When LGR/ENDLGR is entered, either
alone or with the data defining LGR’s, the block corner points are used in the
calculations of pore volumes and transmissibilities (Sections 11.11.1 and 11.11.2).
Depending on the structure of the reservoir the calculations using corner-point
values can be substantially different than calculations made using the array data
directly. An option to use the array data directly for the ROOT grid is provided
here.

NOTE: The corner point method is more consistent geometrically.
BLOCKTR
Definitions:
BLOCKTR Use DX, DY, DZ or DR, DTHETA, DZ directly to

calculate pore volumes and transmissibilities of ROOT
grids.
11.12 Minimum Radius of Radial Refinements (RMIN)
RMIN rmin
Definitions:
blocks. This is applied globally to all radial refinements,
but can be set on a grid by grid basis while specifying the
LGR data (Section 11.3.1.2). Default is 0.0.
11.13 Connection Transmissibility Modification (MULT)
[STD ]
MULT array [NONSTD] [MINUS] [operator]
[ALL ] [PLUS ]
(GRID name)
i1 i2 j1 j2 k1 k2 val
Definitions: 00
See Section 1.6 for additional definitions.
NOTE: Values are propagated to children grids at the appropriate grid block faces
only.

11.14 Function Input Option (FUNCTION)
FUNCTION ..................
(GRID name)
..
..
..
..
Definitions:
name Name of the grid. Default is all grids.
NOTE: GRID is required with the BLOCK option.
11.15 Arbitrary Grid-block Connections (FTRANS)
FTRANS
(GRID name1 (name2))
i1 j1 k1 i2 j2 k2 t (tt)
Definitions:
name1 Name of grid1. Default is ROOT.
name2 Name of grid2. Default is name1.
See Section 6.5.2 for additional definitions.
11.16 Override Modification (OVER)
OVER array (array) (array) (array)

(GRID name)
i1 i2 j1 j2 k1 k2 #v (#v) (#v) (#v)

Definitions:
NOTE: Operations only apply to the specified grid, i.e., no propagation.
11.17 Value Override (VOVER)
VOVER array
(GRID name)
i1 i2 j1 j2 k1 k2 (op)
values as necessary
Definitions:
11.18 Half-Transmissibility Override (TOVER)

The TOVER card allows the user to input half-transmissibilties in the same format
as the VOVER card.
The TOVER cards must follow the array data and precede any FTRANS,
OVER and VOVER cards.
TOVER array
(GRID name)
i1 i2 j1 j2 k1 k2 (op)
Definitions:
array One of the following array names. The + means the face
in the positive direction, while - means the face in the
negative direction.

TX+, TX-, TY+, TY-, TZ+, TZ-, TR+, TR-, TTHETA+,

TTHETA-
TXF+, TXF-, TYF+, TYF-, TZF+, TZF-, TRF+, TRF-,

TTHETF+, TTHETF-
11.19 Pinchout Gridblock Connections (PINCHGRID)

Pinchout connections are generated automatically as described in Sections 2.2.9
and 6.8. The PINCHOUT card is used to specify the tolerances tolnet and tolth.
By default gridblocks having a net thickness less than or equal to tolnet will be
considered inactive (zero pore volume) only if the parent gridblock is also
inactive. The PINCHGRID card allows for the application of the tolnet tolerance
to gridblocks within a grid independent of their parent.
PINCHGRID gridname1 (gridname2) ... (gridnamei)
Definitions:
PINCHGRID Alpha label indicating that the following named grids

will be tested against tolnet independently of their parent
grid.
gridname Names of grids to be tested. If this list only contains the

keyword ALL, then all grid refinements will be tested.

11.20 Pore Volume Cutoff (TOLPV)

The TOLPV card is used to specify the pore volume cutoff tolerance, tolpv on a
grid-by-grid basis. Gridblocks with a pore volume less than tolpv will be
considered inactive (zero pore volume). For the DUAL porosity option, if the sum
of both matrix and fracture pore volumes is less than tolpv, then both matrix and
facture pore volumes will be set to zero. Otherwise, the pore volume test is only
applied to the matrix blocks. OVER/VOVER of pore volumes are applied after
this check.
TOLPV (gridname1) (gridname2) ... (gridnamei) tolpv
Definitions:
TOLPV Alpha label indicating that the following named grids

will be assigned tolpv as the pore volume cutoff.
gridname Names of grids to be assigned tolpv. If this list only

contains the keyword ALL, or no grid names are
provided, then all grid refinements will be assigned
tolpv.
tolpv Pore volume cutoff tolerance, rb (m3). Default for grids

not specified is the value specified by the CORTOL card,
Section 2.2.12.2.


Chapter
12
00000 Tracer Option1
12.1 Introduction
This is a short description of a set of tools which have been developed to improve
and expand the simulation capabilities in the analysis and interpretation of tracer
tests and in the design and performance analysis of waterflood projects. The tools
are built around the particle tracking method which allows accurate simulation of
tracer flow associated with convection and physical dispersion. The method is
nearly numerical dispersion free and allows accurate simulation of tracer flow in
field scale simulation. The algorithm is implemented in VIP-EXECUTIVE and
allows simulation of tracer flow within the framework of three-dimensional,
multi-phase, non-steady state reservoir simulation. In addition to accurate
simulation of tracer flow the software allows: (1) tracking of water fronts in
waterflood operations; (2) construction of three-dimensional flow trajectories and
streamlines of velocity field; (3) calculation of the areal sweep; (4) visualization
and animation of tracer flow.
12.2 New Input Data for Initialization Module VIP-CORE

There is one new card in the initialization data set of VIP-CORE, as well as
additional aquifer INFLUX data.
12.2.1 Activate Tracer Option (TRACER)

The tracer option is activated by the input of the TRACER card.
TRACER
The card notifies the simulator that later in the run the tracer option may be used.
As a result, VIP-CORE generates some grid related information required by the
tracer option. This information is passed to the simulation module through the
restart record.
1. Available as a separately licensed option. Not available in VIP-THERM.
R5000.0.1 Tracer Option 12-557

12.2.2 Additional INFLUX Data (INFLUX)

When the tracer option is activated, the aquifer description data requires one
additional parameter, SIDE, to be defined. It follows the SINF parameter in the
aquifer description data. The side parameter is needed to include the effect of the
aquifer influx on the water velocity at the boundary.

WTR CT
NBINF BINF TC (LINFAC)
nbinf binf tc (linfac)
IINF JINF KINF SINF SIDE
iinf jinf kinf sinf side
[VALUE]
[WINDOW
i1 i2 j1 j2 k1 k2 sinf side]
(ENDAQ)
TD PD
td pd
Definition:
side A parameter which indicates the boundary grid block

side attached to the aquifer. The parameter may take
any of the following numerical values:
1 x- side of the grid block

2 x+ side of the grid block
3 y- side of the grid block
4 y+ side of the grid block
5 z- side of the grid block
6 z+ side of the grid block
12-558 Tracer Option R5000.0.1

Chapter
13
Heat Loss Data (VIP-THERM)
13.1 Introduction
Heat loss data must appear at the end of the initialization data.
Heat loss calculations may be performed in one of three ways:
1. Include the over-underburden in the reservoir grid.
2. Method of Vinsome and Westerveld.
3. Method of Coats, George, Chu, and Marcum.
13.2 Gridding of Over/Underburden

The energy balance equation may be solved in the over/underburden by including
these areas in the reservoir grid. These "burden" gridblocks must be input with
zero permeabilities and non-zero total volumes. Using this method, one
dimensional problems become two dimensional and two dimensional problems
may become three dimensional. At least five gridblocks in the direction of heat
loss is recommended. The sum of the dimensions of these gridblocks in the
direction of heat loss should be at least 150 feet. This method requires the greatest
amount of computer time of the three.
13.3 Method of Vinsome and Westerveld (Reference 10)

This simple method is based on an assumed form of the temperature profile in the
over/underburden and requires the least amount of computer time of the three
methods.
Title Card: HTLOSS VW
The remaining data are given in Section 13.5.
Definitions:
HTLOSS Alpha label indication that the data being read are heat
loss data.
R5000.0.1 Heat Loss Data (VIP-THERM) 13-559

VW Alpha label indicating that the method of Vinsome and

Westerveld will be used for heat loss calculations.
13.4 Method of Coats, George, Chu, and Marcum (Reference 40)

This method uses the principle of superposition to couple a series of one-
dimensional finite difference solutions of the energy balance in the over/
underburden with the reservoir temperature in the boundary gridblocks. Since the
over/underburden gridblocks are not included in the more complicated system of
equations solved in the reservoir, the computer time required for this method is
substantially reduced over the method of gridding of the over/underburden and
falls in between the computer time required for the other two methods.
By default, the number of over/underburden gridblocks in the finite difference

grid is 5, with thicknesses in the direction of heat loss of 2, 4, 10, 50 and 100 feet
(increasing with increasing distance from the reservoir). These dimensions may
be changed by the user as indicated below.
Title Card: HTLOSS

Data Card: (NZOB nzob)
Data Card: (DZOB dzob1 dzob2 . . . dzobnzob)
The remaining data are given in Section 13.5.
Definitions:
HTLOSS Alpha label indicating that the data being read are heat
loss data.
NZOB Alpha label indicating that the next entry on this line is
the number of over/underburden gridblocks in the
direction of heat loss. (Optional)
nzob The number of over/underburden gridblocks in the

direction of heat loss. (Optional)
DZOB Alpha label indicating that the next nzob entries on this
line are the over/underburden gridblock dimensions in
the direction of heat loss. (Optional)
dzob The over/underburden gridblock dimensions in the

direction of heat loss in order of increasing distance for
the reservoir, ft(m). (Optional)
13-560 Heat Loss Data (VIP-THERM) R5000.0.1

13.5 Heat Loss Data Specification

Rock property and geometric data for the methods described in Sections 13.3 and
13.4 are described here. Required data include the rock heat capacity and thermal
conductivity in the direction of heat loss and definition of the surfaces from which
heat is lost.
Two options for definition of heat loss surfaces are available. In the “Specified
Index Option” (Section 13.5.1), each gridblock face through which heat loss is to
occur is specified by giving the gridblock indices (i,j,k) and a direction flag
(except for radial grids for which heat loss is allowed only in the z-direction). In
the “Automatic Index Option” (Section 13.5.2), a single heat capacity and thermal
conductivity are given for the bordering rock along each reservoir boundary
(indicated by a direction flag). The program automatically assigns heat loss to the
outermost active (non-zero total volume) gridblock face on the specified
boundary.
13.5.1 Specified Index Option
Title Card: I J K CPR KTR (DIRCN)(AMULT)

Data Cards: i j k cpr ktr (dircn)(amult)
Definitions:
I Alpha label indicating that the entry appearing in this

location on the following data card(s) is the i-index of the
boundary gridblock.
J Alpha label indicating that the entry appearing in this

location on the following data card(s) is the j-index of the
boundary gridblock.
K Alpha label indicating that the entry appearing in this

location on the following data card(s) is the k-index of
the boundary gridblock.
CPR Alpha label indicating that the entry appearing in this

location on the following data card(s) is the rock specific
heat capacity in the direction of heat loss.
KTR Alpha label indicating that the entry appearing in this

location on the following data card(s) is the rock thermal
conductivity in the direction of heat loss.
DIRCN Alpha label indicating that the entry appearing in this

location on the following data card(s) is the direction of
heat loss. Used only for rectangular grids. For radial
grids, heat loss calculations are allowed only in the z
direction.

AMULT Alpha label indicating that the entry appearing in this

location on the following data card(s) is the area
multiplier.
i Value of i-index for boundary gridblock. May be

specified as a range: i1 -i2.
j Value of j-index for boundary gridblock. May be

specified as a range: j1 -j2.
k Value of k-index for boundary gridblock. May be

specified as a range: k1 -k2.
cpr Value of specific rock heat capacity in direction of heat

loss, Btu/FT3 °F (KJ/M3 °C).
ktr Value of rock thermal conductivity in direction of heat

loss, Btu/D ft. °F (W/m°C).
dircn Alpha label indicating direction of heat loss. Must be

either X, Y, or Z for rectangular grids. Do not enter for
radial grids (heat loss calculations are allowed only in the
z direction). Must be either XP, YP, ZP, XN, YN, or ZN
for corner-point grids, where the P and N denote positive
and negative heat loss directions.
amult Area multiplier, optional. Default is 1.0.
13.5.2 Automatic Index Option

Title Card (2) and Data Cards (2) are optional data to allow area multipliers to be
specified for individual gridblock faces.
Title Card (1): AUTO CPR KTR DIRCN (AMULT)

Data Card (1): cpr ktr dircn (amult)
Title Card (2): (I J K DIRCN AMULT)
Data Card (2): (i j k dircn amult)
Definitions:
CPR Alpha label indicating that the entry appearing in this

location on the following data card(s) is the rock specific
heat capacity in the direction of heat loss.
KTR Alpha label indicating that the entry appearing in this

location on the following data card(s) is the rock thermal
conductivity in the direction of heat loss.

DIRCN Alpha label indicating that the entry appearing in this

location on the following data card(s) is the direction of
heat loss. Used only for rectangular grids. For radial
grids, heat loss calculations are allowed only in the z
direction.
AMULT Alpha label indicating that the entry appearing in this

location on the following data card(s) is the area
multiplier.
cpr Value of specific rock heat capacity in direction of heat

loss, Btu/FT3 °F (KJ/M3 °C).
ktr Value of rock thermal conductivity in direction of heat

loss, Btu/D ft. °F (W/m°C).
dircn Alpha label indicating the reservoir boundary from which

heat loss is to occur. Must be one of the following:
XN (y-z plane at x=O)

XP (y-z plane at x=L)
YN (x-z plane at y=O)
YP (x-z plane at y=W)
ZN (x-y plane at z=O)
ZP (x-y plane at z=H)
ALL (all bounding planes, ZN and ZP
only for radial systems)
ALL is not allowed on type 2 Data Cards.
amult Area multiplier, option. Default is 1.0.
I Alpha label indicating that the entry appearing in this

location on the following data card(s) is the i-index of the
boundary gridblock.
J Alpha label indicating that the entry appearing in this

location on the following data card(s) is the j-index of the
boundary gridblock.
K Alpha label indicating that the entry appearing in this

location on the following data card(s) is the k-index of
the boundary gridblock.
i Value of i-index for boundary gridblock. May be

specified as a range: i1 -i2.
j Value of j-index for boundary gridblock. May be

specified as a range: j1 -j2.
k Value of k-index for boundary gridblock. May be

specified as a range: k1 -k2.


Chapter
14
Parallel Computing
00000
14.1 Automatic Grid Decomposition
14.1.1 Introduction
Any cartesian grid defined with the LGR option can be automatically decomposed
into subdomains for the purpose of running on a network of CPU’s (parallel
computing).
The new subdomains are automatically identified by gridnames D1 D2 D3 ...

D9999999, with increasing numerals according to the convention of x-direction
first followed by y-direction then z-direction. Any name already used for an
existing LGR grid will be skipped over. Local refinements within a decomposed
grid will be moved into the new subdomains as long as each refinement is
contained entirely within any one of the subdomains; otherwise the decomposition
is not allowed. Decomposition of nested grids is allowed.
A radial ROOT grid with no periodic boundary conditions (no FLOW360) is

considered like a cartesian grid for the context of this section. This section
documents the data necessary for specifying the domain decompositions.
NOTE: The subdomains created by decomposition are internally considered

to be local grid refinements. The grid-to-grid connections created are flagged
as non-standard connections for data options such as MULT (Section 1.6).
14.1.2 Domain Decomposition of Cartesian Grids (DECOMP)

The DECOMP/ENDDEC data must follow the LGR data. If no LGR’s are
defined, then the data must follow the grid dimensions data (Section 2.2.3) in
which case the LGR option is turned on automatically and the ROOT grid could
be decomposed.
DECOMP
gridname1 (KEEP) ndx ndy ndz
(X npx1 npx2 npx3 ... npxndx)
(Y npy1 npy2 npy3 ... npyndy)
(Z npz1 npz2 npz3 ... npzndz)
(gridname2 (KEEP) ndx ndy ndz)
.
R5000.0.1 Parallel Computing 14-565

.
.
ENDDEC
Definitions:
DECOMP Keyword for introducing grid decomposition data.
gridnamei Name of grid to be decomposed.
NOTE: Nested grids make decomposition dependent on grid order. It is

recommended to specify the most refined grids first.
KEEP Keyword that will result in the new grids to be 1 by 1

by 1 refinements on top of the original decomposed
grid. The KEEP option increases the size of the model
since storage for the original grid is also required. The
default is for the new grids to replace the original grid
and thus the new grids will be at the same (LGR) level
as the original grid.
ndx,ndy,ndz Number of domains in the x, y, z directions.
X,Y,Z Optional keywords that allows control of the size of

each new sub domain.
npx1,npx2,... Number of x direction parent grid blocks in each new

domain.
NOTE: If the KEEP option is used then the decomposed grid itself will be the
parent of the new grids. Otherwise the parent of the decomposed grid will
also be the parent of the new grids.
npy1,npy2,... Number of y direction parent grid blocks in each new

domain. See note following the definition for npx.
npz1,npz2,... Number of z direction parent grid blocks in each new

domain. See note following the definition for npx.
ENDDEC End of grid decomposition data.
14-566 Parallel Computing R5000.0.1

ndx
NOTE: ∑ npxi = NXP

i=1
ndy
∑ npyi = NYP
i=1
ndz
∑ npzi = NZP
i=1
Where NXP, NYP, NZP are:
1) The x,y,z direction dimensions of the decomposed

grid (NX, NY, NZ) when the KEEP option is used.
or
2) The x,y,z direction dimensions of the portion of the

parent grid that contains the decomposed grid
when the KEEP option is not used.

Example 1 (Default subdomain size):
NX NY NZ NCOMP
10 10 3 2
DECOMPOSE
ROOT 2 2 1
ENDDECOMPOSE
I
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ROOT 10
J
1
2
D1 D2
3
7
D3 D4
8
10

Example 2 (Specify subdomain size in x-direction):
NX NY NZ NCOMP
10 10 3 2
DECOMPOSE
ROOT 2 2 1
x 4 6
ENDDECOMPOSE
I
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ROOT 10
J
1
2
D1 D2
3
7
D3 D4
8
10

Example 3 (Specify subdomain size in x and y-directions, with a nested grid):
NX NY NZ NCOMP
10 10 3 2
LGR
CARTREF D3
3 4 3 4 1 3
4*2 3*1
ENDREF
ENDLGR
DECOMPOSE
ROOT 2 2 1
X 4 6
Y 4 6
ENDDECOMPOSE
I
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ROOT 10
J
1
D1
2
D2
3 D3
7
D4 D5
8
10

Chapter
15
00000 Diffusion
15.1 Summary
The Reservoir Engineering Research Institute (RERI) has extensively investigated
the effects of diffusion in petroleum reservoirs. Their work can be divided into
two categories: (1) calculation of compositional variations due to diffusion alone,
which can be used to initialize a reservoir model in which convective effects are
ignored , and (2) the combined effects of diffusion and convection, which can be
used to initialize a model in which both diffusion and convection are important
mechanisms.
RERI developed algorithms for three different types of diffusion (molecular,

pressure, and thermal) using the theory of irreversible thermodynamics. The
diffusion fluxes within each phase are the products of diffusion coefficients
multiplied by a gradient. The molecular diffusion flux of a particular component
is the sum of the product of the molecular diffusion coefficients and the gradients
of the mole fractions of all the components. The pressure diffusion flux of a
particular component is the product of the pressure diffusion coefficients and the
pressure gradient. The thermal diffusion flux of a particular component is the
product of the thermal diffusion coefficients and the temperature gradient. These
complex coefficients can be evaluated at the start of each timestep, based on the
pressure, temperature, and compositions of each phase, and held constant over the
timestep. For the implicit mode, the diffusive fluxes are then treated implicitly in
phase pressures, phase saturations, and phase compositions. These complex
calculations require many thermodynamic quantities, which can be calculated by
an equation of state (EOS). Shukla and Firoozabadi, and Firoozabadi et al.
describe the thermodynamic calculations in detail.
The steady state solution of the diffusion equation, which can be used to generate
initial pressures and compositions internally, has been added to VIP-CORE.
Additionally, the algorithm rigorously detects the phase state existing in each
gridblock, allowing the initialization process to properly initialize the reservoir
with oil overlaying gas, overlaying water.
With this enhancement, diffusion flux terms are added to the convective flux
terms. These changes have been implemented for IMPES or implicit formulation,
single or DUAL porosity/permeability mode, and in serial or parallel. For the
R5000.0.1 Diffusion 15-571

implicit formulation, the diffusion calculations are implicit in pressure, saturation,

and composition.
15.2 Methodology
The RERI diffusion flux terms are of the form:
⎛ nc – 1 ⎞
J ij = S j ρ j T D ∑ D Mik, j ΔX k, j + D P i, j ΔP j + D Ti, j ΔT⎟
⎜
⎜ ⎟
⎝k = 1 ⎠
00 where:
00 Jij is the diffusive flux of component i in phase j,
00 Sj is the saturation of phase j,

ρ is the density of phase j,
00
j
00 TD is the diffusive transmissibility,
00 nc is the number of hydrocarbon components,
00
DM is the molecular diffusion coefficient corresponding to the flux of
ik, j
component i in phase j, due to the mole fraction gradient of component k,
00
Δ X k, j is the mole fraction gradient of component k in phase j,
00
DP is the pressure diffusion coefficient of component i in phase j,
i, j
00
ΔPj is the pressure gradient of phase j,
DT is the thermal diffusion coefficient of component i in phase j,
00 i, j
00 ΔT is the temperature gradient.
φ------
A-
The diffusive transmissibility is the harmonic average of the term d , where φ is
the porosity, A is the area, and d is the distance between grid node centers.
15.2.1 Initialization
In VIP-CORE, the steady state solution involves solving the equation:
00 for each component of each phase at a point in space.
00 Starting at a point with the temperature, pressure, and composition of each phase,
15-572 Diffusion R5000.0.1

one can solve for the pressure and composition of each phase at another point in
space, given the temperature, and difference in depth at a second point. The
simplifying assumption is made that only a single hydrocarbon phase (oil or gas)
is present everywhere in the reservoir. This limitation only affects the
initialization. VIP-CORE will still calculate diffusion effects properly if two
hydrocarbon phases exist at a later time.
00 The initialization procedure involves a marching procedure, from point to point.

A single starting point is provided for each equilibrium region. Then the
following procedure is followed:
1. From the initial point, march in 1 foot increments to the last layer of the
column of gridblocks where x=1, and y = 1.
2. March from block to block in the bottom layer so that pressures and
compositions are calculated for every block in the bottom layer
3. In each column of blocks of constant x and constant y, march upwards in the

z-direction from block to block, calculating compositions and pressures for
each block.
00 To calculate a water pressure, all the gridblocks in an equilibrium region are

searched to find the block that has the depth of its grid center closest to the water-
oil contact. If more than one block is at the same minimum distance, the block
with the lowest (i,j,k) number is used as the reference block. The oil or gas phase
pressure in the reference block is corrected to the oil/water or gas/water contact
depth. The oil phase pressure is further adjusted by the capillary pressure at the
contact to determine a water phase pressure. The water phase pressure in all other
blocks is calculated by adding the product of the water density (calculated at the
pressure at the contact) and the depth difference between the block and the
contact.
The diffusion initialization option is activated by the DIFFCOMP keyword.
15.2.2 IMPES Formulation

In the IMPES formulation, the diffusive flux terms are evaluated as follows:
⎛ nc – 1 n
⎞
T D ⎜ ∑ D Mik, j ΔX k, j + D Pi, j ΔP j + D Ti, j ΔT⎟⎟
⎜
n+1 n n n n n n
J ij = Sj ρj
⎝k = 1 ⎠
where the n superscript indicates the value at the start of the timestep, and the n+1
superscript indicates the value at the end of the timestep. Thus in IMPES, the
diffusive flux terms are evaluated at the start of the timestep based on the
gradients at the start of the timestep, and the flux terms are held constant over the
step.
R5000.0.1 Diffusion 15-573

15.2.3 Implicit Formulation

For the implicit formulation, the diffusive flux terms must be treated quite
differently, such that the fluxes are implicit in pressure, saturations, and
compositions, as follows:
⎛ nc – 1 n
⎞
T D ⎜⎜ ∑ D M ik, j ΔT⎟⎟
n+1 n +1 n n n +1 n+1 n
J ij = Sj ρj ΔX k, j + D Pi, j ΔP j + D T i, j
⎝k = 1 ⎠
00 The phase molar densities and the molecular, pressure, and thermal diffusion
coefficients are evaluated at the start of the timestep and held constant over the
step, just as with the IMPES formulation, but the remaining terms are all treated
implicitly, resulting in a set of non-linear equations for the component fluxes.
Since the temperatures do not vary with time, the thermal diffusive fluxes are
implicit only in phase saturations. These implicit terms are expanded and included
in the (2*NC +1) equations involving (2*NC+1) unknowns which are iteratively
solved for the conditions at the end of the timestep.
Another significant difference between the IMPES and implicit formulations has
to do with the treatment of phase identification. In the IMPES mode, a phase state
is not changed until the gridblock is detected to have changed from single-phase
to two-phase, or vice-versa. Thus in the IMPES mode, a gridblock could start out
as a single-phase liquid, and remain classified as a single-phase liquid up until the
point at which enough lighter hydrocarbons have entered the block so as to cause
it to flash to a two-phase system. However, in the standard implicit formulation,
the actual phase state is determined at the end of each timestep, such that a
gridblock could change from a liquid phase identification to a vapor identification
without ever crossing into a two-phase state. This presents a slight problem with
the RERI algorithm, in that it only considers liquid-liquid diffusion and gas-gas
diffusion, but not gas-liquid diffusion. Thus a phase-state change also triggers a
disconnect in the diffusion calculations. However, other than a small perturbation,
this has no significant effect on the overall performance or results. This
pertubation can be mitigated by running in the DRYGAS mode, which eliminates
the phase ID check, and allows the implicit run to essentially reproduce the
IMPES results.
15.3 References
00 Firoozabadi, Abbas, Ghorayeb, Kassem, and Shukla, Keshawa: “Theoretical
Model of Thermal Diffusion Factors in Multicomponent Mixtures” AICHE
Journal, May, 2000, Vol. 46, No. 5, 892-900.
00 Ghorayeb, K.,Anraku, T., and Firoozabadi, A.: “Interpretation of the Distribution
15-574 Diffusion R5000.0.1

and GOR Behavior in the Yufutsu Fractured Gas-Condensate Field”, SPE 59437,
presented at the 2000 SPE Asia Pacific Conference, Yokohoma, Japan, April 25-
26, 2000.
00 Ghorayeb, Kassem, and Firoozabadi, Abbas: “Modeling Multicomponent

Diffusion and Convection in Porous Media”, SPEJ 5 (2), June, 2000, 158-171.
00 Ghorayeb, Kassem, and Firoozabadi, Abbas: “Two-Phase Multicomponent

Diffusion and Convection in Porous Media for Reservoir Initialization”, SPE
66365, paper presented at the SPE Reservoir Simulation Symposium, Houston,
TX, Feb., 2001.
Shukla, Keshawa, and Firoozabadi, Abbas: “A New Model of Thermal Diffusion

Coefficients in Binary Hydrocarbon Mixtures”, Ind. Eng. Chem. Res., 1998, 37,
3331-3342.
15.4 Input Data

Only new keywords and changes to existing keywords related to the diffusion
option will be discussed in this section.
15.4.1 VIP-CORE Input Data
15.4.1.1 Diffusion Activation (DIFFUSION)
The DIFFUSION card activates the diffusion option and allows the selection of
the type of diffusion.
The DIFFUSION card must be entered for any diffusion option to be

invoked.
⎛ MOLECULAR ⎞
⎜ ⎟
DIFFUSION ⎜ THERMAL ⎟ (INITONLY)
⎜ ⎟
⎜ PRESSURE ⎟
⎝ ALL ⎠
00 Definitions:
MOLECULAR Activate molecular diffusion.
THERMAL Activate thermal diffusion.
PRESSURE Activate pressure diffusion.
R5000.0.1 Diffusion 15-575

ALL Activate molecular, thermal, and pressure diffusion. This

is the default if none of MOLECULAR, THERMAL,
PRESSURE and ALL are entered.
INITONLY Do not do any diffusion calculations in VIP-EXEC;

hence no extra diffusion-related arrays will be assigned
in VIP-EXEC.
15.4.1.2 Component Characteristics (PROPERTIES)
00 Three additional component diffusion properties must be specified on the COMP

card of the PROPERTIES data (Section 4.4.3) when the DIFFUSION keyword
has been activated.
COMP ... (TAU) (MVNBP) (VISCO)
00 Definitions:
TAU For each component, the ratio of the energy of

vaporization and the energy of viscous flow,
dimensionless. TAU is only required if the thermal
diffusion option is activated. It is inversely proportional
to the thermal diffusive flux of a component.
MVNBP The molar volume of the pure component at the normal

boiling point, cm3/gmole. MVNBP is required if any of
the diffusion calculations are activated.
VISCO The viscosity of the pure component at reservoir

conditions, cp. VISCO is required if any of the diffusion
calculations are activated.
00 Example:
00 In the following example of a Modified Peng-Robinson equation of state table, the

three additional components for the thermal diffusion arrays are specified.
C EOS PARAMETER GENERATION
C
EOS PR
COMPONENTS
V1 V2
PROPERTIES K KPA
COMP MW TC PC ZC ACENTRIC OMEGAA OMEGAB VSHFT TAU MVNBP VISCO
V1 585.2 830.0 701 0.27 1.455 .4572 .0777 0.239 0.9 728.3 .499
V2 374.0 818.9 1108 0.28 1.399 .4572 .0777 0.233 1.1 728.2 .336
15.4.1.3 Steady-State Diffusion Initialization (DIFFCOMP)
When the diffusion option is active, DIFFCOMP invokes the steady-state solution
of the diffusion equation.
15-576 Diffusion R5000.0.1

This data is entered instead of the COMPOSITION keyword (Section

4.4.12.3). As with the COMPOSITION keyword, PSAT must not be specified
on the IEQUIL card.
DIFFCOMP
DEPTH P (T) Z
d p (t) z1 . . . znc
00 Definitions:
d Depth, ft (m).
p Initial pressure corresponding to depth d, psia (kPa).
t Initial reservoir temperature corresponding to depth d, °F

(°C). This data is optional.
zi Composition of component i at depth d.
00 Without this data, the model will be initialized either with a single starting
composition (OILMF/GASMF keywords) or with a compositional variation with
depth, temperature and/or position (COMPOSITION keywords).
00 Example:
C
DIFFCOMP
DEPTH P T Z
4399.4 551.4 149.0 0.500 0.200 0.300
15.4.1.4 Coefficient Array Printing (PRINT COEFS)
The printing of these diffusivity arrays may be requested using PRINT COEFS
(Section 3.3.2).
PRINT COEFS (DIFFX) (DIFFY) (DIFFZ)

(DIFFXF) (DIFFYF) (DIFFZF) (DEX)
00 Definitions:
DIFFX Print diffusivity arrays in the X direction.
DIFFY Print diffusivity arrays in the Y direction.
DIFFZ Print diffusivity arrays in the Z direction.
DIFFXF Print fracture diffusivity arrays in the X direction.
R5000.0.1 Diffusion 15-577

DIFFYF Print fracture diffusivity arrays in the Y direction.
DIFFZF Print fracture diffusivity arrays in the Z direction.
DEX Print the matrix-fracture exchange diffusivity arrays.
15.4.1.5 Grid Data Written for Post-Processing (MAP)
The MAP (Section 2.2.2.1) card is used to write these diffusivity arrays to be
written to the vdb file or to the map file. 00
MAP (DIFFX) (DIFFY) (DIFFZ) (DEX)
00 Definitions:
DIFFX Map diffusivity arrays in the X direction.
DIFFY Map diffusivity arrays in the Y direction.
DIFFZ Map diffusivity arrays in the Z direction.
DEX Map matrix-fracture exchange diffusivity arrays.
15.4.1.6 Input Arrays and/or FUNCTION Options (SIGMAD, DEX, TEMPF)
00 The matrix-fracture diffusivity, DEX, and the fracture temperature, TEMPF, can
optionally be input as arrays, and can also be used as FUNCTION input and
output arrays. When DEX is to be computed, the diffusivity shape factorσ d , can
be either input directly, in the SIGMAD array, or computed from the input arrays
LX, LY, LZ.
00 The matrix-fracture diffusivity shape factor, SIGMAD, is defined as:
⎛ 1 1 1 ⎞
σ d = 4 ⎜ ---------- + --------- + ---------⎟
⎝ LX 2 LY 2 LZ 2⎠
00 If SIGMAD is not input directly as an array, it will be computed as shown above.
15-578 Diffusion R5000.0.1

00 The matrix-fracture exchange diffusivity, DEX, is defined as:
Dex = φ mf σ d ΔXΔYΔZ ⋅ ( net ⁄ gross ) f
00 The matrix-fracture exchange porosity is defined as:
φ mf = min ( φ m, φ f )
φ m = Matrix porosity
φ f = Fracture porosity
00
ΔXΔYΔZ = Bulk Volume
00 When the DUAL option has been specified and TEMP has been input as an array
or has been initialized as a constant or as a function of depth within the
compositional description, the fracture reservoir temperature (TEMPF) will be
defaulted to the matrix reservoir temperature, TEMP. However, if TEMP is
computed as an ouput array via the FUNCTION option, then TEMPF must also be
directly computed.
00 Example:
00 FUNCTION
ANALYT ADD
WORKA2 WORKA3 OUTPUT TEMP TEMPF
15.4.1.7 Override Modification (OVER, VOVER)
The gridblock values in these diffusivity arrays may be modified using OVER
(Section 7.2) and VOVER (Section 7.4).
OVER/VOVER (DIFFX) (DIFFY) (DIFFZ)

(DIFFXF) (DIFFYF) (DIFFZF) (DEX)
DIFFX Apply overreads to X direction diffusivities.
DIFFY Apply overreads to Y direction diffusivities.
DIFFZ Apply overreads to Z direction diffusivities.
R5000.0.1 Diffusion 15-579

DIFFXF Apply overreads to X direction fracture diffusivities.
DIFFYF Apply overreads to Y direction fracture diffusivities.
DIFFZF Apply overreads to Z direction fracture diffusivities.
DEX Apply overreads to matrix-fracture exchange

diffusivities.
00 Example:
00 In the following example, the diffusivity array in the X direction for the specified
gridblock range is multiplied by two.
00 OVER DIFFX
1 37 1 29 1 3 *2
15.4.2 VIP-EXEC Input Data
15.4.2.1 Diffusion Activation/Deactivation (DIFFUSION)
The DIFFUSION card activates or deactivates the diffusion fluxes in VIP-EXEC.

By default, diffusion is on when the DIFFUSION keyword is entered in VIP-
CORE without the inclusion of the INITONLY keyword.
⎛ OFF ⎞
DIFFUSION ⎜ ⎟
⎝ ON ⎠
15.4.2.2 Mapping Diffusion Fluxes (MAPZ)
The MAPZ option (Print/Map Mole Fractions section of the Output Control
chapter of the VIP-EXEC Reference Manual) maps overall hydrocarbon mole
fractions for specified components.
When the diffusion option is on, diffusion fluxes (moles/day) for the specified
component will also be mapped. Three flux arrays (JX_component,
JY_component, JZ_component, and JE_component (for DUAL)) are mapped.
The format used is similar to that of transmissibility arrays. The gridblock values
represent fluxes across the minus face in the particular direction, with positive
values indicating flow into the block and negative values indicating flow out of
the block.
15-580 Diffusion R5000.0.1

References
References
1. Stone, H.L., ’Probability Model for Estimating Three-phase Relative
Permeability’, Trans. SPE of AIME, 249, pp. 214-218 (1970).
2. Stone, H.L., ’Estimation of Three-Phase Relative Permeability and Residual

Oil Data’, J. Can. Pet. Technol., Vol. 12, pp. 53-61 (1973).
3. Coats, K.H. and Modine, A.D., ’A Consistent Method for Calculating

Transmissibilities in Nine-Point Difference Equations’, SPE paper 12248
presented at the Reservoir Simulation Symposium in San Francisco,
California, Nov, 15-18, 1983.
4. Sonnier, F. and Chaumet, P., ’A Fully Implicit Three-Dimensional Model in

Curvilinear Coordinates’, Trans. Soc. Pet Engr., Vol. 257, pp. 361-370 (1974).
5. Carlson, F.M., ’Simulation of Relative Permeability Hysteresis to the

Nonwetting Phase’, SPE paper 10157, presented at 56th Annual Fall
Technical Conference, San Antonio, 1981.
6. Land, C.S., ’Calculation of Imbibition Relative Permeability for 2- and 3-

Phase Flow from Rock Properties’, Soc. Pet. Engr. J., Vol 243, (June 1968).
7. Gilman, J.R. and Kazemi, H., ’Improvements in Simulation of Naturally

Fractured Reservoirs’, SPEJ, August, 1983, pp. 695-707.
8. Frick, T.C. and Taylor, R.W., Petroleum Production Handbook, Vol. II, Chap.
35, Society of Petroleum Engineering (AIME), Dallas, Texas (1962).
9. Carter, R.D. and Tracy, G.W., ’An Improved Method for Calculating Water
Influx’, Trans. AIME, Vol. 219, pp. 415-417 (1960).
10. Beggs, H. Dale, Gas Production Operations, OGCI Publications, pp. 103-104
(1984).
11. Peaceman, D.W., ’Interpretation of Well-Block Pressures in Numerical

Reservoir Simulation’, Soc. Pet. Engr. J., pp. 183-194- (June, 1978).
12. Jain, A.K., ’An Accurate Explicit Equation for Friction Factor’, J. Hydraulics
Div. ASCE, Vol 2, No. Hy5 (May, 1976).
13. Wallis, J.R., ’Incomplete Gaussian Elimination as a reconditioning for

Generalized Conjugate Gradient Acceleration’, SPE paper 12265 presented at
R5000.0.1 References R-581

the Seventh SPE Symposium on Numerical Simulation, San Francisco

(1983).
14. Wallis, J.R., Kendall, R.P., and Little, T.E., ’Constrained Residual
Acceleration of Conjugate Residual Methods’, SPE paper 13536 presented at
the Eighth SPE Symposium on Reservoir Simulation, Dallas (1985).
15. Jhaveri, B.S. and Youngren, G.K., ’Three-Parameter Modification of the

Peng-Robinson Equation of State To Improve Volumetric Predictions’, SPE
Reservoir Engineering, pp. 133-140 August 1988.
16. Killough, J.E., ’Reservoir Simulation with History-Dependent Saturation

Functions’, SPE paper 5106 presented at the SPE-AIME 49th Annual Fall
Meeting, Houston, Texas, Oct. 6-9, 1974.
17. van Everdingen, A. F. and Hurst, W., ‘The Application of the Laplace
Transformation to Flow Problems in Reservoirs’, Trans., AIME (1949) 186,
305-324.
18. Warren, J.E., and Root, P.J., ‘The Behariam of Naturally Fractured
Reservoirs’, Soc. Pet. Engr. J., pp. 245-255 (September, 1963).
19. Thomas, L.K., Dixon, T.N., and Pierson, R.G., ‘Fractured Reservoir
Simulation’, Soc. Pet. Engr. J., pp. 42-54 (February, 1983).
20. Coats, K.H., ‘Simulation of Gas Condensate Reservoir Performance’, SPE

paper 10512 presented at the Sixth SPE Symposium on Reservoir Simulation,
New Orleans (1982).
21. Wallis, J.R., Foster, J.A., and Kendall, R.P., ‘A New Parallel Iterative Linear
Solution Method for Large Scale Reservoir Simulation’, SPE paper 21209
presented at the Eleventh SPE Symposium on Reservoir Simulation, Anaheim
(1991).
22. Peng, D.Y., and Robinson, D.B., ‘A New Two-Constant Equation of State’, I.
and E.C. Fundamentals (1976) 15, No. 1 pp. 59-64.
23. Redich, O., and Kwong, J.N.S., ‘On the Thermodynamics of Solutions. V. -
An Equation of State. Fugacities of Gaseous Solutions’, Chemical Review
(1949) Vol. 44, pp.52-63.
24. Soave, G., ‘Equilibrium Constants from a Modified Redlich-Kwong Equation

of State’, Chemical Engineering Science (1972) Vol. 27 pp. 1197-1203.
25. Baker, L.E., ‘Three Phase Relative Permeability Correlation’, SPE/DOE

paper 17369 presented at the 1988 SPE/DOE Enhanced Oil Recovery
Symposium, Tulsa, April 17-20.
26. Penelous, A., Rauzy, E., and Freze, R., ‘A Consistent Correction for Redlich-
Kwong-Soave Volumes’, Fluid Phase Equilibrium (1982) Vol. 8, pp. 7-23.
R-582 References R5000.0.1

27. Jhaveri, B.S. and Youngren, G.K., ‘Three-Parameter Modification of the

Peng-Robinson Equation of State to Improve Volumetric Predictions’, SPE
Res. Eng. (August 1986) pp. 1033-1040.
28. Pedersen, K.S., et al, ‘Vicosity of Crude Oil’, Chem. Eng. Sci., 39, (1984) pp.
1011-1016.
29. Coats, K.H., “Implicit Compositional Simulation of Single-Porosity and

Dual-Porosity Reservoirs”, SPE 18427, Presented at the SPE Symposium on
Reservor Simulation in Houston, Texas, Feb. 1989.
30. Zudkevitch, David and Joffe, Joseph: “Correction and Prediction of Vapor-
Liquid Equilibria with the Redlich-Kwong Equation of State,” AIChE Jour.
(Jan. 1970) 16, No. 1, pp. 112-119.
31. Joffe, J., Schroeder, G.M. and Zudkevich, D., “Vapor-Liquid Equilibria with
the Relich-Kwong Equation of State,” (3) AIChE Jour. (1970) 16, pp. 496-
498.
32. Beattie, C.I., Boberg, T.C., and McNab, G.S., “Reservoir Simulation of Cyclic
Steam Stimulation in the Cold Lake Oil Sands,” SPE 18752 presented at the
SPE-AIME, 1989, California Regional Meetings.
33. Passut, C.A., and Danner, R.P., I & EC Process Design and Development, 11,
543 (1972).
34. Hwang, P.K. and Daubert, T.E., I & EC Process Design and Development, 13,
193 (1974).
35. Edminster, W.D. and Lee, B.I., Applied Hydrocarbon Thermodynamics, Vol.
1, second edition, Gulf Publishing Co., 1984.
36. Kesler, M.G. and Lee, B.I., Hydrocarbon Processing, 55 (3), 153, 1976.
37. Whitson, C.H., “Characterizing Hydrocarbon Plus Fractions,” Soc. Pet. Engr.
J., August 1983, pp. 683-694.
38. Lohrenz, J., Bray, B.G., and Clark, C.R., “Calculating Viscosities of Reservoir
Fluids from their Compositions,” SPE Reprint Series No. 15, Phase Behavior,
1981, pp. 224-229.
39. Settari, A. and Ito, Y., “Coupling of a Fracture Mechanics Model and a
Thermal Reservoir Simulator for Tar Sands,” Jounal of Canadian Petroleum
Technolgy, V.31, No.9, November 1992, pp. 20-27.
40. Coats, K.H., George, W.D., Chu, C., and Marcum, B.E., "Three Dimensional
Simulation of Steamflooding," SPE 4500 presented at the SPE-AIME 48th
Annual Meeting, Las Vegas, Nevada, Sept. 30-Oct. 4, 1973.
41. Robinson, D.B., Peng D., and Chung, Y., “The Development of the Peng-
Robinson Equation of State and it’s Application to Phase Equilibrium in a
R5000.0.1 References R-583

System Containing Methanol,” Fluid Phase Equilibra (1985), Vol. 24, pp. 25-
41.
42. Fetkovich, M.J., “A Simplified Approach to Water Influx Calculations - Finite

Aquifer Systems,“ Trans., SPE of AIME (1971), pp. 814-828.
R-584 References R5000.0.1

Keyword
Index
000000Keyword Index B4 2-155

B5 2-155
BACKWARD 4-382
BAR 2-111, 4-231
BDGTAB 4-309
BETAG 4-361
A BG 4-277, 4-288, 4-289, 4-305, 4-309
BGFAC 4-289, 4-305, 4-319
A 4-249, 4-257, 4-390 BGTAB 4-287
ACC 2-135 BINF 10-514, 12-558
ACENTRIC 4-230 BLACKOIL 2-114
ADD 1-66, 1-70, 2-82, 7-502 BLOCKS 5-467
ADJUST 10-524 BLOCKTR 11-551
ADJUST FINE 10-524 BO 4-277, 4-284, 4-289, 4-297, 4-302
ALL 1-69, 2-82, 2-156, 3-162, 3-163, 3-167, 3- BODTAB 4-302
168, 3-169, 3-175, 3-176, 4-369, 4-374, BOETAB 4-289
4-376, 4-379, 4-382, 10-514, 10-520, BOF 4-343, 4-346
11-551, 15-576 BOFAC 4-277, 4-284, 4-289, 4-297, 4-319
ALL LGRS 11-545 BOGTAB 4-305
ALPHA 2-149, 2-150 BOOTAB 4-297
AMULT 13-561, 13-562 BOSEP 4-345
ANALYT 5-467 BOSTG 4-343
ANANET 4-366 BOTAB 4-277, 4-284
ANARES 4-366 BOTH 2-156, 4-376, 4-379, 4-382
ANASEP 4-366 BOTINT 2-135
AND 2-128 BPTAB 4-187
API 4-183, 4-187, 4-278, 4-284, 4-290, 4-297, BS 4-356
4-302 BTBD 5-434
APIRO 4-319 BWI 2-108, 4-350, 4-351
APIS 4-278
ARRAYS 3-169, 3-170, 5-397
AUTO 8-506, 13-562
AWIP 10-520
C
C 1-40, 4-231, 4-257
C1 4-212
B C2 4-212
C3 4-212
B 4-249, 4-257 CARBON 2-156
B0 2-155 CARLSON 2-121, 2-122
B1 2-155 CARTREF 11-534
B2 2-155 CASE 1-41
B3 2-155 CDPKRH 2-149
R5000.0.1 KI-585
CFXOFF 10-524
CLASS 1-41 D
CMP 4-369
CMPFLX 10-526 D 4-257
CMT 4-352 DATE 2-81
CN 2-155 DAQI 10-514, 10-520
CO2TAB 4-270 DATE 1-39
COARSE 10-524 DCPRDT 2-109
COARSEN 8-505 DEACTIVATE 2-127
COEFFICIENTS 4-370 DEADCELL 5-465
COIL 4-254, 4-331 DECOMP 14-565
COMP 4-230, 4-249, 4-253, 4-254, 4-256, 4- DELTA 4-372
257, 4-258, 4-317, 4-340, 4-348, 4-376, DENO 4-254
4-379 DEPF 5-413
COMPACT 2-123 DEPTH 4-183, 4-184, 4-185, 4-186, 4-187, 4-
COMPONENTS 4-229, 4-317 188, 4-189, 4-262, 4-264, 4-327, 4-331,
COMPOSITION 4-262, 4-264 5-408, 15-577
COMPSAT 4-319 DEX 15-578
CON 1-46 DGB 4-290, 4-305, 4-309
CONSTANTS 2-108 DGOG 4-360
CONTACT 2-146 DIAGONAL 2-101, 2-103
CONVDPTEST 4-379 DIFEXPTEST 4-376
COPY 1-60 DIFF 2-145
CORCHK 2-142 DIFFCOMP 15-577
CORNER 2-140 DIFFUSION 15-575
CORP 11-546 DIM 2-77
CORTOL 2-140 DIRCN 13-561, 13-562
CPG0 4-256 DIV 1-66, 1-70, 7-502
CPG1 4-256 DJK 4-234
CPG2 4-256 DJKSEP 4-240, 4-337
CPG3 4-256 DKTDSG 2-109
CPO0 4-256 DLIQ 4-340, 4-348
CPO1 4-256 DOB 4-277, 4-284, 4-290, 4-297, 4-302
CPOIL 4-331 DOR 4-278, 4-284
CPR 4-387, 13-561, 13-562 DOS 4-278
CPR0 5-477 DOSTD 4-254, 4-327, 4-331
CPRTAB 4-387 DOTAB 4-327
CR 2-108, 2-109, 5-430 DP 4-277, 4-284, 4-289, 4-297, 4-319
CRD 4-386 DR 5-398
CREEP 2-152 DRAINAGE 2-121, 2-122
CREEPB 5-454 DRANGE 5-467
CREEPC 5-454 DRELPM 2-131
CREEPM 5-455 DRO 4-319
CRF 5-430 DRSDT 2-138
CRINIT 2-136 DRYGAS 2-138
CROSS 2-112 DSW 4-353
CSORM 2-116 DTHETA 5-401
CT 10-514, 10-520, 12-558 DUAL 2-143
CTEOIL 4-254, 4-331 DWB 2-108, 2-109, 4-350, 4-351
CUMFLUX 10-526 DX 5-398
CW 2-108, 4-350, 4-351 DXB 5-398
KI-586 R5000.0.1
DY 5-401 FIELD 2-156

DYB 5-401 FILE 3-163, 3-167
DZ 5-403 FINE 10-524, 10-525
DZB 5-403 FLASH 2-135
DZBCOR 5-404 FLOW360 2-129
DZBNET 5-406 FLOWS 2-154
DZCORN 5-404 FLTRC 6-488
DZNET 5-405 FLTRCF 6-491
DZOB 13-560 FLTTC 6-488
DZVCOR 5-405 FLTTCF 6-491
FLTXC 6-488
FLTXCF 6-491
FLTYC 6-488
E FLTYCF 6-491
FLUID 4-390
E 4-257 FLUX 10-524, 10-526
EACT 4-390 FLXOIL 10-524
EG 4-218 FNAME 1-69, 6-489, 6-492, 7-496, 7-499, 7-
EIGHT 11-546 500, 7-503
EIGHTH 2-101 FORM 2-82, 2-88, 2-89
END 2-81 FORWARD 4-382
END2P 2-117 FOURTH 2-103
ENDAQ 10-514, 10-520, 12-558 FR 4-386, 6-484
ENDDEC 14-566 FREE 2-138
ENDEOS 4-243 FRZPCG 2-124
ENDINC 1-41 FRZPCW 2-124
ENDKV 4-318 FTHETA 6-484
ENDLGR 11-533 FTRANF 6-492
ENDREF 11-534, 11-535, 11-537, 11-538 FTRANS 6-489, 11-552
ENDSEP 4-337 FUNCTION 5-467, 11-552
ENDVIS 4-266 FVEGO 5-448
ENTHALPY 4-256 FVEGOF 5-448
EOD 4-226 FVEWO 5-447
EOG 4-218 FVEWOF 5-448
EOI 4-226 FX 6-484
EOS 4-227 FXCORN 6-484
EOSINT 4-366 FY 6-484
EOSSEP 4-237 FYCORN 6-484
EOW 4-218
EQ 1-66, 1-70, 7-502
EW 4-218
EWD 4-226 G
EWI 4-226
EXCEPT 3-162, 3-163, 3-167, 3-169, 3-176 G 4-390
GAS 4-376, 4-379
GASCM 4-374, 4-381
GASFRAC 4-374, 4-376, 4-379, 4-382
F GASMF 4-261
GASPLANT 4-268
F 4-231 GASRM 4-211
FAULTS 2-129, 6-483 GASRMT 4-211
FET 10-520 GASTRF 5-452
R5000.0.1 KI-587
GASWATER 2-113 INTSW 2-144

GBC 2-125 IPVT 4-183, 4-184, 4-185, 4-186, 5-424
GE 1-62, 7-498 IPVTW 4-183, 4-184, 4-185, 4-186, 4-350, 5-
GIBBS 2-133 424
GOC 4-183, 4-186 IREGF 5-427
GOR 4-343, 4-346 IREGION 5-425
GR 4-277, 4-285, 4-287, 4-290, 4-305, 4-309, ISAT 5-422
4-327, 4-331, 4-343 ISATF 5-423
GRID 1-69, 5-467, 6-489, 6-492, 7-496, 7-499, ISATI 5-422
7-500, 7-503, 10-514, 10-520, 11-551, ISATIF 5-423
11-552, 11-553 ITNMAX 4-371
GRVL 4-230 ITRAN 5-431
GWC 4-184 ITRANF 5-431
IWIRC 5-429
IWIRCF 5-430
H
HARTRAN 11-550 J
HCPVTAB 2-113
HOTAB 4-327 J 13-561, 13-562
HR 4-390 J1 10-524, 10-525
HSTAR 4-237 J2 10-524, 10-525
HTLOSS 13-559 JFUNC 2-123, 7-497, 7-501
HVAP 4-256 JINF 10-514, 10-520, 12-558
HYDBETA 4-362
HYDFRAC 2-152
HYSWO 4-226
K
K 4-231, 13-561, 13-562
I K1 10-524, 10-525
K2 10-524, 10-525
I 13-561, 13-562 KEEP 14-565
I1 10-524, 10-525 KEEPSG 2-128
I2 10-524, 10-525 KEEPSW 2-127
ICMT 5-429 KEYCMP 4-268
ICMTF 5-429 KG/CM2 2-111, 4-231
ICOARS 5-464 KINF 10-514, 10-520, 12-558
ICPRTB 5-480 KMLXYL 5-479
IEQUIL 4-183, 4-184, 4-185, 4-186, 5-434 KMLXYR 5-479
IFT 2-133 KMULR 5-479
IINF 10-514, 10-520, 12-558 KMULTH 5-479
IMB 2-119, 2-120 KMULX 5-479
INCLUDE 1-40 KMULY 5-479
INFLUX 10-514, 10-520, 12-558 KMULZ 5-479
INGRID 11-534, 11-535, 11-537, 11-538 KOHYS 5-478
INIT 2-77 KPA 2-111, 4-231
INIT2P 2-117 KR 5-415
INITONLY 15-576 KRF 5-415
INPUT 10-524 KRFEFF 5-419
INTSAT 2-125 KRG 4-199, 4-205, 4-209, 4-211, 4-216
KI-588 R5000.0.1
KRGMAX 4-211 KYLB 2-159

KRGRO 4-218, 4-219, 4-221, 5-446 KYUB 2-159
KRGROF 5-447 KZ 5-417
KRGRW 5-446 KZARITH 2-159
KROCW 4-218, 4-219, 4-221 KZF 5-417
KROG 4-199, 4-205, 4-209, 4-216 KZFEFF 5-420
KROINT 2-118, 2-119 KZGEOM 2-159
KROLW 5-445 KZHARM 2-158
KROLWF 5-446 KZLB 2-159
KROW 4-194, 4-204, 4-207, 4-215 KZUB 2-159
KRW 4-194, 4-204, 4-207, 4-215
KRWG 4-199, 4-203, 4-206, 4-209
KRWRO 4-218, 4-219, 4-221, 5-446
KRWROF 5-446 L
KS 4-356
KT 5-477 LAB 2-112
KTF 5-416 LATERAL 2-129
KTFEFF 5-420 LAYER 1-52
KTHETA 5-416 LBC 4-236, 4-250, 4-253
KTR 13-561, 13-562 LDEST 4-334, 4-340, 4-348
KTR0 5-477 LE 1-62, 7-498
KTTH0 5-478 LEAKY 6-487
KTX0 5-477 LFRAC 4-334, 4-340, 4-348
KTY0 5-478 LGR 11-533
KTZ0 5-478 LI 2-137
KV 4-319 LINE 2-140
KVALUES 4-317, 4-340, 4-348 LINEAR 2-121, 2-122
KVCOR 4-257 LINFAC 10-514, 12-558
KVTAB 4-319 LIST 1-42
KVTBS 4-258 LIVECELL 5-465
KWELLPI 2-158 LNVAL 1-60
KWHYS 5-478 LNXVAR 1-58
KWX 5-418 LNYVAR 1-59
KWXF 5-421 LNZVAR 1-59
KWY 5-418 LX 5-449
KWYF 5-421 LY 5-449
KWZ 5-418 LZ 5-449
KWZF 5-421
KX 5-415
KXARITH 2-159
KXF 5-415
M
KXFEFF 5-419 MAP 2-82
KXGEOM 2-159 MAPOLD 2-89
KXHARM 2-158 MAPX 2-88
KXLB 2-159 MAPY 2-88
KXUB 2-159 MAPZ 2-88
KY 5-416 MCOARSE 8-506
KYARITH 2-159 MDEPF 5-413
KYF 5-416 MDEPTH 5-408
KYFEFF 5-419 MDI 4-366
KYGEOM 2-159 METRIC 2-111
KYHARM 2-158
R5000.0.1 KI-589
MG 2-155 NFLMAX 2-78

MINUS 1-69, 11-551 NFNAME 2-78
MIS 2-149 NFWMAX 2-78
MISP 4-358 NFXREG 2-78
MISPTB 4-358 NG 2-155
MO 2-155 NGASFR 4-374, 4-376, 4-379, 4-382
MOBILE 2-125 NHLMAX 2-78
MOBWT 10-524 NINEPT 2-115
MOD 1-62 NINFBL 2-78
MODLYR 1-63 NINFMX 2-78
MODX 11-547 NINFTD 2-78
MODY 11-548 NKEY 4-268
MODZ 11-548 NLINES 1-43
MOLECULAR 15-575 NLKFLT 2-78
MOLES 4-390 NLKMAX 2-78
MULCONTEST 4-381 NNTMAX 2-78
MULT 1-56, 1-66, 1-69, 1-70, 7-502, 11-551 NO 2-155
MULTBV 5-464 NOANSP 4-366
MULTFL 1-73 NOBMAX 2-78
MULTIR 1-72 NOCHK 2-134
MVNBP 15-576 NOCOATS 2-144
MW 4-230, 4-249, 4-317 NOINIT 2-127
MWL 4-340, 4-348 NOLIST 1-42
MWOIL 4-327, 4-331 NONE 2-82, 2-128, 2-129, 3-162, 3-163, 3-167,
MWS 4-359 3-168, 3-169, 3-175, 3-176
NONEQ 2-125
NONETWORK 4-366
NONSTD 1-69, 1-72, 11-551
N NORESERVOIR 4-366
NOROOT 2-127
NAMES 2-146 NOSEPARATOR 4-366
NAMESW 2-147 NOSKIP 1-43
NBATMX 2-77 NOVDB 2-89
NBINF 10-514, 10-520, 12-558 NOVDBPACK 2-89
NBP 4-230 NOVEAD 10-524
NC 4-249 NOX 2-142
NCBG 2-156 NOY 2-142
NCBLKS 2-77 NP 4-327
NCBO 2-156 NPCMP 2-78
NCDPMX 2-78 NPINCM 2-78
NCOL 1-43 NPMAX 2-79
NCOMP 2-94, 2-95 NPMXCT 2-79
NCV 2-94, 2-95, 4-253, 4-257, 4-258 NPRES 4-376, 4-379, 4-382
NDARCY 2-155 NPRNPS 4-376, 4-379
NDHCMX 2-78 NPSATM 2-79
NEIPMX 2-78 NPVUPD 2-126
NEQLMX 2-78 NR 2-95
NETGF 5-406 NREGMX 2-79
NETGRS 5-406 NSALMX 2-79
NEWTRAN 2-140, 11-550 NSATMX 2-79
NFBLKS 2-78 NSATNT 2-79
NFLASH 4-381 NSGDIM 2-79
KI-590 R5000.0.1
NSIGMX 2-79 352, 4-356, 4-360, 5-435, 15-577

NSMTAB 2-79 PAQI 10-514, 10-520
NSTGMX 2-79 PATH 4-370
NSWDIM 2-79 PATTERN 2-101, 2-103, 2-105, 2-106
NTAB 2-79 PBASE 2-108, 4-386
NTABCM 2-79 PBASEW 4-350
NTABW 2-79 PC 4-230
NTHETA 2-95 PCGO 4-199, 4-205, 4-209, 4-216
NTMAX 2-79 PCGO1 4-218
NVISMX 2-79 PCGO2 4-218
NWCDIM 2-80 PCGO3 4-218
NWCMAX 2-80 PCGO4 4-218
NWCSWM 2-80 PCGOC 4-183, 4-186
NX 1-62, 1-63, 1-66, 2-94, 7-496, 7-499, 7- PCGOS 4-199, 4-209
500, 7-503, 10-524 PCGW 4-199, 4-209
NXMAX 2-80 PCGWC 4-184
NY 1-62, 1-63, 1-66, 2-94, 7-496, 7-499, 7- PCHOR 4-230
500, 7-503, 10-524 PCHYSG 2-120
NZ 1-62, 1-66, 2-94, 2-95, 7-496, 7-499, 7-500, PCHYSW 2-119
7-503, 10-524 PCWO 4-194, 4-204, 4-207, 4-215
NZOB 13-560 PCWO1 4-218
PCWO2 4-218
PCWO3 4-218
PCWO4 4-218
O PCWOC 4-183, 4-185, 4-186
PCWOS 4-194, 4-207
O 4-390 PD 4-386, 10-514, 12-558
OFF 10-526 PEDERSON 4-247, 4-251
OIL 4-376, 4-379 PF 5-437
OILCM 4-374, 4-381 PHASE 4-390
OILMF 4-261 PI 10-520
OILPROPS 4-331 PINCHGRID 11-554
OILTABLES 4-327 PINCHOUT 2-128
OILTRF 5-452 PINIT 4-183, 4-184, 4-185, 4-186
OMEGAA 4-230 PLNTRY 4-268
OMEGAB 4-230 PLUS 1-70, 4-390, 11-551
OMEGAS 4-336 PLUS MAP 2-89
OMEGBS 4-336 PMAX 4-368
OMGD 5-453 PMIN 4-369
OMGV 5-453 POLYMER 2-153
OMIT 11-534, 11-535, 11-537, 11-538 POR 2-143, 5-414
OMITLIST 11-534, 11-535, 11-537, 11-538 PORDEF 4-386
ON 10-526 PORF 5-414
ORDER 4-390 PORMAX 4-386
OUTPUT 4-373, 5-467, 10-526 PR 4-227, 4-237, 4-386
OVER 7-496, 7-499, 11-552, 15-579 PRES 4-334, 4-376, 4-379, 4-382
PRESSURE 15-575
PRINPS 4-376, 4-379
P PRINT 2-144, 3-167
PRINT ALL 3-161
P 4-258, 4-289, 4-297, 4-305, 4-327, 4-343, 4- PRINT ARRAYS 3-162
PRINT COEFS 3-163, 15-577
R5000.0.1 KI-591
PRINT COMP 3-167 RGASCM 4-373

PRINT CORNER 3-167 RI 2-95
PRINT EQUIL 3-168 RIGHTHANDED 11-549
PRINT FAULTS 3-168 RK 4-227, 4-237
PRINT INFLUX 3-169 RMIN 11-535, 11-537, 11-538, 11-551
PRINT INIT 3-170 ROILCM 4-373
PRINT NONE 3-161 RPCNG 2-155
PRINT REGION 3-175 RPCNO 2-155
PRINT SEPARATOR 3-175 RPHYSG 2-121
PRINT TABLES 3-176 RPHYSO 2-121
PROPERTIES 4-230, 4-317, 15-576 RPHYST 2-122
PRORIG 4-227 RS 4-189, 4-277, 4-284, 4-289, 4-297
PRSTAB 3-177 RSF 4-327, 4-331
PRSTABF 3-178 RSM 2-158
PRTTAB 4-366 RSTAB 4-189
PS 2-108, 2-109 RV 4-189, 4-289, 4-305
PSAT 4-183, 4-185, 4-187, 4-188, 4-262, 4- RVAR 1-47
264, 4-277, 4-284, 4-287, 4-289, 4-297, RVSAT 4-289, 4-305
4-302, 4-305, 4-309, 4-319, 4-374, 4- RVTAB 4-189
376, 4-379, 4-382
PSATF 4-340, 4-343, 4-346
PSEUDO 2-144
PSIA 4-231 S
PSIG 4-231
PSTAB 4-188 SAL 5-435
PV 5-414 SALINT 4-351
PVEXP 2-111 SAND 2-156
PVF 5-414 SATTAB 2-134
PVLINEAR 2-111 SCLFCT 5-432
PVMULT 4-352, 4-353 SDFUNC 4-218
PVTTAB 2-134 SEAL 8-506
PVTTABLE 4-334, 4-340, 4-343, 4-345 SEBOUND 2-115
PVTW 4-350 SEGAREA 10-525
PVTWSAL 4-351 SEPARATOR 4-334, 4-340, 4-348
SEPTEST 4-343
SG 4-199, 4-203, 4-205, 4-206, 4-209, 4-211,
4-216, 5-435
R SGASCM 4-373
SGC 4-218
R 4-231, 5-398 SGF 5-438
RADXREF 11-534, 11-538 SGL 5-443
RADYREF 11-534, 11-537 SGLF 5-444
RADZREF 11-534, 11-535 SGR 4-219, 4-221, 5-443
RANGE INPUT 5-467 SGRF 5-444
RANGE OUTPUT 5-467 SGRM 4-211
REACTION 4-390 SGRO 4-218, 4-219, 4-221, 5-443
REGDTM 9-511 SGROF 5-444
REGION 9-509 SGRW 5-443
REGNZ 2-112 SGRWF 5-445
REGSEP 9-510 SGT 4-199, 4-209, 4-216
RES 2-135 SGTF 4-205
REVERSE 2-123, 2-152 SGTR 4-209, 4-211, 5-441
KI-592 R5000.0.1
SGU 5-443 TABLES 3-169, 3-170, 4-181

SGUF 5-445 TAMULT 4-352, 4-353
SGWT 4-203 TAU 15-576
SGWTF 4-206 TB 4-256
SIDE 12-558 TC 4-230, 10-514, 12-558
SIGMA 5-449 TCTBD 5-433
SIGMAD 5-451, 15-578 TD 10-514, 12-558
SIGR 4-360 TDIFFG 5-451
SIGT 4-360 TDIFFO 5-451
SIMPLE 2-119 TEMP 4-219, 4-221, 4-258, 4-334, 4-376, 4-
SINF 10-514, 10-520, 12-558 379, 4-382, 5-428
SIXTH 2-106 TEMPERATURE 4-368
SKIP 1-42 TEMPF 15-578
SLVTAB 4-356 TENDM 4-221
SOILCM 4-373 TENDPT 4-219
SORG 4-218, 4-219, 4-221 TEX 5-450
SORW 4-218, 4-219, 4-221 TEXORG 2-143
SOTR 4-207 THCNTR 2-126
SRK 4-227, 4-237 THERMAL 2-153, 15-575
STAGE 4-334, 4-340, 4-348 THVAR 1-48
STD 1-69, 1-72, 4-270, 11-551 TIME 1-41, 4-390
STKZDN 4-239 TINIT 4-183, 4-184, 4-185, 4-186
STONE1 2-118, 2-119 TITLE1 2-80
STONE2 2-118, 2-119 TITLE2 2-80
STOP 4-366 TITLE3 2-81
SUB 1-66, 1-70, 7-502 TKWEXP 5-452
SURF 2-135 TMR 5-457
SW 4-194, 4-204, 4-207, 4-215, 5-435 TMRF 5-460
SWAPMF 2-143 TMTH 5-457
SWC 4-218, 4-219, 4-221 TMTHF 5-460
SWELLTEST 4-374 TMX 5-455
SWF 5-438 TMXF 5-459
SWINIT 4-353 TMXYL 5-458
SWIR 4-218, 4-219, 4-221 TMXYLF 5-460
SWL 5-440 TMXYR 5-458
SWLF 5-441 TMXYRF 5-461
SWMNI 4-194, 4-204, 4-207 TMY 5-456
SWR 5-441 TMYF 5-459
SWRF 5-442 TMZ 5-456
SWRO 4-218, 4-219, 4-221, 5-441 TMZF 5-459
SWROF 5-442 TOLPV 11-555
SWT 4-194, 4-207, 4-215 TOTAL 4-379, 4-390
SWTF 4-204 TOVER 11-553
SWU 5-441 TR 5-415
SWUF 5-442 TRACER 12-557
TRACK 2-145
TRACKW 2-147
TREF 4-230
T TRES 2-108, 2-109
TRF 5-419
T 4-249, 4-253, 4-262, 4-264, 4-327, 4-331, 4- TS 2-108, 2-109
343, 4-387, 15-577 TTAB 4-327, 4-331
R5000.0.1 KI-593
TTHETA 5-416 VISGAS 4-251, 4-253

TTHETF 5-420 VISK 4-247, 4-251, 4-266
TTMR 5-462 VISKJ 4-247, 4-251, 4-266
TTMTH 5-463 VISOIL 4-247, 4-249, 4-250, 4-331
TTMX 5-461 VISPE 4-266
TTMY 5-462 VMOD 1-66
TTMZ 5-462 VO 4-277, 4-284, 4-289, 4-297, 4-302, 4-319
TVMULT 4-352, 4-353 VOFAC 4-277, 4-284, 4-289, 4-297, 4-319
TWELFTH 2-105 VOLAVR 5-467
TWOPT 2-114 VOLUME 4-390
TX 5-415 VOMIN 4-248, 4-249, 4-327, 4-331
TXF 5-419 VOTAB 4-327
TXYL 5-418 VOVER 7-500, 7-503, 11-553, 15-579
TXYLF 5-421 VS 4-356
TXYR 5-418 VSHFT 4-230
TXYRF 5-421 VSHFTS 4-337
TY 5-416 VSO 4-356
TYF 5-420 VW 2-108, 4-350, 4-351, 13-559
TZ 5-417 VWAQ 10-520
TZF 5-420 VWP 4-350, 4-351
U W
UPSCALE 2-158 W 4-390
USER 2-121, 2-122 WATER 2-121
WATEROIL 2-113
WATIDEAL 2-154
WBOTAB 4-376
V WBSIM 2-97
WELL 2-156
V98 2-140 WINDOW 10-514, 10-520, 12-558
VAITS 2-126 WIRCT 4-353
VALUE 1-50, 10-514, 10-520, 12-558 WOC 4-183, 4-185, 4-186
VARIABLE 1-41 WTOS 4-278
VDB 1-41, 2-89 WTR 10-514, 10-520, 12-558
VDEST 4-334, 4-340, 4-348 WTRO 4-278, 4-285, 4-290, 4-298, 4-303
VEAREA 10-525
VEDIST 10-526
VEGO 2-131
VEITS 2-132 X
VELCTY 2-155
VEOFF 10-524 X 1-72, 4-264, 8-507, 9-511
VEONLY 10-525 X1 4-319
VEWO 2-130 XCORN 5-399
VFRAC 4-334, 4-340, 4-348 XI 5-437
VG 2-156, 4-277, 4-287, 4-289, 4-305, 4-309, XIF 5-439
4-319 XREG 5-426
VGFAC 4-289, 4-305, 4-319 XVAR 1-47
VISCO 15-576
VISCOSITY 4-331
KI-594 R5000.0.1
Y
Y 1-72, 4-264, 8-507
Y1 4-358
YCORN 5-401
YI 5-436
YIF 5-438
YNC 4-319
YVAR 1-48
Z
Z 1-72, 4-262, 4-264, 8-507, 15-577
Z1 4-358
Z3 4-358
ZBOT 5-411
ZBOTNE 5-411
ZBOTNW 5-412
ZBOTSW 5-412
ZC 4-230
ZCORN 5-409
ZCORNE 5-409
ZCORNW 5-410
ZCORSW 5-410
ZG 4-277, 4-288, 4-319
ZJRK 4-227, 4-237
ZLNCOR 5-413
ZO 4-319
ZRO 4-319
ZS 4-356
ZSO 4-356
ZVAR 1-49
R5000.0.1 KI-595
KI-596 R5000.0.1
Subject
Index
000000Subject Index
variation in X direction by layer 1-58
A variation in Y direction by layer 1-59
variation in Z direction by layer 1-59
accelerated successive substitution 2-135 writing to map file 2-81
aquifers writing to SIMOUT 2-89
fluid influx 10-513 average values
number in each gridblock 5-432 how calculated 5-466
areal sweep 12-557 Aziz and Govier correlation 2-97
arithmetic operations
applying to a grid 7-496
applying to a grid (VIP-DUAL) 7-499
array data B
arithmetic operations on 1-62, 11-547 Beattie fracture model 5-479
automatic generation 1-52 Beattie, Boberg, and McNab 4-385, 4-386
constant value 1-46 Beggs and Brill correlation 2-97
define new from previous 1-56 bibliography A-581
directional variation 1-47 binary interaction coefficient 4-234
directional variation (X,r) 1-47 for surface separator 4-337
directional variation (Y,theta) 1-48 of separators 4-240
directional variation (Z) 1-49 of various compounds 4-245
faults 6-484 black-oil
fracture model 5-479 laboratory data 4-274
full array input 1-50 surface separation data with PVT data 4-
general format 1-44 338
gridblock depths 1-54 black-oil option 2-114
in grid refinements 11-545
black-oil reservoirs
modifying 1-61 how simulated 1-27
options for input 1-44 boundary flux 10-513
printing by cross-section 2-112 defining regions 10-524
printing coefficients 3-163 bulk volume tables 2-112
printing corner points 3-167
printing of 3-161
printing of input 3-162
replication of depths 1-61 C
see also grid data
capillary gravity equilibrium 2-132
selective replacement 1-66
capillary pressure
suppress checking 2-134
endpoint scaling 2-117
transmissibility 1-69
hold steady 2-124
values by layer 1-60
R5000.0.1 SI-597
hysteresis 4-193 how specified 6-487

Leverett-J calculation 2-123 connection transmissibility
matrix pseudo 2-143 modification of 5-455
near-critical 2-133 connection transmissibility modification 1-69
capillary pressures constant equilibrium region
how described 4-216 gas 4-261
Carter-Tracy method oil 4-261
for estimating acquifer influx 10-514, 10- coordinate system
520 handedness 11-549
Cartesian grids correlations
how specified 2-94 using function input option 5-466
refinement of 11-534 CR 5-479
Chemical Reactions 4-387 CRD 5-479
CO2 solubility 4-270 creep 2-152
Coats, George, Chu, and Marcum 13-560 creep option 2-152
coefficients critical properties
binary interaction 4-234 of pure compounds 4-243
Coefficients of Interpolation Function 4-370 cylindrical grids 2-94
columns how specified 2-95
to be scanned in input 1-43
comments
entering as full lines 1-40 D
entering inline 1-40
compaction option 2-123 Darcy vertical flow coefficients 2-97
compaction regions 1-72, 1-73, 5-429, 5-430, data
5-431 formatting requirements 1-38
compaction tables 4-352 how organized 1-33
components initialization utility 2-77
naming 4-229 repeated values 1-39
properties data for 4-243 sample input 1-35
composition data checking
overreads,fracture gas 5-438 of corner-point data 2-141
overreads,fracture oil 5-439 date
overreads,gas 5-436 how to specify 2-81
overreads,oils 5-437 datum depth
variation with area 4-264 for output regions 9-511
variation with depth 4-262 printing for regions 3-175
compositional model dead oil model
definition of 1-29 definition of 1-29
compositional simulator deck layout 1-33
overview 1-27 defaults
compressibility how specified 2-77
creep option (time-dependent) 5-454 density
for each gridblock 5-430 correlation of 4-239
time dependent 2-152 mixing parameter 5-453
conductive faults dependency
SI-598 R5000.0.1
functional 5-466 equilibrium data

depth printing 3-168
arithmetic operations on 1-63 equilibrium initialization
effect on composition 4-262 of water/gas saturation 4-187
of gridblocks 1-54 equilibrium regions 5-434
replication of 1-61 for gas-water option 4-184
descriptive information 2-80 for three-phase 4-183
diagonal grids 2-99 how initialized 4-181
diffusivity external files
of oil and gas phase 2-145 how to include 1-41
dimensions extra regions
how specified for model 2-77 for assigning gridblocks 5-425
directional relative permeability 1-56
drainage
secondary 4-212 F
drainage saturation 4-193
dual porosity/permeability option 2-142 fault data
dual-permeability 1-28 arbitrary gridblock connections 6-488
dual-porosity 1-28 arbitrary gridblock connections (VIP-DU-
Dunns and Ross correlation 2-97 AL) 6-491
how input 6-484
overview 6-481
E printing of 3-168
fault modeling 2-129
echo print faults
how to activate 1-42 automatic generation of 6-494
endpoint arrays 11-546 conductive 6-487
endpoints connection from corner-point data 2-140
temperature variations in 4-219, 4-221 five-spot pattern
energy balance equation how specified 2-101
how solved 13-559 flash calculation 2-135
energy minimization 2-133 flow
enthalpy complete 360 flow 2-129
how calculated for components 4-255 flow rate arrays
ideal gas state 4-236 writing to spreadsheet 2-154
enthalpy coefficients flow trajectories 12-557
Passut-Danner 4-246 fluid composition
equation of state interpolation 4-363 initial 4-260
equilibration fluid properties
super-critical 2-137 constants 2-108
equilibrium general requirements for 1-32
capillary gravity 2-132 fluid tracking 2-146, 5-452
vertical 2-130 flux
vertical equilib. fraction 5-447 at boundaries 10-513
vertical equilib. fraction (VIP-DUAL) 5- FORTRAN units 1-33
448 FR 5-479
R5000.0.1 SI-599
fracture for fracture 4-205

porosity/pore volume 5-414 gas-oil saturation tables 4-199
fracture blocks gas-water option 2-113, 4-199
depth 5-413 geological descriptions
fracture compaction regions 5-429 data requirements for 1-32
fracture compressibility 5-431 Gibbs energy minimization 2-133
fracture modeling 4-384 grid data
fracture option 2-152 arrays of 5-395
fracture pressure see also array data
overreads 5-437 grid patterns
fracture saturation how setup 2-98
overreads 5-437 grids
fracture transmissibility regions 5-431 360 flow 2-129
fracture water induced rock compaction re- arithmetic operations on 7-496
gions 5-430 arithmetic operations on (VIP-DUAL) 7-
fractured reservoirs 499
how modeled 1-28 boundary flux 10-513
fractures Cartesian 2-94
hydraulic fracture option 4-362 coarsen 8-505
permeability of 5-418 compaction regions 1-72, 1-73, 5-429, 5-
transfer to, from matrix 4-360 430, 5-431
fracturing compressibility, per gridblock 5-430
effect on porosity 4-385 corner point X 5-399
free field format corner point Y 5-401
explained 1-38 cylindrical 2-95
function input option 5-466 data checking 2-141
functional dependencies 5-466 depth to corner points 5-408
dimensions of 5-398
directional relative permeability 1-56
G extra regions 5-425
fault data 6-484
gas composition faulting in 2-129
constant equilibrium region 4-261 fracture blocks 2-152
gas hysteresis 4-209 fracture imbibition saturation table 5-423
gas phase relative permeability hysteresis 2- fracture primary saturation table 5-423
121 general modeling requirements 1-30
gas phase viscosity geometry of 2-94
how modeled 4-250 gridblock center initialization 2-125
gas plant gridblock depth 1-54
input data for 4-268 how calculated 1-54
gas relative permeability hysteresis 4-209 gridblock transmissibility 1-69
gas remobilization 4-211 gros stratum thickness, depth corner point
gas-oil capillary pressure hysteresis 2-120 5-405
gas-oil drainage 4-361 gross stratum thickness 5-403
gas-oil normalized saturations 5-443 gross stratum thickness, corner point 5-404
gas-oil saturation gross thickness 5-403
SI-600 R5000.0.1
gross thickness, corner point 5-404 gridding 2-98

imbibition saturation table 5-422 hydraulic fracture option 2-152, 4-362
net stratum thickness, non corner point 5- hydrocarbon pore volume table 2-112
406 hydrocarbons
net thickness, non corner point 5-405 tracked 2-146
non corner point hysteresis
depth to center of gridblock 5-408 gas 4-209
depth to top of gridblock 5-408 gas phase relative permeability 2-121
non-corner point Y/theta 5-401 gas relative permeability 4-209
number of linear acquifers 5-432 gas-oil capillary pressure 2-120
output regions 5-425 how specified 4-223
override values in grid refinement 11-553 oil 4-207
pinchout connections 11-554 oil phase relative permeability 2-121
pinchout modeling 2-128 tolerances 2-122
porosity/pore volume 5-414 water-oil capillary pressure 2-119
primary saturation table 5-422
radial 2-95
rectangular 2-94 I
refinement of 11-533
refinement, minimum radius 11-551 ideal gas state enthalpy 4-236
rock properties 5-422 imbibition relative permeability 4-193
root 11-550 imbibition saturation 4-193
saturation-dependent functions 5-439 immiscible flow
temperature dependency 5-427 how modeled 1-28
thermal conductivity 5-477 include files
thickness 2-126 how to specify 1-41
thickness ratio 5-406, 5-407 influx data
value override 7-500 printing of 3-169
value override (VIP-DUAL) 7-503 influx option 10-513
Griffith, Lau, Hon, and Pearson correlation 2- initial composition 4-260
97 initial reservoir temperature
how specified 2-109
initialization
H nonequilibrium 2-124
initialization arrays
Hagedorn and Brown correlation 2-97 printing 3-170
harmonic integration 2-140 initialization data
heat capacity date 2-81
of rock 4-387 defaults 2-77
variations 5-480 first card 2-77
heat loss last card 2-81
data specification 13-561 title 2-80
how calculated 13-559 what it includes 2-75
heterogeneous reservoirs initialization module
how modeled 1-28 explanation of 1-27
homogeneous reservoirs initialization region reports 2-112
R5000.0.1 SI-601
input data matrix-fracture transfer 4-360

array options 1-44 metric units 2-111
columns to be scanned 1-43 miscibility
continued lines 1-43 transition zones 2-150
formatting 1-38 miscibility pressure 2-150
how organized 1-33 miscible data
repeated values 1-39 pressure table 4-358
skipping lines 1-42 solvent molecular weight 4-359
input/output solvent PVT properties 4-356
diagram of 1-34 miscible flood data 4-355
interations miscible option 2-149
maximum allowable 2-135 mobility weighting 2-114
interfacial tension 2-133 mole fraction
weighting 2-114
multiple reservoirs
K in same model 4-181
multipliers
kPa 1-31 for transmissibility 5-455
k-values
equilibrium, function of pressure 4-316
example of input 4-325 N
how calculated 4-257
named fault/region transmissibility multiplier
1-73
L near-critical fluid properties 2-133
Newton-Raphson method 2-135
laboratory data nine-point finite difference approximation 2-
for black-oil 4-274 115
laboratory units 2-112 nine-spot pattern
Leverett J-function 2-123 how specified 2-101
line continuation non-Darcy flow behavior 4-362
in input data 1-43 nonequilibrium initialization 2-124
lines per page numbers
how to specify 1-43 how entered 1-39
local grid refinement (LGR) 11-533
Lohrenz-Bray-Clark correlation 4-246, 4-253
O
M off-band connections 2-128
oil composition
map file constant equilibrium region 4-261
how written 2-81 oil density
matrix fracture exchange transmissibility 5-449 how computed 4-253
matrix pseudo capillary pressure 2-143 oil hysteresis 4-207
matrix-fracture diffusion oil phase relative permeability hysteresis 2-121
for VIP-DUAL 5-451 oil phase viscosity
SI-602 R5000.0.1
how modeled 4-246 nonstandard connections for 2-128

oil-vapor phase behavior 2-153 warning messages 3-168
OMEGA data polymer flooded reservoirs
for surface separation 4-336 how modeled 1-29
Orkiszewski correlation 2-97 polymer injection 2-153
output regions pore volume
assign separator batteries to 9-510 modification options 7-495
assigning names to 9-509 pore volume calculation 2-139
for multiple groups of output data 5-425 pore volume table
for VIP-DUAL 5-427 for hydrocarbons 2-112
specify datum depth 9-511 porosity
overreads dual 2-142
fracture gas composition 5-438 porosity deformation model 4-385
fracture oil composition 5-439 PR 5-479
fracture pressure and saturation 5-437 pressure
gas composition 5-436 overreads 5-435
oil composition 5-437 pressure table
option overview 7-495 for miscible data 4-358
pressure and saturation 5-435 printing
all none 3-161
by cross-sections 2-112
P control options summarized 3-161
corner-point data 3-167
parallel computing 14-565 echo print 1-42
Passut-Danner ideal gas state enthalpy coeffi- equilibrium data 3-168
cients 4-246 fault data 3-168
patterns individual data groups 3-162
in grids 2-98 influx data 3-169
PD 5-479 initialization arrays 3-170
Pedersen viscosity correlation 4-266 initialization region reports 2-112
Pederson correlation 4-246 input arrays 3-162
Peng-Robinson equation of state 4-226, 4-237 lines per page 1-43
permeability of coefficient arrays 3-163
normalized relative endpoints 5-445 PVT properties 3-167
of fractures 5-418 properties
relative 1-56 of components 4-243
X/R direction 5-415 pseudo components 2-134
Y/theta direction 5-416 pseudo-relative permeability
Z direction 5-417 vertical equilibrium 4-215
permeability behavior PVT interpolation 2-134
how modelled 4-386 PVT properties
phase equilibrium black-oil laboratory data 4-274
calculation of 2-133 equation of state 4-238
phase stability test 2-133 equation of state for 4-226
pinchouts for black oil 4-272
automatic detection of 6-494 gas-water option 4-287
R5000.0.1 SI-603
how correlated (dead oil) 4-329 assignment of 5-422

how input (dead oil) 4-326 root grid 11-550
input multiple tables 5-424 run date 2-81
mixing rules 4-230 run title 2-80
non-EOS 4-246
printing of 3-167
printing of tables 3-175, 3-177, 3-178 S
solvent 4-356
sand-shale fluid exchange 5-431
saturation
R equilibrium initialization 4-187
for fracture (gas-oil) 4-205
radial grids 2-94 for fracture (water-oil) 4-204
flow in 2-129 gas-oil 4-199
how specified 2-95 gas-oil, normalized 5-443
refinement of 11-535 initialization 2-125
Redlich-Kwong equation of state 4-226, 4-237 overreads 5-435
refinement printing of tables 3-175, 3-177, 3-178
of grids 11-533 water-oil 4-194
region names water-oil, normalized 5-440
printing of 3-175 Saturation pressure
region reports variation with depth 4-188
for initialization 2-112 saturation pressure
regions constant by region 4-183
see output regions, extra regions for VIP-ENCORE 4-187, 4-188
relative permeability printing of 3-168
from two-phase saturation table 4-191 variation with depth 4-186
hysteresis 4-193 saturation pressures
hysteresis tolerance 2-122 gas-water option 4-184, 4-185
hysteresis, gas phase 2-121 saturation table
hysteresis, oil phase 2-121 fracture imbibition, for grids 5-423
near-critical 2-133 fracture primary, for grids 5-423
of water, gas-dependent 4-203 imbibition, for grids 5-422
of water, gas-dependent, for fracture 4-206 primary, for grids 5-422
saturation weighted interpolation 2-119 saturation-dependent functions 4-215
scaling of endpoints 2-117 for gridblocks 5-439
two-phase 4-216 secondary drainage 4-212
using Stone method 2-118 segregated flow 4-196, 4-201, 4-215
repeated values separator battery assignments
how entered 1-39 printing of 3-175
restart record separator data
defined/how written 1-33 printing of 3-175
rock characteristics separator facilities
data requirements for 1-32 binary interaction coefficient 4-337
rock heat capacity 4-387 black-oil data input 4-345
rock properties data for (VIP-COMP) 4-334
SI-604 R5000.0.1
default k-values/compressibility 4-339 how specified 2-109

equation of state data 4-334 temperature-dependent endpoints 4-219, 4-221
general modeling requirements 1-31 thermal conductivity
k-value input 4-339 how calculated 5-477
k-value table/PVT data 4-346 how specified 5-477
OMEGA data 4-336 thickness
test data input 4-343 use in calculating block properties 2-126
separator facitilies Thomas, Dixon, and Pierson 1-28
volume shift factor 4-337 three-phase reservoir simulator
separators overview 1-28
binary interaction coefficient of 4-240 time
seven-spot pattern conversion constant for turbidite models 5-
1/6 of, how specified 2-106 433
how specified 2-104 title
shale capacity of run 2-80
for turbidite models 5-434 Todd and Longstaff option 4-355
SIMOUT map file tracer tests
how written 2-89 analysis of 12-557
SIMTECH method 4-387 tracking
skip data of fluids 2-146, 5-452
how to specify 1-42 of hydrocarbons 2-146
Soave-Redlich-Kwong equation of state 4-226, of water 2-147
4-237 water types 2-147
solubility transition block oil 2-146
of CO2 4-270 transmissibility
solvent molecular weight 4-359 diagonal 5-417
specific heat capacity for local grid refinements 11-550
how calculated 5-477 matrix fracture exchange 5-449
spreadsheet file modification for connection 5-455
writing to 2-154 modification options 7-495
Standing-Katz density correlation 4-239 multipliers 1-69
Stone method 2-118 override in grid refinement 11-553
Stone Model 4-191 use of permeability to calculate 5-415
streamlines of velocity 12-557 transmissibility calculation 2-139
summary records Transmissibility Regions 5-431
how written 1-33 transmissibility regions 5-431
super-critical equilibration 2-137 trapezoidal grids 2-94
surface tension trapped hydrocarbon saturation 4-193
ratio tables for 4-360 turbidite reservoir option 5-431
two phase gas-water option 2-113
two phase water-oil option 2-114
T two-phase relative permeability
how described 4-216
temperature two-point scaling 2-117
dependency 5-427 two-point upstream component mole fraction
initial weighting 2-114
R5000.0.1 SI-605
two-point upstream mobility weighting 2-114 output regions 5-427

overview 1-28
value override in grids 7-503
U vertical equilibrium fraction 5-448
VIP-ENCORE
units formulations allowed 1-31
laboratory 2-112 initial fluid composition 4-325
metric 2-111 k-value input example 4-325
type allowed/conventions 1-31 k-value tables 4-316
utility data 2-77 overview 1-28
saturation pressures for 4-187, 4-188
VIP-POLYMER
how activated 2-153
V overview 1-29
Van Everdingen and Hurst analytical solution VIP-THERM
for aquifer influx 10-514 overview 1-29
vapor phase viscosity
behavior of 2-154 calculations 2-149
vdb 2-81 mixing parameter 5-453
vdb file Pederson correlation 4-266
how written 2-81 volume shift factor
velocity dependent relative permeability 2-155 for surface separators 4-337
vertical equilibrium 2-130
vertical equilibrium fraction 5-447
for VIP-DUAL 5-448 W
vertical flow coefficients 2-97
Vinsome and Westerveld 13-559 Warren and Root theory 1-28, 2-142
VIP- ENCORE water induced rock compaction 4-353
surface separation/black oil PVT 4-338 water induced rock compaction regions 5-429
VIP-COMP water tracking 2-147
formulations allowed 1-31 waterflood projects
overview of 1-27 design and analysis 12-557
surface separation data 4-334 water-oil capillary pressure hysteresis 2-119
VIP-CORE water-oil hysteresis
data overview 1-27 how specified 4-223
features shared by other models 1-30 water-oil normalized saturations 5-440
VIP-DUAL water-oil option 2-114
arbitrary fault connections 6-491 water-oil saturation 4-194
arithmetic operations on grids 7-499 for fracture 4-204
fracture compaction regions 5-429 wellbore simulation 2-94, 2-97
fracture compressibility 5-431 wells
fracture imbibition saturation table 5-423 general modeling requirements 1-31
fracture porosity/pore volume 5-414
fracture primary saturation table 5-423
how activated 2-142
matrix-fracture diffusion 5-451
SI-606 R5000.0.1
Z
Zudkevitch- Joffe-Redlich-Kwong equation of
state 4-226
Zudkevitch-Joffe equation of state 4-237
R5000.0.1 SI-607

VIP-CORE Reference Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

VIP-CORE Reference Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

®

Landmark Graphics Corporation

1.5.1.6 Echo Print Off (NOLIST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-42

2.2.2.1 Grid Data Written for Post-Processing (MAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-81

2.2.7.5 Water-oil Capillary Pressure Hysteresis (PCHYSW)

2.2.11.7 Li Pseudo-Critical Temperature (LI) (VIP-COMP) . . . . . . 2-137

3.3 Individual Group Print Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-162

4.3.1.10 Normalized Saturation-Dependent Functions . . . . . . . . . . . 4-215

4.5.4.4 BOGTAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-305

4.16 Hydraulic Fracture Option

5.4.1 Gross Vertical Thickness, Non-Corner Point Grid (DZ) . . . . . . . . . . . 5-403

5.13.4 Fracture Imbibition Saturation Table for Hysteresis (ISATIF) . . . . . 5-423

5.32.1.5 Maximum Trapped Gas Saturation (SGTR) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-441

5.45 Reference Rock Specific Heat Capacity (CPR0) (VIP-THERM) . . . . . . . . . . . 5-477

11.11.2 No Integration (NEWTRAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-550

000000 About This Manual

VIP-ENCORE®: Multi-component Black-Oil Model

VIP-COMP®: Equation-of-State Compositional Model

VIP-DUAL®: Dual-Porosity, Dual-Permeability Model

VIP-POLYMER™: Polymer Flooding Model

VIP-THERM™ Thermal Compositional or Dead Oil Model

These modules work together to provide total flexibility in reservoir modeling.

R5000.0.1 About This Manual xxiii

■ Chapter 1 is an overview of the data required for VIP-CORE; it also describes

Data Formatting Conventions

DATE day mo yr.

More complex formats may include parentheses to indicate optional elements,

array1 (array2 ...)

PRINT ARRAYS ALL

xxiv About This Manual R5000.0.1

For a complete discussion of data formatting, see Section 1.5.

■ VIP-EXECUTIVE Reference Manual.

■ VIP-EXECUTIVE Technical Reference Manual.

R5000.0.1 About This Manual xxv

xxvi About This Manual R5000.0.1

1.1.1 VIP-COMP Overview

R5000.0.1 Data Overview 1-27

1.1.2 VIP-ENCORE Overview

VIP-ENCORE is able to treat water-oil or gas-water two-phase problems as

1.1.3 VIP-DUAL Overview

NOTE: VIP-DUAL is available as a separately licensed option.

The VIP-DUAL option simulates the performance of reservoirs which are

VIP-DUAL must be used in conjunction with either VIP-ENCORE or VIP-

1-28 Data Overview R5000.0.1

1.1.4 VIP-POLYMER Overview

NOTE: VIP-POLYMER is available as a separately licensed option.

The VIP-POLYMER option simulates the performance of polymer flooded

Other polymer dependent properties are: polymer adsorption, permeability

1.1.5 VIP-THERM Overview

The VIP-THERM compositional model is a fully implicit, n-component,

The VIP-THERM dead oil model is a fully implicit three-phase reservoir

VIP-COMP or VIP-ENCORE initialization data may easily be converted to VIP-

1. Specify THERMAL card in VIP-CORE utility data (Section 2.2.19.1).

R5000.0.1 Data Overview 1-29

2. Specify NCV in the grid system data (Sections 2.2.3.1 or 2.2.3.2).

3. Replace Physical Property Constants table with VIP-THERM format

6. Specify heat loss data in VIP-CORE (Chapter 12).

VIP-COMP and VIP-ENCORE recurrent data may easily be converted to VIP-

2. Specify TINJ for all gas injectors (VIP-EXECUTIVE Section 3.4.2.1).

3. Modify DT cards (VIP-EXECUTIVE Section 7.1.1), ITNLIM cards (VIP-

4. Modify TOLR cards (VIP-EXECUTIVE Section 7.1.8) to include an energy

1.1.6 Shared Features

The reservoir being studied may be initialized to capillary-gravity equilibrium or

Each block in the finite difference grid is designated as containing a particular

Method 2: 10 312.5 215 16.5